Service Manual Bts

CATEGORY 323TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

CATEGORY 423INSTALLATION AND

CONFIGURATION

CATEGORY 523MAINTENANCEINFORMATION

INDEXCATEGORY 121 SYSTEM INFORMATION

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01GMR Page 1

Manual RevisionGMR-01

1st Jun 0168P02901W37-A

GSM-100-020

Motorola manualaffected

Incorporate this GMR only in the manual number and version listed below:

68P02901W37-A Service Manual: BTS

Problem reportsThis revision provides a fix to the following problem reports:

SR 48373.

SR 37402.

SR 44799.

SR 43431.

SR 1004346.

Reason forrevision

This revision provides additional and updated information as follows:

S Category 121, Chapter 2, Power consumption note.

S Category 323, Chapter 3, DRIX3 compatibility.

S Category 323, Chapter 3, GDP, CRC-4 error checking.

S Category 323, Chapter 4, DAB, switch settings for use with BBBX.

S Category 423, Chapter 1, Optical fibre handling.

S Category 423, Chapter 2, Optical fibre installation.

S Category 523, Chapter 3, Air filter replacement.

S Category 523, Chapter 3, Optical fibre maintenance.

S Category 523, Chapter 4, Optical fibre replacement.

ActionRemove and replace pages in the Manual as follows:

Remove Insert

All pages between the clear acetatefront sheet and the blank backingsheet, remove from binder.

All pages of the GMR between thefront sheet and the blank backingsheet, insert into binder.

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01GMR Page 2

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Obsolete pages

Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page.

Completion

On completion of the Manual Revision, insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front orback of the manual, for future reference.

Cellular Infrastructure Group

SERVICE MANUALBTS

GMR-01

68P02901W37-A

GSM-100-020

68P02901W37-A

GSM-100-020

SERVICE MANUALBTS

GMR-01

SERVICE MANUALBTS

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01i

GSM-100-020

Service ManualBTS

E Motorola 1993–2001All Rights ReservedPrinted in the U.K.

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01ii

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

CopyrightsThe Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computerprograms stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and othercountries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including theexclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, anycopyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this documentmay not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or byimplication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications ofMotorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.

RestrictionsThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a licenseagreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited bylaw. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, storedin a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by anymeans, without prior written permission of Motorola.

AccuracyWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorolaassumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the useof the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any productsdescribed herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise thisdocument and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify anyperson of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applicationor use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patentrights of others.

Trademarks

and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01iii

Contents

Issue status of this manual 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version information 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution of Service Requests 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important notice 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About this manual 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross references 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text conventions 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

First aid in case of electric shock 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reporting safety issues 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warnings and cautions 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General warnings 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Beryllium health and safety precautions 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General cautions 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Devices sensitive to static 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motorola GSM manual set 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GMR amendment 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GMR amendment record 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 121System Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabinet description 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal units 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabinet labels 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door and internal labelling 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelling table 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Specification i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM battery backup 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency band characteristics 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver transmit output power 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01iv

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Category 323Technical Description i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1General Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Base station unit shelf assembly 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU numbering 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf module fit 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power distribution unit components 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fan cooling system 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interconnect panel 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel layout 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) cabinet cabling 1–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 1–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 3 1–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 4 1–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 5 1–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 6 1–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 7 1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 8 1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 9 1–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 10 1–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling 1–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 1–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 1–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 3 1–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 4 1–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 5 1–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 6 1–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 7 1–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 8 1–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 9 1–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 10 1–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01v

BTS4 differences 1–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power 1–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRCU capacity 1–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU 1–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers 1–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



BTS5 differences 1–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRCU capacity 1–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU 1–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers 1–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS5 (+27 V) cabinet cabling 1–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 1–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 1–58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 3 1–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 4 1–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 5 1–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 6 1–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 7 1–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2RF modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS receiver 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive frequencies 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RF hardware 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RF hardware 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01vi

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

BTS transmitter 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit frequencies 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RF hardware 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External RF hardware 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiver front end shelf 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DPP 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPP diagram 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPP modules 2–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low noise amplifier 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Original LNA 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High sensitivity LNA 2–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Splitters 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive splitter module 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 way splitter module 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preselector 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiver matrix 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver matrix module 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIP switch settings 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit combiner shelf 2–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hybrid combiner 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiners with Tx BPFs in BTS4 or BTS5 2–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiners with Tx BPFs in BTS6 2–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiners with a Tx BPF in BTS6 2–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End view 2–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration example 2–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tx BPF 2–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations 2–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RTC 2–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations 2–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTC fitted in TC shelf 2–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration examples 2–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01vii

CCB 900/1800 2–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 2–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB combiner 2–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transceiver shelf 2–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRCU 2–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of DRCU 2–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function 2–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance 2–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset switch 2–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs 2–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRCU front panel 2–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram 2–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter 2–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver 2–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCB operation 2–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCB on downlink 2–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCB on uplink 2–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCB firmware 2–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEQB operation 2–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRI(M) interface 2–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRCUII 2–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of DRCUII 2–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function 2–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance 2–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset switch 2–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs 2–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRCUII front panel 2–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram 2–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter 2–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver 2–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCB operation 2–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCB on downlink 2–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCB on uplink 2–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCB firmware 2–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four equalization blocks 2–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband signals 2–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V RSSI indications 2–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGC data 2–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRI(M) interface 2–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01viii

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

DRCU3 2–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of DRCU3 2–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuitry 2–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance 2–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset switch 2–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs 2–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRCU3 front panel 2–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram 2–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter 2–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver 2–58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCB operation 2–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCB on downlink 2–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCB on uplink 2–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCB firmware 2–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four equalization blocks 2–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband signals 2–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V RSSI indications 2–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGC data 2–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRI(M) interface 2–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCU900 and SCU1800 2–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of an SCU 2–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance 2–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU front panel 2–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch 2–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs 2–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter 2–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver 2–67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU diagram 2–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC 2–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIM interface 2–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock recovery 2–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC on downlink 2–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC on uplink 2–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC firmware 2–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equalisation blocks 2–71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal strength 2–71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01ix

Transceiver control unit (TCU) 2–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver carrier frequency bands 2–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU circuitry 2–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of a TCU 2–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance 2–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches 2–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting 2–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs 2–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel 2–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU input/output diagram 2–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU receiver board detail 2–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel output 2–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital processing and control board 2–80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU connections 2–81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data specifications 2–81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink (Tx) digital processing 2–81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink (Rx) digital processing 2–82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC firmware tasks 2–82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing and control 2–83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver station manager (TSM) board 2–83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSM functions 2–84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter details 2–87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter board 2–87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control driver board 2–89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board 2–89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External equipment cabinet or rack 2–91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Duplexer 2–92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2–92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quadraplexer 2–93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2–93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender 2–94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver multicoupler 2–94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Large multicoupler extender 2–95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicoupler extender 2–95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributed multicoupler extender 2–96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributed multicoupler extender 2–96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-way (6dB) splitter 2–96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB attenuator 2–96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver extender 2–97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2–97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01x

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

BSU and RXU shelf diagrams 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module front panels 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Full size modules 3–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules 3–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTC 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTC module 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRIM 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIM module 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 3–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 3–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GCLK 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference oscillator 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference dividers 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference encoders 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference fail detect 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock control/alarm logic 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buffered test ports 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK diagram 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPROC 3–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC module 3–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and BSC GPROC functions 3–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC functions 3–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM daughter card 3–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC diagram 3–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xi

GPROC2 3–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 module 3–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication 3–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory 3–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics 3–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software 3–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and BSC GPROC2 functions 3–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC2 functions 3–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 diagram 3–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KSW 3–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW module 3–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 3–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing reference 3–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchbound TDM interface structure 3–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion switchbound highways 3–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchange (TSI) 3–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection RAM control 3–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-party conference (TPC) memory 3–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed/dynamic pattern registers 3–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outbound selection MUX 3–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway monitor 3–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog timer 3–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt logic 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface logic 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW switching 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a BSC 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a RXCDR 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a BTS 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW diagram 3–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnected KSWs 3–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MSI 3–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI module 3–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features 3–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment 3–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 3–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI diagram 3–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MSI2 3–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI2 module 3–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features 3–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (E1) 3–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (T1) 3–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 3–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI2 diagram 3–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xii

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

TSW 3–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSW module 3–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 3–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing reference 3–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchbound TDM interface 3–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion switchbound highways 3–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The DSP 3–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection RAM control 3–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outbound selection multiplexer 3–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway monitors 3–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog timer 3–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt logic 3–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface logic 3–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSW switching 3–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSW diagram 3–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSW extension between cabinets 3–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XCDR 3–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR module 3–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 3–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor 3–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP 3–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes 3–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface 3–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching 3–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface 3–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface 3–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR diagram 3–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GDP 3–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP module 3–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 3–58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU subsystem 3–58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP subsystem 3–58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes 3–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 Line interface 3–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRC-4 Error checking 3–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital crosspoint switch 3–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface 3–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface 3–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP diagram 3–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Half size modules 3–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules 3–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBBX 3–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX module 3–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX diagram 3–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xiii

CLKX 3–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module 3–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX diagram 3–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRIX3 3–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIX compatibility 3–67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIX3 module 3–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIX3 diagram 3–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KSWX 3–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX module 3–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX diagram 3–71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LANX 3–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX module 3–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description 3–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local LAN data switching 3–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended LAN data switching 3–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus arbiter 3–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant LAN 3–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf ID 3–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel 3–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX diagram 3–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PIX 3–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 3–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX module 3–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX diagram 3–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Power, fans & interconnections i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Power supply modules 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet power requirements 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DPSM 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM view 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM diagram 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EPSM 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM view 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM diagram 4–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xiv

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

IPSM 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM view 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description 4–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM diagram 4–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PCU 4–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 4–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power converter unit 4–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power converter module 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCU description 4–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCU diagram 4–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC module description 4–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PDU 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAB 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB diagram 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs 4–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch settings (BTS6) 4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions 4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings 4–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications 4–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PAB 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers 4–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs 4–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse protected circuits 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input signals 4–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial bus 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –48/–60 V status inputs 4–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS4 (+27 V) status inputs 4–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal routeing 4–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal timing 4–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PDB and AIB 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB description 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB view 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB description 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB diagram 4–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Circuit breakers 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC with PAB 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS4 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS5 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS6 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xv

Fan cooling system 4–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power 4–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interconnect panel 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS4 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS5 4–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS6 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type 43 interconnect board 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 diagram 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 connectors 4–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Balanced line interconnect board 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB diagram 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB connectors 4–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 423Installation and Configuration i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit one 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit two 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site requirements and considerations 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dimensions 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating environment 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage environment 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power requirements 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BTS cabinets 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BTS cabinets 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup power 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent protection 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Handling optical fibres 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection of fibres and connectors 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning of fibres and connectors 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre connection 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius 1–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xvi

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Visiting the site 1–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before the visit 1–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at the site 1–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving the site 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety on site 1–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabinet labels 1–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS4 labels 1–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to BTS4 labels 1–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS5 labels 1–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to BTS5 labels 1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS6 labels 1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to BTS6 labels 1–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Installing the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient/ lightning protection 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical fibres 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking the equipment 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping crate 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anchoring the cabinet 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the cabinet air deflector 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS6 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS4 and BTS5 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS6 interconnect panel 2–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS5 interconnect panel 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS4 interconnect panel 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xvii

Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cables 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for –ve earth cabinets 2–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for +ve earth cabinets 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source 2–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 2–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing power supply modules 2–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting RF cables 2–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate transmit antenna 2–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate receive antenna 2–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common antenna 2–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs 2–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing DRCU3s 2–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s 2–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing TCU modules 2–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiver front end shelf 2–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules 2–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing a preselector with a 6-way splitter 2–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix 2–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the dual path preselector 2–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the passive splitter 2–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the diversity receive extender 2–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit combiner shelf 2–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules 2–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xviii

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Installing the hybrid combiner and power load 2–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the RTC 2–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Five-cavity RTC 2–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four-cavity RTC 2–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the cavity combining block 2–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to CCB 2–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 2–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for fitting CCBs 2–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omni configuration 2–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector configuration 2–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the transmit bandpass filter 2–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering 2–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing digital modules 2–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory installation 2–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing DRIX3 modules 2–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing BBBX modules 2–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf 2–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf 2–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optical fibre installation 2–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polymer fibre optic cable installation 2–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass fibre optic cable installation 2–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the control signal cabling 2–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter-cabinet fibre optic connections 2–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line connections 2–66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End user I/O device cabling 2–67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector 2–67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector details 2–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T43 to backplane connections 2–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU 2–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU 2–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU 2–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU 2–71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU 2–71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU 2–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU 2–72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU 2–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xix

BIB to backplane connections 2–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU 2–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU 2–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU 2–77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU 2–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU 2–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU 2–80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU 2–81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU 2–82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Decommissioning the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decommissioning a BTS cabinet 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS checklist 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 523Maintenance Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the manual 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2General procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General procedures 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test and repair equipment lists 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment list 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair equipment list 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General repair procedures 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site configuration 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Man machine interface (MMI) 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI uses 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Locating faulty cabinets 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xx

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required tools and equipment 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the LMT to a GPROC 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the MMI 2–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the security level 2–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Identifying the faulty devices 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment safety 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the status 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Resetting and re-initializing a site 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Maintenance procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedures 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air filter replacement 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter cleaning 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning cabinet air filters 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning cabinet air filters 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning of fibre optics 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning of fibres and connectors 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedures 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter structure 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the MMI to change device status 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taking a device out of service (OOS) 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking a device 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swapping devices 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air filter replacement 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the air filter 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interface board replacement 4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustrations 4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing an interface board 4–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xxi

Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Tx BPF 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Tx BPF 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing the site 4–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement 4–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 4–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXA 4–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXB 4–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non-redundant CLKX replacement 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the CLKX 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dual path preselector replacement 4–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 4–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a dual path preselector 4–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a dual path preselector 4–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low noise amplifier replacement 4–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description 4–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a low noise amplifier 4–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a low noise amplifier 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio unit replacement 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the unit 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the unit 4–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Unit 4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering up the unit 4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the site 4–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the DRIM 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the DRIM 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRIX board replacement 4–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the DRIX 4–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnection at DRIX board 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection procedure at the DRIX board 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnection at the radio 4–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection at the radio 4–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General fibre care 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic cable replacement procedures 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing fibre optic cables in BTS 4/5 4–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to service 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing fibre optic cables in a BTS6 cabinet 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to service 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xxii

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module 4–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the duplexer or quadraplexer 4–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the duplexer or quadraplexer 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the site 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a fan unit 4–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the fan 4–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the fan 4–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redundant GCLK module replacement 4–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant GCLK 4–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non-redundant GCLK replacement 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a single shelf configuration GCLK 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a multi-shelf configuration GCLK 4–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPROC/GPROC2 replacement 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant GPROC considerations 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non–redundant GPROC considerations 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before going to the site 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating the faulty GPROC 4–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the GPROC 4–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the GPROC 4–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hybrid combiner and power load replacement 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the hybrid combiner 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the power load 4–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the power load 4–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the hybrid combiner 4–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redundant KSW or TSW replacement 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non–redundant KSW or TSW module replacement 4–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 4–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redundant KSWX module replacement 4–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indications 4–49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing KSWX A and B 4–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xxiii

Non–redundant KSWX module replacement 4–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration and indications 4–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4–51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redundant LANX replacement 4–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 4–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN 4–52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN 4–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non–redundant LANX replacement 4–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MSI replacement 4–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non–redundant systems 4–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant systems 4–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PIX replacement 4–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the PIX 4–57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power supply module replacement 4–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications 4–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a non–redundant power supply module 4–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant power supply module 4–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XCDR replacement 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non–redundant Systems 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4–62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GDP replacement 4–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant Systems 4–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems 4–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration 4–63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4–64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC) 4–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating the RTC 4–65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the RTC 4–67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a RTC 4–67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a single cavity in an RTC 4–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure criteria 4–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the cavity filter 4–68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cavity filter 4–69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xxiv

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Replacing the RTC control processor 4–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure criteria 4–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the control processor board 4–70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a cavity combining block 4–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 4–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for CCB removal 4–73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a CCB 4–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting a CCB 4–74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing and replacing a receiver matrix 4–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before beginning 4–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a receiver matrix 4–75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a receiver matrix 4–76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a power converter 4–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a power converter 4–78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a power converter 4–79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5Miscellaneous repair i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous repair procedures 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing and replacing a circuit breaker 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a circuit breaker 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a circuit breaker 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1 5–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 3 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB) 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the board 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a new board 5–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the BSU digital cage 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization 5–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the cage 5–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cage 5–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01xxv

DRAM battery backup fuse failure alarm 5–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Devices 5–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm level 5–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMC actions 5–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 5–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFI finger gasket replacement procedure 5–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 5–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment 5–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the old gasket 5–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the new gasket 5–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fan replacement procedure 5–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 5–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment 5–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 5–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index I–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01xxvi

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

GSM-100-020 Issue status of this manual

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-011

Issue status of this manual

Introduction

The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.

Versioninformation

The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue:

Manualissue

Date ofissue

Remarks

O 29th Aug 97 Original issue

A 3rd Aug 98 Issue A

Resolution ofService Requests

The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:

ServiceRequest

GMRNumber

Remarks

SR33249 N/A RTC to CCB upgrade

SR36710 N/A DRCU, DRCUII & DRCU3 power output changes

SR33712 N/A Removal of equip_device command

SR48373 GMR-01 Inclusion of power cosumption note

SR37402 GMR-01 GDP, CRC-4 error checking

SR44799 GMR-01 Air filter replacement

SR43431 GMR-01 Supplementary fibre optic information

SR1004346 GMR-01 DAB, switch settings for use with BBBX

GSM-100-020General information

1st Jun 012

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

General information

Important notice

If this manual was obtained when you attended a Motorola training course, it will not beupdated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If itwas supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major softwarerelease, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form ofGeneral Manual Revisions (GMRs).

Purpose

Motorola Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) manuals are intended toinstruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of theMotorola GSM equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnelengaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.

Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installation and maintenanceinstructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.

WARNING

These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered byMotorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gainedthrough such training.

About thismanual

This manual contains the general system information; technical description of thehardware elements; maintenance procedures for field engineers or technicians to follow;and installation and decommissioning information for the BTS4, BTS5 and BTS6equipment in Motorola GSM900 and DCS1800 systems.

The objectives are:

S To convey the features and operation of all components.

S To understand installation, commissioning, base site integration and repairprocedures.

The procedures presume that operators at the Operations and Maintenance Centre(OMC) have been able to diagnose a problem, and have despatched the engineer ortechnician to the site to try and fix the problem from there.

Many chapters in this manual are also used within courses.

GSM-100-020 General information

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-013

Cross references

Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and sectionnames. The section name cross references are printed bold in text.

This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, aredivided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top ofeach page, and are listed in the table of contents.

Text conventions

The following conventions are used in the Motorola GSM manuals to represent keyboardinput text, screen output text and special key sequences.

Input

Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.

Output

Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmentalvariables that appear on the screen are shown like this.

Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:

CTRL-c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT-f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.

| Press the pipe symbol key.

CR or RETURN Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key isidentified with the ↵ symbol on both the X terminal andthe SPARCstation keyboards. The SPARCstationkeyboard Return key is also identified with the wordReturn.

GSM-100-020First aid in case of electric shock

1st Jun 014

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

First aid in case of electric shock

Warning

Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit isbroken.Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulatingmaterial and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.

WARNING

Artificialrespiration

In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration.Send for medical assistance immediately.

Burns treatment

If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration,carry out the following:

1. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn.

2. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, coverthe wound with a dry dressing.

3. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

GSM-100-020 Reporting safety issues

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-015

Reporting safety issues

Introduction

Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances.Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.

Procedure

Whenever a safety issue arises:

1. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.

2. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.

3. Report the problem directly to GSM Customer Network Resolution Centre+44 (0)1793 565444 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax+44 (0)1793 430987 (fax).

4. Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer NetworkResolution Centre.

GSM-100-020Warnings and cautions

1st Jun 016

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Warnings and cautions

Introduction

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in allmanuals of the Motorola GSM manual set.

Warnings

Definition

A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life,physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, forexample, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.

Example and format

Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors orunterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

WARNING

Cautions

Definition

A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, or individual items ofequipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.

Example and format

Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testingMotorola base stations.

CAUTION

GSM-100-020 General warnings

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-017

General warnings

Introduction

Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation andmaintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure tocomply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola GSMmanuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of theequipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with theserequirements.

Warning labelsPersonnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warninglabels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over orobscured in any way.

Specificwarnings

Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment andwithin the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times whenworking with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrationsand on the equipment.

High voltageCertain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac singlephase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areaswhere the ac supply power is present must not be approached until the warnings andcautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with.

To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolator must beset to off and locked.

Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of theElectricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislationwhich need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.

RF radiationHigh RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipmentwhen in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antennaconnections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminatedcavities or feeders.

Refer to the following standards:

S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to HumanExposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.

S CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields HighFrequency (10kHz to 300GHz).

Laser radiationDo not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laserradiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre opticcables connected to data in/out connectors.

GSM-100-020General warnings

1st Jun 018

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Liftingequipment

When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competentresponsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Whereprovided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to bemanhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in whichthe equipment is used.

Do not ...... substitute parts or modify equipment.

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts orperform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt toensure that safety features are maintained.

Battery supplies

Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.

Toxic material

Certain Motorola equipment incorporates components containing the highly toxic materialBeryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if:

S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, ora wound.

S The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled.

S Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.

See the Beryllium health and safety precautions section for further information.

GSM-100-020 Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-019

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

IntroductionThis equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. Itshould be installed and maintained only by trained technicians. Licensees of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) using this equipment are responsible for insuringthat its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations designed to limit humanexposure to RF radiation in accordance with the American National Standards InstituteIEEE Standard C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to HumanExposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.

DefinitionsThis standard establishes two sets of maximum permitted exposure limits, one forcontrolled environments and another, that allows less exposure, for uncontrolledenvironments. These terms are defined by the standard, as follows:

Uncontrolled environment

Uncontrolled environments are locations where there is the exposure of individuals whohave no knowledge or control of their exposure. The exposures may occur in livingquarters or workplaces where there are no expectations that the exposure levels mayexceed those shown for uncontrolled environments in the table of maximum permittedexposure ceilings.

Controlled environmentControlled environments are locations where there is exposure that may be incurred bypersons who are aware of the potential for exposure as a concomitant of employment, byother cognizant persons, or as the incidental result of transient passage through areaswhere analysis shows the exposure levels may be above those shown for uncontrolledenvironments but do not exceed the values shown for controlled environments in thetable of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.

Maximumpermittedexposures

The maximum permitted exposures prescribed by the standard are set in terms ofdifferent parameters of effects, depending on the frequency generated by the equipmentin question. At the frequency range of this Personal Communication System equipment,1930-1970MHz, the maximum permitted exposure levels are set in terms of powerdensity, whose definition and relationship to electric field and magnetic field strengths aredescribed by the standard as follows:

Power density (S)

Power per unit area normal to the direction of propagation, usually expressed in units ofwatts per square metre (W/m2) or, for convenience, units such as milliwatts per squarecentimetre (mW/cm2). For plane waves, power density, electric field strength (E) andmagnetic field strength (H) are related by the impedance of free space, 377 ohms. Inparticular,

S � E2

377� 377� H2

where E and H are expressed in units of V/m and A/m, respectively, and S in units ofW/m2. Although many survey instruments indicate power density units, the actualquantities measured are E or E2 or H or H2.

GSM-100-020Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

1st Jun 0110

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Maximumpermittedexposureceilings

Within the frequency range, the maximum permitted exposure ceiling for uncontrolledenvironments is a power density (mW/cm2) that equals f/1500, where f is the frequencyexpressed in MHz, and measurements are averaged over a period of 30 minutes. Themaximum permitted exposure ceiling for controlled environments, also expressed inmW/cm2, is f/300 where measurements are averaged over 6 minutes. Applying theseprinciples to the minimum and maximum frequencies for which this equipment is intendedto be used yields the following maximum permitted exposure levels:

Uncontrolled Environment Controlled Environment

1930MHz 1970MHz 1930MHz 1970MHz

Ceiling 1.287mW/cm2 1.313mW/cm2 6.433mW/cm2 6.567mW/cm2

If you plan to operate the equipment at more than one frequency, compliance should beassured at the frequency which produces the lowest exposure ceiling (among thefrequencies at which operation will occur).

Licensees must be able to certify to the FCC that their facilities meet the above ceilings.Some lower power PCS devices, 100 milliwatts or less, are excluded from demonstratingcompliance, but this equipment operates at power levels orders of magnitude higher, andthe exclusion is not applicable.

Whether a given installation meets the maximum permitted exposure ceilings depends, inpart, upon antenna type, antenna placement and the output power to which thisequipment is adjusted. The following example sets forth the distances from the antennato which access should be prevented in order to comply with the uncontrolled andcontrolled environment exposure limits as set forth in the ANSI IEEE standards andcomputed above.

GSM-100-020 Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-0111

Examplecalculation

For a base station with the following characteristics, what is the minimum distance fromthe antenna necessary to meet the requirements of an uncontrolled environment?

Transmit frequency: 1930 MHz

Base station cabinet output power, P: +39.0 dBm (8 watts)

Antenna feeder cable loss, CL: 2.0 dB

Antenna input power Pin: P–CL = +39.0–2.0 = +37.0 dB (5watts)

Antenna gain, G: 16.4 dBi (43.65)

Using the following relationship:

G � 4pr2WPin

Where W is the maximum permissible power density in W/m2 and r is the safe distancefrom the antenna in metres, the desired distance can be calculated as follows:

r � GPin4pW

� � 43.65� 54p� 12.87

� � 1.16m

where W = 12.87 W/m2 was obtained from table listed above and converting frommW/cm2 to W/m2.

The above result applies only in the direction of maximum radiation of theantenna. Actual installations may employ antennas that have defined radiationpatterns and gains that differ from the example set forth above. The distancescalculated can vary depending on the actual antenna pattern and gain.

NOTE

Power densitymeasurements

While installation calculations such as the above are useful and essential in planning anddesign, validation that the operating facility using this equipment actually complies willrequire making power density measurements. For information on measuring RF fields fordetermining compliance with ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, see IEEE Recommended Practicefor the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave,IEEE Std C95.3-1991. Copies of IEEE C95.1-1991 and IEEE C95.3-1991 may bepurchased from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., Attn:Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331,(800) 678-IEEE or from ANSI, (212) 642-4900. Persons responsible for installation of thisequipment are urged to consult these standards in determining whether a giveninstallation complies with the applicable limits.

Other equipmentWhether a given installation meets ANSI standards for human exposure to radiofrequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether theenvironments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from otherequipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overallexposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the timethe licensee’s equipment is being installed or even by equipment installed later.Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and indetermining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.

GSM-100-020Beryllium health and safety precautions

1st Jun 0112

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Beryllium health and safety precautions

Introduction

Beryllium (Be), is a hard silver/white metal. It is stable in air, but burns brilliantly inOxygen.

With the exception of the naturally occurring Beryl ore (Beryllium Silicate), all Berylliumcompounds and Beryllium metal are potentially highly toxic.

Health issues

Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive withinthe component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component shouldbe broken open and the Beryllium Oxide, which is in the form of dust, released, thereexists the potential for harm.

Inhalation

Inhalation of Beryllium Oxide can lead to a condition known as Berylliosis, the symptomsof Berylliosis are similar to Pneumonia and may be identified by all or any of thefollowing:

Mild poisoning causes fever, shortness of breath, and a cough that producesyellow/green sputum, or occasionally bloodstained sputum. Inflammation of the mucousmembranes of the nose, throat, and chest with discomfort, possibly pain, and difficultywith swallowing and breathing.

Severe poisoning causes chest pain and wheezing which may progress to severeshortness of breath due to congestion of the lungs. Incubation period for lung symptomsis 2-20 days.

Exposure to moderately high concentrations of Beryllium in air may produce a veryserious condition of the lungs. The injured person may become blue, feverish with rapidbreathing and raised pulse rate. Recovery is usual but may take several months. Therehave been deaths in the acute stage.

Chronic response. This condition is more truly a general one although the lungs aremainly affected. There may be lesions in the kidneys and the skin. Certain featuressupport the view that the condition is allergic. There is no relationship between thedegree of exposure and the severity of response and there is usually a time lag of up to10 years between exposure and the onset of the illness. Both sexes are equallysusceptible. The onset of the illness is insidious but only a small number of exposedpersons develop this reaction.

First aid

Seek immediate medical assistance. The casualty should be removed immediately fromthe exposure area and placed in a fresh air environment with breathing supported withOxygen where required. Any contaminated clothing should be removed. The casualtyshould be kept warm and at rest until medical aid arrives.

GSM-100-020 Beryllium health and safety precautions

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-0113

Skin contact

Possible irritation and redness at the contact area. Persistent itching and blisterformations can occur which usually resolve on removal from exposure.

First aid

Wash area thoroughly with soap and water. If skin is broken seek immediate medicalassistance.

Eye contact

May cause severe irritation, redness and swelling of eyelid(s) and inflammation of themucous membranes of the eyes.

First aid

Flush eyes with running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical assistance as soonas possible.

Handlingprocedures

Removal of components from printed circuit boards (PCBs) is to take place only atMotorola approved repair centres.

The removal station will be equipped with extraction equipment and all other protectiveequipment necessary for the safe removal of components containing Beryllium Oxide.

If during removal a component is accidently opened, the Beryllium Oxide dust is to bewetted into a paste and put into a container with a spatula or similar tool. The spatula/toolused to collect the paste is also to be placed in the container. The container is then to besealed and labelled. A suitable respirator is to be worn at all times during this operation.

Components which are successfully removed are to be placed in a separate bag, sealedand labelled.

Disposalmethods

Beryllium Oxide or components containing Beryllium Oxide are to be treated ashazardous waste. All components must be removed where possible from boards and putinto sealed bags labelled Beryllium Oxide components. These bags must be given to thesafety and environmental adviser for disposal.

Under no circumstances are boards or components containing Beryllium Oxide to be putinto the general waste skips or incinerated.

Product life cycleimplications

Motorola GSM and analogue equipment includes components containing Beryllium Oxide(identified in text as appropriate and indicated by warning labels on the equipment).These components require specific disposal measures as indicated in the preceding(Disposal methods) paragraph. Motorola will arrange for the disposal of all suchhazardous waste as part of its Total Customer Satisfaction philosophy and will arrangefor the most environmentally ‘friendly’ disposal available at that time.

GSM-100-020General cautions

1st Jun 0114

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

General cautions

Introduction

Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of theequipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with thesecautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals may result indamage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’s failure tocomply with these requirements.

Caution labels

Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any cautionlabels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over orobscured in any way.

Specific cautions

Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of thismanual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with theequipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on theequipment.

Fibre optics

The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.

Static discharge

Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static discharge.Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent,CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused bymishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards.

See Devices sensitive to static for further information.

GSM-100-020 Devices sensitive to static

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-0115

Devices sensitive to static

Introduction

Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer ofinsulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge appliedto the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.

These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands intohigh insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons.

MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shortedtogether, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads intoconductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.

Special handlingtechniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced observe the followingprecautions when handling the replacement:

S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point(ESP) on the equipment.

S Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary toreplace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted.

S Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cottonoverall is preferable.

S If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaceswith an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.

S All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on anearthed surface.

S Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitivedevices. These components may be providing protection to the device.

When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally lesssusceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care,preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferreddirectly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never leftexposed on the workbench.

GSM-100-020Motorola GSM manual set

1st Jun 0116

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

Motorola GSM manual set

Introduction

The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain theMotorola GSM and GSM Packet Radio Service (GPRS) equipment.

Generic GSMmanuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals arerelease dependent:

Classificationnumber Name Order number

GSM-100-101 System Information: General 68P02901W01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-201 Operating Information: GSM System Operation 68P02901W14. . . GSM-100-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System

Administration 68P02901W19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-311 Technical Description: OMC-R in a GSM System 68P02901W31. . GSM-100-313 Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema 68P02901W34. GSM-100-320 Technical Description: BSS Implementation 68P02901W36. . . . . . . GSM-100-321 Technical Description: BSS Command Reference 68P02901W23. GSM-100-403 Installation & Configuration: GSM System

Configuration 68P02901W17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-423 Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization 68P02901W43. . . . GSM-100-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install 68P02901W47. . GSM-100-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at

the OMC-R 68P02901W26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-520 Maintenance Information: BSS Timers 68P02901W58. . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-521 Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions 68P02901W57GSM-100-523 Maintenance Information: BSS Field

Troubleshooting 68P02901W51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-503 Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics

Application 68P02901W56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-721 Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR 68P02901W72. . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R System 68P02901W74. . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020 Motorola GSM manual set

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-0117

Related GSMmanuals

The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:


GSM-001-103 System Information: BSS Equipment Planning 68P02900W21. . . . GSM-002-103 System Information: DataGen 68P02900W22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-002-703 Software Release Notes: DataGen 68P02900W76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-005-103 System Information: GSM Advance Operational

Impact 68P02900W25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-008-103 System Information: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W36. . . . . . GSM-008-703 Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W77. GSM-TOOLS-001 System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W90. . . . . GSM-TOOLS-002 System Information: Motorola Analysis and

Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-TOOLS-701 Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W69. GSM-TOOLS-702 Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and

Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-006-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System

Administration (OSI) 68P02901W10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-006-413 Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install 68P02901W39. . . . . GSM-006-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System 68P02901W70. . . .

Generic GPRSmanuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manuals arerelease dependent:


GPRS-300-101 System Information: GPRS Overview 68P02903W01. . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-202 Operating Information: OMC-G System

Administration 68P02903W03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-222 Operating Information: GSN System Administration 68P02903W37GPRS-300-311 Technical Description: OMC-G in a GPRS System 68P02903W29. GPRS-300-313 Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema 68P02903W46. GPRS-300-321 Technical Description: GSN Command Reference 68P02903W18. GPRS-300-423 Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install 68P02903W47. . . . GPRS-300-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install 68P02903W04. GPRS-300-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at

the OMC-G 68P02903W19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-503 Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics

Application 68P02903W20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-722 Software Release Notes: GSN System 68P02903W76. . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-G System 68P02903W70. . . . . . . .

Related GPRSmanuals

The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals:

GPRS-001-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning 68P02903W02. . GPRS-005-103 System Information: GSN Advance Operational

Impact 68P02903W38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-020Motorola GSM manual set

1st Jun 0118

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

BSS servicemanuals

The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manuals are notrelease dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets mayvary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be orderedusing the overall catalogue number shown below:


GSM-100-020 Service Manual: BTS 68P02901W37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-030 Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-105-020 Service Manual: M-Cell2 68P02901W75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-106-020 Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-201-020 Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ 68P02901W95. . . . . . . GSM-202-020 Service Manual: M-Cellaccess 68P02901W65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-203-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro 68P02902W36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-206-020 Service Manual: Horizoncompact 68P02902W15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-205-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor 68P02902W06. . . . . . . . . . . GSM-204-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor 68P02902W12. . . . . . . . . . GSM-207-020 Service Manual: Horizonoffice 68P02902W46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-209-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61. GSM-208-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor 68P02902W66GSM-101-SERIES ExCell4 Documentation Set 68P02900W50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-103-SERIES ExCell6 Documentation Set 68P02900W70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-102-SERIES TopCell Documentation Set (GSM900) 68P02901W80. . . . . . . . . . . GSM-104-SERIES TopCell Documentation Set (DCS1800) 68P02902W80. . . . . . . . . . GSM-200-SERIES M-Cellmicro Documentation Set 68P02901W90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPRS servicemanuals

The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals include thePacket Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSS for GPRS:


GPRS-301-020 Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) 68P02903W05. . . . . GPRS-302-020 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) 68P02903W10. . . . . . .

Classificationnumber

The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example,manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.

Order number

The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.

Orderingmanuals

All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office orRepresentative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number. Remember,specify the manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter.

GSM-100-020 GMR amendment

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-0119

GMR amendment

Introduction toGMRs

Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manualusing General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manualsas and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the target manual. Each GMR isidentified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01 for each manual at each issue.GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf pages, with a pink instruction sheet on thefront.

GMR procedure

When a GMR is received, check on the GMR amendment record page of this manualthat previous GMRs, if any, have been incorporated. If not, contact your administrator orMotorola Local Office to obtain the missing GMRs. Remove and replace pages in thismanual, as detailed on the GMR pink instruction sheet.

GSM-100-020GMR amendment record

1st Jun 0120

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

GMR amendment record

Instructions

When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below must be filled in torecord the insertion. Retain the pink instruction sheet that accompanies each GMR andinsert it in a suitable place in this manual for future reference.

Amendmentrecord

Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:

GMR number Incorporated by (signature) Date

01 Incorporated (this GMR) 16 Feb 01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

CHAPTER 2SPECIFICATION

CHAPTER 5CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1st Jun 01 System Information: BTS

68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

i

Category 121

System Information

GSM-100-121

1st Jun 01ii System Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W02-A

GSM-100-121


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

iii

Category 121System Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Chapter 2Specification i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM battery backup 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency band characteristics 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver transmit output power 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-121

1st Jun 01iv System Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W02-A


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 1

Introduction

GSM-100-121


GMR-0168P02901W02-A

GSM-100-121


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

iii


Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-100-121


GMR-0168P02901W02-A

GSM-100-121 Introduction


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

1–1

Introduction

Overview

The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) provides the gateway between the mobile stationsand the cellular network. There are three versions of the InCell BTS, the BTS4, BTS5and BTS6, the main difference between the versions are the number of transceivers,which is denoted by the number.

External features

The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet, and has four air vents withgrilles:

S Intake vents have air filters.

S Exhaust vents have exhaust fans fitted behind the vents.

All connections to a cabinet are at the interconnect panel, which is on top of the cabinet.This panel also has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in andout of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMI shielded.

GSM-100-121Cabinet description

1st Jun 011–2 System Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W02-A

Cabinet description

Introduction

This section describes the appearance of a typical BTS cabinet.

Diagram

The diagram shows a typical BTS cabinet:

INTERCONNECT PANEL

CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

BSU SHELF

BLANKING PLATE

POWER AND ALARM BOARD

RECEIVE FRONT END SHELF

POWERSUPPLYMODULE

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSMITCOMBINERSHELF

TRANSCEIVER SHELF

FANS

FANS

POWER AND DISTRIBUTIONUNIT

GSM-100-121 Cabinet description


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

1–3

DimensionsThe cabinet has the following dimensions:

Height 2100 mm excluding lifting eyelets

Width 711 mm excluding isolation strips

Depth 416 mm excluding isolation strips

Internal unitsAs shown, the BTS contains a base station unit (BSU) in a card cage in the lower half ofthe cabinet. The BSU is equipped with digital modules according to the required function,and is described in more detail in Base station unit shelf assembly in this manual.

The upper portion of the cabinet houses RF hardware:

S Transceiver shelf.

S Transmitter combiners and bandpass filters.

S Receiver front end (RFE).

Transceiver shelfThe transceiver shelf assembly consists of a tray that can mount transceivers. Thenumber of transceivers that can be fitted to a cabinet depends on the cabinet type andthe type of transceiver, generally the number of the cabinet denotes the maximumnumber of transceivers that can be fitted. For example a BTS6 cabinet canaccommodate six transceivers.

Transmit combiner shelfThe transmit combiner shelf is directly above the upper bank of fans. The shelf holdstransmit combiners and bandpass filters. Transmit combiners are discrete hybridcombiners. Transmit RF signals to be combined inside a BTS cabinet can either comefrom transceivers within the cabinet or from an external source, usually a second BTScabinet.

Receiver front end shelfThe receiver front end (RFE) shelf is directly above the transmit combiner shelf. TheRFE shelf contains:

S Receiver preselector and eight-way splitter modules.

S Dual path preselectors (DPPs).

There must be one preselector module for each antenna input.

A shelf can contain up to three DPPs. A DPP module consists of a bandpass filter, apreamplifier, and two eight-way splitters. This module allows two antennas to feed up tofive transceivers.

PDUThe cabinet power distribution unit (PDU) is in the top shelf. The PDU contains circuitbreakers and fuses and distributes power in the cabinet.

Fan cooling systemThe lower bank of fans draws air downward from the upper intake, through the RFE shelfand the transmit combiner shelf, then through a channel behind the transceiver shelf, anddown through the BSU shelf. Blanking panels are installed in the front of empty slots tomaintain the correct airflow.

The upper bank of fans draws air from below the transceiver shelf through openings inthe tray, the transceiver and the deflectors. Blanking plates are installed to close theopenings in the tray when the transceiver slot is empty, to prevent air from flowingthrough empty slots.

GSM-100-121Cabinet labels


GMR-0168P02901W02-A

Cabinet labels

Door and internallabelling

The diagram shows the location of warning and advisory labels on a typical BTS cabinetand transceiver:

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


FRONT OF DOOR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

1 2 3

6 78

9

11

13

14

15

16

18

19

21

22

23

24

12

10

54

12

25

26

27

28

29

20

17

GSM-100-121 Cabinet labels


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

1–5

Labelling table

The table explains the label numbers on the previous diagram:

Key Description

1 Warning, live terminals

2 Safety glasses

3 Fuse and circuit breaker map

4 Circuit breaker

5 Serial number

6 T43 connection label

7 Caution, non-ionizing radiation

8 Rating label

9 Warning, live terminals

10 Earth symbol

11 Alarm label

12 Warning, disconnect fuse

13 Panel must be in place


15 ESP

16 Caution, isolate


18 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard

19 Warranty

20 Anti–tip warning

21 Warning, possible laser radiation


23 ESD and card map

24 Warning, possible laser radiation


26 Safety glasses

27 Do not obstruct

38 Hazard

29 Frequency designation label



GMR-0168P02901W02-A


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 2

Specification

GSM-100-121


GMR-0168P02901W02-A

GSM-100-121


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 2Specification i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM battery backup 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency band characteristics 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver transmit output power 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-121


GMR-0168P02901W02-A

GSM-100-121 Specifications


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

2–1

Specifications

Overview

The BTS cabinet specifications, including frequency band characteristics, are tabulated inthis chapter.

Environment

The environmental limits are shown in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Environmental limits

Environment Temperature Humidity

Operating 0 _C to +30 _C 5% to 95% non-condensing

Storage –45 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100% non-condensing

Dimensions

The dimensions are shown in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 Dimensions

Height Width Depth

BTS 2100 mm 711 mm 416 mm (with door)400 mm (without door)

Powerrequirements

Positive earth BTS cabinets operate from a –48 V or –60 V dc supply. The maximumpower requirements are:

GSM900

S BTS4 (–48 V) = 45 A.

S BTS4 (–60 V) = 35 A.

S BTS6 (–48 V) = 60 A.

S BTS6 (–60 V) = 50 A.

DCS1800

S BTS6 (–48 V) = 55 A.

S BTS6 (–60 V) = 45 A.

Negative earth BTS cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, –5 V dc) supply.The maximum power requirements are:

GSM900

S BTS5 (+27 V) = 85 A.

S BTS6 (+27 V) = 95 A.

GSM-100-121Specifications


GMR-0168P02901W02-A

DCS1800

S BTS6 (+27 V) = 85 A.

S DRAM Backup 4A at +27 V dc.

DRAM batterybackup

BTS cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input powerbackup for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices.

The DRAM backup maximum power requirement for each cabinet is:

S 4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc.

Frequency bandcharacteristics

GSM900 radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with thecharacteristics listed in Table 2-3:

Table 2-3 Frequency band characteristics

GSM900

Transmit frequency band (MHz) 935 to 960

Receive frequency band (MHz) 890 to 915

Transmit/receive duplex separation (MHz) 45

Channel width (kHz) 200

Number of channels 124

Transmit frequency guard bands (MHz) 935.0 to 935.1959.9 to 960.0

Receive frequency guard bands (MHz) 890.0 to 890.1914.9 to 915.0

Transmit channel centre frequency (MHz) Even 10ths of a MHz from 935.2 to 959.8

Receive channel centre frequency (MHz) Even 10ths of a MHz from 890.2 to 914.8

DCS1800 radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with thecharacteristics listed in Table 2-4:

Table 2-4 Frequency band characteristics

DCS1800

Transmit frequency band (MHz) 1805 to 1880

Receive frequency band (MHz) 1710 to 1785

Transmit/receive duplex separation (MHz) 95

Channel width (kHz) 200

Number of channels 374

Transmit frequency guard bands (MHz) 1805 to 1805.11879.9 to 1880.0

Receive frequency guard bands (MHz) 1710.0 to 1710.11784.9 to 1785.0

GSM-100-121 Specifications


68P02901W02-A

GMR-01

2–3

Transceivertransmit outputpower

Table 2-5 outlines achievable transceiver output power on the top of the cabinet with atwin band pass filter (TBPF), or with or without combining. These values can be usedalong with the power consumption values specified within this section, in order tocalculate heat dissipation figures.

Table 2-5 Transceiver achievable values

Transceiver Maximum specified output powertype

Twin band passfilter, no duplexer

No combining One stagecombining

GSM900 40 W (46 dBm) N/A 20 W (43 dBm)

DCS1800PCS1900

N/A 16 W (42.05 dBm) 8 W (39.05 dBm)

DCS1800PCS1900

(High Power)

N/A 32 W (45.05 dBm) 16 W (42.05 dBm)

All Or the customer-specified value at the top of the cabinet, takingcable losses into account.

Table 2-5 shows that with transceivers placed on full power, the output valuesindicated should be achieved on the top of the cabinet. In fact the actualoutputs on the top of the cabinet could exceed these values.

N/A = Not applicable.

NOTE

GSM-100-121Specifications


GMR-0168P02901W02-A

Powerconsumption

Maximum power consumption figures are theoretical values derived underextreme conditions and are affected by variables such as temperature,component tolerances, transmission power and supply voltage. Although thesefigures must be considered when planning site power requirements, typicalmeasured consumption values will be lower.

NOTE

Table 2-6 outlines the maximum power consumption of a BTS6 cabinet with six carrier.

In these calculations:

S All Transceivers are call processing.

S Output power is 100%.

S There is digital redundancy.

Table 2-6 outlines the power consumption with six carrier.

Table 2-6 Power consumption (kW)

Cabinettype

25 _C

GSM900

orDCS1800/PCS1900

(High power)

DCS1800PCS1900

+27 2.166 1.772

–48 1.991 1.629

The power input for each GSM900 transceiver is approximately 250 watts.The figures quoted in Table 2-6 are for a six carrier with several dependentunits inputs added. With equipments of less than six carrier, the input woulddecrease correspondingly by 250 watts (for each transceiver) plus theproportionate value reduced from the inputs of the other dependent units.

NOTE

CHAPTER 2RF MODULES

CHAPTER 3DIGITAL MODULES

CHAPTER 4POWER, FANS AND

INTERCONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS

68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

i

Category 323

Technical Description

GSM-100-323

1st Jun 01ii Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

iii

Category 323Technical Description i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1General Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-100-323

1st Jun 01iv Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A









GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

v












GSM-100-323

1st Jun 01vi Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A





GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

vii



GSM-100-323

1st Jun 01viii Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A








GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

ix








GSM-100-323

1st Jun 01x Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A





GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

xi






GSM-100-323

1st Jun 01xii Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A






Chapter 4Power, fans & interconnections i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .





GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

xiii








GSM-100-323

1st Jun 01xiv Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A






68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 1

General Information

GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 1General Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A






GSM-100-323 Overview


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–1

Overview

Introduction

This manual describes the base transceiver station (BTS) cabinet which houses the radiofrequency (RF) equipment that provides the BSS air interface.

Cabinet types

There are three cabinets:

S BTS4

S BTS5

S BTS6

The BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets are the same as the BTS6 except in their capacity fortransceivers and their handling of power distribution and alarms.

Terminology

The term transceiver is used generically for the DRCU, DRCUII, DRCU3, SCU900,SCU1800 and TCU units, which are themselves described in chapter 2.

GSM-100-323Base station unit shelf assembly

1st Jun 011–2 Technical Description: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Base station unit shelf assembly

Overview

A base station unit (BSU) shelf assembly consists of:

S A backplane.

S Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules:

– The upper shelf holds half size digital modules.

– The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.

S A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.

Every cabinet must be fitted with the following digital cards:

S Two bus termination cards (BTCs).

S One local area network extender (LANX) module.

All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinetconfiguration.

BSU numbering

In a BTS, BSUs are numbered from F backward using the sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module. This rotary switch sets the BSU LANaddress.

GSM-100-323 Base station unit shelf assembly


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–3

BSU shelf

The diagram shows a base station unit shelf:

AI0AI1AI2

MS0

MS1

MS2

MS3

KS1

GK0

KS0

DR5DR4

DR3DR2

DR1DR0

PART OF BSU BACKPLANE

FULL SIZEMODULES

HALF SIZEMODULES

BLANKINGPLATE

DPSM, EPSM or IPSMs

GSM-100-323Base station unit shelf assembly


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Shelf module fit

The table shows the module positions in a fully-equipped BSU shelf assembly:

Slot Half size modules Slot Full size modules

U0 KSWXL L0 BTC

U1 KSWXL L1 TSW

U2 KSWXR or CLKX L2

U3 KSWXR or CLKX L3 GCLK

U4 KSWXR or CLKX L4

U5 KSWXR or CLKX L5 GCLK

U6 KSWXR or CLKX L6 MSI

U7 KSWXE or CLKX L7 MSI or DRIM

U8 KSWXE L8 MSI

U9 KSWXE L9 MSI or DRIM

U10 DRIX L10 MSI

U11 DRIX L11 MSI or DRIM

U12 DRIX L12 MSI


U14 DRIX L14 MSI


U16 PIX or BBBX L16 MSI

U17 PIX or BBBX L17 MSI or DRIM

U18 PIX or BBBX L18 GPROC

U19 LANX L19 GPROC

U20 LANX L20 GPROC

U21 KSWXE L21 GPROC

U22 KSWXE L22 GPROC

U23 KSWXE L23 GPROC

U24 KSWXR L24 GPROC

U25 KSWXR L25 GPROC

U26 KSWXR L26 Spare

U27 KSWXR L27 TSW

U28 KSWXR L28 BTC

GSM-100-323 Base station unit shelf assembly


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–5

Ventilation

Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots toassist with the correct airflow and ventilation.

Backplaneconnectors

The table shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the BSU backplane:

Connector Function

AI0 Serial bus primary, to DAB

AI1 Serial bus redundant, to DAB

AI2 +5 V DRAM power, from BBBX

KS0 TTY test connector, to TSW in slot L27

KS1 TTY test connector, to TSW in slot L1

GK0 GPS receiver connector, to interconnect panel on top ofcabinet

MS1 MSI connector, to interconnect panel on top of cabinet

MS3 MSI connector, to interconnect panel on top of cabinet

DR0 TTY test connector for the DRI(M) or MSI in slot L7






GSM-100-323Power distribution unit components


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Power distribution unit components

Introduction

This section describes the cabinet dc power distribution arrangements.

Overview

The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and:

S Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet.

S Provides an alarm interface.

It consists of:

S A distribution alarm board (DAB), as described in chapter 4.

S A circuit breaker panel containing a maximum of ten dc circuit breakers, asdescribed in chapter 4.

Input power

DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routedto:

S The VIN bus bar.

S The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.

A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from:

S The Integrated Power Supply Modules (IPSMs) in the lower BSU in positive earth(–48/–60 V) cabinets.

S The VIN and GND busbars, via busbar links, in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.

Circuit breakers

Seven of the ten circuit breakers distribute power to units within the cabinet.

S CB1 (30 A) provides +27 V to the DAB.

S CB2 to CB7 (20 A) provide +27 V to (D)RCUs 0 to 5.

S CB8 to CB10 (60 A) provide –48/–60 V to the IPSMs.

GSM-100-323 Fan cooling system


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–7

Fan cooling system

Overview

Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans. Cabinet baffling divides the cabinetcooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling sub-systems.

The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors,provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment.

Each fan has a fan stall sensor which is connected to alarm circuits in the DAB throughconnector PC5.

Location

The fan cooling systems are mounted directly below the BSU shelf assembly and abovethe transceivers.

Requirements

Power for the fans is derived from the +27 V busbar and is routed to the +27 V terminalon the DAB, then from connector PC9 on the DAB to the fans.

GSM-100-323Interconnect panel


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Interconnect panel

Overview

The interconnect panel is mounted on the top of the cabinet and provides connectionsfor:

S Transmit and receive antenna signals.

S DC input power.

S E1/T1 line interconnect modules.

S Customer defined alarm equipment input/output.

S +27 V power/alarm for external receiver multicoupler and external remotelytuneable combiner.

S +27 V battery back-up input for DRAM.

The interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinetcables into and out of the cabinet.

Feed through tubes operate below their waveguide cut-off frequency and donot compromise the cabinet’s EMC screening.

NOTE

The E1/T1 line interconnection modules are:

S Type 43 (T43) Interconnect Boards.

S Balanced-line Interconnect Boards (BIB).

Panel layout

The diagram shows a BTS6 interconnect panel:

GK0

PIX0

BAT. BACKUP

FIBRE OPTIC CABLESFEED-THROUGH TUBES

PIX1

EARTHSTUD

MS3 MS1

RX3B RX1BRX2BRX3A RX2A

TX1 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX0

RX1A

EXT C & M + VSWR

PHASE 1 PHASE 0

0V

VIN

T43 orBIB

T43 orBIB

TX2

GSM-100-323 Interconnect panel


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–9

Connectors

The table shows the interconnect panel connector functions:

Connector Function Internal destination Externaldestination

Battery backup DRAM backup battery DAB connector PC4 Backup battery

Rx1A, Rx2A andRx3A

Receive antennasignals

Input to dual pathpreselectors 1, 2, and 3(RFE shelf)

Rx antenna 1A, 2A,and 3A or port ofduplexer 0, 1, or 2

Rx1B, Rx2B andRx3B

Diversity receiveantenna signals

Diversity input to dual pathpreselectors 1, 2, and 3(RFE shelf)

Diversity Rx antenna1B, 2B, and 3B

Tx0, Tx1, Tx2, Tx3,Tx4 and Tx5

Transmit antennasignal

Refer to interconnectionmatrix/site specificdocumentation

Refer to site2specificdocumentation

EXT C & M + VSWR External remotelytuneable combiner dcpower and externalreceiver multicouplerdc power/sense

DAB connector PC6 External remotelytuneable combinerand externalreceivermulticoupler dcpower connector

MS1 and MS3 MSI ports (up tosixE1/T1 circuits ateach connector; six Txand six Rx circuits)

MS1 and MS3 connectorson BSU backplane

E1/T1 circuitssource orterminationequipment (via aT43 or BIB)

PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarminput/output ports

Front edge connector ofPIX modules

Customer alarmequipment

GK0 Not used in thisconfiguration

GK0 connector on BSUbackplane

Phase 0 and phase 1 Cabinet phasing Transmit combiner shelf Tx phasing harness

External multicoupler External receivermulticoupler dcpower/sense

DAB connector PC6 External receivermulticoupler dcpower connector

GSM-100-323BTS6 (–48/–60 V) cabinet cabling


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) cabinet cabling

Overview

This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a –48/–60 V BTS6:

Diagram 1

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).

Diagram 2

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half).

Diagram 3

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling.

Diagram 4

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling.

Diagram 5

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling.

Diagram 6

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling.

Diagram 7

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling.

Diagram 8

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling.

Diagram 9

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) fibre optic ((D)RCU to DRIX3) cabling.

Diagram 10

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) receiver extender cabling.

GSM-100-323 BTS6 (–48/–60 V) cabinet cabling


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–11

Diagram 1

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):

INTERCONNECT PANEL(TOP OF CABINET)

PC6CIRCUITBREAKER

CB2

CB1

CB3

PC3

PC4

PC7

PC5GNDBUSBAR(GBB)

DAB

PS28

PS18

PS8

CONN 15 CONN 16 CONN 17

PC2

CB5

CB4

CB6

CB7

CB8

CB10

CB9

VIN BUS BAR

0V

+27VPANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7FAN 3FAN 4FAN 5

+27BV BUS BAR

8

CONN 6

SINGLE PATH

CONN 5

PRESELECTORS

RECEIVER MATRIX A(WHEN INSTALLED)

RECEIVER MATRIX B(WHEN INSTALLED)

EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR BACKUPBATT PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

CHANNEL COMBINER(WHEN INSTALLED)

REMOTELY TUNEDCONN 4

CONN 7

CONN 8

CONN 9

CONN 10

CONN 11

CONN 12

ORPRESELECTORS

GBB

PDU FRAME

DUAL PATHPRESELECTORS

OR



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 2

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half):

AI0

AI1

AI2 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3 GKO

PS28PS29 PS18PS19PS32 PS8PS9

CHASSISGND

FAN 1 FAN 0


IPSM0 27 V INIPSM2 27 V IN

BSU BACKPLANE

1 2 3 4 5 76

FAN 2

(D)RCU3

PC1 PC1

(D)RCU2

8

(D)RCU5

PC1 PC1

(D)RCU4 (D)RCU1

PC1 PC1

(D)RCU0

BBBX

PC1

PC2

PS50PS51

IPSM1 27 V IN 27 V OUT



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–13

Diagram 3

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling:

EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

NOTE:

PIX CABLES ARE ROUTED FROM THE TOP OF THE CABINET INTERCONNECT PANEL TO THE SHELF BACKPLANE.THESE CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO THE PIX MODULE BY A FRONT PANEL CONNECTOR.IF THERE ARE NO PIX MODULES ON A SHELF, THESE CABLES ARE TIE–WRAPPED TO THE SHELF.


AI0

AI1AI2 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3 GKO

BSU BACKPLANEPCB PIX0

PCB PIX1NOTE

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 4

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling:


4 3 2 1 0DUAL PATH

PRESELECTOR4 3 2 1 0

EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

5

5

DRCU3 DRCU2 DRCU1 DRCU0

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

TXBPF1

HYBRID COMBINERS

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–15

Diagram 5

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling:



4 3 2 1 0 TEST SINGLE PATHPRESELECTORS

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PC1PC1PC1PC1

REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER

DRCU4

PC1

CAV4

P0

P1 P2

EXT C & M

GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 6

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling:


4 3 2 1 0DUAL PATH


EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

5

5


PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1

CAVITY COMBINING

TXBPF0

BLOCKCCB0CCB1



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–17

Diagram 7

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling:


DUAL PATHPRESELECTOR

4 3 2 1 0

EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

5


PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1

CAVITY COMBINING

TXBPF0

BLOCKCCB0CCB1

DPP14 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

DPP14 3 2 1 05

TXBPF0



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 8

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:


PRESELECTOR 1A PRESELECTOR 2A PRESELECTOR 3A

RECEIVER


PRESELECTOR 1B PRESELECTOR 2B PRESELECTOR 3B

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

RECEIVER

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

MATRIX A

MATRIX B

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

HYBRID COMBINERS

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1

EXT C & M

GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–19

Diagram 9

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) fibre optic ((D)RCU to DRIX3) cabling:

MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE


PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRIX3

U10

TX

RX

DRIX3

U11

DRIX3

U12

DRIX3

U13

PART OF BSU SHELF ASSEMBLY

DRCU5 DRCU4

PC1PC1

DRIX3

U14

DRIX3

U15

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 10

BTS6 (–48/–60 V) receiver extender cabling:

4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

RX3ARX1A RX2B

BTS CABINET

ANTENNA

RX2A RX2B

PRESELECTORDUAL PATH

RX1B

ANTENNA

4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

NOTE:

THE ABOVE ILLUSTRATES THE INTERCABLING BETWEEN THREE CABINETS, AND SHOWS THATDUAL PATH PRESELECTORS (DPP2) CAN BE INTERCONNECTED, USING A PASSIVE SPLITTER,TO CONNECT 18 (D)RCUs TO ONE PAIR OF ANTENNAS.

4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

RX2ARX3B


PASSIVE SPLITTER

RX3A RX3B


4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

BTS CABINET BTS CABINET

ADAPTORS

GSM-100-323 BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–21

BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling

Overview

This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a +27 V BTS6:

Diagram 1

BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).

Diagram 2

BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half).

Diagram 3

BTS6 (+27 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling.

Diagram 4

BTS6 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling.

Diagram 5

BTS6 (+27 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling.

Diagram 6

BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling.

Diagram 7

BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling.

Diagram 8

BTS6 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling.

Diagram 9

BTS6 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX3) cabling.

Diagram 10

BTS6 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling.

GSM-100-323BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 1

BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):


PC6CIRCUITBREAKER

CB2

CB1

CB3

PC3

PC4

PC7

PC5GNDBUSBAR(GBB)

DAB

PS28

PS18

PS8


PC2

CB5

CB4

CB6

CB7

CB8

CB10

CB9

VIN BUS BAR

0V

+27VPANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7FAN 3FAN 4FAN 5

+27BV BUS BAR

3A

2A

1A

CONN 6

SINGLE PATH

3B

2B

1B

CONN 5

PRESELECTORS



EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR BACKUPBATT PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

CHANNEL COMBINER(WHEN INSTALLED)

REMOTELY TUNEDCONN 4

CONN 7

CONN 8

CONN 9

CONN 10

CONN 11

CONN 12

MX2

MX1

RTC

ORPRESELECTORS

GBB

PDU FRAME

DUAL PATHPRESELECTORS

OR



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–23

Diagram 2

BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half):

AI0

AI1


PS28 PS29 PS18 PS19PS32 PS8 PS9

CHASSISGND

FAN 1 FAN 0


EPSM0EPSM1EPSM2

BSU BACKPLANE

1 2 3 4 5 76

FAN 2

(D)RCU3

PC1 PC1

(D)RCU2(D)RCU5

PC1 PC1

(D)RCU4 (D)RCU1

PC1 PC1

(D)RCU0

BBBX

PC1

PC2



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 3

BTS6 (+27 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling:

EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

NOTE:



AI0



PCB PIX1NOTE

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–25

Diagram 4

BTS6 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling:


4 3 2 1 0DUAL PATH


EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

5

5


PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

TXBPF1

HYBRID COMBINERS

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 5

BTS6 (+27 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling:



4 3 2 1 0 TEST SINGLE PATHPRESELECTORS

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PC1PC1PC1PC1

REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER

DRCU4

PC1

CAV4

P0

P1 P2

EXT C & M

GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–27

Diagram 6

BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling:


4 3 2 1 0DUAL PATH


EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

5

5


PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1

CAVITY COMBINING

TXBPF0

BLOCKCCB0CCB1



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 7

BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling:



4 3 2 1 0

EXT C & M GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR

BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2

5


PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1

CAVITY COMBINING

TXBPF0

BLOCKCCB0CCB1

DPP14 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

DPP14 3 2 1 05

TXBPF0



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–29

Diagram 8

BTS6 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:



RECEIVER



4 3 2 1 0 TEST

RECEIVER

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

MATRIX A

MATRIX B

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

HYBRID COMBINERS

DRCU4

PC1

DRCU5

PC1

EXT C & M

GKO

TX3 TX4

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX5

+VSWR BACKUPBATT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX1

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS3 MS1

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V

ELCAP PANEL

TX2



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 9

BTS6 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX3) cabling:

MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE


PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRIX3

U10

TX

RX

DRIX3

U11

DRIX3

U12

DRIX3

U13


DRCU5 DRCU4

PC1PC1

DRIX3

U14

DRIX3

U15

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–31

Diagram 10

BTS6 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling:

4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

RX3ARX1A RX2B

BTS CABINET

ANTENNA

RX2A RX2B


RX1B

ANTENNA

4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

NOTE:

THE ABOVE ILLUSTRATES THE INTERCABLING BETWEEN THREE CABINETS, AND SHOWS THATDUAL PATH PRESELECTORS (DPP2) CAN BE INTERCONNECTED, USING A PASSIVE SPLITTER,TO CONNECT 18 (D)RCUs TO ONE PAIR OF ANTENNAS.

4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

RX2ARX3B


PASSIVE SPLITTER

RX3A RX3B


4 3 2 1 05

4 3 2 1 05

BTS CABINET BTS CABINET

ADAPTORS

GSM-100-323BTS4 differences


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BTS4 differences

Introduction

This section does not apply to DCS1800 systems.

NOTE

The BTS4 cabinet is the same as the BTS6 except in terms of its transceiver capacity,and its power distribution and alarm handling arrangements. This section describes thesedifferences; it must be read with reference to the rest of this chapter.

Power

The BTS4 can be powered from +27 V or –48/–60 V supplies. If a –48/–60 V supply isused, power converters must be installed to produce +27 V for the cabinet PSMs.

DRCU capacity

The +27 V BTS4 transceiver shelf can actually house up to five transceivers, althoughone slot is occupied by power converters in –48/–60 V versions, which reduces thecapacity to four. The transceivers are described in chapter 2, and the power converters inchapter 4.

PDU

The BTS4 power distribution unit (PDU) contains a power alarm board (PAB). The PABdistributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 30 fuses, monitors alarm lines,passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2 and provides a signal for the cabinetalarm LED. The PAB is described in chapter 4.

Circuit breakers

Power from the VIN bus bar is distributed to power supplies within the cabinet via thecircuit breaker panel. The panel is described in chapter 4.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–33

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) cabinet cabling

Overview

This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a –48/–60 V BTS4:

Diagram 1

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).

Diagram 2

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with preselectors and receiver matrices dc power and alarm cabling(upper half).

Diagram 3

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half).

Diagram 4

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling.

Diagram 5

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with DPP and RTC RF cabling.

Diagram 6

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling.

Diagram 7

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling.

Diagram 8

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling.

Diagram 9

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling.

Diagram 10

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) receiver extender cabling.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 1

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):


PC10

PC9

CIRCUITBREAKER

CB2

CB1

CB3

PC1

PC2PC3

PC4

PC5PC6

PC7

PC8

GNDBUSBAR(GBB)

PAB

PS29

PS19

PS9

P5 P4 P3

PC11PC12

PC13 PC14CB5

CB4

CB6

CB7

CB8

CB10

CB9

CB11

CABINET DOORLEDVIN BUS BAR

0V

+27VPANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7FAN 3FAN 4FAN 5

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

+27BV BUS BAR

REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER

8

VIN

0V

SURGE AND FEEDTHROUGHCAPACITORS








68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–35

Diagram 2

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with preselectors and receiver matrices dc power and alarm cabling(upper half):


PC10

PC9

CIRCUITBREAKER

CB2

CB1

CB3

PC1

PC2PC3

PC4

PC5PC6

PC7

PC8

GNDBUSBAR(GBB)

PAB

PS29

PS19

PS9

P5 P4 P3

PC11PC12

PC13 PC14CB5

CB4

CB6

CB7

CB8

CB10

CB9

CB11


0V

+27VPANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7FAN 3FAN 4FAN 5

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

+27BV BUS BAR


4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER MATRIX APRESELECTOR 3B PRESELECTOR 2B PRESELECTOR 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER MATRIX B

8

VIN

0V


REMOTELY TUNED CHANNEL COMBINER(WHEN INSTALLED)



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 3

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half):

AI0

AI1


PS28 PS29 PS18 PS19 PS32 PS8 PS9

CHASSISGND

FAN 1 FAN 0

P2 P1 P0

−+−+−+

DPS0DPS1DPS2

BSU BACKPLANELOWER

1 2 3 4 5 76

FAN 2

(D)RCU3

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

RF MODULE/FANPOWER CONVERTER UNIT

PS50

(PCU)

(D)RCU2 (D)RCU1 (D)RCU0

8



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–37

Diagram 4

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling:

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

NOTE:



AI0



PCB PIX1NOTE

VIN

0V




GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 5

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with DPP and RTC RF cabling:

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1



PC1PC1PC1PC1

VIN

0V


REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER

4 3 2 1 0 AUX/TESTDUAL PATH

PRESELECTOR4 3 2 1 0 AUX/TEST



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–39

Diagram 6

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling:

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1


PRESELECTOR 1A PRESELECTOR 1B


4 3 2 1 0 TEST 6-WAY SPLITTER6-WAY SPLITTER 4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PC1PC1PC1PC1

VIN

0V


REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 7

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling:

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1



PC1PC1PC1PC1

VIN

0V




CAVITY

TXBPF0

BLOCK

CCB0CCB1

COMBINING



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–41

Diagram 8

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

HYBRID COMBINERS

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1



RECEIVER



4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER

4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

MATRIX A

MATRIX B

VIN

0V




GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 9

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling:


PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRIXMODULE

U10

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U11

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U12

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U13

TX

RX




68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–43

Diagram 10

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) receiver extender cabling:

RX3A RX1A RX3B INTERCONNECT PANEL(TOP OF CABINET)

ANTENNA

RX3A RX3B

PRESELECTOR 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1A

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1A

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

RX1B

ANTENNA

6dB ATTENUATOR6dB ATTENUATOR

ATTENUATORBRACKET

6-WAY SPLITTER6-WAY SPLITTER6-WAY SPLITTER6-WAY SPLITTER


GMR-0168P02901W03-A


Overview


Diagram 1

BTS4 (+27 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).

Diagram 2

BTS4 (+27 V) with preselectors and receiver matrices dc power and alarm cabling (upperhalf).

Diagram 3


Diagram 4


Diagram 5

BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling.

Diagram 6

BTS4 (+27 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling.

Diagram 7

BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling.

Diagram 8


Diagram 9

BTS4 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling.

Diagram 10

BTS4 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–45

Diagram 1

BTS4 (+27 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):


PC10

PC9

CIRCUITBREAKER

CB2

CB1

CB3

PC1

PC2PC3

PC4

PC5PC6

PC7

PC8

GNDBUSBAR(GBB)

PAB

PS29

PS19

PS9

P5 P4 P3

PC11PC12

PC13 PC14CB5

CB4

CB6

CB7

CB8

CB10

CB9

CB11


0V

+27VPANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6FAN 3FAN 4FAN 5

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

+27BV BUS BAR

3A 2A 1A

REMOTELY TUNEDJ1

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

CAV4 CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER

DUAL PATH

3B 2B 1B



PRESELECTOR



VIN

0V




GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 2

BTS4 (–48/–60 V) with preselectors and receiver matrices dc power and alarm cabling(upper half):


PC10

PC9

CIRCUITBREAKER

CB2

CB1

CB3

PC1

PC2PC3

PC4

PC5PC6

PC7

PC8

GNDBUSBAR(GBB)

PAB

PS29

PS19

PS9

P5 P4 P3

PC11PC12

PC13 PC14CB5

CB4

CB6

CB7

CB8

CB10

CB9

CB11


0V

+27V

J5

PANEL

1 2 3 45 6

FAN 3FAN 4FAN 5

+27V BUS BAR


3A 2A 1A

4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER MATRIX APRESELECTOR 3B PRESELECTOR 2B PRESELECTOR 1B

3B 2B 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER MATRIX B

J12

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V


REMOTELY TUNEDCHANNEL COMBINER



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–47

Diagram 3


AI0

AI1



CHASSISGND

FAN 1 FAN 0

P2 P1 P0

−+−+−+

DPS0DPS1DPS2

BSU BACKPLANE

1 2 3 4 5 6

FAN 2

DRCU3

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

DRCU2 DRCU1 DRCU0DRCU4

PC1



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 4


EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

NOTE:



AI0



PCB PIX1NOTE

VIN

0V




68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–49

Diagram 5

BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling:

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1


TXBPF1

TXBPF0

HYBRID COMBINERS




PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRCU4

PC1

VIN

0V




GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 6

BTS4 (+27 V) with 6-way splitter and RTC RF cabling:





PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRCU4

PC1

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V


REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

CAV4 CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–51

Diagram 7

BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling:

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1



PC1PC1PC1PC1

VIN

0V




CAVITY

TXBPF0

BLOCK

CCB0CCB1

COMBINING



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 8

BTS4 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiner RF cabling:



RECEIVER

DRCU3 DRCU0


4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER

4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

PC1 PC1

MATRIX A

MATRIX B

DRCU4

PC1

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

HYBRID COMBINERS

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V


DRCU4

PC1

DRCU4

PC1



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–53

Diagram 9

BTS4 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling:


PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRIXMODULE

U10

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U11

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U12

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U13

TX

RX


DRCU4

PC1

DRIXMODULE

U14

TX

RX



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 10

BTS4 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling:


ANTENNA

RX3A RX3B

PRESELECTOR 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1A

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1A

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

RX1B

ANTENNA


ATTENUATORBRACKET


GSM-100-323 BTS5 differences


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–55

BTS5 differences

Introduction

This section does not apply to DCS1800 systems.

NOTE

The BTS5 cabinet is the same as the BTS6 except in terms of its DRCU capacity and itspower distribution and alarm handling arrangements. This section describes thesedifferences; it must be read with reference to the rest of this chapter.

The BTS5 can be powered only by a +27 V supply.

DRCU capacity

The BTS5 transceiver shelf can house up to five transceivers. These are described in chapter 2.

PDU

The BTS5 power distribution unit (PDU) contains a power distribution board (PDB) andan alarm interface board (AIB).

PDB

The power distribution board distributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 25fuses. The PDB is described in chapter 4.

AIB

The alarm interface board monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROCand provides a signal for the cabinet alarm LED. The AIB is described in chapter 4.

Circuit breakers

Power from the VIN bus bar is distributed to power supplies within the cabinet via thecircuit breaker panel. The panel is described in chapter 4.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A


Overview


Diagram 1

BTS5 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).

Diagram 2


Diagram 3


Diagram 4

BTS5 (+27 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling.

Diagram 5


Diagram 6

BTS5 (+27 V) fibre optic cabling.

Diagram 7

BTS5 (+ 27 V) receive extender cabling.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–57

Diagram 1

BTS5 (+27 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):


PS28

PS18

PS8

P5 P4 P3

1 2 3 4 5 6

FAN 3FAN 4FAN 5

PRESELECTOR A PRESELECTOR B PRESELECTOR C

AMP A AMP B AMP C

4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER MATRIX

REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

CAV4 CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3

TX2

RXB

RXC

OPT

TX1 EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0PX1

PX0

TX4

D

D

RXA

PHASE 1

MS0 MS1TX0

D

FBR0OPTFBR1

VIN 0V

7

SURGECAPACITOR

MS2 MS3

524130

PC3

PC1

PC2PC9

PC5

PC6 P

C7

PC8CABINET DOOR

LEDAIB

CIRCUITBREAKERS

CB2

CB1

CB0

PC1

PC2

PC3

PC4

PC5

PC6

PC7

PC8

GNDBUSBAR(GBB)

PS29

PS19

PS9

PDB+27V

GND



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 2


AI0

AI1



CHASSISGND

FAN 1 FAN 0

P2 P1 P0

−+−+−+

DPS0DPS1DPS2

BSU BACKPLANE

1 2 3 4 6 7

FAN 2

DRCU3

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

DRCU2 DRCU1 DRCU0DRCU4

PC1

5



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–59

Diagram 3


NOTE:

PIX CABLES ARE ROUTED FROM THE TOP OF THE CABINET INTERCONNECT PANEL TO THE SHELF BACK-PLANE.THESE CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO THE PIX MODULE BY A FRONT PANEL CONNECTOR.IF THERE ARE NO PIX MODULES ON A SHELF, THESE CABLES ARE TIE–WRAPPED TO THE SHELF.


AI0



PCB PIX1NOTE

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3

TX2

RXB

RXC

OPT

TX1 EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0PX1

PX0

TX4

D

D

RXA

PHASE 1

MS0 MS1TX0

D

FBR0OPTFBR1

VIN 0V

SURGECAPACITOR

MS2 MS3



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 4

BTS5 (+27 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling:





PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRCU4

PC1

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0

PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V


REMOTELY TUNED

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

CAV4 CAV2 CAV0

CAV3 CAV1PC1

P0 P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2P0 P0

P1 P2 P1 P2

CHANNEL COMBINER



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–61

Diagram 5

BTS5 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:



RECEIVER



4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

RECEIVER

4 3 2 1 0 TESTPC2

PC1 PC1 PC1 PC1

MATRIX A

MATRIX B

DRCU4

PC1

TXBPF1

TXBPF0

HYBRID COMBINERS

EXTCOMB

GKO

TX3 TX2

RX1B RX2A OPT

TX1

EXT MULTCPLR

+27BVBACKUP

BAT

PHASE 0PX1

PX0

TX4

RX2B RX3A RX1A

PHASE 1

MS1 MS3

TX0

RX3BFBR0

OPTFBR1

VIN

0V




GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram 6

BTS5 (+27 V) fibre optic cabling:


PC1PC1PC1PC1

DRIXMODULE

U10

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U11

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U12

TX

RX

DRIXMODULE

U13

TX

RX


DRCU4

PC1

DRIXMODULE

U14

TX

RX



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

1–63

Diagram 7

BTS5 (+ 27 V) receive extender cabling:


ANTENNA

RX3A RX3B

PRESELECTOR 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1A

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1B

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

PRESELECTOR 1A

4 3 2 1 0 TEST

RX1B

ANTENNA


ATTENUATORBRACKET




GMR-0168P02901W03-A


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 2

RF modules

GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

iii













GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A







GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

v



GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A








68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–1

Overview

Introduction

This chapter describes the radio frequency (RF) modules fitted in BTS cabinets.

The following BTS cabinet shelves are described:

S Receiver front end (RFE) shelf.

S Transmit combiner shelf.

S Transceiver shelf.

Also see the BTS receiver and BTS transmitter sections of this chapter for overviews ofthe respective systems.

In this chapter

All information given is valid for GSM, extended GSM (EGSM) and DCS1800 systemsunless indicated otherwise.

GSM-100-323BTS receiver


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BTS receiver

IntroductionThis section is a brief overview of the functions and capabilities of the BTS receiverequipment. Each item is described in more detail later in this chapter.

Receivefrequencies

The receiver RF operating frequency band and channels are as follows:

GSM EGSM DCS1800

Receive frequency band (MHz) 890 to 915 880 to 915 1710 to 1785

Transmit/receive duplex separation(MHz)

45 45 95

Channel width (kHz) 200 200 200

Number of channels 124 174 374

Receive frequency guard bands(MHz)

890.0 to 890.1914.9 to 915.0

880.0 to 880.1914.0 to 915.0

1710.0 to 1710.11784.9 to 1785.0

Receive channel centre frequency(MHz)

Even 10ths ofa MHz from

890.2 to 914.8


880.2 to 914.8

Even 10ths of aMHz from

1710.2 to 1784.8

Internal RFhardware

The following equipment is housed in the BTS cabinet:

Receiver front end (RFE)

The BTS RFE consists of one or more of the following:

S Preselector module; amplifies single channel receive antenna signals in the GSMor EGSM receive frequency band.

S 6-way splitter module; routes a single preselector output to the appropriatetransceiver.

S Receiver matrix module; routes up to three preselector outputs to the appropriatetransceiver.

S Dual path preselector (DPP) module; amplifies diversity receive antenna signals inthe GSM or EGSM receive frequency band, and routes two preselector outputs tothe appropriate transceiver.

Diversity radio channel unit (DRCU)

The DRCU performs all the transceiver receive functions and:

S Can handle a second receive path from a second antenna input.

S Compares the two received signals.

Slim channel unit 900 (SCU900)

The SCU900 performs all the transceiver receive functions, and can receive ExtendedGSM (EGSM) as well as GSM channel frequencies.

GSM-100-323 BTS receiver


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–3


The SCU1800 performs all the transceiver receive functions in DCS1800.

Transceiver control unit (TCU900)

The TCU900 performs all the transceiver receive functions of the SCU900, when thefront panel mode switch is set to SCU.


The TCU1800 performs all the transceiver receive functions of the SCU1800, when thefront panel mode switch is set to SCU.

The front panel mode switch on a TCU must be set to SCU for the transceiverto function in an InCell BTS cabinet.

NOTE

External RFhardware

The following receive antenna equipment is external to the BTS cabinet:

Duplexer/quadraplexer

Allows a single antenna to be used for transmit and receive operations. Theduplexer/quadraplexer modules provide operation on GSM, Total AccessCommunications System (TACS), or Extended TACS (ETACS) receive frequency bands.

Receiver multicoupler

With preselector modules which provide operation on GSM, TACS, or ETACS receivefrequency bands. The output of each multicoupler preselector module is applied to a6-way splitter module providing six output signals from a single receive antenna inputsignal.

GSM-100-323BTS transmitter


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BTS transmitter

Introduction

This section is a brief overview of the functions and capabilities of the BTS transmitterequipment. Each item is described in more detail later in this chapter.

Transmitfrequencies

The transmitter operating frequency band and channels are as follows:

GSM EGSM DCS1800

Transmit frequency band (MHz) 935 to 960 925 to 960 1805 to 1880

Transmit/receive duplex separation(MHz)

45 45 95

Channel width (kHz) 200 200 200

Number of channels 124 174 374

Transmit frequency guard bands(MHz)

935.0 to 935.1959.9 to 960.0

925.0 to 925.1959.9 to 960.0

1805.0 to 1805.11879.9 to 1880.0

Transmit channel centre frequency(MHz)


935.2 to 959.8


925.2 to 959.8

Even 10ths of aMHz from

1805.2 to 1879.8

Internal RFhardware

The following equipment is housed in the BTS cabinet:

Diversity radio channel unit (DRCU)

The DRCU performs the following transmit functions:

S Tunes (on a timeslot basis) to any GSM transmit channel RF frequency.

S Encodes transmit data input from the DRI or DRIM module.

S Modulates transmit data onto the transmit radio channel signal.

S Amplifies and controls the level of the transmit radio channel RF signal.

S Outputs control data, via coaxial cable, to the remotely tuneable combiners.


The SCU900 performs all the transceiver transmit functions, and can transmit ExtendedGSM (EGSM) as well as GSM frequencies.


The SCU1800 performs all the transceiver transmit functions in DCS1800.


The TCU900 performs all the transceiver transmit functions of the SCU900, when thefront panel mode switch is set to SCU.

GSM-100-323 BTS transmitter


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–5


The TCU1800 performs all the transceiver transmit functions of the SCU1800, when thefront panel mode switch is set to SCU.

The front panel mode switch on a TCU must be set to SCU for the transceiverto function in an InCell BTS cabinet.

NOTE

Combining

Combiners can be used to combine the transmit output signals from multiple transceiversinto one transmit antenna signal output. The types of combiners available are:

S Hybrid combiner.

S Remote tuning combiner (900 Mhz only).

S Cavity combining block.

Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF)

Reduces emissions of out-of-band spurious signals. The Tx BPF is connected betweenthe final combined transmit channel output signal and the transmit antenna equipment.

External RFhardware

The RTC and Tx BPF modules can be located outside the BTS cabinet. The modules arethe same as those mounted internally.

The following transmitter antenna equipment is also external to the BTS cabinet:

Duplexer/quadraplexer

The duplexer and quadraplexer modules allow a single antenna to be used for transmitand receive operation.

They provide operation on GSM, TACS, or ETACS transmit frequency bands and areequipped with a frequency-dependent transmit input for each of the three bands.

GSM-100-323Receiver front end shelf


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Receiver front end shelf

Description

The receiver front end (RFE) shelf is a slide-in tray mounted directly above the transmitcombiner shelf at the top of the cabinet.

The table shows the possible combinations of RFE modules in each cabinet:

Equipment GSM 900 DCS1800

Item Additions BTS4 BTS5 BTS6 BTS6

Preselector 6-way splitter Yes Yes No No

Passive splitter No No Yes No

Receivermatrix Yes Yes Yes No

Dual pathpreselector –– Yes No Yes ––

Dual pathpreselector 2 –– Yes No Yes ––

Low noiseamplifier –– –– –– –– Yes

HighsensitivityLNA

–– –– –– –– Yes

A dual path preselector (DPP) and a low noise amplifier (LNA) provide similarfunctions, a DPP is for GSM 900 and a LNA is for DCS1800.

NOTE

GSM-100-323 DPP


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–7

DPP

Description

The dual path preselector (DPP) allows one pair of antennas to feed up to sixtransceivers. The DPP module consists of:

S Two receive bandpass filters (Rx BPFs) to attenuate out-of-band receive signalfrequencies.

S Two RF preamplifiers to amplify the bandpass filtered received signals to a levelsufficient to compensate for splitter, receiver matrix and cable losses, to providethe proper receive signal level to the transceiver receiver input(s).

In a Mk2 DPP (DPP2) module a pair of outputs (fitted on the rear) are used for thereceiver extender function or test purposes.

Limitations

One DPP module is required for each pair of receive antenna signals coming into the topof the cabinet.

Each cabinet can contain up to three DPP modules.

Any unused output connectors must be terminated with 50 ohm loads.

DPP diagram

The diagram is a schematic of the DPP module:

ANTENNA 1 Rx IN RF

OUTRx BPF

ANTENNA 2 Rx IN RF

OUTRx BPF

6-WAYSPLITTER

PRESELECTOR

PRESELECTOR

6-WAYSPLITTER

GSM-100-323DPP


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DPP modules

The diagram shows DPP modules installed in the RFE shelf:

RF INPUT(FROM RX ANTENNA OR

DUPLEXER RX PORT)


MODULE

AUX/TEST OUTPUT PORT (NORMALLY TERMINATED)

OUTPUTS 0 TO 4(TO CORRESPONDING DRCU)

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 0

GSM-100-323 Low noise amplifier


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–9

Low noise amplifier

Overview

The low noise amplifier (LNA) allows one pair of antennas to feed up to six transceivers.

Location

The LNA modules are fitted on the top panel of DCS1800/PCS 1900 cabinets.

Requirements

There is no requirement to terminate unused output connectors with 50 ohm loads.

Module view

The following shows an LNA module:


DUPLEXER RX PORT)

LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER MODULE

OUTPUTS 0 TO 5(TO CORRESPONDING TCU)

OUTPUT 5

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 0

GSM-100-323Low noise amplifier


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Functionaldescription

The low noise amplifier (LNA) consists of two receive bandpass filters (Rx BPFs) toattenuate out-of-band receive signal frequencies, two RF pre-amplifiers to amplify thebandpass filtered received signals and dual six way splitter modules allow one pair ofantennas to feed up to six transceivers. The module only transfers received signals thatare in the BTSs receive frequency band.

There are now two LNA’s, the original and a high sensitivity version.

Original LNA

Operation

The original LNA comprises two Rx channels, each consisting of an input bandpass filter,a preselector and an 8-way splitter. The input BPF provides out of band attenuation, andthe preselector provides two stages of amplification and additional filtering. The 8-waysplitter then divides the output, and six of the outputs are distributed to transceivers forfurther processing. Outputs J3 and J4 enable BTS cabinets to be daisy chainedtogether, and provide the input path for the 27 V dc required to power the amplifiers.

The LNA provides a Rx input gain of 8.5 – 15.5 dB.

Block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the LNA module:

ANTENNA 2 Rx IN RF

OUTRx BPFSPLITTER

PRESELECTOR

Rx BPF

J3 J4EXTENDERS

ANTENNA 1 Rx IN

RFOUTRx BPF

SPLITTER

PRESELECTOR

Rx BPF

J3 J4EXTENDERS

GSM-100-323 Low noise amplifier


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–11

High sensitivityLNA

Operation

The high sensitivity LNA comprises two Rx channels, each consisting of an inputbandpass filter, preselector and an 8-way splitter. The input BPF provides out of bandattenuation, and the preselector provides three stages of amplification and a switchedattenuator. The 8-way splitter then divides the output, and six of the outputs aredistributed to transceivers for further processing. Outputs J3 and J4 enable BTScabinets to be daisy chained together, and provide the input path for the 27 V required topower the amplifiers. Additional filtering is provided by BPFs on the outputs of thesplitter, including the additional outputs (J3 and J4, see below) for when these outputsare used to drive transceivers directly (eg. in the 8/8/8 configuration).

The high sensitivity LNA has two gain modes, High Gain and Low Gain. Mode selectionis by an externally accessible switch, with the attenuator switched into the RF path in thelow gain mode. High gain is selected for normal high sensitivity operation. Low gain isselected where there is to be another source of gain in front of the LNA, ie. if a mastheadamplifier is to be used or in the case of daisy chaining receivers.

The high sensitivity LNA provides a Rx input gain of 8.5 – 14.5 dB in low gain mode and19.0 – 25.5 dB in high gain mode.

Block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the high sensitivity LNA module:

ANTENNA 1 Rx IN RF

OUTSPLITTER

PRESELECTOR

Rx BPF

J3 J4EXTENDERS

REAR PANELSWITCH

ANTENNA 1 Rx IN RF

OUTSPLITTER

PRESELECTOR

Rx BPF

J3 J4EXTENDERS

REAR PANELSWITCH

dB

dB

GSM-100-323Low noise amplifier


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Module view

The following diagram shows a view of the rear view of a high sensitivity LNA.

LOWGAIN

HIGHGAIN

PATH A

PATH B

LOWGAIN

HIGHGAIN


DUPLEXER RX PORT)

LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER MODULE

J3 J4

J4 J3

GSM-100-323 Splitters


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–13

Splitters

Description

6-way splitter

The 6-way splitter module splits the preselector module RF output signal into six signalsto provide a receive antenna signal to each transceiver.

Passive splitter

A passive splitter module consists of dual six-way splitter modules. It is coupled to a DPPor DPP2 module using the receiver extender connectors, and allows one pair of antennasto feed up to 18 transceivers.

Limitations

One 6-way splitter module is required for each preselector when a receiver matrix is notused.

All unused splitter outputs on GSM900 must be terminated by a 50 ohm load. OnDCS1800 DPPs, 50 ohm loads are not required.

A passive splitter module can be located in either the host or receiving cabinet.

Operation

For splitter module functional operation in the receiver multicoupler, see the Receivermulticoupler section in this chapter, and with the dual path preselector see the DPPsection in this chapter.

GSM-100-323Splitters


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Passive splittermodule

The diagram shows a passive splitter module installed in the RFE shelf with a DPP2module:

DPP2MODULE

PASSIVE SPLITTER MODULE

OUTPUT 0

OUTPUT 0

OUTPUTS TORxA/RxB PORTSON TOP OF CABINET

GSM-100-323 Splitters


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–15

6 way splittermodule

The diagram shows 6 way splitter modules installed in the RFE shelf with preselectormodules:

TEST PORT (NORMALLYUNTERMINATED)


DUPLEXER RX PORT)

SPLITTER 0 (RX1A)

SPLITTER 4 (RX2B)

SPLITTER 5 (RX3B)

PRESELECTORMODULE 3A

AUX/TEST OUTPUT PORT (NORMALLY TERMINATED)

OUTPUTS 0 TO 4(TO CORRESPONDING (D)RCU)

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 0SPLITTER 3 (RX1B)

PRESELECTOR MODULES 3B, 2B, & 1B(LEFT–TO–RIGHT, NOT VISIBLE IN THIS

VIEW)

SPLITTER 2 (RX3A) PRESELECTORMODULE 2A


SPLITTER 1 (RX2A)

GSM-100-323Preselector


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Preselector

Overview

The preselector module consists of:

S A receive bandpass filter (Rx BPF) to attenuate out-of-band receive signalfrequencies.

S An RF preamplifier to amplify the bandpass filtered received signals to a levelsufficient to compensate for splitter, receiver matrix and cable losses, to providethe proper receive signal level to the DRCU receiver input(s).

There are two types of preselector module:

S 25 MHz bandwidth (for TACS/GSM).

S 35 MHz bandwidth (for ETACS/TACS/GSM).

The output of a preselector module can be connected to a six-way splitter module or to areceiver matrix module.

Limitations

One preselector module is required for each Rx antenna signal coming into the top of thecabinet, to a maximum of six per BTS cabinet and six per receiver multicoupler cabinet.

Diagram

The diagram is a schematic of the preselector module:

ANTENNA Rx IN RF OUT

Rx BPF

GSM-100-323 Receiver matrix


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–17

Receiver matrix

Description

The receiver matrix module is capable of connecting any of three antenna inputs to anyof six outputs on a timeslot basis.

The three inputs (from the preselectors) are connected to 6-way splitters, the outputs ofwhich are applied to one of three inputs of each of six solid-state switches. Eachsolid-state switch is controlled by a transceiver to select one of the three antenna signalsfor its input.

Limitations

A BTS cabinet can accommodate up to two receiver matrix modules, although thereceiver matrix module cannot be used with an RTC.

Any unused output connectors must be terminated by 50 ohm loads.

Diagram

The diagram is a schematic of the receiver matrix module:

MATRIX 1A

OUTPUTS

MATRIX 2A

MATRIX 3A

INPUTS

6-WAYSPLITTER

6-WAYSPLITTER

6-WAYSPLITTER

DRCU 5 Rx INPUT

DRCU 5 CONTROL

DRCU 4 Rx INPUT

DRCU 4 CONTROL

DRCU 3 Rx INPUT

DRCU 3 CONTROL

DRCU 2 Rx INPUT

DRCU 2 CONTROL

DRCU 1 Rx INPUT

DRCU 1 CONTROL

SOLIDSTATESWITCH

SOLIDSTATESWITCH

SOLIDSTATESWITCH

SOLIDSTATESWITCH

SOLIDSTATESWITCH

SOLIDSTATESWITCH

DRCU 0 CONTROL

DRCU 0 Rx INPUT

GSM-100-323Receiver matrix


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Receiver matrixmodule

Receiver matrix modules fitted in an RFE shelf with preselectors:

TEST OUTPUT PORT(NORMALLYTERMINATED)

OUTPUT 0

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 3

OUTPUTS 0 TO 4(TO CORRESPONDINGDRCU)

OUTPUT SWITCHESRECEIVER MATRIX B

PRESELECTOR MODULES 3B, 2B, AND 1B(LEFT–TO–RIGHT, NOT VISIBLE IN THIS VIEW)




RECEIVER MATRIX B

RECEIVER MATRIX A

OUTPUT SWITCHESRECEIVER MATRIX A

OUTPUT 4

OUTPUTDIPSWITCHES

TEST

43

21

0

DIP switchsettings

The switching function of the module can either be controlled by a DRCU or be preset toa fixed connection between an antenna and a DRCU.

This is configured using four DIP switches for each output on the front panel of themodule. The table lists the DIP switch settings for each output:

Iput/output signal selection Output DIP switch positions(Switch order, left to right)

Output signal selection DRCU data controlled Down, Down, Up, Up

Output signal selection of antenna connectorRx1A/Rx1B

Up, Up, Down, Up


Up, Up, Up, Down


Up, Up, Down, Down

GSM-100-323 Transmit combiner shelf


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–19

Transmit combiner shelf

Description

The transmit combiner shelf is mounted directly above the upper bank of fans and belowthe RFE shelf and houses the following equipment:

S Transmit combiners can combine up to six RF signals into a composite signal.Transmit combiners can be either discrete hybrid combiners or remotely tuneablecavity combiners (RTCs).

S Transmit bandpass filters (Tx BPFs) remove spurious and harmonic signals. Theband limited composite transmit signal is then routed to the BTS cabinet antennaconnectors.

The transmit RF signals combined inside a BTS cabinet can either come fromtransceivers within the cabinet or from an external source (usually a second BTScabinet).

GSM-100-323Hybrid combiner


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Hybrid combiner

Description

The hybrid combiner module combines transmit signals from two inputs for simultaneousbroadcast on a single antenna. The inputs can be from DRCUs or other hybrid combinermodules; transmit signals from several DRCUs can be combined into a single antenna byusing more than one hybrid combiner module.

Limitations

A BTS cabinet can hold up to five hybrid combiner modules capable of combining sixtransmit signals.

There is a 3 dB power signal loss through each hybrid combiner stage. When multiplestages are coupled together, each input signal must be routed through the same numberof stages to ensure that the combined output signal contains individual channelfrequencies of an equal power level. The practical limit is seven hybrid combiners(combining eight signals), with each input signal coupled through three stages.

The hybrid combiner is a four-port device, with two ports on one side and two ports onthe opposite side. Either pair of ports can be chosen as the input, but both input portsmust be on the same side of the device.

One of the output ports must be terminated by a suitable power load.NOTE

GSM-100-323 Hybrid combiner


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–21

Hybridcombiners withTx BPFs in BTS4or BTS5

The diagram shows four hybrid combiners fitted in the transmit combiner shelf with threetransmit bandpass filters:

HYBRID COMBINER(FOUR ILLUSTRATED)

TX OUT, ON BACK OF DEVICE, NOT SHOWN IN THIS VIEW(TO TX BPF OR HYBRID COMBINER)

TX IN (FROM A DRCU ORANOTHER HYBRID COMBINER)

TOP OF DRCU SHELF ASSEMBLY(CUTAWAY VIEW)

POWER LOAD

TX BANDPASSFILTER 0

TX BANDPASS FILTER 2

NO CONNECTION

TX IN (FROM CHANNEL COMBINER OUTPUT OR(D)RCU)

TX OUTPUT POWER LOAD

TX BANDPASS FILTER 1



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Hybridcombiners withTx BPFs in BTS6

The diagram shows four hybrid combiners fitted on a transmit combiner shelf with threetransmit bandpass filters:

Tx OUT, ON BACK OF DEVICE, NOT SHOWN IN THIS VIEW(TO Tx BPF OR HYBRID COMBINER)

Tx IN (FROM A DRCU ORANOTHER HYBRID COMBINER)

POWER LOAD

Tx BANDPASS FILTER 2

NO CONNECTION

Tx IN (FROM CHANNEL COMBINEROUTPUT OR DRCU)

Tx OUTPUT

HYBRID COMBINER(FOUR ILLUSTRATED)


POWER LOAD

Tx BANDPASSFILTER 0


GSM-100-323 Hybrid combiner


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–23

Hybridcombiners with aTx BPF in BTS6

The diagram shows five hybrid combiners fitted on a transmit combiner shelf with atransmit bandpass filter:

Tx OUT, ON BACK OF DEVICE, NOT SHOWN IN THIS VIEW(TO Tx BPF OR HYBRID COMBINER)

Tx IN (FROM A DRCU ORANOTHER HYBRID COMBINER)

POWER LOAD

Tx BANDPASS FILTER

NO CONNECTION

Tx IN (FROM CHANNEL COMBINEROUTPUT OR DRCU)

Tx OUTPUT

HYBRID COMBINER(FIVE ILLUSTRATED)


End view

The diagram shows an end view of the hybrid combiner module:

ÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

PORT 2PORT 1

PORT 3PORT 0



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Configurationexample

The diagram is a schematic of seven hybrid combiners configured to combine eight Txfrequencies on one antenna:

COUPLER

OUTPUT

INPUTS

HYBRID COMBINER

COMBINED OUTPUT

Tx OUTPUTSFROM 8 DRCUs

100BWLOAD

100BWLOAD

100BWLOAD

100BWLOAD

100BWLOAD

100BWLOAD

100BWLOAD

100BWLOAD

GSM-100-323 Tx BPF


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–25

Tx BPF

Description

The transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) module reduces noise and out-of-bandinterference caused by spurious and harmonic signals.

It filters the combined transmit signal before it is applied to the antenna, so that onlysignals in the transmit frequency band are passed to the antenna.

Limitations

Each BPF has a loss of 0.6 dB.

A Tx BPF module is required for each transmit antenna in all configurations.

Diagram

The diagram is a schematic of the Tx BPF module:

RF OUT

Tx BPF

RF INPUT

SAMPLING

GSM-100-323RTC


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RTC

Description

The remotely tuneable cavity combiner (RTC) consists of up to five independent cavityresonators. The combiner cavities are narrow-band devices that pass only transmitsignals with an RF frequency equal to the cavity’s tuned (resonant) frequency.

Possible configurations are:

S The outputs of the individual cavities can be coupled together to combine up to fivechannels onto one antenna.

S The outputs of the individual cavities can be coupled/decoupled as appropriate tocombine two or three channels onto two separate antennas.

S The outputs of two RTCs can be coupled together using a phasing harness, tocombine up to 10 channels onto one antenna.

RTCs are tuned on command from the OMC, which causes a transceiver to send controldata (via coaxial cable) to retune the cavity to a different transmit frequency.

Limitations

The channels to which RTC cavities are tuned must be separated by 800 kHz and in theGSM frequency band.

A BTS cabinet can accommodate one RTC. Additional combining requires externalRTCs.

One cavity can be retuned and verified in 8 seconds. All five cavities can be retuned andverified in 19 seconds.

The maximum signal power loss through the RTC is greater than 3 dB when all fivecavities are coupled together.

GSM-100-323 RTC


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–27

RTC fitted in TCshelf

The diagram shows an RTC fitted in the transmit combiner shelf:

CAVITY 4 ORBLANKING PLATE

CAVITY 0 Tx IN(FROM DRCU)





COMBINER OUT(TO Tx BPF OR PHASING JUNCTION)

ALTERNATE COMBINER OUT(TO Tx BPF OR PHASING JUNCTION)

Tx BANDPASSFILTER 2


Tx OUT(TO Tx ANTENNA )

Tx IN(FROM CHANNEL COMBINER OUTPUT OR DRCU)

TEST PORT


ONE OF FOUR COAXIAL BRIDGES

GSM-100-323RTC


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Configurationexamples

The diagram shows possible RTC combinations:

2 Tx FREQUENCIES ON ONE ANTENNA

COMBINED OUTPUT

Tx OUTPUTSFROM 2 DRCUs

Tx OUTPUTS FROM 5DRCUs

Tx OUTPUTS FROM 5 DRCUs

10 Tx FREQUENCIES ON ONE ANTENNA

PHASINGHARNESS

COMBINED OUTPUT

2 Tx FREQUENCIES ON ONE ANTENNA AND 3Tx FREQUENCIES ON ANOTHER ANTENNA

(2/3 CHANNEL COMBINING)

COMBINED OUTPUT

2 Tx OUTPUTSFROM 2 DRCUs

COMBINED OUTPUT

3 Tx OUTPUTSFROM 3 DRCUs

GSM-100-323 CCB 900/1800


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–29

CCB 900/1800

Description

The cavity combining block (CCB) hardware feature, available from release GSR2onwards, provides a cavity combining block which combines the transmit signals from upto three transceivers, enabling them to transmit on one antenna. The CCBs for 900 MHzand 1800 MHz are internally different, they operate and look the same. The followingshows the two different configurations of CCB module (CCB output assembly and CCBextension assembly):

CAVITY COMBININGBLOCKS

TRANSMIT BANDPASSFILTER

CCB CONTROL MODULECCB OUTPUT ASSEMBLY

CCB EXTENSIONASSEMBLY

A CCB consists of three independent tuneable cavity resonators and can combine thetransmit signals from three transceivers. The RF transmit signals from up to sixtransceivers can be combined in one cabinet using two CCBs. The CCB modules arefitted on the combining shelf in the cabinet.

CCB combiner

The CCB is a cavity combiner operating in the appropriate transmit frequency band. TheCCB consists of three independent tuneable cavity resonators. The combiner cavitiesare narrow band devices which only pass transmit signals with an RF frequency equal tothe cavity tuned (resonant) frequency. The output of the individual cavities are coupledtogether to provide three channel combining. The following shows a block diagram of aCCB.

GSM-100-323CCB 900/1800


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

CC

B C

ON

TR

OL

MO

DU

LEÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER

TX1 TX2 TX3

BIASTEE

MOTORCONTROL

ANTENNA

CAVITY

RF

DATA

CCB CONTROL BUS

RF AND DATA FROMTRANSCEIVER

MOTOR

(CCB OUTPUT ASSEMBLY ONLY)

Transmit bandpass filter

A transmit bandpass filter, to reduce emission of spurious signals outside the transmitfrequency band by the transmit antenna equipment, is connected between the combineroutput and the antenna connector.

CCB control module

The power supplies, alarm and control interface from the transceiver and power supplymodules are interfaced by the CCB control module. This allows multiple sourced cavitycombiners to be installed without requiring amended transceiver software.

The CCB cavities are tuned by software commands from the transceivers. Control data issent by the transceiver, through the coaxial cable, to the CCB bias tee. The bias teesends the RF signals to the appropriate cavity and the control signals to the CCB controlboard. The control board passes the tuning information to the motor of the appropriatecavity. If the system has more than one CCB control board, the boards operate as activeand standby, this makes sure there is no break in control, should a control board fail.

CCB control bus

This control bus is connected between CCB control boards to provide redundancy in theevent of a control board malfunction.

GSM-100-323 Transceiver shelf


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–31

Transceiver shelf

Introduction

A transceiver shelf assembly consists of a tray in which transceivers can be mounted.The BTS6 shelf can accommodate six DRCU3, SCU900, SCU1800, TCU900 orTCU1800 transceivers, while the BTS4 and BTS5 can hold up to 5 DRCUs.

If a DRCU3 or SCU900 is fitted in a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet, a spacer(Motorola part number 4304422N01) must be fitted, as these units areconsiderably narrower than their slots.

NOTE

Control signals and traffic channels for a transceiver are routed from a DRIM module byway of a DRIX module via a fibre optic cable.

GSM-100-323DRCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRCU

OverviewThe diversity radio channel unit (DRCU) is a radio transceiver and forms the centralelement of the base station system (BSS) RF subsystem. The DRCU also supportsdiversity reception. It generates the RF transmit and receive frequencies and contains thechannel equalization and DRCU control logic circuits.

View of DRCUThe DRCU:

Function

The DRCU generates the RF transmit and receive frequencies and contains the channelequalization and DRCU control logic circuits for eight timeslots.

The DRCU provides a fully duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) forcommunicating with mobile stations in the following band:

S Transmit (Tx): 935 to 960 MHz.

S Receive (Rx): 890 to 915 MHz.

The DRCU can change transmit and receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis tosupport frequency hopping.

Internal DRCU circuitry consists of:

S Receiver.

S Synthesizer.

S Transmitter (including an RF power amplifier).

S Diversity control board (DCB).

S Diversity equalizer board (DEQB).

S Power supplies.

GSM-100-323 DRCU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–33

Maintenance

For maintenance purposes, the front panel includes:

S RS232 serial ports to the transceiver control processor and equalizer processor.

S A test port giving access to critical test points for alignment and maintenance.

All major subsystems, for example synthesizers, RF amplifiers and exciter, arecontinuously monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to a GPROCmodule in the BSU shelf. The DRCU alarm status is also displayed by LED indicators onthe front panel.

Reset switch

The front panel pushbutton switch is pressed as follows:

S Momentarily to reset the control processor and begin the front panel indicator testsequence.

LEDs

The front panel LED indicators are as follows:

Power (green)

S LED on when the power supply circuits are on.

S LED off when there is a power supply fault.

Alarm (red)

S LED normally off.

S LED on during an alarm condition (stays on until alarm condition cleared).

S LED on momentarily when the control processor is reset.

Sleep (yellow)

S LED normally off (in wake state).

S LED on in standby condition (sleep state) when the BSS software detects a lack ofchannel activity.

Test (yellow)

S LED normally off.

S LED on in test mode.

Activity 0–7 (green)

S Each LED lights when Tx (uplink) or Rx (downlink) data processing is active on itstimeslot channel.

GSM-100-323DRCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRCU front panel

The DRCU front panel:

POWER (GREEN)

ALARM (RED)

SLEEP (YELLOW)

TEST (YELLOW)

TX OUT − TRANSMITTER RFOUTPUT CONNECTOR (TOCOMBINERS)

TEST INTERFACE

ACTIVITY 0 TO 7(GREEN)

POWER − 27BV DC INPUT (FROM PDUCIRCUIT BREAKERS)

EQUALIZER PROCESSOR TTY PORT(RS2232 SERIAL PORT)

MANUAL RESET(MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON SWITCH)

DATA OUT − FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMITPORT TX (UPLINK)

RX IN 1 − RECEIVE RF INPUT CONNECTOR(FROM RF SPLITTERS OR RECEIVE MATRIX)

DATA IN − FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVERPORT RX (DOWNLINK)


RX IN 1

RX IN 2

CONTROL PROCESSOR TTY PORT(RS2232 SERIAL PORT)

GSM-100-323 DRCU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–35

Block diagram

The following two pages are a functional block diagram of the DRCU:

Rx SYNTHBOARD 1

Rx SYNTHBOARD 2

Rx SYNTH 2 CLK

Rx SYNTH 2 PROG DATA

Rx SYNTH 2 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Rx SYNTH SW

LOW POWER ALARM

SYNTH 1 OUTPUT

SYNTH 2 OUTPUT

Rx SYNTH 1 CLK


Rx SYNTH 1 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Tx SYNTHBOARD 1

Tx SYNTHBOARD 2

Tx SYNTH 2 CLK

Tx SYNTH 2 PROG DATA

Tx SYNTH 2 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Tx SYNTH SW

LOW POWER ALARM

SYNTH 1 OUTPUT

SYNTH 2 OUTPUT

Tx SYNTH 1 CLK


Tx SYNTH 1 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

MOD CLK

MODULATOR (NRZ) DATA

RESET

CARRIER ENABLE

16 X CLK

2.6 MHz REF IN

I2 SIGNAL

Q2 SIGNAL

AGC DATA

V RSSI 1

EXCITER KEY

PWR CONTROL DATA

REV PWR

AIC1

EXCITER ALARM

70.2 MHz INJECTIONSYNTHESIZER BOARD

70.2MHz

70.2MHz

MODULATOR ALARM

ACG

DSSIBOARD

2.048 Mbit/s DATA INPUT

2.048 MHz CLOCK INPUT

2.048 Mbit/s DATA OUTPUT

2.048 MHz CLOCK OUTPUT

(FROM DRIX)

(TO DRIX)

V RSSI 2

AIC2

I1 SIGNAL

Q1 SIGNAL

HEN0 2 HEN7

EQ INPUT DATA

DSP RST0 2 DSP RST7

EQ OUTPUT DATA

RXD

TXD

MOBILE DETECT CH1 & CH2

CH1 & CH2 COMPARATOR

FE FAIL

SSI FAIL

MIF FAIL

DIVERSITY CONTR

OL BOARD

DIVERSITY EQUALIZE

R BOARD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

SE

E P

AG

E 2

-36

GSM-100-323DRCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RF OUTPUT

(TO COMBINER)

RxSWITCHBOARD

TxSWITCHBOARD

819.8to844.8 MHz

809 to 834 MHz

DDSMODULATOR

BOARD

70.2MHz

70.2MHz

DIQBOARD

DIVERSITYFRONT END

BOARD

POWERAMPLIFIERMODULE

POWERCONTROLBOARD

EXCITERBOARD

DDS UPCONVERTER

BOARD

FWDPWR

REVPWR

PWR CONTROL

CHANNEL 2 RECEIVE RF IN

(FROM BTS FRONT END)

CHANNEL 1 RECEIVE RF IN1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

28

27

29

30

31

32

SE

E P

AG

E 2

-35

GSM-100-323 DRCU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–37

Transmitter

The non-return to zero (NRZ) data input signal (eight timeslot channels) from the controlboard is applied to the direct digital synthesizer (DDS) modulator board.

DDS modulator board

The signal is:

S Encoded.

S Serial-to-parallel converted.

S Gaussian filtered into a digital representation.

S D/A converted into a 1/2 Gaussian minimum shift keyed (GMSK) modulated carrierat an IF of 7.2 MHz.

S Up-converted and frequency-doubled into a full GMSK modulated carrier at an IFof 126 MHz.

S Applied to the DDS up-converter board.

DDS up-converter board

The signal is:

S Up-converted into the final transmit channel frequency (935 to 960 MHz).

S Applied to the exciter board.

Exciter board

The exciter board provides a control point (transmitter keying and power output level) forthe final DRCU transmitter RF power output.

The signal is:

S Amplified to the intermediate RF power output level (maximum +27 dBm).

S Applied to the power amplifier board.

Power amplifier board

The power amplifier contains an isolator and forward and reverse power detectors,whose outputs are applied to the power control board.

The signal is amplified to the final RF power output level.

Power control board

Using the measurements from the power amplifier board power detectors, the powercontrol board signals the power amplifier voltage controlled attenuator to set the RFpower level (maximum 48.4 W to 61.0 W (47.35 dBm +/– 0.5 dB).

GSM-100-323DRCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Receiver

The DRCU receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from twopreselectors, via two receive matrices or six-way splitters, on the BTS RFE shelf. Thesesignals (channel 1 and channel 2) are applied to the DRCU RF front end board.

RF front end board

The signals are:

S Converted to a first intermediate frequency (IF) of 70.2 MHz. The basebandsignals are produced to simplify sampling and filtering.

S Split and applied to the diversity signal strength indication (DSSI) board and thediversity in phase and quadrature (DIQ) board.

The DRCU’s RF front end is designed to operate during splitter or matrix loss.

DSSI board

The DSSI board:

S Converts each first IF output signal to a DSSI IF of 10.7 MHz.

S Filters and detects the DSSI IF output signals to produce a dc voltage (V) receivedsignal strength (RSSI) outputs (VRSSI1 and VRSSI2) proportional to the receivedRF signal power applied to the input of the DRCU front end.

S Applies the RSSI voltages to the DCB for DSSI and automatic gain control (AGC)processing.

DIQ board

The DIQ board:

S Demodulates each baseband signal into I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals.

S Filters and amplifies the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals to the level required by the A/Dconverters on the DCB.

Second mixers/bandpass filters

Second mixers and bandpass filters (DSSI mixer/10.7 MHz bandpass filter, I1/I2 signalmixer/filter and Q1/Q2 signal mixer/filter) further reduce adjacent channel, image channeland spurious RF signal rejection.

Automatic gain control

The level of the received signal is controlled by AGC in both RF and IF. The RF AGC is a35 dB fixed signal attenuator that can be switched in or out as required. The IF AGC is adigital stepped attenuator (DSA) with variable signal attenuation of 0 to 80 dB.

GSM-100-323 DRCU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–39

DCB operation

The diversity control board (DCB) is a digital control board for the RF part of the DRCU.It also provides a duplex interface between the digital radio interface (DRI) or digital radiointerface extended memory (DRIM) and the DRCU so that modulation and equalizationdata can be passed between them, along with associated control and status data.

The DCB contains the digital circuits required to perform RCU control including thefollowing functions:

S DRI(M) interface.

S RF board interface, including DSSI/AGC processing.

S Diversity equalizer interface (to DEQB).

S Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the DRCU).

S Maintenance interface (including DRCU front panel status indicators, Teletype(TTY) ports, test point I/O port, and test mode operation).

S Control of external modules, for example, remotely tunable combiner, and receivematrix.

DCB on downlink

On the downlink (Tx), the DCB accepts formatted modulation, DRCU control and slowcontrol (background) messages from the DRI(M), via the fibre optic receiver.

The messages are stored in a 64 byte first-in-first-out (FIFO) by the high level data linkcontroller (HDLC). The DCB firmware either distributes them to their respectivedestinations (for example modulator or equalizer), or interprets them to perform anotherslow control or configuration function.

For mobile-bound information (for example voice data), the message is distributed to themodulator FIFO and interface and then applied to the direct digital modulator board to bemodulated onto the RF carrier and transmitted to the mobile station. Each message mustbe transferred in one timeslot.

GSM-100-323DRCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DCB on uplink

On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the DIQ board, areapplied to A/D converters on the DCB and converted into digital words, which are appliedto each of the eight equalizer digital signal processor blocks on the DEQB. The DEQBprocesses the baseband signal into eight timeslot channels of equalized data.

This data output signal is routed back to the DCB and is applied to the equalizer interfaceand loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The DCB host processor reads it, formats it into amessage and loads it into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC, which transmits theinformation to the DRI(M) via the fibre optic transmitter.

Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads the uplinkcontrol data from DCB registers 1, 2, and 3 and sends this data as a message to theDRI(M). Slow control information is transmitted by firmware as a separate message afterappropriate hardware transfers have been performed.

Each message must be transferred in one timeslot.

DCB firmware

The DCB firmware:

S Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and type ofrequest/query.

S Manages analogue and digital alarms.

S Selects and inserts bursts for both test purposes and normal operation.

S Inserts tail and guard bits, and midamble training sequence according to trainingsequence code (TSC), for any one timeslot.

S Formats slow control message protocol into source processor and type ofconfirm/response.

S Demultiplexes inbound modulation data, DRCU control data and slow controlmessages.

S Multiplexes equalized data, uplink control and slow control messages.

S Performs GSM frequency hopping algorithm for both uplink and downlink on atimeslot basis.

S Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (two for transmit and two for receive,to handle fast synthesizer hopping).

S Allows hopping through the broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier.

S Controls and coordinates timing based on an interrupt driven executive.

GSM-100-323 DRCU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–41

DEQB operation

The DEQB is a digital signal processing board. Due to the large amount of processing tobe done, eight individual equalization blocks are required, one block for each GSMTDMA timeslot. Each equalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP).These blocks are largely independent of each other, but access common buses tocommunicate with the DCB host processor, and peripherals located on the DCB. Allcommunications with the DEQB are through the DCB to DEQB interface.

The DEQB:

S Equalizes the uplink (Rx) data channel.

S Processes DSSI data.

S Interfaces with the DCB.

Inputs to the equalizer digitizer signal processor (EQ DSP) blocks are received from theDCB, and EQ DSP outputs are sent to the DCB. Most EQ DSP peripherals are locatedon the DCB. Local RAM, address decoding, and watchdog timers are on the DEQBitself.

The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the main IF board are applied to therespective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits on the DCB. Theoutput of these circuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data and routed tothe DEQB. The second IF output signal from the DRCU front end board is not amplitudelimited, however the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude variations ofthe receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be angle demodulated by the EQDSP blocks.

The EQ DSP blocks use a Viterbi algorithm, digital filtering and other signal processingalgorithms to equalize the I and Q baseband information signals.

The V RSSI indications from the DSSI board are applied to the RSSI A/D conversion,data buffer and RAM circuits on the DCB. The output of these circuits are processed intoeight timeslot channels of RSSI data and routed to the DEQB. Each EQ DSP blockprocesses the RSSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advance averages for itsparticular timeslot channel.

The AGC/timing advance data output signal is routed back to the DCB, applied to theequalizer interface and loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The DCB host processor readsthe AGC/timing advance data out of the equalizer output FIFO.

The host processor adjusts the data timing accordingly. The host processor also formatsthe AGC data into a message that is applied to the AGC data RAM and register and RFAGC logic circuits on the DCB. These circuits output control signals to the fixedattenuators on the DRCU diversity front end board, and to the variable attenuator on themain IF board. The attenuators adjust the receiver signal gain accordingly.

DRI(M) interface

The interface between the DRCU and the DRI(M) located in the BSU is via fibre opticcable at a data rate of E1/T1. All channel data and transceiver control data areexchanged over this link. All data is Manchester coded (NRZ). The DCB clock recoverycircuit recovers a reference signal from the E1/T1 data stream input (downlink) signal forDRCU data synchronization. The recovered clock reference signal is also applied to thereference frequency loop for derivation of a stable frequency reference (2.6 MHz) forfrequency synthesis.

GSM-100-323DRCUII


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRCUII

Overview

The diversity radio channel unit (DRCUII) is a radio transceiver and forms the centralelement of the base station system (BSS) RF subsystem. Functionally similar to theDRCU, the DRCUII also supports diversity reception. It generates the RF transmit andreceive frequencies and contains the channel equalization and DRCUII control logiccircuits.

View of DRCUII

The DRCUII:

Function

The DRCUII generates the RF transmit and receive frequencies and contains thechannel equalization and DRCUII control logic circuits for eight timeslots.

The DRCUII provides a fully duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) forcommunicating with mobile stations in the following band:

S Transmit (Tx): 935 to 960 MHz.

S Receive (Rx): 890 to 915 MHz.

The DRCUII can change transmit and receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis tosupport frequency hopping.

Internal DRCUII circuitry consists of:

S Receiver.

S Synthesizer.

S Transmitter (including an RF power amplifier).

S Radio control board (RCB).

S Power supplies.

GSM-100-323 DRCUII


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–43

Maintenance

For maintenance purposes, the front panel includes:

S RS232 serial ports to the transceiver control processor and equalizer processor.

S A test port giving access to critical test points for alignment and maintenance.

All major subsystems, for example synthesizers, RF amplifiers and exciter, arecontinuously monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to a GPROCmodule in the BSU shelf. The DRCUII alarm status is also displayed by LED indicatorson the front panel.

Reset switch

The front panel pushbutton switch is pressed as follows:

S Momentarily to reset the control processor and begin the front panel indicator testsequence.

LEDs

The front panel LED indicators are as follows:

Power (green)

S LED on when the power supply circuits are on.

S LED off when there is a power supply fault.

Alarm (red)

S LED normally off.

S LED on during an alarm condition (stays on until alarm condition cleared).

S LED on momentarily when the control processor is reset.

Sleep (yellow)

S LED normally off (in wake state).

S LED on in standby condition (sleep state) when the BSS software detects a lack ofchannel activity.

Test (yellow)

S LED normally off.

S LED on in test mode.

Activity 0–7 (green)

S Each LED lights when Tx (uplink) or Rx (downlink) data processing is active on itstimeslot channel.

GSM-100-323DRCUII


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRCUII frontpanel

The DRCUII front panel:

POWER (GREEN)

ALARM (RED)

SLEEP (YELLOW)

TEST (YELLOW)


TEST INTERFACE

ACTIVITY 0 TO 7(GREEN)

POWER − 27BV DC INPUT (FROM PDUBREAKERS)

EQUALIZER & CONTROL PROCESSORSTTY PORT (RS2232 SERIAL PORT)






EQL +CONTPRCSR

RX IN 1

RX IN 2

GSM-100-323 DRCUII


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–45

Block diagram

The following two pages are a functional block diagram of the DRCUII:

Rx SYNTHBOARD 1

Rx SYNTHBOARD 2

Rx SYNTH 2 CLK


Rx SYNTH 2 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Rx SYNTH SW

LOW POWER ALARM

SYNTH 1 OUTPUT

SYNTH 2 OUTPUT

Rx SYNTH 1 CLK


Rx SYNTH 1 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Tx SYNTHBOARD 1

Tx SYNTHBOARD 2

Tx SYNTH 2 CLK


Tx SYNTH 2 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Tx SYNTH SW

LOW POWER ALARM

SYNTH 1 OUTPUT

SYNTH 2 OUTPUT

Tx SYNTH 1 CLK


Tx SYNTH 1 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

MOD CLK


RESET

CARRIER ENABLE

16 X CLK

2.6 MHz REF IN

I2 SIGNAL

Q2 SIGNAL

AGC DATA

V RSSI 1

EXCITER KEY

PWR CONTROL DATA

REV PWR

EXCITER ALARM


70.2MHz

70.2MHz

MODULATOR ALARM

ACG

LSSIBOARD





(FROM DRIX)

(TO DRIX)

V RSSI 2

I1 SIGNAL

Q1 SIGNAL

FE FAIL

SSI FAIL

MIF FAIL

RADIO CONTR

OL BOARD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

2930

SE

E P

AG

E 2

-46

GSM-100-323DRCUII


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RF OUTPUT

(TO COMBINER)

RxSWITCHBOARD

TxSWITCHBOARD

819.8to844.8 MHz

809 to 834 MHz

DDSMODULATOR

BOARD

70.2MHz

70.2MHz

LIQBOARD

DRCUIIRECEIVERFRONT END

BOARD


POWERCONTROLBOARD

EXCITERBOARD

DDS UPCONVERTER

BOARD

FWDPWR

REVPWR

PWR CONTROL




4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

28

27

29

30

SE

E P

AG

E 2

-45

2

3

GSM-100-323 DRCUII


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–47

Transmitter


DDS modulator board

The signal is:

S Encoded.







The signal is:



Exciter board

The exciter board provides a control point (transmitter keying and power output level) forthe final RCU transmitter RF power output.

The signal is:






Power control board


GSM-100-323DRCUII


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Receiver

The DRCUII receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from twopreselectors, via two receive matrices or six-way splitters, on the BTS RFE shelf. Thesesignals (channel 1 and channel 2) are applied to the DRCUII RF front end board.

DRCU RF front end board

The signals are:


S Split and applied to the low power signal strength indication (LSSI) board and thelow power in phase and quadrature (LIQ) board.

The DRCUII RF front end is designed to operate during splitter or matrix loss.

LSSI board

The LSSI board:

S Converts each first IF output signal to an LSSI IF of 10.7 MHz.

S Filters and detects the LSSI IF output signals to produce a dc voltage (V) receivedsignal strength (RSSI) outputs (VRSSI1 and VRSSI2) proportional to the receivedRF signal power applied to the input of the DRCUII front end.

S Applies the RSSI voltages to the RCB for LSSI and automatic gain control (AGC)processing.

LIQ board

The LIQ board:


S Filters and amplifies the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals to the level required by the A/Dconverters on the RCB.


Second mixers and bandpass filters (LSSI mixer/10.7 MHz bandpass filter, I1/I2 signalmixer/filter and Q1/Q2 signal mixer/filter) further reduce adjacent channel, image channeland spurious RF signal rejection.



GSM-100-323 DRCUII


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–49

RCB operation

The radio control board (RCB) is a digital control board for the RF part of the DRCUII. Italso duplex-interfaces with the DRI(M) to communicate modulation, equalization, controland status data.

The RCB contains the DRCUII control circuits including:

S DRI(M) interface.

S RF board interface, including LSSI/AGC processing.

S Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the DRCUII).

S Maintenance interface (including DRCU front panel status indicators, Teletype(TTY) ports, test point I/O port, test mode operation, etc).

S Uplink (Rx) data channel equalization.

S LSSI data processing.

S Controlling external modules, for example remotely tuneable combiner and receivematrix.

RCB on downlink

On the downlink (Tx), the RCB accepts formatted modulation, DRCUII control, and slowcontrol (background) messages from the DRI(M) via the fibre optic receiver.

The messages are stored in a 64 byte first-in-first-out (FIFO) by the high level data linkcontroller (HDLC). The RCB firmware either distributes them to their respectivedestinations (for example modulator or equalizer), or interprets them to perform anotherslow control or configuration function.

For mobile-bound information (for example voice data), the message is distributed to themodulator FIFO and modulator interface and then applied to the direct digital modulatorboard, which modulates the data onto the RF carrier and transmits it to the mobilestation. All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.

RCB on uplink

On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the LIQ board are appliedto A/D converters on the RCB and converted to digital words, which are applied to eachof the four equalizer digital signal processor blocks on the RCB. Each EQ DSPprocesses the baseband signal into eight timeslot channels of equalized data.

The data output signal is routed to the equalizer FIFO and read by the host processor,which formats it into a message and loads it into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC.The HDLC transmits the information to the DRI(M) via the fibre optic transmitter.

Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads uplinkcontrol data from RCB registers 1, 2 and 3, and sends it as a message to the DRI(M).Slow control information is transmitted by the firmware as a separate message afterappropriate hardware transfers have been performed.

All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.

GSM-100-323DRCUII


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RCB firmware

The RCB firmware:

S Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and request type.





S Demultiplexes inbound modulation data, DRCUII control data, and slow controlmessages.



S Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (two for transmit and two for receive),for fast synthesizer hopping.



Four equalizationblocks

Four individual equalization blocks are required, each for two TDMA timeslots. Eachequalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP). These blocks are largelyindependent of each other, but access common buses to communicate with the hostprocessor and other peripherals.

Inputs to the equalizer digital signal processor (EQ DSP) blocks are received from theRCB, and EQ DSP outputs are sent to the RCB. Most EQ DSP peripherals are locatedon the RCB, but local RAM, address decoding, and watchdog timers are on the DEQBitself.


Basebandsignals

The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the main IF board are applied to therespective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits. The output of thesecircuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data and routed to the appropriateEQ DSP. The second IF output signal from the DRCU front end board is not amplitudelimited, however, the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude variations ofthe receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be angle demodulated by the EQDSP blocks.

GSM-100-323 DRCUII


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–51

V RSSIindications

The V RSSI indications from the LSSI board are applied to the RSSI A/D conversion,data buffer and RAM circuits on the RCB. The output of these circuits are processed intoeight timeslot channels of RSSI data and routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. Each EQDSP block processes the RSSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advanceaverages for its particular timeslot channel.

AGC data

The AGC/timing advance data output signal is routed back to the RCB, applied to theequalizer interface and loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The RCB host processor readsthe AGC/timing advance data out of the equalizer output FIFO and adjusts the datatiming accordingly.

The host processor also formats the AGC data into a message that is applied to the AGCdata RAM and register and RF AGC logic circuits on the RCB. These circuits outputcontrol signals to the fixed attenuators on the DRCUII receiver front end board and to thevariable attenuator on the main IF board. The attenuators adjust the receiver signal gainaccordingly.

DRI(M) interface

The interface between the DRCUII and the DRI(M), located in the BSU, is via fibre opticcable at a data rate of E1/T1. All Manchester coded channel data and transceiver controldata are exchanged over this link. The clock reference signal is recovered from theE1/T1 data stream input (downlink) signal for DRCUII data synchronization, and is alsoapplied to the reference frequency loop derive a stable frequency reference (2.6 MHz) forfrequency synthesis.

GSM-100-323DRCU3


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRCU3

Overview

The DRCU3 radio transceiver is the central element of the BSS RF subsystem. Itgenerates RF transmit and receive frequencies, and contains the digital circuits for eighttimeslots of channel equalization and DRCU3 control logic.

The DRCU3 provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel):

S Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 935 to 960 MHz.

S Receive (Rx) frequency band, 890 to 915 MHz.

The DRCU3 can change transmit/receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis, as requiredfor frequency hopping applications.

If a DRCU3 is fitted in a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet, a spacer (Motorola partnumber 4304422N01) must be fitted, as the unit is considerably narrowerthan the slot.

NOTE

View of DRCU3

The DRCU3:

Circuitry

DRCU3 circuitry is contained in an integral module package. This circuitry consists of:

S Receiver boards.

S Synthesizer boards.

S Transmitter boards (including an RF power amplifier).

S Various power supply boards.

GSM-100-323 DRCU3


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–53

Maintenance

For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the transceiver control processor andone to the equalizer processor are included on the front panel of the DRCU3.

A special test port on the DRCU3 front panel provides access to critical test points foralignment and maintenance.

All major subsystems within the DRCU3, for example, synthesizers, RF amplifiers,andexciter, are continuously monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to ageneric processor board (GPROC) in the BSU shelf.

A voltage of 15 V is present, at the power D-type connector of the DRCU3,when the circuit breaker for the appropriate DRCU is switched off and theDRCU3 is disconnected.This voltage is due to the alarm detection circuitry monitoring the state of thecircuit breaker, and presents no hazard as it is supplied via a 20 kohm currentlimiting resistor.With the DRCU3 connected (and the circuit breaker off) there is nomeasurable voltage present at the connector.

NOTE

Reset switch

The front panel pushbutton reset switch is pressed momentarily to reset the controlprocessor and begin the front panel indicator test sequence.

LEDs

The front panel incorporates two tricolour LED indicators as follows:

Power/Alarm LED

S Off = No power.

S Steady green = Call processing in progress.

S Flashing green = Bootstrap mode.

S Yellow = Sleep mode.

S Red = Alarm condition (on until the alarm condition is cleared).

Activity LED

S Green = Normal transmit/receive activity.

S Yellow = Transceiver in test mode (transmit or receive activity).

S Red = Transceiver in test mode (no RF activity).

The power/alarm and activity LEDs briefly illuminate red when reset is initiated.

NOTE

GSM-100-323DRCU3


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRCU3 frontpanel

The DRCU3 front panel:

EQL +CONTPRCSR


TEST INTERFACE







RX IN 1

RX IN 2

EQUALIZER & CONTROL PROCESSORSTTY PORT (RS2232 SERIAL PORT)

GSM 900

EXTERNALALARMINPUT

POWER/ALARM

ACTIVITY

EXTERNAL ALARM SOCKET (FOR TOPCELL USE ONLY)

GSM-100-323 DRCU3


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–55

Block diagram

The following two pages are a functional block diagram of the DRCU3:

Rx SYNTHBOARD 1

Rx SYNTHBOARD 2

Rx SYNTH 2 CLK


Rx SYNTH 2 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Rx SYNTH SW

LOW POWER ALARM

SYNTH 1 OUTPUT

SYNTH 2 OUTPUT

Rx SYNTH 1 CLK


Rx SYNTH 1 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Tx SYNTHBOARD 1

Tx SYNTHBOARD 2

Tx SYNTH 2 CLK


Tx SYNTH 2 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

Tx SYNTH SW

LOW POWER ALARM

SYNTH 1 OUTPUT

SYNTH 2 OUTPUT

Tx SYNTH 1 CLK


Tx SYNTH 1 SEL

2.6 MHz REF IN

MOD CLK


RESET

CARRIER ENABLE

16 X CLK

2.6 MHz REF IN

I2 SIGNAL

Q2 SIGNAL

AGC DATA

V RSSI 1

EXCITER KEY

PWR CONTROL DATA

REV PWR

EXCITER ALARM


70.2MHz

70.2MHz

MODULATOR ALARM

ACG

LSSIBOARD





(FROM DRIX)

(TO DRIX)

V RSSI 2

I1 SIGNAL

Q1 SIGNAL

FE FAIL

SSI FAIL

MIF FAIL

SLIM CONTR

OL BOARD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

2930

SE

E P

AG

E 2

-56

GSM-100-323DRCU3


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RF OUTPUT

(TO COMBINER)

RxSWITCHBOARD

TxSWITCHBOARD

819.8to844.8 MHz

809 to 834 MHz

DDSMODULATOR

BOARD

70.2MHz

70.2MHz

LIQBOARD

DRCU3RECEIVERFRONT END

BOARD


POWERCONTROLBOARD

EXCITERBOARD

DDS UPCONVERTER

BOARD

FWDPWR

REVPWR

PWR CONTROL




4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

28

27

29

30

SE

E P

AG

E 2

-55

2

3

GSM-100-323 DRCU3


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–57

Transmitter


DDS modulator board

The signal is:

S Encoded.







The signal is:



Exciter board

The exciter board provides a control point (transmitter keying and power output level) forthe final DRCU transmitter RF power output.

The signal is:






Power control board


GSM-100-323DRCU3


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Receiver

The DRCU3 receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from twopreselectors, via two receive matrices or six-way splitters, on the BTS RFE shelf. Thesesignals (channel 1 and channel 2) are applied to the DRCU3 RF front end board.

DRCU RF front end board

The signals are:


S Split and applied to the low power signal strength indication (LSSI) board and thelow power in phase and quadrature (LIQ) board.

The DRCU3 RF front end is designed to operate during splitter or matrix loss.

LSSI board

The LSSI board:

S Converts each first IF output signal to an LSSI IF of 10.7 MHz.

S Filters and detects the LSSI IF output signals to produce a dc voltage (V) receivedsignal strength (RSSI) outputs (VRSSI1 and VRSSI2) proportional to the receivedRF signal power applied to the input of the DRCU3 front end.

S Applies the RSSI voltages to the SCB for LSSI and automatic gain control (AGC)processing.

LIQ board

The LIQ board:


S Filters and amplifies the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals to the level required by the A/Dconverters on the SCB.


Second mixers and bandpass filters (LSSI mixer/10.7 MHz bandpass filter, I1/I2 signalmixer/filter and Q1/Q2 signal mixer/filter) further reduce adjacent channel, image channeland spurious RF signal rejection.



GSM-100-323 DRCU3


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–59

SCB operation

The slim control board (SCB) is a digital control board for the RF part of the DRCU3. Italso duplex-interfaces with the DRI(M) to communicate modulation, equalization, controland status data.

The SCB contains the DRCU3 control circuits including:

S DRI(M) interface.

S RF board interface, including LSSI/AGC processing.

S Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the DRCU3).

S Maintenance interface (including DRCU front panel status indicators, Teletype(TTY) ports, test point I/O port, test mode operation, etc).

S Uplink (Rx) data channel equalization.

S LSSI data processing.

S Controlling external modules, for example remotely tuneable combiner and receivematrix.

SCB on downlink

On the downlink (Tx), the SCB accepts formatted modulation, DRCU3 control, and slowcontrol (background) messages from the DRI(M) via the fibre optic receiver.

The messages are stored in a 64 byte first-in-first-out (FIFO) by the high level data linkcontroller (HDLC). The SCB firmware either distributes them to their respectivedestinations (for example modulator or equalizer), or interprets them to perform anotherslow control or configuration function.

For mobile-bound information (for example voice data), the message is distributed to themodulator FIFO and modulator interface and then applied to the direct digital modulatorboard, which modulates the data onto the RF carrier and transmits it to the mobilestation. All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.

SCB on uplink

On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the LIQ board are appliedto A/D converters on the SCB and converted to digital words, which are applied to eachof the four equalizer digital signal processor blocks on the SCB. Each EQ DSPprocesses the baseband signal into eight timeslot channels of equalized data.

The data output signal is routed to the equalizer FIFO and read by the host processor,which formats it into a message and loads it into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC.The HDLC transmits the information to the DRI(M) via the fibre optic transmitter.

Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads uplinkcontrol data from SCB registers 1, 2 and 3, and sends it as a message to the DRI(M).Slow control information is transmitted by the firmware as a separate message afterappropriate hardware transfers have been performed.

All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.

GSM-100-323DRCU3


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

SCB firmwareThe SCB firmware:

S Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and request type.





S Demultiplexes inbound modulation data, DRCU3 control data, and slow controlmessages.



S Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (two for transmit and two for receive),for fast synthesizer hopping.



Four equalizationblocks

Four individual equalization blocks are required, each for two TDMA timeslots. Eachequalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP). These blocks are largelyindependent of each other, but access common buses to communicate with the hostprocessor and other peripherals.

Inputs to the equalizer digital signal processor (EQ DSP) blocks are received from theSCB, and EQ DSP outputs are sent to the SCB. Most EQ DSP peripherals are locatedon the SCB, but local RAM, address decoding, and watchdog timers are on the DEQBitself.


Basebandsignals

The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the main IF board are applied to therespective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits. The output of thesecircuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data and routed to the appropriateEQ DSP. The second IF output signal from the DRCU front end board is not amplitudelimited, however, the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude variations ofthe receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be angle demodulated by the EQDSP blocks.

V RSSIindications

The V RSSI indications from the LSSI board are applied to the RSSI A/D conversion,data buffer and RAM circuits on the SCB. The output of these circuits are processed intoeight timeslot channels of RSSI data and routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. Each EQDSP block processes the RSSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advanceaverages for its particular timeslot channel.

GSM-100-323 DRCU3


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–61

AGC data

The AGC/timing advance data output signal is routed back to the SCB, applied to theequalizer interface and loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The SCB host processor readsthe AGC/timing advance data out of the equalizer output FIFO and adjusts the datatiming accordingly.

The host processor also formats the AGC data into a message that is applied to the AGCdata RAM and register and RF AGC logic circuits on the SCB. These circuits outputcontrol signals to the fixed attenuators on the DRCU3 receiver front end board and to thevariable attenuator on the main IF board. The attenuators adjust the receiver signal gainaccordingly.

DRI(M) interface

The interface between the DRCU3 and the DRI(M), located in the BSU, is via fibre opticcable at a data rate of E1/T1. All Manchester coded channel data and transceiver controldata are exchanged over this link. The clock reference signal is recovered from theE1/T1 data stream input (downlink) signal for DRCU3 data synchronization, and is alsoapplied to the reference frequency loop derive a stable frequency reference (2.6 MHz) forfrequency synthesis.

GSM-100-323SCU900 and SCU1800


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

SCU900 and SCU1800

Overview

In this section the generic term SCU is used for the SCU900 and SCU1800except where information relates specifically to one type.

NOTE

The slim channel unit (SCU) is a radio transceiver and is the central element of the BSSRF sub-system. It generates all the GSM and EGSM (SCU900) and DCS1800(SCU1800) transmit and receive RF frequencies, and contains the digital circuits requiredfor eight timeslots of channel equalization as well as SCU control logic. SCU1800scannot be fitted in BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets.

The SCU provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) forcommunicating with mobile stations in the following bands:

S GSM: Tx 935 to 960 MHz; Rx 890 to 915 MHz.

S EGSM: Tx 925 to 960 MHz; Rx 880 to 915 MHz.

S DCS1800: Tx 1805 to 1885 MHz; Rx 1710 to 1785 MHz.

The SCU can change transmit/receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis to supportfrequency hopping applications.

If an SCU900 is fitted in a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet, a spacer (Motorola partnumber 4304422N01) must be fitted, as the unit is considerably narrowerthan its slot.

NOTE

SCU circuitry consists of a receiver board, a synthesizer board, transmitter boards(including an RF power amplifier), a digital processing and control (DPC) board, and apower supply board.

GSM-100-323 SCU900 and SCU1800


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–63

View of an SCU

The diagram shows an SCU:

Maintenance

For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the control processor is included onthe front panel of the SCU. Communication to the equalizer processors is also availablefrom this port by way of a virtual link provided by the control processor.

A special test port on the SCU front panel provides access to critical test points foralignment and maintenance.

All major sub-systems within the SCU (synthesizers, RF amplifiers, etc) are continuouslymonitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to a Generic ProcessorBoard (GPROC) in the BSU shelf. The SCU control and transmitter status is alsodisplayed using LED indicators, on the front panel of the SCU.

The front panel switch contains a pushbutton used to manually reset the SCU. Thesoftware generates a front panel indicator test sequence when reset is activated.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

SCU front panel

The SCU900 front panel:

RADIO STATUS

TX STATUS

CNTRLPRCSR

TX OUT − TRANSMITTER RF OUTPUTCONNECTOR (TO COMBINERS)

TEST INTERFACE




RX IN 1

RX IN 2

CONTROL PROCESSORSTTY PORT (RS2232SERIAL PORT)

EXTERNALALARMS

EXTERNAL ALARMS

DATAIN A

DATAOUT A

DATA OUT A − FIBRE OPTICTRANSMIT PORT TX (UPLINK)

DATA IN A − FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVERPORT RX (DOWNLINK)

CAUTIONHEAT SINK MAY BE HOT TO TOUCH

VOLTAGE INPUT 20–30 VDC

RESET

MANUAL RESET MOMENTARY PUSHBUTTON SWITCH)

TXOUT

GSM 900



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–65

Switch

The front panel pushbutton switch is pressed momentarily to reset the control processorand begin the front panel indicator test sequence.

LEDs


Radio status LED

S Red = Power fail.

S Steady yellow (and transmitter status LED off) = Sleep mode.

S Flashing yellow = Test mode.



Transmitter status LED

S Off = Transmitter off and not programmed.

S Off (and radio status LED steady yellow) = Sleep mode.

S Red = Transmitter alarm exists.

S Flashing green = Transmitter programmed and off.

S Yellow = Transmitter on during at least one timeslot.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Transmitter

Refer to the SCU block diagram.

The modulator (non-return to zero (NRZ)) data input signal (eight timeslot channels) fromthe (digital processing and control board DPC) is applied to the Transmitter Board. ThisNRZ data signal is encoded, serial to parallel converted, Gaussian filtered into a digitalrepresentation, and then D/A converted into a Gaussian Minimum Shift Keyed (GMSK)modulated carrier at a 1st IF of 7.0 MHz. This 7.0 MHz IF signal is up converted with ahigh side injection of 182.0 MHz to a full GMSK modulated carrier at a 2nd IF of175 MHz.

The full GMSK modulated 175 MHz 2nd IF is filtered and applied to the input of a Gilbertcell linear amplitude modulator for the purpose of transmitter ramping control. The outputof the Gilbert cell is then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is up-converted tothe final transmit channel frequency which is in the range of 925 to 960 MHz (or 1805 to1880 MHz in DCS1800). This low level modulated carrier signal is then applied to acombination of analogue and digital attenuators for the purposes of RF power control.The analogue ramp voltage and power control voltage are provided by the DPC. Digitalattenuator information is provided by the DPC over a serial link. The output of the powercontrol elements is further amplified by an exciter chain to a maximum output of +5 dBm.

The control driver board provides RF power amplification between the transmitter boardoutput and the input of the power amplifier board. It provides power regulation and signalbuffering, acting as an interface between the power amplifier and other parts of the radio.The forward power detector is mounted on this board.

The power amplifier board amplifies the intermediate level modulated carrier signal inputto a final RF power output level. The power amplifier also contains an isolator and thereverse power detector. The detected output from the the forward power detector (on thecontrol driver board) and the reverse power detector is applied to the DPC Board. Basedon these detected signals the DPC determines the setting for the final SCU RF poweroutput level. The DPC then sends a signal to the gain control elements of the transmitterto set the corresponding RF power level.

The maximum output power available at the SCU900 transmitter RF power outputconnector is 54.3 Watts (47.35 dBm) +/– 0.5 dBm.

The maximum output power available at the SCU1800 transmitter RF power outputconnector is 25.1 Watts (44.0 dBm) +/– 1.0 dBm.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–67

Receiver

Refer to the SCU block diagram.

The receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from a dualpreselector module.

The receive RF signal from each BTS RF front end is applied to two inputs (branch 1 andbranch 2) of the SCU receiver board. Following a switchable automatic intermodulationcontrol (AIC) pad and an RF band pass filter, each receive input signal is converted to anintermediate frequency (IF) of 86.6 MHz (or 215 MHz in DCS1800). The IF lineupprovides bandpass filtering and a 35 dB switchable pad for automatic gain control (AGC).

The IF output signal (having been downconverted to 10.75 MHz in DCS1800) for eachreceiver branch is split into two signals.

One signal is applied to a Log/limiting amplifier stage which provides a Received SignalStrength Indication (RSSI1, RSSI2) voltage and an amplitude limited IF output. TheRSSI voltage provides an analogue representation of the received signal strength, whichis sent to the DPC where it is digitized and made available to the equalizer blocks for thepurposes of received signal processing. The limiting IF output is used to acquire arandom access channel (RACH).

The other IF signal is applied to a set of AGC pads which provide a linear receiverbranch used to acquire traffic and control channels. Linear AGC gain settings are sent tothe receiver board from the DPC. Either the limited or linear path can be selected by theDPC on a timeslot basis. The selected path is demodulated into quadrature signals (I1/I2and Q1/Q2) and filtered by baseband analogue filters. The signals are sent to the DPCwhich digitizes and makes them available to the equalizer blocks for receivesynchronization/data recovery.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

SCU diagram

The diagram shows a schematic of the SCU:

RF OUTPUT

(TO COMBINER)

Rx SYNTH SEL

LOW POWER ALARM

Tx SYNTH SEL

819.8 to 844.8 MHz

809 to 834 MHz

MOD CLK


RESET

CARRIER ENABLE

16 X CLK

13 MHz REF IN

I2 SIGNAL

Q2 SIGNAL

AGC DATA

TX KEY

PWR CONTROL DATA

REV PWR

TX ALARM

SYNTHESIZERBOARD

86.6 MHz

86.6 MHz

RXBOARD

POWERAMPLIFIERmodule

CONTROLDRIVERBOARD

TXBOARD


E1/T1 DATA INPUT

E1/T1 DATA INPUT

E1/T1 DATA OUTPUT

E1/T1 DATA OUTPUT


I1 SIGNAL

Q1 SIGNAL

RX FAIL

DIGITALPROCESSORANDCONTROLBOARD(DPC)

(FROM DRIX)


(TO DRIX)



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–69

DPC

The DPC is a digital control board for the RF module of the SCU. It also provides aduplex interface between the digital radio interface with extended memory (DRIM) andthe SCU so that modulation and equalization data can be passed between them, alongwith associated control and status data.

The DPC contains the following SCU digital and analogue control circuits:

S DRI(M) interface.

S RF board interfaces, including PA power control.

S Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the SCU).

S Maintenance interface (including SCU front panel status indicators, Teletype (TTY)ports, test point I/O port, test mode operation, etc).

S The channel equalization of the uplink (Rx) data.

S Processing of SSI data.

S External module control (combiner, receive matrix).

DRIM interface

The connection between the SCU and the DRIM, located in the BSU, is via fibre opticalcable at a data rate of E1/T1. The fibre optic link is designed to support up to 1 km offibre optic cable, and redundant fibre links are provided for future applications. Allchannel data and transceiver control data is exchanged over this link. All data isManchester coded.

Clock recovery

The DPC clock recovery circuit recovers the clock reference signal from the E1/T1datastream input (downlink) signal for SCU data synchronization. The recovered clockreference signal is sent to the synthesizer board as a reference for all RF PLLs.

DPC on downlink

On the downlink (Tx), the DPC accepts formatted messages from the DRIM. Thesemessages all fall under the categories of modulation data, SCU control data, and slowcontrol data (which are messages that are executed as background tasks by the DPC).The messages arrive at the DPC and are stored in a 64 byte First In First Out (FIFO) bythe High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC). The DPC firmware takes these messagesand either distributes them to their respective destinations (modulator, equalizer, etc), orinterprets them to perform some other slow control or configuration function.

For instance, in the case of mobile bound information (voice data), the message isdistributed to the modulator interface. The NRZ data output from the modulatorinterface is applied to the Tx board. The data is modulated on the RF carrier andtransmitted to the MS. All power control and transmitter timeslot ramping control ishandled by the DPC. During each timeslot, the DPC firmware writes a ramp onwaveform and a power control word to the PA control hardware resident on the DPC.The power control word is based upon the downlink transmitter power message receivedon the fibre link.




GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DPC on uplink

On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the Receiver board, areapplied to A/D converters on the DPC. The A/D converters convert the analogue I1/I2and Q1/Q2 signals to digital words which are applied to each of the four equalizer digitalsignal processor blocks on the DPC. Each EQ DSP processes the baseband signal intoeight timeslot channels of equalized data. This data output signal is routed to theequalizer dual port RAM (DPR). The host processor reads the equalized data out of theequalizer DPR and formats it into a message which is loaded into a 64 byte output FIFOon the HDLC.

The HDLC transmits the information to the DRIM through the fibre optic transmitter.Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads the uplinkcontrol data from the bottom of the dual port RAM and sends this data as a message tothe DRIM. Any slow control information that needs to be sent uplink, to the DRIM, istransmitted by the firmware as a separate message after appropriate hardware transfershave been performed.


DPC firmware

The DPC firmware:

S Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and type ofrequest/query.



S Inserts tail and guard bits, and midamble training sequence according to TrainingSequence Code (TSC), for any one timeslot.

S Controls all transmitter functions including timeslot ramping and digital andanalogue attenuation for power output control.

S Formats slow control messages into source processor and type ofconfirm/response.

S Demultiplexes inbound modulation, control and slow control messages.



S Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (2 for transmit and 2 for receive) forfast synthesizer hopping.

S Accommodates hopping through the broadcast control channel (BCCH).

S Controls and coordinates timing, based on an interrupt driven executive.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–71

Equalisationblocks

Due to the large amount of processing to be done, four individual equalization blocks arerequired, one block for two TDMA timeslots. Each equalization block contains a digitalsignal processor (DSP). These blocks are largely independent of each other, but accesscommon buses to communicate with the host processor, and other peripherals.

The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the receiver board are applied to therespective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits. The output of thesecircuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data. This data is routed to theappropriate EQ DSP. The I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitudevariations of the receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be equalized andangle demodulated by the EQ DSP blocks.


Signal strength

The SSI indications from the receiver board are applied to the SSI A/D conversion anddata buffer & RAM circuits on the DPC. The output of these circuits are processed intoeight timeslot channels of SSI data. This data is routed to the appropriate EQ DSP.Each EQ DSP block processes the SSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timingadvance averages for its particular timeslot channel. The timing advance data outputsignal is loaded into the uplink message DPR. The AGC message is written directly tothe AGC control function on the DPC. This function outputs control signals to the fixedattenuators and to the variable attenuator on the receiver board. The attenuators adjustthe receiver signal gain accordingly.

Once a timeslot, the DPC firmware writes modulation data to the modulator interface,and writes power control information and a ramp profile to the transmitter controlinterface. This data is written one timeslot in advance of when it is used by the DPCcontrol hardware. The power control information consists of a digital attenuator wordwhich is transmitted over the transmitter serial link, and an analogue attenuator controlword, which is converted to a voltage on the DPC and then sent to the transmitter board.

GSM-100-323Transceiver control unit (TCU)


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Transceiver control unit (TCU)

Overview

In this section the generic term TCU is used for the TCU900, TCU1800 andhigh power TCU1800 except where the information relates specifically to onetype.

NOTE

This section describes the functional operation of the transceiver control unit (TCU) usedin base transceiver station (BTS) cabinets.

The TCU is a radio transceiver and is the central element of the base station system(BSS) RF sub-system of BTS6 cabinets.

The TCU:

S Generates all the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit and receivefunctions.

S Contains the digital circuits required for eight timeslots of channel equalization andTCU control logic.

The TCU provides the Air interface between a BSS and mobile systems. A TCUemploys diversity reception which, during signal fades provides a more consistentreceive operation. A TCU can change frequency on a timeslot basis to provide forfrequency hopping and equipment sharing. The six TCUs provide six RF channels for atotal of 48 timeslot channels.

Requirements

The high power TCU1800 must be used in conjunction with the high sensitivity LNA.

Standard and high power TCU1800s cannot be used in the same sector, but may beused in different sectors for the same BSS site.

Transceivercarrier frequencybands

The TCU provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) forcommunicating with mobile stations. The RF carrier frequency of operation is:

S EGSM900

– Receive (Rx) frequency band, 880.2 to 914.8 MHz.

– Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 925.2 to 959.8 MHz.

S DCS1800



S PCS1900



The TCU can change transmit/receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis, as required forfrequency hopping and/or equipment sharing applications.

GSM-100-323 Transceiver control unit (TCU)


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–73

TCU circuitry

TCU circuitry is all contained in an integral module package. This circuitry consists of:

S TCU receiver (Rx) board.

S Synthesizer board.

S Transmitter (Tx) board.

S Control driver board.

S Power amplifier board.

S Digital processor and control (DPC) board.

S Transceiver station manager (TSM) board.

S Power supply module (SPSM).

View of a TCU

The following shows the TCU module:

Maintenance

For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the control processor is included onthe front panel of the TCU.

Communication to the equalizer processors is also available from this port via a virtuallink provided by the control processor.

A special test port on the TCU front panel provides access to critical test points foralignment and maintenance.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Front panelswitches

Reset switch

The front panel pushbutton reset switch is pressed momentarily to rest the controlprocessor and begin front panel indicator test sequence.

Mode switch

A front panel mode selection switch is used to switch the transceiver between TCU andSCU modes of operation. The SCU mode of operation must be selected for TCUs fittedin a BTS cabinet. The mode selection switch is recessed to prevent accidental selectionof the alternate mode of operation.

Alarm reporting

All major sub-systems within the TCU, such as synthesizers, and RF amplifiers, arecontinuously monitored and alarmed as necessary.

Alarms are reported to the TSM in the TCU. The TCU control and transmitter status isalso displayed, via LED indicators, on the front panel of the TCU.

LEDs


Radio status LED

S Red = Power fail.

S Steady yellow (and transmitter status LED off) = Sleep mode.

S Flashing yellow = Test mode.



Transmitter status LED

S Off = Transmitter off and not programmed.

S Off (and radio status LED steady yellow) = Sleep mode.

S Red = Transmitter alarm exists.

S Flashing green = Transmitter programmed and off.

S Yellow = Transmitter on during at least one timeslot.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–75

TCU front panel

The following shows the TCU front panel (TCU900):

EXTERNALALARMS

RESET

RADIO STATUS

TX STATUS

CNTRLPRCSR

TX OUT – Transmitter RF Outputconnector (to CBF [M-Cell2/6] or

CCB [M-Cell6])

Test Interface

POWER – 27 V dc Input (from PDU breakers)

DATA OUT B – Fibre optic transmitport Tx (uplink)

RX IN 1 – Receive RF Input connector(from DNLB [M-Cell2] or IADU [M-Cell6])

DATA IN B – Fibre optic receiverport Rx (downlink)

RX IN 2 – Receive RF Input connector(from DNLB [M-Cell2] or IADU [M-Cell6])

RX IN 1

RX IN 2

Control Processors TTYport (RS-232 serial port)

External Alarms

DATAIN A

DATAIN B

DATAOUT

A

DATAOUT B

DATA OUT A – Fibre optic transmitport Tx (uplink)

DATA IN A – Fibre optic receiverport Rx (downlink)

HEAT SINK MAY BE HOT TO TOUCH

VOLTAGE INPUT 20–30 VDC

Manual RESET(momentary push button switch)

TX OUT

EGSM 900

CAUTION

RCU

TCU

MODESWITCH

TSM Interface

Mode switch

RADIO STATUS – Indicator

Tx STATUS – Indicator



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

TCU input/outputdiagram

The following is a block diagram of the TCU:

RFOUTPUT

(TO CBF orCCB)

POWERAMPLIFIER

BOARD

CONTROLDRIVERBOARD

880.2 to 915 MHz

925 to 960 MHz

13 MHz

13 MHz

RXBOARD

Rx SYNTH SEL

LOW POWER ALARMS

Tx SYNTH SEL

13 MHz REF IN SYNTHESIZERBOARD

DIGITALPROCESSOR

ANDCONTROL

BOARD

TRANSCEIVERSTATION

MANAGERBOARD





FIBRE OUT

HDLC DATA

577µS REF

FIBRE IN

8.192 MHz CLOCK

HDLC DATA

6.12S REF

4.612mS REF

FIBRE CLOCK

2.048 MHz CLOCK

MOD CLK


RESET

CARRIER ENABLE

16 X CLK

TX KEY

PWR CONTROL DATA

TX ALARM

I2 SIGNAL

Q2 SIGNAL

AGC DATA



I1 SIGNAL

Q1 SIGNAL

RX FAIL

DETECTED POWER DATA

TXBOARD

TSM PRESENT

(TO FOX)

(FROM FOX)

POWERSUPPLYMODULE

DISTRIBUTED POWER

(TO EACH OF THE BOARDS)



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–77

TCU receiverboard detail

The receiver part of the TCU transceiver accepts two amplified and filtered receiveantenna signals from a dual low noise block (DLNB) module. (The TCU RF front end isdesigned with consideration towards the DLNB gain and noise level).

RF signals:

The receive RF signal from each DLNB is applied to two inputs (branch 1 and branch 2)of the TCU receiver board.

Following a switchable automatic intermodulation control (AIC) pad and an RF band passfilter, each receive input signal is converted to a baseband frequency of 86.6 MHz. TheIF lineup provides bandpass filtering and 35 dB switchable pad for automatic gain control(AGC).

AIC and AGC RF signals diagram

The following shows the AIC and AGC of the RF signals:

splitter

splitter

SWITCHABLEPAD 35dB

SWITCHABLEPAD 35dB

BANDPASS86.6MHz

BANDPASS86.6MHz

BANDPASS880 to 915MHz

BANDPASS880 to 915MHz

mixer

mixer

switchableattenuator

switchableattenuator

880.2 to915MHz

880.2 to915MHz

AGC

AIC

AIC

AGC

MIXER INPUT810 to 845MHz

AGC DATA

AGC DATA

86.6MHz(VSSI PATH)

86.6MHz(VSSI PATH)

86.6MHz(TCC PATH)

86.6MHz(TCC PATH)

IF signals:

The IF output signal for each receiver branch is split into two signals:

S A VSSI output.

S Traffic and control channel output.

VSSI output

The VSSI voltage provides an analogue representation of the received signal strength.The limiting IF output is used for the acquistion of random access channel (RACH).

The receive VSSI signal is applied to a 86.6 MHz bandpass filter and converted to an IFof 13 MHz with amplitude limitation.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

VSSI output path diagram

The following shows the VSSI path:

andAMPLITUDE

INDICATORSLOPE ADJUST

andTEMPERATURE

and

COMPENSATION

AMPLITUDE

INDICATORSLOPE ADJUST

andTEMPERATURECOMPENSATION

BANDPASS BANDPASSAMPLIFIER

RSSI

BANDPASS BANDPASS

BANDPASS MIXER

LIMITER

AMPLIFIER

RSSI

BANDPASS MIXER

LIMITER

57 MHzMIXERINPUT

VSSI/1OUTPUT

86.6 MHz

86.6MHz

VSSI/2OUTPUT

Traffic andcontrol channeloutput

The other IF signal is applied to a set of AGC pads which provides analogue AGCelement which provides a linear receiver branch used to acquire traffic and controlchannels. Linear AGC gain settings are sent to the receiver board from the DPC. Eitherthe limited or linear path can be selected by the DPC on a timeslot basis. The selectedpath is demodulated into quadrature signals (I1/I2 and Q1/Q2) and filtered by basebandanalogue filters.

These signals are sent to the DPC where they are digitized and made available to theequalizer blocks for the purposes of receive synchronization and data recovery.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–79

Traffic and control path diagram

The following shows the traffic and control channel path:

I2 OUTPUT

Q2 OUTPUT

Q1 OUTPUT

I1 OUTPUT

VARIABLEATTENUATOR

DEMODULATOR

SPLITTER

AMPLIFIER

AMPLIFIER

FILTER

FILTERACTIVE LOWPASS

AMPLIFIER

AMPLIFIER

FILTER

ACTIVE LOWPASS

ACTIVE LOWPASS

FILTERACTIVE LOWPASS

BANDPASSI/Q

IF AMPLIFIER

VARIABLEATTENUATOR

DEMODULATOR

BANDPASSI/Q

IF AMPLIFIER

80dB

80dB

2–WAY

86.6MHz

86.6 MHz



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Digitalprocessing andcontrol board

The following details describe the operation of the TCU when the front panelmode selection switch is set to the SCU position.

NOTE

The digital processing and control board (DPC) is a digital control board for the RFportion of the TCU. It also provides a duplex interface between the digital radio interfacewith extended memory (DRIM) and the TCU so that modulation and equalization datacan be passed between them, together with associated control and status data.

The DPC contains the digital and analogue circuits required to perform TCU controlincluding the following functions:

S DRIM interface.

S RF board interfaces, including PA power control.

S Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the TCU).

S Maintenance interface, including:

– TCU front panel status indicators.

– Teletype (TTY) ports.

– Test point I/O port.

– Test mode operation.

S The channel equalization of the uplink (Rx) data.

S SSI data processing.

S Control of external modules, such as the remotely tunable combiner, receivematrix, etc.

Diagram

The following shows the DPC block diagram:

ITCASIC

EQ#0PROCESSOR

CONTROLPROCESSOR

EQ#3PROCESSOR

HDLC

CLOCKRECOVERY

COMMUNICATIONINTERFACE

FIBRE A

FIBRE B

UPLINKTRAFFIC and

CONTROL

TDM HIGHWAY



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–81

TCU connections

The connection between the TCU and the DRIM, located in the BSU is over fibre opticcable at a data rate of 2.048 Mbit/s.

The fibre optic link is designed to support up to 1 km of fibre optic cable. Redundant fibrelinks are provided for future applications. All channel data and transceiver control dataare exchanged over this link.

Dataspecifications

All data crossing the 2.048 Mbit/s link is Manchester coded. The DPC clock recoverycircuit recovers 2.048 MHz clock reference signal from the 2.048 Mbit/s data streaminput (downlink) signal for TCU data synchronization. The recovered 2.048 MHz clockreference signal is sent to the synthesizer board as a reference for all RF PLLs.

Downlink (Tx)digitalprocessing

On the downlink (Tx), the DPC accepts formatted messages from the DRIM, via the fibreoptic receiver. These messages all fall under three categories:

S Modulation data.

S TCU control data.

S Slow control data (which are messages the DPC executes as background tasks).

The high level data link controller (HDLC) takes these messages as they arrive at theDPC and stores them in a 64 byte first in first out (FIFO). The DPC firmware takes thesemessages and either:

S Distributes them to their respective destinations (modulator, equalizer).

S Interprets them to perform some other slow control or configuration function.

For instance, in the case of information going to the mobile, the DPC firmware distributesthe message to the modulator interface. The non-return to zero (NRZ) data output fromthe modulator interface is applied to the transmitter board. The data is modulated on theRF carrier and transmitted to the MS.

The DPC handles all power control and transmitter timeslot ramping control. During eachtimeslot, the DPC firmware writes a ramp on waveform and a power control word to thePA control hardware resident on the DPC. The power control word is based upon thedownlink transmitter power message received on the fibre link.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Uplink (Rx)digitalprocessing

On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the Receiver board areapplied to analogue to digital (A/D) converters on the DPC. The A/D converters convertthe analogue I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals to digital words which are applied to each of the 4equalizer (EQ) digital signal processor blocks on the DPC.

Each EQ DSP processes the baseband signal into 8 timeslot channels of equalized data.This data output signal is routed to the equalizer dual port RAM (DPR). The hostprocessor reads the equalized data out of the equalizer DPR and formats it into amessage which is loaded into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC. The HDLC transmitsthe information to the DRIM, via the fibre optic transmitter. Immediately following thismessage (when required), host processor reads the uplink control data from the bottomof the dual port RAM and sends this data as a message to the DRIM. Any slow controlinformation that needs to be sent uplink, to the DRIM, is transmitted by the firmware as aseparate message after appropriate hardware transfers have been performed.

All messages for both uplink and downlink (as described above) must be transmitted andreceived by the appropriate entity within a single time division multiple access (TDMA)timeslot. (eg, For downlink, modulation data, TCU control data, and any slow controlmessage must all be transferred within one timeslot.)

DPC firmwaretasks

The following list summarizes some of the major tasks of the DPC firmware.

S Interpretation of slow control messages into destination processor and type ofrequest/query.

S Analogue and digital alarm management.

S Burst selection and insertion for both test purposes and normal operation.

S Midamble insertion according to training sequence code (TSC), for any onetimeslot. Also, tail and guard bit insertion.

S Control of all Transmitter functions including timeslot ramping control and digitaland analogue attenuation control for the purposes of power output control.

S Protocol formatting of slow control messages into source processor and type ofconfirm/response.

S Demultiplexing of inbound modulation data, TCU control data, and slow controlmessages.

S Multiplexing of equalized data, uplink control and slow control messages (whenapplicable).

S Performs GSM frequency hopping algorithm for both uplink and downlink on a pertimeslot basis, thus supporting both normal frequency hopping and equipmentsharing.

S Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (2 for transmit and 2 for receive, toaccommodate fast synthesizer hopping).

S Accommodates hopping through the broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier inhopping modes.

S Controls and co-ordinates the timing of all the above, based on an interrupt drivenexecutive.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–83

Processing andcontrol

Four individual equalization blocks are used for processing; one block for two EGSMTDMA timeslots. Each equalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP).These blocks are largely independent of each other, but access common buses tocommunicate with the host processor, and other peripherals.

The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the receiver board are applied to therespective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits. The output of thesecircuits are processed into 8 timeslot channels of data. This data is routed to theappropriate EQ DSP. The I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitudevariations of the receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be equalized andangle demodulated by the EQ DSP blocks.


The SSI indications from the receiver board are applied to the SSI A/D conversion anddata buffer & RAM circuits on the DPC. The output of these circuits are processed into 8timeslot channels of SSI data. This data is routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. Each EQDSP block processes the SSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advanceaverages for its particular timeslot channel. The timing advance data output signal isloaded into the uplink message DPR. The AGC message is written directly to the AGCcontrol function on the DPC. This function outputs control signals to the fixedattenuators and to the variable attenuator on the receiver board. The attenuators adjustthe receiver signal gain accordingly.

Once every timeslot, the DPC firmware writes modulation data to the modulatorinterface, and writes power control information and a ramp profile to the transmittercontrol interface. This data is written one timeslot in advance of when it is used by theDPC control hardware. The power control information consists of a digital attenuatorword which is transmitted via the transmitter serial link, and an analogue attenuatorcontrol word, which is converted to a voltage on the DPC and then sent to the transmitterboard.

Transceiverstation manager(TSM) board

This board is switched out of circuit when the front panel mode selector switchis set to the SCU position. With the switch in this position the transceiverstation manager functions are provided by the DRIM board mounted in theBSU.

NOTE

Overview

The transceiver station manager (TSM) board provides all radio sub system (RSS)control, front end processing, channel coding processing and communications to themBCU via a 2.048 Mbit/s 32 timeslot TDM interface. Two fully redundant links areavailable for communications with a redundant mBCU. A 2.048 Mbit/s HDLC packet datalink is provided between the front end processor and the control processor on the DPC.The TSM together with it’s corresponding DPC and RF boards perform the RSS levelcontrol together with the air interface for eight GSM logical traffic channels or timeslots.The TSM also performs logical to physical channel mapping, interleaving andde-interleaving, channel encoding and decoding and downlink Baseband hopping.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the TSM board:

TDMINTERFACE

HDLC

RSSCONTROL

RSS68040QUICC

MEMORYDPR FEP

56002QPR

CC#0PROCESSOR

CC#7PROCESSOR

TDM HIGHWAY

UPLINKTRAFFIC

and CONTROL

BBH DATA

TRAU DATA

TPS

TSM functions

Downlink traffic

Downlink traffic data from the mBCU is received at the TDM interface via the TDMinterface and routed to one of eight channel coders. The channel coders encode (cyclicor convolutional coding) the speech data or TRAU frames and insert signalling messagesper GSM recommendations. The coded traffic data and signalling messages are routedback to the mBCU via the TDM interface for baseband hopping. The post hoppeddownlink data is then sent back to the appropriate TCU via the TDM link where it isreceived by the FEP and forwarded on to the DPC. The transceiver control informationgenerated by the FEP is multiplexed with coded downlink messages generated by thechannel coder. This multiplexed information is sent to the control processor on the DPCvia a direct HDLC link.

Uplink traffic

Uplink traffic and control messages from the DPC are received by the HDLC and read bythe FEP. The FEP demultiplexes the incoming data into uplink traffic and controlmessages. Control messages are sent to the RSS processor via the host and DPRinterfaces. The FEP forwards the equalizer data on to the channel coders via the quadport RAM (QPR) interface. The eight channel coders de-interleave, decrypt, and decodethe data into TDM compatible TRAU frames. This data is delivered to the mBCU via theTDM interface.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–85

Baseband hopping

When baseband hopping is implemented, the FEP calculates the hopping sequence forthe TCU. The calculated frequency is converted to the corresponding TCU destinationevery GSM frame and sent to the mBCU. Because of the timing differences betweenGSM air interface and TDM timeslots, baseband hopping data is evenly distributed overfour TDM frames. The TDM timeslots containing the baseband hopping downlink trafficdata are routed to the same or different TCUs depending on the calculated frequency forthat particular downlink traffic data. When baseband hopping data sent through the TDMinterface arrives, a further four TDM timeslots are used to receive the baseband hoppingdata and route it to the FEP. The FEP then sends that to the DPC control processor viathe HDLC link.

RSS processing

The RSS processor function provides a BSS software platform which allows thedistribution of the RSS software process to each of the TCUs. The RSS functioncommunicates to the other software processing functions in the mBCU via dedicated64 kbit timeslots on the 2.048 Mbit/s fibre link. The RSS processor communicates to therest of the TSM via a host port and Dual Port RAM (DPR) interface.

The RSS processor is based on a Motorola 68040 processor with a Motorola 68360communications processor operating in companion mode. The assorted non-volatile andvolatile memory available include 8 Mbytes of DRAM. Non-volatile memory is used forbootstrap and firmware object code storage.

Front end processing (FEP)

The FEP function provides a transceiver control and system control interface to the RSSfunction. It routes data control messages to the control processor on the DPC, andhandles messaging and control of the channel coder DSPs (CCDSPs). In addition, ithandles the routeing of baseband hopping data on the TCU downlink via the TDMinterface. The FEP function is responsible for configuration and control of the channelcoder functions. The FEP controls the reset line of the channel coders and downloadsthe operational code into the channel coder DSPs.

The FEP is also responsible for providing a communication links between the following:

S Channel coders and the RSS.

S Channel coders and the DPC.

S RSS and the DPC.

The FEP function is centred on a Motorola 56002 DSP processor. The processor hasexternal RAM used for program and data space. The FEP has access to a 32K of 8 bitspace that is used to interface with the RSS block together with a host port interface.The FEP has access to a 2K x 8 memory space that is used for storing uplink anddownlink data and communication with the TDM block. The FEP communicates with theDB board through an HDLC link.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Channel coder processing

As a unit, the eight blocks are responsible for all signal processing associated with GSMspecified channel coding. There is a single dedicated CCDSP block for each of the eightGSM air interface timeslots. The channel coders receive downlink speech data from theTDM across the SCI port in the form of TRAU frames from the TDM interface. TheCCDSPs encode and package the data into GSM air interface frames, which arereturned to the TDM via the quad-port RAM interface. From there, the air frames arepassed to the appropriate FEP via baseband hopping at the mBCU. On the uplink side,the channel coders receive equalized GSM air interface frames from the DPC via theFEP (through the quad-port RAM interface). After decoding, uplink TRAU frames areprovided to the TDM via the SCI port.

The channel coding functionality of the TSM board is built around a block of eight (onefor each GSM air interface timeslot) Motorola 56002 DSP processors running at 66 MHz.Each processor has 128K of 24 bit wide SRAM memory used for program and datastorage, as well as hardware-limited access to a portion of a common 2K x 8 quad-portRAM (QPR). The QPR is used to store encoded pre-baseband hopped data, as well asequalized GSM air interface frames. SCI, SSI, and Host interfaces are used tocommunicate to various other TSM functional blocks.

Time division multiplexed (TDM) interface

The TDM function provides an interface between the 32 timeslot redundant 2.048 Mbit/slink from the mBCU to the RSS, FEP, and CCDSP functions. Optical reception andtransmission as well as Manchester encoding/ decoding are handled for both redundantlinks on the DPC. The TDM block provides synchronization to the selected primary linkfrom the mBCU. The data on each link is recovered on a timeslot basis and forwarded tothe appropriate processing function. Master GSM timing synchronization is alsorecovered and distributed. The downlink information (mBCU to TCU) includes thefollowing:

S Downlink TRAU frames to the CCDSPs.

S Post baseband hopped encoded data to the FEP.

S Superframe and 60 msec timing information.

S 64 kbit HDLC channel to RSS with additional timeslots for future use.

The transmit or uplink side of the TDM interface provides a data link path back to themBCU. Here, the TDM function receives data from the processing functions andtransmits the data back uplink synchronous with the selected primary link. The downlinkinformation (TCU to mBCU) includes the following:

S Uplink TRAU frames from the CCDSPs.

S Pre baseband hopped data encoded data from the CCDSPs.

S Baseboard hopping routeing word from the FOP.

S 64 Cbi HDLC channel from RSS with additional timeslots for future use.

The TDM interface consists of two Altera FLEX8820 field programmable gate arrays(FPGAs). The devices are programmed on power up. The TDM block interfaces withthe FEP and CCDSP blocks through a 2k x 8 Quad Port RAM. The TDM interface alsoprovides a SCI link to the CCDSP blocks for transfer of TRAU data and a HDLC link tothe RSS. Other signals provided include baseband hopping/EQ interrupts to theCCDSPs and GSM timing interrupts.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–87

Transmitterdetails

The transmitter section of the TCU is divided into three boards as follows:

S Transmitter board.

S Control driver board.

S Power amplifier board.

Details of these three boards follow:

Transmitterboard

1st and 2nd IF stages

The modulator non return to zero (NRZ) data input signal (eight timeslot channels) fromthe DPC is applied to the transmitter board. This NRZ data signal is encoded, serial toparallel converted, Gaussian filtered into a digital representation, and then D/Aconverted into a gaussian minimum shift keyed (GMSK) modulated carrier at a 1st IF of7.0 MHz. This 7.0 MHz IF signal is up converted with a high side injection of 182.0 MHzto a full GMSK modulated carrier at a 2nd IF of 175 MHz.

1st and 2nd If stages block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the input signal to 1st and 2nd IF stages:

DIVIDEBY 2

OSCILLATOR

D/ACONVERTER

LOWPASS

FILTER

AMPLIFIER

PARALLELCONVERTOR

GAUSSIAN

FILTER

SERIALDATA

SERIAL to

COUNTER

MODULATOR

ENCODER

FRACTIONAL

(NRZ) DATA

MOD CLK

CARRIER ENABLE

86.6MHz MIXERINPUT

4-BITCOUNTER

TIMING

CONTROL

16 x clk

RESET

TO Tx RAMPINUPCONVERTER174 MHz

1st IF

2nd IF



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Ramping control and transmit frequency stages

The full GMSK modulated 175 MHz 2nd IF is filtered and applied to the input of a Gilbertcell linear amplitude modulator for the purpose of transmitter ramping control. The outputof the Gilbert cell is then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is upconverted tothe final transmit channel frequency which is in the range of 925 to 960 MHz.

Diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the 2nd IF signal to ramping control and finaltransmit frequency stages:

LOWPASSFILTER

FREQUENCYDOUBLER

HIGHPASSFILTER

AMPLIFIER

LOWPASSFILTER BANDPASS

SAW

FILTER

UPCONVERSION

MIXER

POWER DETECTOR

855 to 890 MHz INPUT

FROM2nd IFSTAGE

SAWBANDPASS

FILTER

AMPLIFIER

925 MHz TO 960 MHzOUTPUT TO

ATTENUATORS

Attenuator and exciter path

This low level modulated carrier signal is then applied to a combination of analogue anddigital attenuators for the purposes of RF power control. The analogue ramp voltage andpower control voltage are provided by the DPC. Digital attenuator information is providedby the DPC over a serial link. The output of the power control elements is furtheramplified by an exciter chain to a maximum output of +5 dBm.

Final transmit frequency block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the final transmit frequency to the attenuator andexciter chain stages:

FROMTRANSMIT

FREQUENCYSTAGE

BANDPASSFILTER

AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER

KEYINGCONTROLLED

BANDPASSFILTER

AMPLIFIERVOLTAGE

CONTROLLEDATTENUATORS

AMPLIFIER

ATTENUATORDRIVER

TRANSMIT ALARM

POWERDETECTOR

ALARMSENSOR

KEYINGCONTROL

TOCONTROLDRIVERBOARD

POWERCONTROL

TRANSMITKEY



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–89

Control driverboard

The control driver board provides RF power amplification between the transmitter boardoutput and the input of the output stage. It provides power regulation and signalbuffering, acting as an interface between the power amplifier section and other parts ofthe radio. The RF forward power detection is also included on this board.

Control driver block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the control driver board:

POWERREGULATION

ANDBUFFER

OUTPUTTO

POWER AMPLIFIER

FROMTRANSMITTER

BOARD

FORWARDPOWER

DATA

REVERSEPOWER

DETECTIONTO

DPC

POWERAMPLIFIER

Power amplifierboard

The power amplifier board amplifies the intermediate level modulated carrier signal inputto a final RF power output level. The power amplifier also contains a forward powerdetector, an isolator and a reverse power detector. The detected output from the twopower detectors is applied, via the control driver board to the DPC. Based on thesedetected signals the DPC determines the setting for the final TCU RF power output level.The DPC then sends a signal to the gain control elements of the transmitter to set thecorresponding RF power level.

The maximum output power available at the EGSM900 TCU transmitter RF power outputconnector is 54.3 watts (47.35 dBm) +/– 0.5 dBm.

The maximum output power available at the DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU transmitter RFpower output connector is 25.1 watts (44.0 dBm) +/– 1 dBm.

The maximum output power available at the high powered DCS1800 TCU transmitter RFpower output connector is 50.1 watts (47.0 dBm) +/– 1.0 dBm.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the power amplifier board:

CARRIERMODULATED RF PUTPUT

REVERSE

DETECTORPOWER

DETECTOR

LOAD

POWER

POWER

FORWARD

DETECTOR

POWER

CLASS ABAMPLIFIER

AMPLIFIER

CIRCULATORCIRCULATOR

DETECTOR

FINAL

REVERSE

ISOLATOR

FORWARD

2-STAGE

LOAD

925 to 960 MHz

GSM-100-323 External equipment cabinet or rack


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–91

External equipment cabinet or rack

Introduction

An external equipment cabinet or rack can be used to accommodate RF equipment thatis too bulky to fit into the BTS cabinet itself. It is normally positioned next to the BTScabinet.

The following equipment can be installed in an external equipment cabinet or rack:

S Duplexer.

S Quadraplexer.

S Receiver multicoupler with multicoupler extender.

These items are described in the sections that follow in this chapter.

GSM-100-323Duplexer


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Duplexer

Overview

The duplexer allows the transmit and receive signals to share the same antenna.

It consists of two bandpass filters, one for Tx and one for Rx.

Diagram

The diagram shows the duplexer:

ANTENNA

Rx

RxBPF

TxBPF

Tx1

GSM-100-323 Quadraplexer


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–93

Quadraplexer

Overview

The quadraplexer allows separate TACS, ETACS, and GSM transmit and receive signalsto share the same antenna. The quadraplexer is fitted in an external equipment cabinetor rack.

It consists of four bandpass filters, one for each of the following frequency bands:

S ETACS (Tx 1, 925.0–935.0 MHz).

S TACS (Tx 2, 939.5–950.0 MHz).

S GSM (Tx 3, 955.0–960.0 MHz).

S Receive (Rx, 880.0–915.0 MHz).

Up to three quadraplexers can be mounted in one tray of an external equipmentcabinet/frame.

Diagram

The diagram shows the quadraplexer:

RxBPF

Tx 1BPF

ANTENNA

Rx

Tx1 Tx2 Tx3

Tx 2BPF

Tx 3BPF

GSM-100-323Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender

Overview

The receiver multicoupler with a multicoupler extender allows the same receive antennasignals to be distributed to multiple BTS cabinets.

The multicoupler extender must be connected between the receiver multicoupler outputsand the BTS cabinet antenna inputs to provide the necessary receive attenuation (6 to 8dB depending on the type of extender used).

The receiver multicoupler contains six preselector modules and six 6-way splittermodules. Six receive antenna signals, each connected to a receiver multicoupler input,are filtered and amplified by the preselector module and split six ways to provide sixoutput signals for each receive antenna input (a total of 36 receive outputs).

The receiver multicoupler preselector modules have a 35 MHz bandpass and operate inthe TACS, ETACS and GSM receive frequency bands.

Receivermulticoupler

The receiver multicoupler:

36 Rx OUTPUTS (6 PER ANTENNA)

SIX, 62WAYSPLITTERS

SIX,PRESELECTORS

RxANTENNA 1

ANTENNA 1ANTENNA 2ANTENNA 3ANTENNA 4ANTENNA 5ANTENNA 6






RxANTENNA 2

RxANTENNA 3

RxANTENNA 4

RxANTENNA 5

RxANTENNA 6

GSM-100-323 Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–95

Largemulticouplerextender

The large multicoupler extender takes six receive antenna signal outputs from thereceiver multicoupler and splits each signal four ways, providing a total of 24 outputs.The signal strength is the same at each multicoupler extender output.

The following configurations are possible:

S One set of six outputs, each output having a different receive antenna signal, fromthe receiver multicoupler are connected to the inputs of the large multicouplerextender. The large multicoupler extender provides four sets of six outputs havingdifferent receive antenna signals. It is also possible to connect the other five setsof six outputs, each with different receive antenna signals, from the receivermulticoupler to the inputs of five additional large multicoupler extenders. Thisprovides an additional 20 sets of six outputs with different receive antenna signals,for a total of 24 sets of six outputs with different receive antenna signals.

S Six outputs, having the same receive antenna signal, from the receivermulticoupler are connected to the inputs of the large multicoupler extender. Thelarge multicoupler extender provides 24 outputs having the same receive antennasignal. It is also possible to connect the other five sets of outputs, each set havingthe same receive antenna signal, from the receiver multicoupler, to the inputs offive additional large multicoupler extenders. This provides an additional five sets of24 outputs, each set having the same receive antenna signal, for a total of six setsof 24 outputs with the same receive antenna signal.

Multicouplerextender

The multicoupler extender:

24 Rx OUTPUTS (4 PER INPUT)

SIX,4−WAY

SPLITTERS


RxANTENNA 2




RxANTENNA 6

RxANTENNA 1

RxANTENNA 5

RxANTENNA 4

RxANTENNA 3



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Distributedmulticouplerextender

Three 2-way splitters are combined in a cascade manner. One receive antenna outputsignal, from the receiver multicoupler, is connected to the input of the splitter combinationwhich provides four outputs having the same receive antenna signal. Each output isapproximately 6 dB less than the receive signal connected to the input of the splittercombination.

The distributed multicoupler extender configuration can consist of up to six of thesesplitter combinations (18 splitters total). The exact number of splitter combinations useddepends on antenna signal to BTS cabinet distribution requirements.

A distributed multicoupler extender configuration consisting of six of these splittercombinations (18 splitters total) can be configured to provide the same receive antennasignal distribution as the large multicoupler extender.

Distributedmulticouplerextender

The following shows a distributed multicoupler extender:

THREE 22WAY SPLITTERS(3 dB SIGNAL LOSS

THROUGH EACH SPLITTER)

4 Rx OUTPUTS

RECEIVEANTENNAINPUT

2-way (6dB)splitter

One receive antenna output signal, from the receiver multicoupler, is connected to theinput of a 2-way splitter which provides two outputs having the same receive antennasignal. Each output is approximately 6 dB less than the receive signal connected to theinput of the splitter.

The 2-way splitter multicoupler extender configuration can consist of up to 36 of thesesplitters (one for each multicoupler output). The exact number of splitters used dependson antenna signal to BTS cabinet distribution requirements.

6 dB attenuator

One receive antenna output signal, from the receiver multicoupler, is connected througha 6 dB attenuator to a BTS cabinet receive antenna input. The BTS cabinet receiveantenna input is approximately 6 dB less than the receive signal from the receivermulticoupler output.

The exact number of attenuators used depends on antenna signal to BTS cabinetdistribution requirements.

GSM-100-323 Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

2–97

Receiverextender

A receiver extender allows one receive antenna signal to be shared between two BTScabinets. The receive antenna is connected to the RFE shelf in the standardconfiguration. The receive antenna output signal, from an unused 6-way splitter output,is routed via a receiver extender cable and a 6 db attenuator to the interconnect panel. Asecond cable (part of receiver extender kit) routes the receive signal to the interconnectpanel of a second BTS cabinet.

One receiver extender is required for each antenna to be shared between two BTScabinets. Two receiver extenders are required for diversity operation. A maximum ofthree receive antennas can be shared between two BTS cabinets.

Diagram

The diagram shows a receiver extender:

RxANTENNA

62WAYSPLITTER

PRESELECTOR

6 dbATTENUATOR

62WAYSPLITTER

PRESELECTOR



GMR-0168P02901W03-A


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 3

Digital modules

GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

iii










GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A





GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

v






GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A








68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–1

Overview

Introduction

This chapter describes the digital modules used in BTS equipment cabinets.

The digital modules fit into the base station unit (BSU) shelf.

In this chapter

All information given is valid for GSM, EGSM and DCS1800 systems unless otherwiseindicated.

GSM-100-323BSU and RXU shelf diagrams


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BSU and RXU shelf diagrams

Introduction

This section contains BSU and RXU shelf module assignments and associatedinformation. Subsequent sections in this chapter describe each module.

BSU shelf

The diagram shows the BSU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:

BTC

0

BTC

1

XCDR 1

GPROC 6

GPROC 7

DRI(M

) 2

DRI(M

) 3

DRI(M

) 1

DRIX 2

DRIX 4

DRIX 0

DRIX 1

KSW/TSW A

GCLK

B

GCLK

A

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

PIX 0

DRI(M

) 4

DRIX 3

KSW/TSW B

GPROC 5

XCDR 0

RMT

KSWX A

4

RMT

KSWX A

3

RMT

KSWX A

2

RMT

KSWX A

1

RMT

KSWX A

0

KSWX A

2

KSWX A

1

KSWX A

0

EXP

EXP

EXP

LANX A

LANX B

KSWX B

0

KSWX B

1

EXP

EXP

KSWX B

2EXP

RMTKSWX B

0

RMTKSWX B

1

RMTKSWX B

2

spare

GPROC 3

GPROC 4

GPROC 2

GPROC 1

GPROC 0

MSI 0

MSI 1

MSI 2

MSI 3

XCDR 2

XCDR 3

MSI 4

XCDR 4

MSI 5

XCDR 5

MSI 6

XCDR 6

MSI 7

XCDR 7

MSI 8

XCDR 8

MSI 9

XCDR 9

DRI(M

) 0

MSI 10

XCDR 10

MSI 11

XCDR 11

CLK

X B

0

CLK

X B

1

CLK

X A

0

CLK

X A

1

CLK

X A

2

CLK

X B

2

RMTKSWX B

3

RMTKSWX B

4

KSWX A

KSWX B

LCL

LCL

U0U1U2U3U4U5U6U7U8U9U10U11U12U13U14U15U16U17U18U19U20U21U22U23U24U25U26U27U28

L0L1L3L5L6L7L8L9L10L11L12L13L14L15L16L17L18L19L20L21L22L23L24L25L26L27L28

KS0 KS1AI0

AI1

AI2MS0 GK0

DR5 DR4 DR3 DR2 DR1 DR0

MS1 MS2 MS3

PIX 1


SPA

RE


SPA

RE

BSU Module slots

S Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.

S Half size modules are fitted in the upper row.

S Full size modules are fitted in the lower row.

S Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes:

– Slot L20 GPROC.

S All unused full size slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.

GSM-100-323 BSU and RXU shelf diagrams


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–3

BSU backplane connectors

S AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.

S AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the backup supply (BBBX).

S KS0 and KS1 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports forKSW/TSW boards.

S DR0 to DR5 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports forDRI/MSI boards.

S GK0 is a 9-pin D-type and provides a GCLK synchronization input.

S MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 circuits.

RXU shelf

The diagram shows the RXU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:

BTC

0

BTC

1

XCDR 1

KSW A

GCLK

B

GCLK

A

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

PIX 0

KSW B

XCDR 0

RMT

KSWX A

4

RMT

KSWX A

3

RMT

KSWX A

2

RMT

KSWX A

1

RMT

KSWX A

0

KSWX A

2

KSWX A

1

KSWX A

0

EXP

EXP

EXP

LANX A

LANX B

KSWX B

0

KSWX B

1

EXP

EXP

KSWX B

2EXP

RMTKSWX B

0

RMTKSWX B

1

RMTKSWX B

2

GPROC 1

GPROC 0

MSI 0

MSI 1

MSI 2

MSI 3

XCDR 2

XCDR 3

MSI 4

XCDR 4

XCDR 5

XCDR 6

XCDR 7

XCDR 8

XCDR 9

XCDR 10

XCDR 11

CLK

X B

0

CLK

X B

1

CLK

X A

0

CLK

X A

1

CLK

X A

2

CLK

X B

2

RMTKSWX B

3

RMTKSWX B

4

KSWX A

KSWX B

LCL

LCL

U0U1U2U3U4U5U6U7U8U9U10U11U12U13U14U15U16U17U18U19U20U21U22U23U24U25U26U27U28

L0L1L3L5L6L7L8L9L10L11L12L13L14L15L16L17L18L19L20L21L22L23L24L25L26L27L28

KS0AI0

AI1 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3

PIX 1

AI2


SPA

RE

XCDR 12

XCDR 13

XCDR 14

XCDR 15

XCDR 16

XCDR 17

XCDR 18

KS1


SPA

RE

GSM-100-323BSU and RXU shelf diagrams


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RXU module slots

S Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.

S Half size modules are fitted in the upper row.

S Full size modules are fitted in the lower row.

S Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes.

– Slot L25 GPROC.

S All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.

Backplane connectors.

S AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.

S AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the backup supply (BBBX).

S KS0 and KS1 provide TTY access to serial ports for KSWs/TSWs.

S MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 lines.

GSM-100-323 Module front panels


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–5

Module front panels

Introduction

This section is a quick reference guide to the status indicators and switches on the frontpanels of the digital modules in BSU and RXU shelves. Subsequent sections in thischapter describe each module. The reset switch on a module will not return a Disabled orLocked module to service. If the module was B–U or E–U before the module was resetthen it will return to an inservice state either Busy or Enabled. Once a module is lockeddisabling the module will have no effect on the status of the module as displayed viaMMI, disabling a module results in isolating the module from the cage. Modules not listedbelow have no status indicators or front panel switches.

Module Status indicators Front panel switchesDRI(M) Green LED flashing = Waiting for code download

Green LED on only = FEP running, no alarmsRed LED on only = FEP halted or in resetBoth LEDs on = FEP running, TDM clock and

ref alarm or serial link failureBoth LEDs off = No power to board

Toggle switch (three position)

Up (momentary) = Reset board, download codeMiddle = normal operationDown = disable board for extraction

GCLK Green LED on only = Master, no alarmsRed LED on only = Alarms, not MasterBoth LEDs on = Master and alarmsBoth LEDs off = Not Master, no alarms

(or no power)(alarms: oscillator or PLL failure, ref. counter overflow)


Up (momentary) = Reset boardMiddle = normal operationDown = disable board for extraction

Potentiometer = adjustment for the VCXO**

GPROC Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarmsRed LED on only = Processor halted or in resetBoth LEDs on = Processor running, board is

disabled or other alarmBoth LEDs off = No power to boardBoth LEDs flashing = Bootstrap reprogram in

progress



KSW andTSW

Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarmsRed LED on only = Processor halted or in resetBoth LEDs on = Processor running, board is

disabled or other alarmBoth LEDs off = No power to board



MSI Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarmsRed LED on only = Processor halted or in resetBoth LEDs on = Processor running, board is




XCDRand GDP

Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarmsRed LED on only = Processor halted or in resetBoth LEDs on = Processor running, board is




KSWX Green LED on = Master, no alarmsGreen LED blinking = Slave, no alarmsGreen LED off = TDM bus or Clock alarms

(or no power)



LANX None Rotary switch (16 position)

For setting shelf ID number

PIX Green LED on = No alarmsGreen LED off = Customer alarm detected

None

GSM-100-323Full size modules


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Full size modules

Introduction

Full size modules fit into slots in the lower card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slotsare numbered, right to left, from L0 to L28.

The following sections describe the full size modules that can be mounted in a BSU orRXU.

The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.

The modules

The following full size modules are described:

S Bus terminator card (BTC).

S Digital radio interface extended memory (DRIM).

S Generic clock (GCLK).

S Generic processor (GPROC).

S Kiloport switch (KSW).

S Multiple serial interface (MSI).

S Timeslot switch (TSW).

S Transcoder (XCDR).

GSM-100-323 BTC


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–7

BTC

Purpose

The bus termination card (BTC) terminates the backplane to keep signals on a BSU orRXU shelf at the proper TTL level.

The BTC terminates:

S Both MCAP buses.

S Both BSS serial buses.

S Both reference clocks.

S All TDM buses (Expansion, Remote and Local).

Requirements

Two BTC modules must be fitted in each BSU or RXU shelf, in slot L0 and slot L28, at alltimes.

While a faulty BTC is being replaced, another BTC must be fitted in a KSW slot tomaintain the above requirement.

BTC module

The diagram shows a BTC module:

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

GSM-100-323DRIM


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRIM

Purpose

The digital radio interface (extended memory) is the interface between the TDM highwayand the DRCU, via the DRIX.

Downlink (Tx) data input from the KSW or TSW is encoded onto the correct channel(GSM timeslot). Encoded downlink data is output to the DRCU via the DRIX.

Uplink (Rx) data is received from the DRCU (via the DRIX), decoded and output to theKSW or TSW.

Requirements

DRIM modules are fitted in slots L7, L9, L11, L13, and L15.

DRIM module

The diagram shows a DRIM module:

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

(NORMALLY OFF)

(MASTER = ON)

RESET/DISABLE SWITCHUP (MOMENTARY) = RESETMIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATIONDOWN = DISABLE

Brief description

The DRIM module provides the logical interface between the (diversity) radio channelunit (DRCU) and the TDM bus. The digital radio interface extender (DRIX3) module, ahalf-size module described later in this chapter, is the physical interface between theDRIM and DRCU.

One DRIM, DRIX3, and DRCU function together to form the air interface for eight GSMlogical traffic channels or timeslots. The DRIM also handles logical to physical channelmapping, interleaving and de-interleaving, channel encoding and decoding, and downlinkbaseband hopping (BBH).

GSM-100-323 DRIM


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–9


Refer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section.

Downlink

Downlink traffic data from the KSW or TSW is received at the TDM interface via the TDMoutbound highway, and routed to one of eight channel coder blocks by the front endprocessor (FEP). The channel coders encode the speech data (using either cyclic orconvoluting code) and insert signalling messages in accordance with GSMrecommendations.

The coded traffic data and signalling messages are routed to the high level data linkcontroller (HDLC). Downlink control messages generated by the FEP are routed to theHDLC. The HDLC multiplexes DRCU control information (generated by the FEP) withcoded downlink traffic data and downlink control messages (generated by the channelcoders). This multiplexed data is then Manchester encoded and sent serially to theDRIX3.

Uplink

Uplink traffic and control messages from the DRCU come to the DRIM via the DRIX3,and are passed on to the Manchester decoder where it is decoded and sent to theHDLC. The HDLC demultiplexes the incoming data into uplink traffic and controlinformation. The control information is sent to the FEP for processing or relaying to theGPROC via the MCAP bus.

The uplink traffic is routed to the eight channel coders where it is de-interleaved,de-encrypted, and decoded into TDM-compatible data. This data is routed to the TDMbus via the TDM interface for delivery to the KSW/TSW.

Baseband hopping

When BBH is implemented, the FEP calculates the hopping sequence for the DRIM. Thecalculated frequency is converted to a corresponding TDM timeslot, which is passed tothe TDM interface to program the TDM timeslot assignment for every GSM frame. Due tothe differences between GSM and TDM timing, BBH data is evenly distributed over fourTDM timeslots.

The TDM timeslots containing the BBH downlink traffic data are routed to the same ordifferent DRIMs depending on the calculated frequency for that particular downlink trafficdata. When BBH data arrives at the proper DRIM (this could be the same DRIM that sentthe BBH data), another five TDM timeslots are used to receive the BBH data and route itto the FEP. The FEP then routes that BBH data to the HDLC.

ArchitectureRefer to the diagram of the DRIM whilst reading this description.

Front end processor

The FEP performs all control functions, and monitors all DRIM operations and off-boardcommunications, via the MCAP bus.

The FEP:

S Handles the transfer of traffic data between the TDM interface and the eightchannel coder blocks.

S Acts as a bus arbiter for the eight channel coder blocks, as traffic data istransferred between the channel coders and the HDLC.

S Provides TDM timeslot counter updates, downlink baseband hopping calculations,and watchdog timer functions.

GSM-100-323DRIM


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

TDM interface

The TDM interface connects the TDM switchbound highway and the TDM outboundhighway with the downlink and uplink GSM traffic data.

Since all eight channel coders are connected to the TDM interface, the TDM controlleracts as an arbiter between the channel coders.

There are several buffers in series with the TDM interface; they are needed due to timingdifferences between the TDM bus and the channel coders.

Channel coders

Each channel coder is based on a Motorola MC56001 DSP, and has 128 x 24 kbytes offast SRAM associated with it.

Each channel coder operates independently to perform:

S Channel encoding and decoding.

S Interleaving and de-interleaving.

S Speech transcoding.

S Logical to physical mapping of downlink traffic and control messages.

S Physical to logical mapping of uplink traffic data and control messages.

High level data link controller (HDLC)

For downlink data, the HDLC formats data from the channel coders and the downlinkcontrol information from the FEP. For the uplink information the HDLC unpacksequalized data from the DRCU to route downlink traffic to the channel coders and controlinformation to the FEP. The serial data sent to the DRIX3 is sent at 2.048 Mbit/s. Due toManchester encoding the actual bit rate on the serial link is 4.096 Mbit/s.

Synchronization

In order to keep the DRCU and the DRIM synchronized, a synchronization generatortransmits sync information to the DRCU during GSM idle frames. Downlink data from thesynchronization generator is routed through the HDLC. The synchronized information isadded to the downlink data after the HDLC process. In addition to synchronizedinformation the synchronization generator routes DRCU sleep and DRCU wakeupcommands from the GPROC to the DRCU.

Timing reference logic delivers clock and reference signals to both TDM and GSMcounters. The DRIM is the interface between the GSM format and the TDM bus, so twodifferent counter sections are required.

The TDM counters are used to by the TDM controller to search for the timeslot windowsfor sourcing and receiving data to/from the TDM bus. The TDM counters are also usedby the FEP for timing reference when performing baseband hopping calculations. TheGSM counters consists of the GSM timeslot counter and the GSM superframe counter.

Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus

The MCAP interface logic provides communications between the GPROC and the DRIM.The information can be routed to the FEP, channel coders, or passed to the DRCU. TheMCAP bus is also used to download operating software for the DRIM after power upinitialization.

GSM-100-323 DRIM


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–11

Serial interfaces

The serial interface logic supports two ports. One is the TTY interface which is connectedto dedicated backplane pins. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be usedto control the DRIM, monitor operations of the FEP and channel coders, and supportDRIM diagnostics.

The second port is the Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI). The use of this interface issoftware dependent.

Watchdog timer

The purpose of the watchdog timer is to ensure that the FEP is functioning normally. TheFEP writes to a special memory address which resets the watchdog timer assuring that itdoes not time out. The FEP in turn monitors the processors in each of the channel coderblocks. If the FEP or any channel coder stops running, the watchdog timer times out andcauses the red LED on the front panel to illuminate. An interrupt is generated and sent tothe GPROC via the MCAP bus.

Direct memory access

The FEP direct memory access (DMA) is used to transfer data for the FEP. Downlinkpost-hopped data from the TDM bus is transferred to the FEP via the DMA. Uplink datais transferred from the FEP to the proper channel coder block via the DMA.

Interrupt registers

The FEP interrupt registers are required so that a device can request attention from theFEP. The channel coders interrupt requests are ORd together and the FEP must checka separate interrupt register to see which channel coder block needs service.

The HDLC generates an interrupt request when the HDLC needs to transfer data to theFEP from the DRCU. Other interrupts are generated when a device has failed, so theFEP can take corrective actions and report failures to the GPROC.

GSM-100-323DRIM


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Block diagram

The following is a functional block diagram of the DRIM module:

TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY A

TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY A

TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY B

TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY B

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

HDLC

SERIAL DATA IN

SERIAL DATA OUT

CLOCKRECOVERY

TDMINTERFACE

TDMCONTROLLER

MODULE TYPEREVISION REGISTER

}TO/FROMDRCUVIA DRIX

MC56001

27 MHzWATCHDOGTIMER

INTERRUPTLOGIC

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

REDLED

GREENLED

SERIAL INTERFACELOGIC

TTY INTERFACE

TIMINGREFERENCELOGIC

MCAP BUS A

MCAP BUS B

MCAP BUSINTERFACELOGIC

52

52 }2 FOR REDUNDANCY

A CLOCK & REFERENCE CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us, 60 ms, AND 6.12 s)

B CLOCK & REFERENCE CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us, 60 ms, AND 6.12 s)

TDMCOUNTERS

GSMCOUNTERS

DISTR

IBUTION TO

MC56001

CHANNEL CODER BLOCK 1

SRAM

MC56001


SRAM

MC56001


SRAM

MC56001


SRAM

OTH

ER DRI C

IRCUITRY

FEP

MANCHESTERDECODER

MANCHESTERENCODER

SYNCGEN.

FEPDMA

FEP INTERRUPTREGISTER

DRCUDATA READYREGISTER

TDMBUFFER

TDMBUFFER

FEP ADDRESS/DAT

A BUS

GSM-100-323 GCLK


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–13

GCLK

Purpose

The generic clock (GCLK) module generates all the timing reference signals that theBSU or RXU requires. The master TDM clock is normally synthesized from a 16.384MHz ±0.05 ppm stable reference (temperature stabilized crystal oscillator) and a2.048 MHz or 1.544 MHz clock recovered from one of the E1 or T1 lines.

Requirements

The GCLK module fits in slots L3 and L5 in the BSU and RXU shelf assemblies. Themodule is two slots wide and covers L2/L3 and L4/L5.

For initialization purposes, assuming there are no local KSWXs fitted, there must be aGCLK module in one of the GCLK slots of all available BSU and RXU shelf assemblies.

A second GCLK module in the other slot provides n + 1 redundancy.

Mutually redundant GCLKs must reside in the same BSU or RXU.

GCLK module

The diagram shows a GCLK module:

E1/T1 In

16.384 MHz OUT

6.12 S OUT

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

125uS OUTGROUND

FREQUENCY ADJUST

60mS OUTTESTPORTS


(NORMALLY OFF)

(MASTER = ON)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

LATER VERSIONS OF THE GCLK DONOT HAVE THE 6.12 S, 60mS AND4.24uS OUTPUTS ON THE FRONTPANEL

GSM-100-323GCLK


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Brief descriptionRefer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section.

The GCLK module generates all timing reference signals required by the BSS:

S 16.384 MHz TDM clock.

S 125 ms frame reference.

S 60 ms synchronization reference.

S 6.12 s superframe reference.

The GCLK is phase-locked to the recovered clock of a selected E1/T1 line from an MSIor XCDR module. If the recovered clock signal is lost, and no long term average (LTA) isavailable upon which to synchronize, then the GCLK free-runs, providing referencestability better than 0.05 ppm. The module incorporates self-diagnostics to detect andisolate board faults and to select a redundant board in the event of module failure.

When a redundant GCLK is present, the GCLKs operate in a master/slave configurationwith the slaved outputs synchronized to the master. If an error is detected, the clockcontrol circuit reverses the master/slave status of the two GCLKs. Fault status isreported to the main processor via the MCAP bus.

Referenceoscillator

The reference oscillator uses a phase lock loop (PLL) and a frequency multiplier tosynthesize 16.384 MHz from a E1/T1 line. The PLL consists of:

S A digital phase detector.

S A loop filter.

S A voltage controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO).

S A divide by eight loop divider.

If a fault is detected on the signal from both E1/T1 lines, the oscillator either uses the LTA(if available) or free runs with stability being maintained by the VCXO.

Referencedividers

The 125 ms, 60 ms, and 6.12 s reference dividers consist of cascaded programmablebinary counters to divide the input signal to the correct output frequency. The referencedividers are synchronized to the master clock. The output of each reference counter isrouted to a multiplexer, which is used to switch the reference output from the master orthe slave GCLK. The output of each reference counter is also routed to the referenceencoder.

Referenceencoders

The reference encoder encodes the reference signals together while maintaining phaserelationships. The encoded clock signals are routed via the backplane to a CLKX to betransmitted to other shelves at the site, via fibre optic cables.

Reference faildetect

The reference fail detect circuit monitors the signal on the two E1/T1 lines. Failures arereported to the clock control/alarm logic. In the event of a reference failure, the GCLKeither uses the LTA (if available) or selects the secondary E1/T1 line reference. In eithercase an alarm is reported to the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus.

GSM-100-323 GCLK


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–15

Clockcontrol/alarmlogic

The clock control/alarm logic determines the GCLK master/slave status based on modulefaults and GPROC commands, and reports the operational status to the GPROC.

Buffered testports

Buffered test ports are supplied on the front of the GCLK module for test andmeasurement of the input reference signal and output clock and reference signals. Thetest jacks are recessed.

GSM-100-323GCLK


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GCLK diagram

The following is a block diagram of the GCLK module:

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

ENCODED CLK IN

6.12 s REF FROM MATE GCLK60 ms REF FROM MATE GCLK

125 us REF FROM MATE GCLK

16.384 MHz CLK FROM MATE GCLK

ENCODED CLK TO CLKX

ENCODED CLK TO MATE GCLK

REFERENCEOSCILLATOR

REFERENCEENCODER

125 usREFERENCE

COUNTER

60 msREFERENCE

COUNTER

6.12 sREFERENCE

COUNTER

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

MUX

MASTER/SLAVE

OUTPUT ENABLECLOCK CONTROL /

ALARM LOGIC

REFERENCEFAIL

DETECT

6.12 s REF TO BACKPLANE

6.12 s REF TO MATE GCLK

60 ms REF TO BACKPLANE

60 ms REF TO MATE GCLK

125 us REF TO BACKPLANE

125 us REF TO MATE GCLK

16.384 MHz CLK TO BACKPLANE

16.384 MHz TO MATE GCLK

RED LED

GREEN LED

E1/T1 CLOCK REF A

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

TEST CONNECTOR

TEST CONNECTOR

TEST CONNECTOR

TEST CONNECTOR

MCAPINTERFACE

MCAP BUS A

MCAP BUS B

TEST CONNECTOR

125 us OUT

60 ms OUT

6.12 s OUT

16.384 MHz OUT

E1/T1 IN

E1/T1 CLOCK REF B

MASTER/SLAVE

CONTROL

CLOCKFAILUREDETECT


GSM-100-323 GPROC


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–17

GPROC

Purpose

The generic processor (GPROC) module provides the processing power to control aBTS.

GPROCs in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling via several links:

S A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in severalshelves via fibre optic cable.

S A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends theprocessor’s address, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the sameshelf.

S A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROCs andhalf-size modules. This serial bus extends to the PDU.

S The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.

Requirements

The GPROC module fits into:

S Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.

S Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.

Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC.

A GPROC must be fitted in slot L20 of BSU 0, and slot L25 of RXU 0, for use ininitialization.

GPROC module

The diagram shows a GPROC module.

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

TTY CONNECTORRESET/DISABLE SWITCHUP (MOMENTARY) = RESETMIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATIONDOWN = DISABLE

(NORMALLY OFF)

GREEN LED ON, RED LED OFF =PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES

GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON =PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET

BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSORRUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLEDOR OTHER ALARM

(THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TESTPORT ALLOWS CONTROL OFTROUBLESHOOTING ANDDIAGNOSTICS.)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

(NORMALLY ON)

GSM-100-323GPROC


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Brief description

Refer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section.

The GPROC module contains:

S A Motorola MC68030 16-bit processor operating at 25 MHz.

S The LAN processor, which is the interface between the GPROC and the token ringLAN.

S The COMM processor which, in conjunction with the TDM interface controller, isthe interface between the GPROC and the TDM highway.

Communication

The GPROC communicates with other full size modules via the MCAP bus, and with halfsize modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus. There aretwo other serial ports which are not currently used.

The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speedprivate bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68030 address/databus and the high-speed private bus.

The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives inputsignals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain:

S Shelf ID.

S Slot ID.

S Backplane type.

S Backplane revision level.

Memory

The GPROC module is equipped with 16 Mbytes of DRAM. There is also 512 kbytes ofEPROM (expandable to 1 Mbyte). The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.

Troubleshootingand diagnostics

A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personalcomputer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controllingsoftware when performing maintenance or troubleshooting.

The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and CCITT V.24specifications.

The GPROC runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on commandfrom the maintenance TTY.

Software

Every GPROC is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the softwareloaded into it.

The processor functions for BTS and BSC applications are different from those for anRXCDR application and are described separately in the following sections.

GSM-100-323 GPROC


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–19

BTS and BSCGPROCfunctions

The GPROC performs the following processor functions:

S Fault Manager (FM).

S Configuration Manager (CM).

S Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).

S Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).

S Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).

S Cell Resource Machine (CRM).

S Switch Manager (SM).

S Connectionless Manager (CLM).

S Radio Subsystem (RSS).

S Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).

S Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.

GPROC task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the softwareloaded into a given GPROC.

When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC, it is considered to be a unique GPROCdevice type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor (CSFP), which isnot considered to be a unique device type.

The table shows the device types and task groups:

GPROC device BSCtask groups

BTStask groups

BSC/BTSinterface

Type 0 Base Site ControlProcessor (BSP)

Base TransceiverProcessor (BTP)

Motorolaproprietary

Type1 Base Site ControlProcessor (BSP)

Link ControlProcessor (LCP)


Digital Radio HostProcessor (DHP)

Motorolaproprietary



Operations andMaintenanceProcessor (OMP)



Radio System LinkProcessor (RSLP)

Motorolaproprietary

NOTEA code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.

GSM-100-323GPROC


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RXCDR GPROCfunctions

The RXCDR GPROC processor functions are similar to the BSC and BTS GPROCs andcomprise:




These processor functions:

S Maintain the switch database for the KSWs and TSWs.

S Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.

S Initialize the RXCDR network element.

S Maintain the configuration database.

S Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.

S Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link.

S Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).

S Communicate with collocated digital modules.

S Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.

S Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs,KSWs, and XCDRs.

Fault manager

The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoderBSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.

Switch manager

The SM:

S Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS)and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.

S Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.

S Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC and BTS.

Configuration manager

The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parametersand operational software currently in use.

Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due tothe potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.

GSM-100-323 GPROC


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–21

Flash EPROMdaughter card

The flash EPROM (flash memory) feature allows GPROCs equipped to reprogram to thelatest bootstrap code automatically. This feature eliminates the need to visit every site tomanually replace EPROMs every time the bootstrap code changes.

Reprogramming is an automatic part of code downloading and requires no GSM networkoperator interaction.

One flash EPROM GPROC daughter card is needed for each upgraded GPROC module.

HardwareThe flash EPROM contains four 256 kbyte flash EPROMs that contain the bootstrapcode for a total of 1 Mbyte of code space.

The upper 4 kbytes of this address space accesses control logic on the daughter card toenable and disable the programming voltage. This portion of memory is thereforeunavailable for program storage.

The contents of the flash EPROM can be loaded in the field with the required softwareload. The flash EPROM daughter card resides in the address range $0 to $FFFFF on theGPROC.

Control circuitsThe flash EPROM contains control circuits that the software uses to enable and disablethe application of the programming voltage to the flash EPROMs, to provide protectionfrom accidental writes.

The programming voltage is enabled by a write to a specific address and disabled by aread to another specific address. The address range $FF000 to $FFFFF is unavailablefor program storage.

The control circuits on the card provide sufficient programming current to program all fourflash EPROMs simultaneously.

SoftwareThe downloadable bootstrap flash EPROM works in all GPROC configurations.

The new bootstrap software is downloaded as a new code object and distributed to allGPROCs using the current code object download and distribution scheme.

The RAM code programs the new bootstrap code into place. Having transitioned fromROM to RAM code, the software must determine if the new bootstrap code object is thesame as that currently programmed into EPROM. If it is not, and if the GPROC has beenreworked to use flash EPROMs, the GPROC updates its flash EPROM to the codecontained in the new bootstrap code object.

ProgrammingAll four flash EPROMs are programmed simultaneously. This minimizes the totalreprogramming time of the flash EPROMs, to reduce the possibility of resetting the cardin the middle of the reprogramming cycle and thus rendering the bootstrap (and theGPROC) useless.

On startup, the ROM code provides the memory management unit write protection overthe flash EPROM area. This helps guard against accidental writes to the bootstrap code.

When the bootstrap reprogramming cycle is in progress, both the red and green LEDs onthe GPROC front panel flash in unison. This is a visual sign to an onsite technician thatthe reprogramming cycle is in progress.

An MMI command is available to verify that the bootstrap programming has beensuccessful. If the technician operates from the OMC, the GPROC(s) are monitored withprinted messages via the “rlogin” capability from the OMC.

GSM-100-323GPROC


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GPROC diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the GPROC module:

PROCESSORMC68030

MEMORY ARRAY

WATCHDOGTIMER

EPROM (512 KBYTE TO 1 MBYTE)(BOOTSTRAP CODE STORAGE)ORFLASH EPROM (256 KBYTE TO 1 MBYTE)REPROGRAMMABLE BOOTSTRAP CODESTORAGE)

DRAM (16M BYTE )

DRAM WITH BATTERY BACKUP LOGIC

NVRAM NON–VOLATILE RAM (32K BYTES)

MCAP BUS A

MCAP Bus B

OUTBOUND TDM HWY A

OUTBOUND TDM HWY B

TOKEN RING LAN A

TOKEN RING LAN B

SERIAL LINE 1

SERIAL A/B SELECT

BSS SERIAL BUS A

SERIAL LINE 2

MCAP BUSINTERFACE

LOGIC

TDMINTERFACE

CONTROLLER

LAPDPROCESSOR

PRIVATE BUSARBITER

TOKEN RINGLAN

INTERFACE

SYSTEM TIMINGCONTROLLER(STC)

RED LED

GREEN LED

BUFFEREDTEST PORT

SERIALINTERFACE

SERIALINTERFACE

ADDRESS/DATA BUS

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

PARALLELPORT

52

52

SWITCHBOUND TDM HWY A

SWITCHBOUND TDM HWY B

9

9

9

9

RS232DRIVER

TOKEN RING CONTROL

SERIALBUS

CONTROL

BSS SERIAL BUS B

4

1

4

2

2

2

1

2

}

}

}

2 FOR REDUNDANCY

2 FOR REDUNDANCY

}

+5 V

+5 V BATTERYTO DRAM

BOARD DISTRIBUTION

OPTO–ISOLATOR

NOT CURRENTLYUSED

} 2 FOR REDUNDANCY

GND

COMMPROCESSOR

PRIVATE BUS

PRIVATE BUS

REFERENCE CLKS (125 us, 60 ms, 6.12 s AND 16.384 MHz A & B)

REGISTERPORTS

BACKPLANE INFORMATION

COUNTER/TIMERs

25 PIN ”D”CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323 GPROC2


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–23

GPROC2

PurposeThe generic processor (GPROC2) module provides the processing power to control aBTS. The GPROC2 cannot be used with software version less then 1500.

GPROC2s in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling in several ways:

S A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in severalshelves via fibre optic cable.

S A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the processoraddress, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same shelf.

S A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROC2s andhalf-size modules. This serial bus extends to the power distribution unit.

S The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.

RequirementsThe GPROC2 module fits into:

S Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.

S Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.

Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC2.

GPROC2 moduleThe diagram shows a GPROC2 module.

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED


(NORMALLY OFF)

GREEN LED ON, RED LED OFF =PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES

GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON =PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET

BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSORRUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLEDOR OTHER ALARM

(THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TESTPORT ALLOWS CONTROL OFTROUBLESHOOTING ANDDIAGNOSTICS.)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

(NORMALLY ON)

Brief descriptionThe GPROC2 module contains:

S A Motorola MC68040 32-bit processor operating at 33 MHz.

S The LAN processors, which are the interface between the GPROC2 and the tokenring LAN.

S The COMM processor which, in conjunction with the TDM interface controller, isthe interface between the GPROC2 and the TDM highway.

GSM-100-323GPROC2


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Communication

The GPROC2 communicates with other full size modules via the MCAP bus, and withhalf size modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus.

The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speedprivate bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68040 address/databus and the high-speed private bus.

The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives inputsignals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain:

S Shelf ID.

S Slot ID.

S Backplane type.

S Backplane revision level.

Memory

The GPROC2 module is equipped with 32 Mbytes of DRAM. There is also 1Mbyte ofEPROM. The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.

Troubleshootingand diagnostics

A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personalcomputer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controllingsoftware when performing maintenance or troubleshooting.

The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and ITU–TSS V.24specifications.

The GPROC2 runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on commandfrom the maintenance TTY connection.

Software

Every GPROC2 is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the softwareloaded into it.

The processor functions for BTS and BSC applications are different from those for anRXCDR application and are described separately in the following sections.

GSM-100-323 GPROC2


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–25

BTS and BSCGPROC2functions

The GPROC2 performs the following processor functions:



S Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).

S Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).

S Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).

S Cell Resource Machine (CRM).


S Connectionless Manager (CLM).

S Radio Subsystem (RSS).

S Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).

S Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.

GPROC2 task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the softwareloaded into a given GPROC2.

When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC2, it is considered to be a uniqueGPROC2 device type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor(CSFP), which is not considered to be a unique device type.

The table shows the device types and task groups:

GPROC device BSCtask groups

BTStask groups

BSC/BTSinterface



Motorolaproprietary

Type1 Base Site ControlProcessor (BSP)




Motorolaproprietary



Operations andMaintenanceProcessor (OMP)



Radio System LinkProcessor (RSLP)

Motorolaproprietary

NOTEA code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.

GSM-100-323GPROC2


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RXCDR GPROC2functions

The RXCDR GPROC2 processor functions are similar to the BSC and BTS GPROC2sand comprise:




These processor functions:

S Maintain the switch database for the KSWs and TSWs.

S Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.

S Initialize the RXCDR network element.

S Maintain the configuration database.

S Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.

S Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link.

S Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).

S Communicate with collocated digital modules.

S Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.

S Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs,KSWs, and XCDRs.

Fault manager

The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoderBSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.

Switch manager

The SM:

S Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS)and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.

S Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.

S Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC and BTS.

Configuration manager

The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parametersand operational software currently in use.

Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due tothe potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.

GSM-100-323 GPROC2


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–27

GPROC2 diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the GPROC2 module:

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

WATCHDOGTIMERS

TIMINGCONTROL

PROCESSORMC6804033 MHz

DATA/ADDRESSBUS

LAN ADRAM

LAN APROC

LAN BPROC

LAN BDRAM

LANINTERFACE

LAN A

LAN B

LAPDPROC

EXT CACHE128 K

MAIN DRAM(16 – 64 Mb)

EEPROMNVRAM

BUSSIZER

TDMINTERFACE

MCAPINTERFACE

SERIAL BUSCONTROLLER

PERIPHERALBUS

TDM A

TDM B

MCAP A

MCAP A

SERIAL BUS A

SERIAL BUS BTTY TESTCONNECTOR

LANBUS

GSM-100-323KSW


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

KSW

Purpose

The kiloport switch (KSW) module is a time division digital switch, and:

S Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway.

S Communicates with the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus.

S At a BSC, routes the logical channels dynamically on a per-call basis.

See also the TSW section of this chapter, in which the timeslot switch (a sub equippedversion of the KSW) is described.

Requirements

The KSW module fits in the following slots in a BSU or RXU shelf assembly:

S L1 for TDM highway B.

S L27 for TDM highway A.

KSW module

The diagram shows a KSW module:

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED


(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323 KSW


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–29

Architecture

Refer to the KSW block diagram at the end of this section.

A Motorola MC56001 digital signal processor (DSP) controls the KSW internally. TheDSP:

S Executes port connects between the switchbound TDM highway and the outboundTDM highway.

S Controls the timeslot interchange (TSI) section via the connection RAM controlsection.

S Performs on-line and off-line self diagnostics, including:

– Internal (KSW-related) tests.

– External (TDM bus-related) tests.

S Controls inbound and outbound multiplexers.

S Processes alarms.

S Updates the dynamic pattern registers.

The DSP communicates via the MCAP bus interface logic, the DSP data/address bus,and the serial interface logic.

Timing reference

The timing reference section generates various clock signals, timeslot counts, and framecounts required by other sections of the KSW.

The TDM counters section is an offset counter that adds a fixed offset to the master TDMtimeslot counter.

The GSM counters section contains four separate counters:

S GSM sub-timeslot counter.

S GSM sequence counter.

S GSM timeslot counter.

S GSM frame counter.

SwitchboundTDM interfacestructure

The switchbound TDM highway interface consists of a series of multiplexers that areused to select one of four switchbound highways (numbered 0 to 3). The DSP controlsthe switchbound multiplexers via highway control logic.

Switchbound highway 0 and the outbound highway are split into local and remote parts.

Local

The local switchbound highway 0 and local outbound highways are active when the KSWis communicating with highway interface modules in the same shelf.

GSM-100-323KSW


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

RemoteThe remote switchbound highway 0 and remote outbound highways are active when theKSW is communicating with highway interface modules in remote shelves. Thiseffectively extends the TDM bus to multiple shelves. In the remote case, the KSW sendsand receives TDM data to and from a remote KSW Extender (KSWXR) in the same shelfas the KSW.

The remote KSWXR communicates via fibre optic links with a local type KSWXL in theremote shelf. Local switchbound highway 0 has a delay circuit which adds a fixed 12timeslot delay. This delay is equal to the delay associated with the KSWX extensionoperation, and keeps the local and remote switchbound highways in phase.

The modules on the TDM bus are:

S DRIM.

S MSI.

S XCDR.

S GPROC.

Expansionswitchboundhighways

Expansion switchbound highway 1, 2 and 3 data originates from highway interfacemodules associated with other KSWs. These remote highway interface modules sendand receive data between their respective KSWs. Each KSW re-transmits data receivedon its switchbound highway 0 (local or remote) to other KSWs via dedicated KSWXE fibreoptic links.

Data is received on switchbound highways 1, 2 and 3 of remote KSWs. This architectureresults in each KSW receiving data from all 1024 timeslots of all expansion highwaysconnected to the KSW and retransmitting that data on the 1024 timeslots associated withits own highway interface modules to the other KSWs.

The DSP can write data to any of the four switchbound highways. This allows knownstatic data patterns to be inserted into any switchbound timeslot, and data can be loopedback to switchbound highway 0 from the TSI section, enabling self diagnostics. When theKSW is performing self diagnostics, data is compared at two highway monitors, onebefore the TSI section and one after the TSI section.

Timeslotinterchange (TSI)

The TSI section is the main section of the KSW. It switches data from a given timeslot onone of the four switchbound TDM highways to a given timeslot on the outbound TDMhighway. The TSI section consists of four independent TSI blocks operating in parallel tosupport sub-rate switching. Each TSI block switches 16 kbit/s of data.

If a particular timeslot is associated with a 64 kbit/s channel, then one TSI block containsthe same path connection for that timeslot. Conversely, if a timeslot is associated withtwo 32 kbit/s channels, two TSIs contain a similar path connection and the other twocontain a different path connection. When a timeslot contains four 16 kbit/s channels,each TSI section has a different path connection.

Connection RAMcontrol

The connection RAM control is the interface between the DSP and the TSI section. Theconnection RAM control isolates the DSP from strict timing constraints associated withthe TSI section.

GSM-100-323 KSW


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–31

Three-partyconference (TPC)memory

After traffic data leaves the TSIs, it is sent to either the TSI mode multiplexer, whichselects full-rate or sub-rate switching as required, or to the three party conference (TPC)memory section. The TPC memory operates in real time allowing the KSW to supportany number of three party conference calls.

Fixed/dynamicpattern registers

The fixed/dynamic pattern registers can generate fixed patterns and a variety of dynamicpatterns that generate tones, data sequences, or dynamic test patterns.

Outboundselection MUX

The outbound selection multiplexer selects the correct source data to be sent to theoutbound highway. Although referred to as a multiplexer, this section does not contain aphysical multiplexer. Instead, multiplexing is implemented by connecting the outputs of allthe possible data sources together and selectively enabling one of these sources duringeach timeslot.

After data is sent from the outbound selection multiplexer, a parity bit is added to the databefore it is placed on the outbound TDM highway. Output from the outbound multiplexeris sent directly to the remote outbound highway, but data for the local outbound highwayis sent through a delay circuit to keep the remote and local outbound highways in phase.This delay is 12 timeslots.

Highway monitor

The KSW has two highway monitor sections:

S The switchbound monitor logic which selectively monitors one of the fourswitchbound TDM highways at the inputs of the TSI section.

S The outbound monitor logic which monitors the output of the outbound selectionmux.

The DSP uses these monitors for monitoring inbound and outbound data on any timeslot.When used in conjunction with the various DSP controlled data sources andfixed/dynamic pattern selection, these monitors allow the KSW to perform extensive selfdiagnostics on the TSI section.

Watchdog timer

The watchdog timer ensures that the DSP is functioning normally. The DSP writes to amemory address that resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If theDSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out and causes the red LED on the frontpanel to illuminate. An interrupt is also generated and sent to the GPROC via the MCAPbus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the KSW still switches data, but no new pathconnections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while the system isreconfigured around the failed KSW.

GSM-100-323KSW


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Interrupt logic

The interrupt logic generates two interrupts to the DSP:

S Interrupt-A prompts the DSP to perform certain periodic tasks such as updatingthe watchdog timer and the dynamic pattern registers.

S Interrupt-B, processes alarms such as clock and reference alarms, and parityalarms.

Serial interfacelogic

The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to adedicated backplane connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can beused to control the KSW, monitor KSW operation status, and support KSW diagnostics.

KSW switching

The usable switching capacity of each KSW depends on site hardware and softwareconfigurations because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. TheKSW is controlled by the local GPROC via the MCAP bus.

Each KSW can switch connections between 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. However,total switching capacity can be expanded by interconnecting up to three additional KSWsvia KSWXs.

In this configuration, each KSW has the ability to switch data between 2048 (2 x 1024), 3072 (3 x 1024) or 4096 (4 x 1024) 64 kbit/s input ports and its 1024outbound ports. Each KSW has access to all 2, 3 or 4 switchbound highways, althougheach KSW only drives its own 1024 port outbound TDM highway.

KSW in a BSC

KSW switching at the BSC is variable. Physical channel mapping on the A interface isperformed for each call, and at every handover.

KSW in a RXCDR

KSW switching in an RXU shelf is fixed. It provides one to one physical mappingbetween the traffic to and from the BSC and the traffic to and from the MSC.

KSW in a BTS

KSW switching at the BTS is fixed. It provides one to one physical mapping between thetraffic channels on the air interface and the traffic channels on the BSC to BTS interface.

Because fixed switching is less complex than variable switching as performed at theBSC, a TSW module (a sub equipped version of the KSW) is normally used instead of aKSW at the BTS. Refer to the TSW section of this chapter for a description of the TSW.

GSM-100-323 KSW


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–33

KSW diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the KSW module:

TIMINGREFERENCE

LOGIC

MCAP BUS A

MCAP BUS B

MCAP BUSINTERFACE

LOGIC

52

52 } 2 FOR REDUNDANCY

MC5600127 MHz A CLOCK & REFERENCE

CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us, 60 ms, AND 6.12 s)

B CLOCK & REFERENCE CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us,

60 ms, AND 6.12 s)

TDMCOUNTERS

GSMCOUNTERS

DS

P D

ATA

/AD

DR

ES

SERIALINTERFACE

LOGIC

WATCHDOGTIMER

TTY INTERFACE

MUX LOCAL SWITCHBOUND HWY 0

REMOTE SWITCHBOUNDHWY 0

MUX

MUX

HIGHWAYCONTROL

MUX

MUX

TIME SLOTINTERCHANGE

(TSI)

REMOTE KSWX HWYINTERFACE CONTROL

EXPANSION SWITCHBOUNDHWY 1



DELAY


(TSI)


(TSI)


(TSI)

CONNECTIONRAM CONTROL

HIGHWAYMONITOR

DS

P D

ATA

/AD

DR

ES

TSI MODE MUX

THIRDPARTY

CONFERENCEMEMORY

FIXED/DYNAMICPATTERN

REGISTERS

SU

B–R

AT

E

FU

LL–R

AT

E

SO

UR

CE

0

SO

UR

CE

1

OU

TB

OU

ND

SE

LEC

T M

UX

OUTBOUNDCONTROL

RAM

REMOTE OUTBOUND HWY

HIGHWAYMONITOR

PARITYGENERATOR

MUX

DELAY

DELAY LOCAL OUTBOUND HWY

PARITYGENERATOR EXPANSION OUTBOUND HWY

INTERRUPTLOGIC

RED LED

GREENLED

+12 V

–12 V

+5 V

GND

DIS

TR

IBU

TIO

N T

O

LOO

P

BA

CK

LOO

P

BA

CK

OT

HE

R K

SW

CIR

CU

ITR

Y

DSP

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

GSM-100-323KSW


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

InterconnectedKSWs

The diagram shows three interconnected KSWs:

SWITCHBOUND LOCAL (1024 PORTS) OUTBOUND HIGHWAY (1024 PORTS)

KSWXE

TSI

KSWXE

EACH KSW ROUTES SWITCHBOUND DATA TO BOTHTHE TSI SECTION AND THE EXPANSION OUTBOUND

HIGHWAY.

fibRe OPTIC CABLES

BSU/RXU SHELF

KSW


KSWXE

TSI

KSWXE

KSW


KSWXE

TSI

KSWXE

KSW

EXPANSION OUTBOUNDHIGHWAY IS SENT TO

EACH KSWXE

TDM DATA IS SENTTO/FROM

KSWXE TO KSWXE

DATA FROM OTHER KSWsIS SENT TO THE TSI

SECTION (1024 EACH)

ALL EXPANSION SWITCHBOUNDDATA IS SENT (ALONG WITH THE

SWITCHBOUND LOCAL) TO THE TSI FORSWITCHING TO THE OUTBOUND HIGHWAY

BSU/RXU SHELF

BSU/RXU SHELF

GSM-100-323 MSI


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–35

MSI

PurposeThe Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module drives two separate interface lines to and fromthe TDM bus.

MSI moduleThe MSI module can drive two European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) data lines.

One of the E1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1 line is known as group B.

The E1 lines can come from either:

S A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB).

S Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.

The MSI can also extract the clock synchronization from the E1 line data stream.

An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected fortesting and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.

TerminologyOne wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream.

Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1 line.

RequirementsThe MSI module is fitted in:

S Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly.

S Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.

InitializationAn MSI or MSI2 must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BTSinitialization purposes.

S Shelf 15 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B)

S Shelf 15 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A)

S Shelf 14 (if second BSU in BTS) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)

MSI moduleThe diagram shows an MSI module:

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH

(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)

UP (MOMENTARY) = RESETMIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATIONDOWN = DISABLE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323MSI


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

General featuresThe MSI converts signals from the E1 lines from serial format to the parallel format thatthe TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1 lines from parallelto serial. The MSI also provides surge protection and frame alignment.

Each serial line can carry the following to and from the active TDM highway in the BSU:

S One 64 kbit/s channel for synchronization.

S One 64 kbit/s channel for control signalling.

S Thirty 64 kbit/s channels that can each be used as follows:

– Traffic (four 16 kbit/s compressed voice/data channels each).

– Additional control channels.

If all 30 channels are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.

These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway underthe control of the GPROC.

The interfaces provided by MSIs depend upon the transcoding location:

S If transcoding is integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the BSC to BTSinterface.

S If transcoding is not integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the RXCDR to BSCand BSC to BTS interfaces.

Transcodedenvironment

The MSI can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic channels in a transcoded environment, asdefined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s channels are multiplexed into one 64kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example:

30 64 kbit/s timeslots of a serial data stream

x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic channels

x 2 E1 lines

= 240 16 kbit/s traffic channels


Refer to the MSI block diagram at the end of this section.

MC68000 processor

A Motorola MC68000 processor, operating at 8 MHz, controls:

S The E1 line to TDM interface function.

S A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock to be routed to the GCLK.

The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC on the MCAP bus:

S Extracted clock failures.

S Frame alignment errors.

S Multiframe alignment errors.

S Bipolar violations.

S CRC4 errors.

S Transmit or receive failures.

GSM-100-323 MSI


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–37

EPROM

The EPROM contains 128 kbytes of bootstrap program code. At power-up the bootstrapprogram sends a request message to the GPROC to download the MSI’s operatingprogram into the SRAM. The SRAM also stores program variables, and can bepermanently saved in EEPROM.

E1 line to TDM interface circuits

There are two identical E1 lines to TDM interface circuits on the MSI module. Thisfunctional description applies to both.

The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1 line serial to TDM parallel.The two E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced outby 32 timeslots. The sequence is as follows:

S Group A timeslot 0, group B timeslot 0.


“



Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent tothe E1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1 line levels. The E1 line data isthen HDB3 and CRC4 encoded. After encoding, the data is routed to the loopbackmultiplexer and to a level converter. The level converter converts from split-phase, TTLlevel unipolar to bipolar.

The table illustrates the E1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions:

Stage Action

1 The system matches impedance and isolates the signal

2 The E1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter

3 The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL levelunipolar

4 The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder and clock extraction circuit

5 The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for:

S Diagnostic purposes.

S Distance measurements.

S Drop and insert feature utilization.

The impedance matching circuits consist of isolation transformers and Zener diodes,which:

S Impedance match the two sides of the interface.

S Provide secondary surge protection from high voltage transients, such as lightningstrikes, which may come down the E1 lines.

The “drop and insert” feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant foranother BTS, to be routed back out on group B.

GSM-100-323MSI


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Clock extraction

The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clocks, to which the entire site (either BTS orBSC) can be synchronized. The two extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer thatselects which clock signal (if any) is routed to the GCLK.

Frame decoding

The HDB3 and CRC4 decoding section performs frame decoding according to CCITTrecommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.

GSM-100-323 MSI


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–39

MSI diagram

Figure 5-1 shows a block diagram of the MSI module.

TDMINTERFACE

LEVEL CONVERTER& E1/T1/JT1 LINETRANSMITTER

MC6800 PROCESSOR

MCAP INTERFACE

LEVELCONVERTER

MCAP BUS A

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

WATCHDOGTIMER

REDLED

GREENLED





TTY TEST PORTRS232

DRIVERS

RECEIVE

TRANSMIT

RECEIVEDCLOCK

EXTRACTOR

EXTRACTED CLOCK REF

HDB3DECODER

CRC4DECODER

HDB3ENCODER

CRC4ENCODER

TDMINTERFACE

TDMINTERFACE

LEVELCONVERTER





RECEIVE

TRANSMIT

RECEIVEDCLOCK

EXTRACTOR

HDB3DECODER

CRC4DECODER

HDB3ENCODER

CRC4ENCODER

TDMINTERFACE

MUX

EPROM SRAM EEPROM

CO

NT

RO

L

2

2

2

2

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

IMPEDANCEMATCHING

IMPEDANCEMATCHING

IMPEDANCEMATCHING

IMPEDANCEMATCHING

MCAP BUS B

E1 LINE A

LEVEL CONVERTER& E1/T1/JT1 LINETRANSMITTER

E1 LINE B

Figure 5-1 MSI block diagram

GSM-100-323MSI2


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

MSI2

Purpose

The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI2) module is the interface between the inter-sitecommunication lines and the TDM highway.

MSI2 module

The MSI2 module is a software configured board and has the following drive capability:

S North American 1.544 Mbit/s (T1).

S European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1).

S Japanese 1.544 Mbit/s (JT1).

One of the E1/T1/JT1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1/T1/JT1 line is knownas group B.

The E1/T1/JT1 lines are connected at the interconnect panel via either:

S A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB).

S Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.

The MSI2 can also extract the clock synchronization data from the E1/T1/JT1 line datastream in order to phase lock the GCLK to the line.

An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected fortesting and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.

GSM-100-323 MSI2


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–41

Terminology

One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1/JT1 serial data stream.

Two E1/T1/JT1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1/JT1 line.

RequirementsThe MSI2 module is fitted in:

S Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly.

S Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.

Initialization

An MSI or MSI2 must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BTSinitialization purposes.



S Shelf 14 (if second BSU in BTS) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)

MSI2 moduleThe diagram shows an MSI2 module:

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED


(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)


BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

General featuresThe MSI2 converts signals from the E1/T1/JT1 lines from serial format to the parallelformat that the TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1/T1/JT1lines from parallel to serial.

E1 Data


S One 64 kbit/s timeslot for synchronization.

S One 64 kbit/s timeslot for control signalling.

S Thirty 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows:


– Additional control timeslots.

If all 30 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.

GSM-100-323MSI2


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

T1 Data


S Twenty-four 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows:


– Additional control timeslots.

If all 24 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 96 traffic channels are possible.

Transcodedenvironment (E1)

The MSI2 can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, asdefined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example:


x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots

x 2 E1 lines

= 240 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots

Transcodedenvironment (T1)

The MSI2 can support 192 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, asdefined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example:


x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots

x 2 T1/JT1 lines

= 192 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots


Refer to the MSI2 block diagram at the end of this section.

MC68302 processor

A Motorola MC68302 processor, operating at 16.384 MHz, controls:

S The E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface function.

S A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock signal to be routed to the GCLK.

The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC on the MCAP bus:

S Extracted clock failures.

S Frame alignment errors.

S Multiframe alignment errors.

S Bit errors.

S Transmit or receive failures.

GSM-100-323 MSI2


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–43

EPROM

The EPROM contains 64 kbytes of bootstrap program code memory, 256 kbytes ofnonvolatile operational code memory (Flash EPROM) and 128 kbytes of volatile programand data memory (SRAM). At power-up the bootstrap program sends a request messageto the GPROC to download the MSI2s operating program into the SRAM.

E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits

There are two identical E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits on the MSI2 module.This functional description applies to both.

The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1/T1/JT1 line from serial toTDM parallel.

E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 32timeslots. The sequence is as follows:



..........



T1/JT1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 24timeslots. The sequence is as follows:



..........



Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent tothe E1/T1/JT1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1/T1/JT1 line levels.

E1/T1/JT1 data uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) format and line encoding/errorchecking can be used as given below:

Line format Line Encoding Error Checking

E1 HDB3 CRC4

T1/JT1 B8ZS CRC6

After encoding, the data is routed to the loopback multiplexer and to a level converter.The level converter converts from split-phase, TTL level unipolar to bipolar.

GSM-100-323MSI2


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

The table illustrates the E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions:

Stage Action

1 The system matches impedance and isolates the signal

2 The E1/T1/JT1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter

3 The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL levelunipolar

4 The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder (E1) or B8ZS decoder (T1) and clockextraction circuit

5 The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for:

S Diagnostic purposes.

S Distance measurements.

S Drop and insert feature utilization.

The “drop and insert” feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant foranother BTS, to be routed back out on group B.

Clock extraction

The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1/JT1 clocks, to which the entire site (eitherBTS or BSC) can be synchronized. In the case of T1/JT1, the extracted clock is fedthrough a clock adaptor to convert the 1.544 MHz signal to a 2.048 MHz signal. The twoextracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that selects which clock signal (if any) isrouted to the GCLK.

Frame decoding

The HDB3 (E1) and B8ZS (T1) decoding section performs frame decoding according toCCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.

GSM-100-323 MSI2


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–45

MSI2 diagram

Figure 5-2 shows a block diagram of the MSI2 module.

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

LEDS

+5 V, +12 VAND –12 V

RESETSWITCH

LINE INTERFACE A

T1, E1, OR JT1LOCAL AND REMOTE LOOPBACK2M OR 1.5M EXTRACTED CLOCK

DATA

LINE INTERFACE B

T1, E1, OR JT1LOCAL AND REMOTE LOOPBACK2M OR 1.5M EXTRACTED CLOCK

DATA

RXA

TXA

COMMONINTERFACEFUNCTIONS

DISTANCEMEASURINGSWITCHING

EXTRACTED CLOCKDATA TO GCLK

RXB

TXB

CONTROLPROCESSOR

68302BOOTSTRAP EPROM

SRAMWATCHDOG TIMER

POWER/RESETCIRCUIT

TTY PORTFLASH EPROMPARALLEL I/O

SERIAL EEPROM

TDMSTATUS

ANDCONTROL

TDM INTERFACE

TSA RAM

BACKPLANEDRIVERS

RECEIVERS

MCAP INTERFACE

MCAPREGISTERS

CLOCK ANDREFERENCEGENERATION

DATA

ADDRESS

CONTROL

16.384 MHZREF 125REF 60REF 6.12

TTY PORT

SWITCHBOUNDTDM HIGHWAY

OUTBOUNDTDM HIGHWAY

INTERFACESTATUS

CONTROL

INBOUND/OUTBOUNDDATA

EXTRACTEDCLOCK AND

DISTANCEMEASURING

CONTROL

LINE INTERFACESTATUS/CONTROL

DATA

DATA

DATA

EXTRACTEDCLOCK/DISTANCEMEASURING

MESSAGEDPRAM BUS

Figure 5-2 MSI2 block diagram

GSM-100-323TSW


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

TSW

PurposeThe timeslot switch (TSW) module is a time division digital switch, controlled by aMotorola MC56001 digital signal processor (DSP).

DSP communications are supported via the MCAP bus interface logic, the DSPdata/address bus, and the serial interface logic.

The TSW is static, that is the port connects are fixed, and routes logical channels on aper-call basis.

The TSW is a sub equipped KSW module. Refer to the KSW section of this chapter for adescription of the KSW module.

Primary TSW functions

S To execute port connects between the switchbound and outbound TDM highways.

S To control the timeslot interchange (TSI) via the connection RAM control section.

Secondary TSW functions

S To perform on-line and off-line self-diagnostics, including:

– Internal (TSW-related) tests.

– External (TDM bus-related) tests.

S To control inbound and outbound multiplexers.

S To process alarms.

S To update the dynamic pattern registers.

RequirementsThe KSW module fits in the following slots in a BSU shelf assembly:

S L1 for TDM highway B.

S L27 for TDM highway A.

TSW moduleThe diagram shows a TSW module:

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED


(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323 TSW


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–47


Refer to the TSW block diagram at the end of this section.

Timing reference

The timing reference section of the TSW generates various clock signals, timeslotcounts, and frame counts required by other sections of the TSW circuitry.

The TDM counters section is an offset counter that adds a fixed offset to the master TDMtimeslot counter. It contains:

S GSM sub-timeslot counter.

S GSM sequence counter.

S GSM timeslot counter.

S GSM frame counter.

SwitchboundTDM interface

The switchbound TDM highway interface consists of a series of multiplexers that areused to select one of four switchbound highways (0, 1, 2 and 3). The DSP controls theswitchbound multiplexers via highway control logic.

Switchbound highway 0 and the outbound highway are split into two parts, local andremote.

Local

The local switchbound highway 0 and local outbound highways are active when the TSWis communicating with highway interface modules, for example MSI or XCDR, in thesame shelf.

Remote

The remote switchbound highway 0 and remote outbound highways are active when theTSW is communicating with highway interface modules in remote shelves. This extendsthe TDM bus to multiple shelves. The TSW sends and receives TDM data to and from aremote type KSWXR in the same shelf as the TSW.

The remote KSWXR communicates via fibre optic links with a local type KSWXL in theremote shelf. Local switchbound highway 0 has a delay circuit which adds a fixed 12timeslot delay. This delay is equal to the delay associated with the KSWX extensionoperation, keeping the local and remote switchbound highways in phase.

Expansionswitchboundhighways

Expansion switchbound highway 1, 2, and 3 data originates from highway interfacemodules associated with other TSWs. These send and receive data to and from theirrespective TSWs. Each TSW retransmits data received on its switchbound highway 0(local or remote) to other TSWs via dedicated KSWXE fibre optic links.

The data is received on switchbound highways 1, 2, and 3 of remote TSWs. Thisarchitecture means that each TSW receives data from all 1024 timeslots of all expansionhighways connected to the TSW, and re-transmits that data to the 1024 timeslotsassociated with its own highway interface modules.

GSM-100-323TSW


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

The DSP

The DSP can write data to any of the four switchbound highways. This allows knownstatic data patterns to be inserted into any switchbound timeslot, and data can be loopedback to switchbound highway 0 from the TSI section. These two features provide for selfdiagnostics, during which data is compared at two highway monitors, one before the TSIsection and one after the TSI section.

The TSI section is the main section of the TSW. It switches data from a given timeslot onone of the four switchbound TDM highways to a given timeslot on the outbound TDMhighway. The TSI block switches data at 64 kbit/s.

Connection RAMcontrol

The connection RAM control is the interface between the DSP and the TSI section. Theconnection RAM control isolates the DSP from strict timing constraints associated withthe TSI section. After traffic data leaves the TSI it is sent to the outbound selectmultiplexer.

The fixed and dynamic pattern registers can generate fixed patterns (such as the m-lawidle channel code) and a variety of dynamic patterns which generate tones, datasequences, or dynamic test patterns.

Outboundselectionmultiplexer

The outbound selection multiplexer selects the correct source data to be sent to theoutbound highway. Although referred to as a multiplexer, this section does not contain aphysical multiplexer. Instead, multiplexing is implemented by connecting the outputs of allthe possible data sources together and selectively enabling one of these sources duringeach timeslot.

After data is sent out from the outbound selection multiplexer, a parity bit is added to theoutbound data before it is placed on the outbound TDM highway. Output from theoutbound multiplexer is sent directly to the remote outbound highway, but data for thelocal outbound highway is sent through a delay circuit to keep the remote and localoutbound highways in phase. The delay is 12 timeslots.

Highwaymonitors

The TSW has two highway monitor sections:

S The switchbound monitor logic selectively monitors one of the four switchboundTDM highways at the inputs of the TSI section.

S The outbound monitor logic monitors the output of the outbound selectionmultiplexer.

The DSP uses these monitors for monitoring inbound and outbound data on any timeslot.When used in conjunction with the various DSP controlled data sources andfixed/dynamic pattern selection, these monitors allow the TSW to perform extensive selfdiagnostics on the TSI section.

GSM-100-323 TSW


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–49

Watchdog timer

The purpose of the watchdog timer is to ensure that the DSP is functioning normally. TheDSP writes to a special memory address which resets the watchdog timer, ensuring thatit does not time out. If the DSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out, causing aninterrupt to be generated and sent to the GPROC via the MCAP bus, and the red LED onthe front panel to illuminate. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the TSW still switches data,but no new path connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being heldwhile the system is reconfigured around the failed TSW.

Interrupt logic

The interrupt logic generates two interrupts to the DSP, interrupt-A and interrupt-B.

S Interrupt-A prompts the DSP to perform certain periodic tasks such as updatingthe watchdog timer and the dynamic pattern registers.

S Interrupt-B, processes alarms such as clock, reference and parity alarms.

Serial interfacelogic

The serial interface logic supports the buffered RS232 TTY interface, a dedicatedbackplane connector port. The TTY can be used to control the TSW, monitor TSWoperation status, and support TSW diagnostics.

TSW switching

Usable TSW switching depends upon site hardware and software configurations,because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The TSW iscontrolled by the local GPROC via the MCAP bus.

The TSW can switch connections between 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. However,these connections may be extended to additional BTS cabinets. The remote switchboundand outbound highways are connected, via up to five KSWXR in the master cabinet, to aKSWXL fitted to each remote BSU shelf in up to five other BTS cabinets. This allows sixcabinets to interchange the same information.

TSW switching at the BTS is fixed and provides one to one physical mapping betweenthe traffic channels on the air interface and the traffic channels on the BSC to BTSinterface.

GSM-100-323TSW


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

TSW diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the TSW module:

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

TIMINGREFERENCELOGIC

MCAP BUS A

MCAP BUS B

MCAP BUSINTERFACELOGIC

52

52

2 FOR REDUNDANCYMC56001

27 MHz A CLOCK & REF. CLKS (16.384 MHz,125 us, 60 ms, & 6.12 s)

B CLOCK & REF. CLKS (16.384 MHz,125 us, 60 ms, & 6.12 s)

TDMCOUNTERS

GSMCOUNTERS

DS

P D

ATA

/AD

DR

ES

SERIAL INTERFACELOGIC

WATCHDOGTIMER

TTY INTERFACE

MUX

LOCALSWITCHBOUNDHWY 0

REMOTESWITCHBOUNDHWY 0

MUX

MUX

HIGHWAYCONTROL

MUX

MUX

REMOTE KSWX HWYINTERFACE CONTROL

EXPANSIONSWITCHBOUNDHWY 1



DELAY

TIME SLOTINTERCHANGE(TSI)

CONNECTIONRAM CONTROL

HIGHWAYMONITOR

DS

P D

ATA

/AD

DR

ES

FIXED/DYNAMICPATTERNREGISTERS

FU

LL–R

AT

E

OU

TB

OU

ND

SE

LEC

T M

UX

OUTBOUNDCONTROLRAM

REMOTEOUTBOUND HWY

HIGHWAYMONITOR

PARITYGENERATOR

MUX

DELAY

DELAYLOCALOUTBOUND HWY

PARITYGENERATOR

EXPANSIONOUTBOUND HWY

INTERRUPTLOGIC

REDLED

GREENLED

+12 V

–12 V

+5 V

GND

DIS

TR

IBU

TIO

N T

O

LOO

P

BA

CK

LOO

P

BA

CK

OT

HE

R T

SW

CIR

CU

ITR

Y

DSP

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

GSM-100-323 TSW


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–51

TSW extensionbetween cabinets

The diagram shows an example of TSW extension between three cabinets:

LOCAL SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY(1024 PORTS)

LOCAL OUTBOUNDHIGHWAY(1024 PORTS)

KSWXR

TSI

KSWXRBSU SHELF

TSW

KSWXL

KSWXL

REMOTE OUTBOUNDHIGHWAY IS SENT TO EACHKSWXR

TDM DATA IS SENT TO/FROMKSWXR TO KSWXL

BSU SHELF

BSU SHELF

LOCAL OUTBOUND HIGHWAY

LOCAL SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY

FIBRE OPTIC CABLES

REMOTE SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY ISSENT TO EACH KSWXR

FIBRE OPTIC CABLES

LOCAL OUTBOUNDHIGHWAY

LOCAL SWITCHBOUNDHIGHWAY

TDM DATA IS SENT TO/FROMKSWXR TO KSWXL

GSM-100-323XCDR


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

XCDR

Purpose

The transcoder (XCDR) module:

S Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in aparallel format.

S Transcodes thirty 64 kbit/s channels into 120 compressed voice/data channels, inaccordance with the GSM recommendations:

– Channel zero of each E1/T1 line is reserved for synchronization.

– Channel sixteen is reserved for link control signalling.

If the BSC performs the transcoding function, XCDRs interface the BSU or RXU to theMSC in place of MSI modules.

The XCDR transcodes the remaining 30 channels into 120 x 16 kbit/s compressedchannels. The synchronization and signalling channels and the 120 compressedvoice/data channels are applied to the active TDM highway in the BSU or RXU.

These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway undercontrol of the GPROC.

Terminology

One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream.

Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.

RequirementsThe XCDR module is fitted in:

S Slots L6 to L17 (maximum 6 modules) in the BSU shelf assembly.

S Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 16 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.

There must be an XCDR or MSI module in slot L14 or slot L16 of the BSU or RXU inshelf 0 for initialization purposes.

XCDR moduleThe diagram shows an XCDR module:

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED


(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)


BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323 XCDR


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–53

Brief descriptionRefer to the XCDR block diagram at the end of this section.

The XCDR module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:

S GSM-defined speech encoding.

S GSM-defined speech decoding.

S Submultiplexing functions.

The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the landnetwork to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface.

Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.

ArchitectureThe XCDR module contains the following major systems:

S Processor system.

S DSP system.

S Line interface system.

S Switching system.

S MCAP interface system.

S TDM interface system.

ProcessorThe main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which:

S Controls and interfaces the five major systems (listed below) on the XCDRmodule.

S Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.

Other components of the processor system are:

S A watchdog timer.

S 16 kbytes of RAM.

S 64 kbytes of EEPROM.

S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM.

S A power monitor circuit.

The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is notstrobed before a pre-set timeout.

DSPThe DSP system consists of:

S 30 mask programmed DSP units.

S A subrate multiplexer.

S A serial port timing generator.

S A parallel host interface.

Each DSP unit has its own internal memory (2 kbytes of RAM and 12 kbytes of ROM)and serial interface. The DSP units are arranged into four banks (three banks of eightand one bank of six).

The serial port timing generator keeps all DSPs synchronized. The parallel host interfaceis used to transfer status and control data between the MCU and DSP units.

GSM-100-323XCDR


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Subratemultiplexermodes

The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes. The following lists the modes andshows what happens:

Mode Functions

DSP loop backThe DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a selftest function.

16 kbytesmultiplexed

Each DSP receives 16 bits of data:

The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from theTDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM.The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCMis processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames.

64 kbytesnon-multiplexed


The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to theE1/T1 line.The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed tothe TDM bus.

Line interface

The line interface system performs:

S Impedance matching.

S Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes),which may come down the E1/T1 lines.

The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.

After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a levelconverter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar.

After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuitand a HDB3 decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which allBSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The HDB3/CRC4 decoding section performsframe decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Trafficis then routed to the switching system.

Switching

The switching system consist of two separate digital switches, each performing adifferent function.

S The first switch has the E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams passingthrough it.

S The second switch is used as an interface between the processor section and theframer of the line interface system.

MCAP interface

The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the XCDR. TheXCDR communicates with the GPROC in the same manner as all other full-sizemodules.

GSM-100-323 XCDR


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–55

TDM interface

The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it fromparallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.

XCDR diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the XCDR module:

TDMINTERFACE

SUBRATEMULTIPLEXER

SERIAL PORTING GENERATOR

SWITCHINGSYSTEM

MCUMC68HC811E2

MCAP BUSINTERFACERED

LED

MCAP BUS A

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

DSP UNIT 1

MCAP BUS B

TTY TEST PORT

DSP UNIT 2

DSP UNIT 3

DSP UNIT 4

DSP UNIT 29

DSP UNIT 30

WATCHDOGTIMER

POWERMONITOR

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

EXTRACTED CLOCK REF

LEVELCONVERTER

CS61574





LEVELCONVERTER

E1/T1TRANSMITTER

E1/T1 LINE A RECEIVE

E1/T1 LINE A TRANSMIT

RECEIVEDCLOCK

EXTRACTOR

FRAMER MT8979AP

CRC4/HDB3DECODER

CRC4/HDB3ENCODER

2

2

IMPEDANCEMATCHING

IMPEDANCEMATCHING

CONTROL

CO

NT

RO

L

CO

NT

RO

L

FRAMER MT8979AP

GREENLED

GSM-100-323GDP


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GDP

Purpose

The Generic DSP Processor (GDP) module can be used as an enhanced XCDR, withadditional features, including Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) speech and uplink/downlinkaudio volume control. The GDP DSP firmware is downloadable whereas the XCDRDSP firmware is mask programmed.

The description in the following pages assumes the GDP is being used as an enhancedXCDR.

The GDP module can only be used with systems running GSR 3 or laterreleases, as this contains the neccessary software support to allow operation.In addition, for GRS3, GPROC2 must be fitted to the BSC as the masterprocessor (with redundant master and CSFP).

For a BSC which will operate the EFR speech option, all transcoder boards itconnects to must be GDP, not XCDR.

The GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1serial line use. Each GDP type has a different framer/transceiver withaccompanying crystall oscillator, and two associated resistors. This meansthat a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1, and a GDP usedfor T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1.

NOTE

The GDP module:

S Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP module is located at theRXCDR, or at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC.

S Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in aparallel format.

S Transcodes thirty E1(twenty-four T1) 64 kbit/s channels, inserting them as part of120 E1 (96 T1) compressed voice/data channels, in accordance with the GSMrecommendations:

– Channel zero of each E1 line is reserved for synchronization.

– Channel sixteen of each E1 line is reserved for link control signalling.

– The 30 remaining E1 channels are transcoded.

Each GDP supports thirty compressed voice and data channels, using 15 DSPs. Thesechannels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed inany of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC/GPROC2.

Terminology

One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream.

Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.

GSM-100-323 GDP


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–57

RequirementsThe GDP module is fitted in:

S Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU shelf assembly.

S Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.

An MSI, MSI2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations belowfor BSC initialization purposes.



S Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)

An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.

GDP moduleThe diagram shows a GDP module:

ALARM LED (RED)

ACTIVE LED (GREEN)


UP (MOMENTARY) = RESETMIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION

DOWN = DISABLE

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

Brief description

Refer to the GDP block diagram at the end of this section.

The GDP module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:

S GSM-defined speech encoding.

S GSM-defined speech decoding.

S Submultiplexing functions.

The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the landnetwork to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface.

Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.

GSM-100-323GDP


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Architecture

The GDP module contains the following major systems:

S MCU subsystem.

S DSP subsystem.

S E1/T1 Line interface.

S Digital crosspoint switch.

S MCAP interface.

S TDM interface.

MCU subsystem

The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which:

S Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP module.

S Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.

Other components of the processor system are:

S A watchdog timer.

S 256 kbytes of RAM.

S 512 kwords of Flash EPROM.

S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging.

S 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface.

S A power monitor circuit.

The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is notstrobed before a pre-set timeout.

DSP subsystem

The DSP subsystem consists of 15 identical blocks each with:

S One 80 MHz DSP processor

S 128k x 24 dedicated SRAM for program and data storage.

S Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs).

S On-board phase-locked loops to multiply input from subsystem 16.384 MHz clock.

DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses one of its Serial CommunicationsControllers (SCC1) to connect to the SCI of all DSPs, for control, monitoring anddownload purposes. All the ESSI signals to the DSPs are buffered by tristate devices.

GSM-100-323 GDP


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–59

Subratemultiplexermodes

There is a subrate multiplexer within the serial data formatter, converting data from theDSP subsystem ESSI format to the digital crosspoint switch ST bus format.

The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes. The following lists the modes andshows what happens:

Mode Functions

DSP loop backThe DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a selftest function.

16 kbytesmultiplexed


The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from theTDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM.The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCMis processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames.

64 kbytesnon-multiplexed


The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to theE1/T1 line.The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed tothe TDM bus.

E1/T1 Lineinterface

The line interface system performs:

S Impedance matching.

S Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes),which may come down the E1/T1 lines.

The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.

After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a levelconverter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar.

After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuitand a decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which allBSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The decoding section performs frame decodinglaw CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic is then routedto the switching system.

GSM-100-323GDP


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

CRC-4 Errorchecking

A GDP module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking.This is set by default to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also haveCRC-4 error checking set to the on state. This allows communication across theA-interface

To check if the GDP board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM databasecommand.

disp_element MMS_config_type <location>

Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (GSM-100-321) forinformation on the above CM database command.

To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendorsupplied equipment manual.

Digitalcrosspointswitch

The switching system consist of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:.

S Transmission of E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams.

S Connection between the processor section and the E1/T1 line interface system.

MCAP interface

The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP. TheGDP communicates with the GPROC2 in the same manner as all other full-size modules.

TDM interface

The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it fromparallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.

GSM-100-323 GDP


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–61

GDP diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the GDP module:

GSM-100-323Half size modules


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Half size modules

Introduction

Half size digital modules provide interface extension for the full size modules, enablingunit interconnection (for example BSU to BSU, RXU to RXU) and external alarmconnection.

The modules fit into slots in the upper card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slots arenumbered, right to left, from U0 to U28.

The following sections describe the half size modules that can be mounted in a BSU orRXU.

The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.

The modules

The following half size modules are mounted in a BSU or RXU shelf:

S Battery backup board (BBBX).

S Clock extender (CLKX).

S Digital radio interface extender (DRIX).

S Kiloport switch extender (KSWX).

S Local area network extender (LANX).

S Parallel interface extender (PIX).

GSM-100-323 BBBX


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–63

BBBX

Purpose

If the main supply fails, the battery backup board (BBBX) provides a backup supply of +5V at 8 A.

The +5 V DRAM battery backup supply maintains power to the:

S Optical circuit on the LANX module.

S DRAM memory located on the GPROC.

Normally, the PSMs supply +5 V DRAM voltage to the BSU or RXU backplane. If thePSMs fail to deliver this due to cabinet input power failure or PSM failure, the BBBXconverts an external backup supply to a fused +5 V DRAM supply. The BBBX can onlybe used in a BTS6 cabinet.

Requirements

The BBBX module is normally positioned in slots U16, U17 or U18 of the BSU or RXUshelf assembly, but can be fitted in any spare half-size card slot.

All connections are made at the front of the module.

BBBX module

The following shows a BBBX module:

CONNECTOR PC2 IS CABLED TO TOPOF CABINET FOR CONNECTION TOPC4 ON THE DAB AND BATT BACKUP

CONNECTOR PC1 IS CABLED TO AI2 ON THEDIGITAL CAGE BACKPLANE

BBBX diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the BBBX:

DC to DCCONVERTER

BRIDGERECTIFIER

SURGEPROTECTION

OUTPUT VOLTAGE(+5 V @ 8 A)

ALARMSIGNALS

INPUT VOLTAGE(20 to 75 V @ 3.2 to 0.85 A)

OUTPUT GOOD

INPUT GOOD

4 PIN “AMP” CONNECTOR

9 PIN “D” CONNECTOR

OVER VOLTAGE

OVER TEMPERATURE

GSM-100-323CLKX


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

CLKX

Purpose


WARNING

The clock extender (CLKX) module optically distributes the clock and reference signalsgenerated by the GCLK in the parent shelf to all other shelves at a site.

The extended clock signals are received by a KSWXL in the remote BSU/RXU.

Requirements

The CLKX module is fitted in slots U2 to U7 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly.

A maximum of six remote shelves can be supported.

In a multishelf site, the shelf containing the GCLK must also receive its clocks via aCLKX and a KSWXL to maintain synchronization integrity.

GCLK module

The following shows a CLKX module:

FIBRE OPTIC CLOCKOUTPUTS TO LOCALKSWXs

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323 CLKX


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–65

CLKX diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the CLKX module:

ENCODED CLOCK / REFERENCES(FROM GCLK)

BSS SERIAL INTERFACE

REGISTERS1. REVISION LEVEL2. BOARD TYPE3. SLOT ID

FIBRE OPTICTRANSMITTER






BSS SERIAL BUS A

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

BSS SERIAL BUS B

DRIVERCIRCUIT

DRIVERCIRCUIT

DRIVERCIRCUIT

DRIVERCIRCUIT

DRIVERCIRCUIT

DRIVERCIRCUIT

GSM-100-323DRIX3


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRIX3

Purpose


WARNING

The digital radio interface extender (DRIX3) module is the electrical-optical interface fordownlink (Tx) data, and the optical-electrical interface for uplink (Rx) data, between theDRCU and the DRIM.

A DRIM, a DRIX3 and a DRCU work together to form the air interface for eight logicalGSM channels, which may or may not all be on the same RF frequency.

Electrical connections to the DRIX3 are via the backplane. Optical connections are viapolymer or glass fibre optic cables connected to the front panel of the DRCU and DRIX3.

Fibre optic cable types must not be mixed. The jumper settings on DRIX3 (A &B) do not cater for this. A DRIX3C module will only accept glass fibre opticcables, the jumper settings on this module are hard-wired.

NOTE

Requirements

DRIX3 modules can be fitted in slots U10 to U15.

If an SCU900 or TCU900 is installed with a DRIX3 Type A module, or if theexisting fibre optic cables are too short, the fibre optic cable extender(Motorola part number 3004423N01) must be fitted.

NOTE

DRIX3 (A & B)

The DRIX3 (A & B) has three selectable modes of operation associated with Motorolaproducts, when connected using polymer fibre optic cables:

S Mode T: TopCell set jumpers J5 and J9.

S Mode BE4 (BTS4 and BTS5) set jumpers J3 and J6.

S Mode BE6 (BTS6) set jumpers J3 and J7.

The jumpers J5 and J9 must be set (as for mode T) if glass fibre optic cables are used.

If it is in the wrong mode, the DRIX3 fails to operate correctly because the fibre opticdrivers transmit and receive at the wrong levels.

Jumper location

Two blocks of jumpers are used to set the DRIX3s operating mode:

S Jumpers J5, J6 and J7 are beside fibre optic driver D2.

S Jumpers J9 and J3 are in the middle of the module.

GSM-100-323 DRIX3


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–67

DRIX3C

The DRIX3C board is functionally identical to the previous DRIX3 boards (A & B). It isintended for use only with glass fibre optic cables, and has no alternative drivers orreceivers for use with polymer fibres. The jumpers on the module are hard-wired to caterfor this.

DRIXcompatibility

The following table shows DRIX compatibilty when fitted to certain cabinets usingparticular radios:

Table 5-1 DRIX compatibility

Radio Carrier type... Whenfittedinto...

is compatible with...

Carrier type(Part No.)

Cabinettype

DRIXSLN7137A

DRIX3ASWLN4104A

DRIX3BSWLN4104B

DRIX3CSWLN4104C

SeeNote

DRCU (SWLF1006A,B)DRCU2 (SWLF1006C)

BTS4/5 Yes Yes Yes No 1

DRCU3 (SWLF1010)SCU900 (SWLF2032)

BTS4/5BTS6

No Yes Yes Yes 2

SCU1800 (SWLG1009) BTS6 No Yes Yes Yes 2

The corresponding note below should be used to determine recommended DRIX usagefrom the above table.

1. DRIX, DRIX3A or DRIX3B module can be used. Polymer fibre optic cablesmust be used and fitted by following the connection procedure.2. When using a DRIX3A or DRIX3B module the use of glass fibre opticcables is recommended, if replacing unserviceable cables or if DRI 61/63alarms are occuring. A DRIX3C module is supplied with, and can only be usedwith, glass fibre optic cables.

NOTE

GSM-100-323DRIX3


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DRIX3 module

The following shows the DRIX3 module:

FIBRE OPTIC INPUTTO DRIX3 FROM DRCU

FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUTFROM DRIX3 TO DRCU

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

SELECTABLEJUMPER LINKS

DRIX3 diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the DRIX3 module:


FIBRE OPTICRECEIVER

RECEIVERCIRCUIT

DRIVERCIRCUIT

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

MANCHESTERENCODEDDATA

RECEIVEDDATA

FIBRE OPTICCABLE TO DRCU

FIBRE OPTICCABLE FROM DRCU

FIBRE OPTICRECEIVER

RECEIVERCIRCUIT

RECEIVEDDATA


MANCHESTERENCODEDDATA

DRIVERCIRCUIT

FIBRE OPTICCABLE FROM DRCU

FIBRE OPTICCABLE TO DRCU

GSM-100-323 KSWX


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–69

KSWX

Purpose


WARNING

The kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module extends the 1024 ports of a KSW in oneBSU or RXU to the TDM highways in another BSU or RXU. It is used when the numberof required peripherals exceeds the capacity of a BSU or RXU shelf.

S A KSWX in expansion mode (KSWXE) connects the KSW to the KSW in a remoteBSU or RXU.

S A KSWX in remote transmit mode (KSWXR) accepts the highway data from aKSW and sends it to a local receiver.

S A KSWX in local receive mode (KSWXL) accepts the highway data and drives theTDM bus in the local BSU or RXU, and also provides a clock reference inmultishelf configurations.

Although a KSW is located in a particular BSU/RXU, it is logically connected to the TDMbus in that BSU/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 16 other shelves it can be driving.For each BSU or RXU that a KSW/TSW is driving, two KSWXs are required; one actingas a remote transmitter attached to the KSW/TSW, the other as a local receiver attachedto the TDM highway in the remote shelf.

This description details how KSWX modules work with KSW modules.However the description is also valid when a TSW is used (normally at aBTS).

NOTE

Requirements

The KSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU or RXU shelfassembly, with the following limitations:

S KSWXR must be fitted in slots U2 to U6 and U24 to U28.

S KSWXL must be fitted in slots U0 and U1.

S KSWXE must be fitted in slots U7 to U9 and U21 to U23.

KSWX module

The following shows a typical KSWX module:

RESET/DISABLE SWITCHACTIVE/ALARM (GREEN) LED

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM CLKX

FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER KSWX

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER KSWX

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323KSWX


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Brief description

The KSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting all TDM businformation between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information and TDMclock and reference pulses in the BSS shelves.

The KSWX is required when a site has more than one cabinet. It extends the 1024 portsof a KSW/TSW to other shelves and/or interconnects up to four KSW/TSW modules viafibre optic cable. In a TDM switch highway extended between two module shelves, aKSWX module is required in each shelf.

There are three modes in which the KSWX may operate. These modes are dependenton where in the shelf the KSWX module is placed. The three modes are:

Expansion (KSWXE)

Expands the TDM bus between up to four KSW/TSWs to expand switching capacity.KSWXE modules are optically connected to other KSWXE modules.

Remote (KSWXR)

Extends the TDM bus to a shelf with no KSW/TSW. This allows a KSW/TSW to switchdata to and from highway interface modules (MSIs and DRIMs) in a shelf with noKSW/TSW. KSWXR modules are optically connected to KSWXL modules.

Local (KSWXL)

The KSWXL distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from aKSWXR in another shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received from aCLKX. KSWXL modules are optically connected to CLKX modules and can also beconnected to KSWXR modules.

GSM-100-323 KSWX


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–71

KSWX diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the KSWX module:

8 MHz CLOCK

SERIAL INTERFACE

FIBRE OPTICRECEIVER

INCOMINGFIBRE OPTIC

CABLE

REFERENCESTATE

DECODER

BSS SERIAL BUS A

16.384 MHz TO BACKPLANE

16.384 MHz FROM MATE KSWX

125 us REF TO BACKPLANE

60 ms REF TO BACKPLANE

6.12 s REF TO BACKPLANE

ENCODED CLK FROM MATE

ENCODED CLK TO MATE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR


FIBRE OPTICRECEIVER

MUX

MUX

MUX

DECODER

EDGEDETECTOR

DELAYLINE

MASTER/SLAVE

CONTROLLOGIC

CLOCK FAIL

DETECT

MUX

TAXIRECEIVER

TAXITRANSMITTER

TDMINTERFACE

CAGESYNCHRONIZER

CLKDISTRIBUTION

FRAME COUNTER

R/W CONTROL

BSS SERIAL BUS B

INCOMINGFIBRE OPTIC

CABLE(CLKX)

OUTGOINGFIBRE OPTIC

CABLE

CLOCKSELECT

RE

AD

WR

ITE

16.384 MHz CLOCK A

16.384 MHz CLOCK B

125 us REF A

125 us REF B

60 ms REF A60 ms REF B

6.12 s REF A

6.12 s REF B

TDM BUS OUTBOUND (LCL)

MASTER REQUEST FROM MATE

TDMINTERFACE

MASTER REQUEST TO MATE

TDM BUS SWITCHBOUND (RMT, EXP)

TDM BUS OUTBOUND (RMT, EXP)

TDM BUS SWITCHBOUND (LCL)

OR

OR

GREENLED

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

MODULE CONTROL

MODULE ALARMS& STATUS

GSM-100-323LANX


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

LANX

Purpose


WARNING

The local area network extender (LANX) module is required for each BSU or RXU shelf.The LANX:

S Connects one of the LAN interfaces of each GPROC/GPROC2 in a BSU or RXUshelf to the local shelf token ring LAN via the shelf backplane.

S Allows optical LAN extension from one BSU or RXU to another.

S Switches empty module slots or faulty GPROC/GPROC2s out of the LAN.

S Sets the cage (BSU or RXU shelf) ID.

S Performs on-board MCAP bus arbitration.

S Provides shelf active/standby redundant LAN control.

Shelf to shelf extension is via a LANX module in each shelf, interconnected with fibreoptic cabling.

The LANX supports up to eight GPROC/GPROC2s on the local LAN in one BSU or RXUshelf.

Requirements

LANX modules must be fitted in slots U19 and U20 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly atall times.

A sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module sets the BSU or RXULAN address (shelf ID number).

LANX module

The diagram shows a LANX module:

ROTARY SWITCHFOR SETTING SHELF ID NUMBER

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER LANXIN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE

FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER LANXIN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323 LANX


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–73

Brief description

Refer to the block diagram at the end of this section.

Each LANX receives LAN data from another shelf via optical fibre cables and:

1. Routes the LAN data to the first GPROC/GPROC2.

2. Receives the LAN data back from the first GPROC/GPROC2.

3. Routes the LAN data to the second GPROC/GPROC2.

4. Receives the LAN data back from the second GPROC/GPROC2.

And so on until all GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf have received the LAN data.

The LAN data received back from the last GPROC/GPROC2 in the shelf is sent via fibreoptics to the next shelf (if LAN extension is used). If a GPROC/GPROC2 is not present inthe shelf or has failed, the LANX bypasses it and passes the LAN data to the nextGPROC/GPROC2.

Local LAN dataswitching

Each GPROC/GPROC2 using the LANX uses the following signals to route LAN data:

S LAN DATA IN.

S LAN DATA OUT.

S INSERT.

GPROC/GPROC2 present

When the GPROC/GPROC2 is present and operating with no faults, the INSERT line islogic 1, causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows:

S LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LAN DATA INsignal of the next GPROC/GPROC2 slot. In the case of shelf extension, the LANDATA OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic transmitterstage.

S LAN DATA OUT signal from the previous GPROC/GPROC2 slot is switched to theLAN DATA IN signal of this GPROC/GPROC2. In the case of shelf extension, thesignal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal ofGPROC/GPROC2 0.

GPROC/GPROC2 not present

If the GPROC/GPROC2 is not present or operating with faults, the INSERT line is logic 0causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows:

S LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched (looped back) to theLAN DATA IN signal of the same GPROC/GPROC2.

S LAN DATA OUT signal of the previous GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LANDATA IN signal of the next GPROC/GPROC2.

This removes the GPROC/GPROC2 from the LAN ring, and subsequent LAN databypasses the GPROC/GPROC2.

GSM-100-323LANX


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Extended LANdata switching

In configurations of more than one shelf, the LANX allows the local LAN data to beextended to another shelf via optical fibre connected to a LANX in the other shelf.

Any of the GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf controls local LAN data switching betweenshelves. Control is via the serial bus connected to the LANX signal, LANLOCAL/EXTERNAL.

Logic 1

A logic 1 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switchsignals as follows:

S LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optictransmitter stage. The optical transmitter provides a Tx data signal, consisting ofthe local LAN data of this shelf, which is transmitted via fibre optic to a LANX inanother shelf.

S Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATAOUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.

Logic 0

A logic 0 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switchsignals from LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the LAN DATAOUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.

This bypasses the LANX fibre optic transmitter and receiver stages consequentlydisabling local LAN extension to another shelf.

Power loss

If the local LANX loses dc power, the Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage isswitched (looped back) to the optical transmitter, providing a Tx data signal via fibre opticto the LANX in another shelf.

Bus arbiter

The LANX bus arbiter decides which GPROC/GPROC2 is allowed to write data to theMCAP bus via the LAN DATA IN line. Each GPROC/GPROC2, 0 to 7, can assert itsrespective BUS REQUEST line. The bus arbiter starts by monitoring GPROC/GPROC20 slot.

If GPROC/GPROC2 0 has an active BUS REQUEST line, the bus arbiter asserts theGPROC/GPROC2 0 BUS GRANT line. GPROC/GPROC2 0 seizes the MCAP bus andwrites data to the bus. When GPROC/GPROC2 0 has finished writing data to the MCAPbus, it deactivates the BUS REQUEST line. This frees the bus and the bus arbiteractivates the BUS GRANT line of the next higher numbered GPROC/GPROC2 with anactive BUS REQUEST line.

GSM-100-323 LANX


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–75

Redundant LAN

If the redundant GPROC/GPROC2 LAN interface is used, a redundant LANX is required.Each LANX has two serial bus interfaces for communications with theGPROC/GPROC2. The selection of which LAN interface is to be used is determined bythe GPROC/GPROC2.

Shelf ID

The shelf ID is a unique hexadecimal number assigned to each BSU or RXU shelf. TheLANX is fitted with a 16-position (hexadecimal encoded) rotary switch, which defines theshelf ID number of the shelf containing the LANX. The shelf ID is read by theGPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus interface. The ID number is used by the BSSsoftware when configuring the BSU or RXU.

No two shelves at a site can have the same shelf ID. When a redundant LANX is presentin a shelf, it must have the same ID number as the primary LANX.

The following rules apply:

S A BSU shelf in a BSC is numbered 0 to D (hexadecimal).

S A BSU shelf in a BTS is numbered F to 2 (hexadecimal).

Front panel

The front panel of the LANX incorporates:

S Rx fibre optic input connector. This connects to the Tx fibre optic output of a LANXin another shelf.

S Tx fibre optic output connector. This connects to the Rx fibre optic input of a LANXin another shelf.

S Rotary switch for setting the BSU/RXU shelf ID number.

GSM-100-323LANX


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

LANX diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the LANX module:

FIBRE OPTICRECEIVER


MUX

LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL

MUX

MUX

MUX

BUS GRANT 0

LAN DATA OUT 0

BUS REQUEST 0

LAN DATA IN 0

INSERT 0

BUS GRANT 1

LAN DATA OUT 1

BUS REQUEST 1

LAN DATA IN 1

INSERT 1

BUS GRANT 2

LAN DATA OUT 2

BUS REQUEST 2

LAN DATA IN 2

INSERT 2

GPROCSLOT 0

GPROCSLOT 1

GPROCSLOT 2

GPROCSLOT 7

GPROCSLOTS

3, 4, 5, 6

BUS GRANT 7

LAN DATA OUT 7

BUS REQUEST 7

LAN DATA IN 7

INSERT 7

BUS ARBITER

POWER FAIL DETECT &

LANLOCAL/EXTERNAL

LOGIC

SELECTSHELF ID NUMBER

BSS SERIAL BUS A

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

BSS SERIAL BUS B

ROTARYSWITCH

SERIALINTERFACE

DC INPUTPOWER

DISTRIBUTION

Rx DATA

Tx DATA

GSM-100-323 PIX


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

3–77

PIX

Overview

Refer to the block diagram on the next page.

The parallel interface extender (PIX) module provides:

S An input/output (I/O) interface for customer site equipment.

S The interface logic between the GPROC and external customer alarm devicessuch as relays and switches.

S Eight optically isolated inputs and four relay outputs.

Requirements

PIX modules can be fitted in the following slots of a BSU or RXU shelf assembly:

S BTS6: slots U16, U17 and U18.

S BTS4 and BTS5: slots U15 and U16.

PIX module

The diagram shows a PIX module:

ALARM (GREEN) LED

CONNECTOR IS CABLED TO TOP OFCABINET FOR INTERCONNECT TOCUSTOMER SITE EQUIPMENT

(ON = NO ALARMS)(OFF = CUSTOMER ALARM DETECTED)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GSM-100-323PIX


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

PIX diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the PIX module:

DC to DCCONVERTEROPTO–

COUPLERSURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S1SENSE D1

SERIAL BUSTRANSCEIVER

OPTO–COUPLER

SURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S2SENSE D2

OPTO–COUPLER

SURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S3SENSE D3

OPTO–COUPLER

SURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S4SENSE D4

OPTO–COUPLER

SURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S5SENSE D5

OPTO–COUPLER

SURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S6SENSE D6

OPTO–COUPLER

SURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S7SENSE D7

OPTO–COUPLER

SURGEPROTECTION

SENSE S8SENSE D8

RELAYDRIVERRELAY

N. O. 1N. C. 1

RELAYDRIVER

RELAY

COM 1

RELAYDRIVER

RELAY

RELAYDRIVER

RELAY

N. O. 2N. C. 2COM 2

N. O. 3N. C. 3COM 3

N. O. 4N. C. 4COM 4

TOCUSTOMEREQUIPMENT

EARTH

+12 V

+12 V–12 V

BSS SERIAL BUS A

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

BSS SERIAL BUS B

62 PIN “D”CONNECTOR

FROMCUSTOMEREQUIPMENT

GREENLED

+5 V


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 4

Power, fans & interconnections

GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

GSM-100-323


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 4Power, fans & interconnections i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .









GSM-100-323


GMR-0168P02901W03-A










68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–1

Overview

Introduction

This chapter describes the following pieces of cabinet equipment:

S Power supplies.

– Digital power supply module (DPSM).

– Enhanced power supply module (EPSM).

– Integrated power supply module (IPSM).

– Power converter unit (PCU).

S Power distribution units (PDUs).

– Distribution alarm board (DAB).

– Power alarm board (PAB).

– Power distribution board (PDB) and alarm interface board (AIB).

– Circuit breaker panel.

S Fan cooling systems.

– Fan power converter unit (FPCU).

S Interconnect panels.

In this chapter

Do not fit equipment in any cabinet not listed in the “Applies to” section ofthe equipment description.

CAUTION

All information given is valid for GSM, extended GSM (EGSM) and DCS1800 systemsunless otherwise indicated.

GSM-100-323Power supply modules


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Power supply modules

Introduction

Ensure that the correct power supply module is fitted for the input used.CAUTION

There are three compartments at the base of the BSU shelf assembly with slide-inmountings for plug-in power supply modules (PSMs):

These cabinets ... Use this type of power supply ...

BTS4 and BTS5 Digital power supply modules (DPSMs)

Positive earth BTS6 Integrated power supply modules (IPSMs)

Negative earth BTS6 Enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs)

The left compartment is for an optional redundant PSM. If the configuration of a particularcabinet does not require a redundant PSM, a blanking plate is fitted over thecompartment. The redundant PSM must be compatible with the other cabinet powerunits.

Cabinet powerrequirements

The table shows the power requirements of the various cabinets:

Supply System Cabinet type

Earth Voltage BTS4 BTS5 BTS6

Negative +27 V GSM900 75 A 85 A 95 A

DCS1800 70 A –– 85 A

Positive –48 V GSM900 45 A –– 60 A

DCS1800 40 A –– 55 A

–60 V GSM900 35 A –– 50 A

DCS1800 32 A –– 45 A

GSM-100-323 DPSM


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–3

DPSM

Overview

The digital power supply (DPS) system for each BSU consists of up to three plug-inenhanced power supply modules (DPSMs). The DPS can only be fitted to GSM900systems.

The DPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc inputpower to the following dc outputs:

S +5 V (� 2% at 85.5 A).

S �12 V (� 5% at 2.5 A).

The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each DPSM in parallel.

The DPSMs in the DPS system load-share:

S Two of the DPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped SHELF.

S The third DPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.

A DPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via theserial bus.

DPSM view

The following shows the DPSM:

ACTIVE LED (GREEN): ON WHEN ALLOUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENTAND WITHIN TOLERANCE.

ALARM LED (RED):ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARMCONDITIONS EXIST.OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITIONEXISTS.

GND (EARTH FOR +5BV OUTPUT)GND (EARTH FOR +5BV OUTPUT)+5BV+5BV

CGND (CHASSIS EARTH)VINA− (0 V INPUT)VINA+ (+27 V INPUT)

25−PIND−TYPECONNECTOR(FEMALE)

(REAR VIEW)

GSM-100-323DPSM


GMR-0168P02901W03-A


Normal operation

During normal operation, the DPSMs share the load current demand of the shelfmodules:

S Half of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a two-DPSM system.

S One third of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a three-DPSM system.

Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the shelf modules.

Redundancy

Two DPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a shelf. A thirdDPSM can be added for redundancy.

When plugged into the backplane, all DPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, sothat the DPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual DPSM; any thirdDPSM is redundant (n+1).

Power supply shutdown

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty DPSM, the output circuits of themalfunctioning DPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the DPSM alarmLED is switched on. The malfunctioning DPSM informs the GPROC of the shutdowncondition.

Monitoring circuits

Parallel output connections allow each DPSM to sense its own output lines for:

S Output voltage regulation.

S Over-voltage protection to shut the DPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2to 1.3 times the rated output.

S Over-current protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for largeoverloads) if the output current exceeds:

– 1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output.

– 1.15 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and –12 V outputs.

The shelf’s GPROC/GPROC2 also monitors the status of each DPSM, via a serial alarmlink on the backplane, for:

S Loss of dc input voltage.

S Loss of output voltage.

S Overtemperature.

S Loss of serial link.

GSM-100-323 DPSM


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–5

Circuit protection

Additional internal DPSM circuit protection includes:

S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent DPSM damage using an input seriesdiode to block reverse voltages.

S Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via theserial port, and shut the DPSM down, if the DPSM ambient temperature exceeds asafe level.

After an alarm condition has ceased, normal DPSM operation is automatically restored.

Serial link

The serial link carries the following information and flags an alarm if an unexpected stateor failure occurs:

Address Device location

Slot 0 – 2

Revision DPSM Alarms

I/P FailO/P FailOvertemp

LED display

Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the DPSM to indicate the following:

S Active (Green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits.

S Alarm (Red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.

DPSM diagram

The diagram shows a functional block diagram of the DPSM:

SERIAL LINK

VOUT (–12 V)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

REDLED

GREENLED

VIN (+27 V)

POWERCONVERTER

ANDSYSTEMMONITOR

VOUT (+12 V)

VOUT (+5.V)

INPUT FAILOUTPUT FAILOVERTEMPER

GSM-100-323EPSM


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

EPSM

Overview

The enhanced power supply (EPS) system for each BSU in a negative earth (+27 V)system consists of up to three plug-in enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs). TheEPSM can be fitted to negative earth BTS6 cabinets.

The EPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc inputpower to the following dc outputs:

S +5 V (� 2% at 85.5 A).

S �12 V (� 5% at 2.5 A).

The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each EPSM in parallel.

When three EPSMs are fitted in the EPS system, they load-share as follows:

S Two EPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU.

S The third EPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.

An EPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC via the serialbus.

EPSM view

The following shows the EPSM:

ACTIVE LED (GREEN) − ON WHEN ALLOUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENTAND WITHIN TOLERANCE.

ALARM LED (RED) − ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS. +5 V

+5 VRTN (GROUND FOR +5BV OUTPUT)RTN (GROUND FOR +5BV OUTPUT)

C GND (CHASSIS GROUND)V RTN (0BV INPUT)V IN (+27 V INPUT)

252PIN D2TYPECONNECTOR(FEMALE)

(REAR VIEW)

GSM-100-323 EPSM


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–7


Normal operation

During normal operation, the EPSMs share the load current demand of the shelfmodules:

S Half of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a two-EPSM system.

S One third of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a three-EPSM system.

Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the shelf modules.

Redundancy

Two enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs) can provide adequate operating powerfor all modules in a shelf. A third EPSM can be added for redundancy.

When plugged into the backplane, all EPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, sothat the EPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual EPSM; any thirdEPSM is redundant (n+1).


During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty EPSM, the output circuits of themalfunctioning EPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the EPSM alarmLED is switched on. The malfunctioning EPSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of theshutdown condition.

Monitoring circuits

Parallel output connections allow each EPSM to sense its own output lines for:


S Over-voltage protection to shut the EPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2to 1.3 times the rated output.


– 1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output.


The shelf’s GPROC also monitors the status of each EPSM, via a serial alarm link on thebackplane, for:



S Overtemperature.


GSM-100-323EPSM


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Circuit protection

Additional internal EPSM circuit protection includes:

S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent EPSM damage using an input seriesdiode to block reverse voltages.

S Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC via the serial port,and shut the EPSM down, if the EPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.

After an alarm condition has ceased, normal EPSM operation is automatically restored.

Serial link



Slot 0 – 2

Revision EPSM Alarms


LED display

Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the EPSM to indicate the following:



EPSM diagram

The diagram shows a functional block diagram of the EPSM:

SERIAL LINK

VOUT (–12 V)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

REDLED

GREENLED

VIN (+27 V)

POWERCONVERTER

ANDSYSTEMMONITOR

VOUT (+12 V)

VOUT (+5 V)

INPUT FAILOUTPUT FAILOVERTEMPERATURE

GSM-100-323 IPSM


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–9

IPSM

Overview

The integrated power supply (IPS) system for each BSU or RXU in a positive earth(–48 V/–60 V) system consists of up to three plug-in integrated power supply modules(IPSMs). The IPSM can be fitted in positive earth (–48/–60 V) BTS6 cabinets.

The IPSM is a switching type dc – dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc inputpower to the following dc outputs:

S +27.5 V ± 5 % at 45 A (full-load current).

S +5.1 V ± 2 % at 87.5 A (full-load current).

S +12 V ± 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).

S –12 V ± 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).

The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each IPSM in parallel.

When three IPSMs are fitted in the IPS system, they load-share as follows:

S Two IPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU.

S The third IPSM provides n + 1 redundancy.

An IPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC via the serialbus.

IPSM view

The following shows the IPSM:

ACTIVE LED (GREEN) – ON WHENALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES AREPRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE.

ALARM LED (RED) – ON WHEN ONEOR MORE ALARM CONDITIONSEXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARMCONDITION EXISTS.

+5 V+5 VRTN (GROUND FOR +5 V OUTPUT)RTN (GROUND FOR +5 V OUTPUT)

C GND (CHASSIS GROUND)V RTN (0 V INPUT)V IN (–48 V/–60 V INPUT)

25-PIN D-TYPECONNECTOR(FEMALE)

(REAR VIEW)

+27.5 V RTN+27.5 V (OUTPUT)

GSM-100-323IPSM


GMR-0168P02901W03-A


Normal operation

During normal operation, the IPSMs equally share load current demand of the shelfmodules:

S Half of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a two-IPSM system.

S One third of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a three-IPSM system.

Redundancy

Two IPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a shelf. A thirdIPSM can be added for redundancy.

When plugged into the backplane, all IPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, sothat the IPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual IPSM; any third IPSMis redundant (n+1).


During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty PSM, the output circuits of themalfunctioning PSM are isolated from the backplane output line and the PSM alarm LEDis on. The malfunctioning PSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.

Monitoring circuits

Parallel output connections allow each IPSM to sense its own output lines for:


S Over-voltage protection to shut the IPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to1.3 times the rated output.


– 1.05 to 1.3 times the full-load rating of the +5.1 V output.


The BSU or RXU shelf’s GPROC/GPROC2 monitors the status of each IPSM via a serialalarm link on the backplane for:



S Overtemperature.


Circuit protection

Additional internal IPSM circuit protection includes:

S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent IPSM damage using an input seriesdiode that blocks reverse voltages.

S Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via theserial port, then shut the IPSM down, if the IPSM ambient temperature exceeds asafe level.

After an alarm condition has ceased, normal IPSM operation is automatically restored.

GSM-100-323 IPSM


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–11

Serial link



Slot 0 – 2

Revision IPSM Alarms


LED display

Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the IPSM to indicate the following:



IPSM diagram

The following shows a functional diagram of the IPSM:

SERIAL LINK

VOUT (+27.5 V)

VOUT (–12 V)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

REDLED

GREENLED

VIN (–48 V/–60 V)

POWERCONVERTER

ANDSYSTEMMONITOR

VOUT (+12 V)

VOUT (+5 V)

INPUT FAILOUTPUT FAILOVERTEMPERA

GSM-100-323PCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

PCU

Purpose

The power converter unit (PCU) contains up to four power converter (PC) modules. ThePCU is fitted in positive earth (–48/–60 V) BTS4 cabinets. It converts the –48/–60 V dcinput into +27 V dc to supply the following:

S Cooling fans.

S Diversity radio channel units (DRCUs).

S Power alarm board (PAB).

S Receiver front end (RFE) components.

S Remotely tuneable combiner (RTC).

Requirements

The PCU must be fitted in slot 4 of the BTS4 DRCU shelf.

Three PC modules can provide sufficient power for a fully equipped cabinet; a fourth canprovide n+1 redundancy.

Power converterunit

The following shows a PCU.

POWER CONVERTERMODULE

POWER CONVERTERUNIT

GSM-100-323 PCU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–13

Power convertermodule

The following shows a PC module.

9-PIN D-TYPECONNECTOR(FEMALE)

(rear view)

CGND (CHASSIS EARTH)

VIN (−48/−60BV)

VIN (GND)

VOUT (GND)

VOUT (+27BV)

ACTIVE LED (GREEN) − ON WHEN ALLOUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENTAND WITHIN TOLERANCE.

ALARM LED (RED) − ON WHEN ONEOR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST.OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITIONEXISTS.

GSM-100-323PCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

PCU description

The number of PC modules used depends upon the +27 V load current demand, whichdepends upon from the number of DRCUs fitted. The table shows the number of PCmodules required with and without n+1 redundancy.

Number of PC modulesNumber of DRCUs No redundancy With redundancy

1 1 2

2 1 2

3 2 3

4 3 4

When the PCU is connected to the cabinet backplane, all PC module outputs areconnected in parallel. During normal operation, the PC modules equally share the +27 Vdc output load current demand.

The PAB monitors the PCU output, PC module failure and module temperature via aserial data link between the PCU and PAB.

During a shutdown condition due to a PC module failure, the output circuits of themalfunctioning PC module are isolated from the backplane output line, and the PC alarmLED is lit. The malfunctioning PC module informs the PAB of a shutdown condition, andthe PAB forwards an alarm message to the GPROC.

GSM-100-323 PCU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–15

PCU diagram

The following is a functional block diagram of the PCU.

REDLED

POWER CONVERTER 4

PC4 VIN (−48/−60V)

GREENLED

+27BV OUTPUT

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

OVER−TEMPERATURE

+27BV OUTPUT

+27BV OUTPUT

OVER−TEMPERATURE

REDLED

GREENLED

REDLED

GREENLED

+27BV OUTPUT

OVER−TEMPERATUREREDLED

GREENLED

OVER−TEMPERATURE

PC3 VIN (−48/−60V)

PC2 VIN (−48/−60V)

PC1 VIN (−48/−60V)

POWER CONVERTER 3

POWER CONVERTER 2

POWER CONVERTER 1

MODULE FAIL

MODULE FAIL

MODULE FAIL

MODULE FAIL

GSM-100-323PCU


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

PC moduledescription

The PC module is a switching type dc-dc converter that plugs into the PCU backplane.DC input power at –48/–60 V is applied via the associated circuit breaker in the PDU.The PC module converts the input voltage to a regulated output of +27 V ± 1% at 26 A(full load current).

The PC module monitors its own +27 V output for the following purposes:


S Over-voltage protection to shut the module down if the output voltage exceeds1.25 times the rated output.

S Over-current protection to provide foldback voltage/current output limiting if theoutput current exceeds 1.15 to 1.5 times full load rating.

The PC module is also protected against:

S Input dc reverse polarity protection. The PC module trips the cabinet circuitbreaker if the input dc polarity is reversed.

S Thermal protection. The PCU sends an alarm message to the GPROC via thePAB if the ambient temperature of the PC module exceeds a safe level, after whichthe PC module shuts down.

Protection circuit activation, dc input voltage loss or disconnection from the PCUbackplane cause an alarm condition, in which an alarm signal is sent to the GPROC.After an alarm condition has ceased, normal operation resumes.

Two LEDs are mounted on the front of each PC module to indicate the following:

S Active (Green). On when output voltages are present and within tolerance.

S Alarm (Red). On when one or more alarm conditions exist.

GSM-100-323 PDU


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–17

PDU

Overview

The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and:

S Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet.

S Provides an alarm interface.

It consists of a circuit breaker panel and one of the following:

S A distribution alarm board (DAB).

S A power alarm board (PAB).

S A power distribution board (PDB) with an alarm interface board (AIB).

Input power

DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routedto:

S The VIN bus bar.

S The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.

A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from:

S The power supply modules (PSMs) in the lower shelf in positive earth (–48/–60 V)cabinets.

S The VIN and GND busbars via busbar links in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.

GSM-100-323DAB


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

DAB

Purpose

The distribution alarm board (DAB):

S Distributes +27 V dc to units within the cabinet via 25 fuses.

S Monitors alarm lines.

S Passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2.

The DAB processes operational failure signals from:

S Ruptured fuses.

S The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.

S VSWR monitoring (BTS6 only).

Two bi-coloured LEDs (D43 and D8) are mounted on the DAB to indicate DAB- andcabinet-based faults. The other LEDs indicate fuse failures according to the tables in thissection. The DAB can be fitted to BTS6 cabinets.

Requirements

The DAB is fitted in the PDU shelf.

DAB diagram

The diagram shows a DAB:

F4 F5 F6F7F8 F9

F10 F11 F12F13 F14F15 F18

F19

F20

F21 F22 F23F24F25F26

F27 F28F29F30

PC7

PC3

PC4

PC5 PC6

PC2

U4

0 VLED

S1

S2

D43

LEDD21

LEDD23

LEDD24

LEDD27

LEDD29

LEDD31

LEDD32

LEDD33

LEDD35

LEDD37

LEDD38

LEDD41

LEDD42

LEDD40

LEDD39

LEDD36

LEDD34

LEDD30

LEDD28

LEDD26

LEDD25

LEDD22

+27 V

LEDD8

GSM-100-323 DAB


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–19

Fuses and LEDs

The table details the functions of the DAB fuses and LEDs:

Fuse Rating Power to LED

F4 0.5 A Preselector 1B D27



F7 0.5 A Preselector 1A D24



F10 0.5 A Receiver matrix (main power) D22

F11 0.5 A Receiver matrix (redundantpower)

D25

F12 4 A Internal remotely tuneablecombiner (main power)

D28

F13 4 A Internal remotely tuneablecombiner (redundant power)

D26

F14, F15 4 A External remotely tuneablecombiner (main power)

D30

F18 2 A VSWR meter supply(redundant power)

D42

F19 0.5 A DAB supply

F20 2 A VSWR meter supply (mainpower)

D40

F21 2 A Upper fan 5 D33



F24 2 A Lower fan 2 D38



F27 2 A External receiver multicoupler(main power)

D36

F28 2 A External receiver multicoupler(redundant power)

D39

F29, F30 4 A External remotely tuneablecombiner (redundant power)

D34

GSM-100-323DAB


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Switch settings(BTS6)

DAB switches S1 and S2 set the following configurations in the BTS6:

Function Switch Position Setting

VSWR1 (Sector 1) S1 1 As required (ON = VSWR1selected)



Spare S1 4 OFF

BB O/P2 S1 5 OFF (if battery backup selected)ON (if battery backup not installedor installed but not selected)

BB O/P1 S1 6 ON

BB I/P2 S1 7 ON

BB I/P1 S1 8 ON

DRCU5 S2 1 ON (if fitted)






Spare S2 7 OFF

BBB ID S2 8 OFF

Alarm functions

The DAB produces alarms for several different devices and modules:

S 25 fuses.

S Battery backup input and output alarms.

S VSWR monitor.

S Multicoupler.

S Six circuit breakers.

S Six fan alarms.

Each signal from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to a TTL highlevel. Under no-fault conditions, the TTL output is held at a high level. If one or morefuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low.

The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has eight status inputs,which are multiplexed to obtain the required alarm functionality.

GSM-100-323 DAB


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–21

Visual warnings

Each +27 V (nominal) fuse protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has acorresponding LED indicator on the DAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a faultcondition, and the associated alarm line goes low.

The DAB also provides visual warnings for alarms via two bi-coloured LEDs:

S D43 indicates any internal cabinet or multicoupler and combiner failure.

S D8 indicates a fuse failure on the DAB only.

Both LEDs are driven by the master GPROC/GPROC2 in response to alarms generatedby the DAB; red indicates an alarm, otherwise the LEDs remain green. If the masterGPROC/GPROC2 is not running then both LEDs default to red.

Communications

The DAB communicates with the master GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus link. Themaster GPROC/GPROC always initiates connections, in which all modules respond withstatus reports on the serial bus.

The DAB processes operational failure reports from the following:

S Ruptured fuses.

S Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers, which aremonitored by the master GPROC/GPROC2 directly).

S Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.

S Hardware failures reported directly to the DAB are individually sent to the masterGPROC via the serial bus.

The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf.The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as ±12 V) deliver isolated outputs.Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earthrelative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed arereferenced to cabinet earth.

GSM-100-323PAB


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

PAB

Purpose

The power alarm board (PAB) located in the PDU processes operational failure reportsfrom the following:

S Ruptured fuses.

S Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers).

S Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.

S Hardware failures that are reported directly to the PAB, are individually sent to theGPROC via the serial bus.

The PAB provides +27 V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuits for cabinet equipmentand fuse-protected +5 V DRAM backup power for the digital modules in the BSU andRXU shelves. Each fused branch has a corresponding LED indicator on the PAB, whichlights when the fuse is ruptured. The PAB can be fitted to BTS4 cabinets.

The PAB also has a bi-coloured LED which turns red to indicate a PAB-based fault. ThePAB maintains the bicoloured LED on the cabinet front door at green to indicate that thesystem has power applied.

Diagram

The diagram shows a PAB:

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25

F26

F27

F28

F29

F30

PC1PC2

PC3PC4

PC5

PC6 PC7 PC8 PC9PC10

PC11

PC12PC13 PC14

U32

LED1

LED2

LED3

LED4

LED5

LED6

LED7

LED8

LED9

LED10

LED11

LED12

LED13

LED14

LED16

LED17

LED18

LED19

LED20

LED21

LED22

LED23

LED24

LED25

LED26

LED15

JU1JU2JU3

LED27

GSM-100-323 PAB


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–23

Jumpers

Jumper JU1 must be fitted on POS, as shown in the diagram, for +27V cabinets, or toNEG for –48/60V cabinets.

Normally, the +5 V DRAM voltage is supplied to the BSU backplane by the DPSMs. Ifthe DPSMs fail to deliver the +5 V DRAM supply, due to cabinet input power failure orDPSM failure, the PAB converts either an external +27 V backup supply (input powerprotection) or the +27 V cabinet supply (DPSM failure protection) to a fused +5 V DRAMsupply. The desired option is selected using jumpers JU2 and JU3, as shown below.

Connect pins 1–2 on both jumpers for INTERNAL power conversionINT EXT

JU2

JU3

1

1

Connect pins 2–3 on both jumpers for EXTERNAL backup power

Set to POS (JU1 pins 2 – 3) JU1POSNEG 1

Fuses and LEDs

The table details the functions of the PAB fuses and LEDs:

F1, F2 4BA Lower Shelf +5BV DRAM battery backup 1F3 4BA 27BV input to DRAM battery backup 2F4 0.5BA Preselector 1b 3F5 0.5BA Preselector 2b 4F6 0.5BA Preselector 3b 5F7 0.5BA Preselector 1a 6F8 0.5BA Preselector 3a 7F9 0.5BA Preselector 2a 8F10 0.5BA Receiver Matrix (Main Power Input) 9F11 0.5BA Receiver Matrix (Redundant Power Input) 10F12 4BA Internal Remotely Tuneable Combiner (Main Power) 11F13 4BA Internal Remotely Tuneable Combiner (Redundant Power) 12F14, F15 4BA External Remotely Tuneable Combiner (Main) 13F16, F17 4BA Upper Shelf +5BV DRAM battery backup 14F18 2BA VSWR Meter Supply Redundant Power 15F19 0.5BA PAB Supply 16F20 2BA VSWR Meter Supply Main Power 17F21 2BA Upper Fan 5 18F22 2BA Upper Fan 4 19F23 2BA Upper Fan 3 20F24 2BA Lower Fan 2 21F25 2BA Lower Fan 1 22F26 2BA Lower Fan 0 23F27 2BA External Receiver Multicoupler (Main Power) 24F28 2BA External Receiver Multicoupler (Redundant Power) 25F29, F30 4BA External Remotely Tuneable Combiner (Redundant) 26

Fuse Rating Power Supplies LED

GSM-100-323PAB


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Alarm functions

The PAB alarms several different devices and modules:

S 26 fuses.

S Four +5 V DRAM backup fuses.

S –48/–60 V converter alarms.

S The multicoupler alarm.

S Eight circuit breakers.

S Six fan alarms.

The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has seven status inputsavailable. To obtain the required alarm functionality, the inputs to the status pins aremultiplexed.

The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf.The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as ±12 V) deliver isolated outputs.Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earthrelative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed arereferenced to cabinet earth.

In order to preserve the isolation between the two grounds present in the PAB,opto-isolators between the multiplexer/data selector outputs and status inputs are usedwhere needed.

Fuse protectedcircuits

The cabinet has fuse-protected branch circuits for the following internal and externalcabinet equipment:

S +5 V DRAM backup to lower BSU.

S Each cabinet cooling fan.

S Each preselector in the RFE.

S Receiver matrix module (internal and external).

S Remotely tuneable channel combiner module (internal and external).

S Receiver multicoupler (external).

S +27 V DRAM backup battery (external).

Visual warnings

Each +27V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has acorresponding LED indicator on the PAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a faultcondition, and the associated alarm line goes low.

The PAB also provides visual warnings for alarms through two bicoloured LEDs.

S The first LED is mounted on the cabinet door. This LED indicates failures in:

– An internal cabinet function.

– External multicoupler and combiner.

S The second LED (LED27) is on the lower left corner of the PAB and signals a fusefailure on the PAB only.

GSM-100-323 PAB


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–25

Input signals

Fuse alarm levels

Each of the signals from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to aTTL high level.

Circuit breaker alarms

Depending on the cabinet fit, the following signals from circuit breakers are fed to thePAB:

S BTS4 (–48/–60 V):

– Four signals to sense the DRCU circuit breakers and four signals to sensethe –48/–60 V dc to dc converter input voltages. The output from eachconverter circuit breaker, at a nominal –48 V or –60 V level, is brought to aTTL high level.

S BTS4 (+27 V):

– Five signals to sense the DRCU circuit breakers.

S BSSC:

– Two signals to sense the –48/–60 V dc to dc fan power converter inputvoltages. The output from each converter circuit breaker, at a nominal–48 V or –60 V level, is brought to a TTL high level.

Multicoupler alarm

Under no-fault conditions the TTL level output is held at a high level. If one or morefuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low.

Converter alarms

Two –48 V or –60 V dc to dc converter alarm signals are detected. One signal is an overtemperature indication, the other a low voltage failure. Under no-fault conditions the TTLlevel output is held high. If one or both failures occur the TTL level is low.

+5 V backup supply

The PAB also supplies current to the digital shelves for the purpose of a backup supply.The device used to perform this function is a 150 W dc to dc converter which delivers anoutput of 16 A at a nominal +5 V. The converter is configured to give a +4.85 V output.This backup power, which is for the GPROC and LANX modules, is switched in only inthe event of a loss of the primary base station cabinet input power.

GSM-100-323PAB


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Serial bus

The serial bus allows the GPROC bus master to connect to, and communicate with, thePAB.

Status word

The function of the status word is to report any alarms that occur to the master GPROC.Under normal (no alarm) operating conditions, bits S0–S2 and S4–S6 are high while bitsS3 and S7 are low.

Transmit enable

As the serial bus communication link is bidirectional, allowing the PAB to receive andtransmit information along the same signal path, a one-shot serial bus access circuit isused to provide an 10 ms access/transmit window. The command strobe (CS) pulse isgenerated by the addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter ( AART) after itreceives a valid command word. The CS pulse signals the one-shot to send the 10 mspulse to the receive and transmit circuitry, allowing data transmission.

Transmit and receive

When the transmit enable 10 ms pulse is active, the PAB can send data (input data andstatus words) on the serial bus. The A/B select line decides on which serial data line theinformation is to be received from the GPROC.

Reset

The ART could enter an unknown state at switch–on, therefore its reset is tied to anundervoltage sensing circuit. This allows the AART to receive power before it is reset.

Timing

A MC406 crystal oscillator provides the 307.2 kHz clock frequency. This frequency isthen internally divided by 64 to derive the receive data strobe and the data clock rate(4800 Hz).

GSM-100-323 PAB


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–27

–48/–60 V statusinputs

The status inputs S0–S7 respond to the following alarms on the (–48/–60 V working)cabinet:

Status input ... Respond to alarms from the following ...

S0 DRCU 0 (CB1), DRCU 1 (CB2), DRCU 2 (CB3), DRCU 3 (CB4);preselector 1A (F7), preselector 2A (F9), preselector 3A (F8) and–48/–60 V converter 1 (CB5).

S1 Matrix 1 (F10), matrix 2 (F11); internal combiner 1 (F12), internalcombiner 2 (F13), external combiner 1 (F14 and 15), externalcombiner 2 (F29 and 30); multicoupler 1 (F27) and multicoupler 2(F28).

S2 Fan 0 (F26), fan 1 (F25), fan 2 (F24), fan 3 (F23), fan 4 (F22) andfan 5 (F21) power supplies; –48/–60 V converter temperature failand +27 V DRAM backup input supply.

S3 +27 V PAB supply (F19); preselectors 1B (F4), 2B (F5), 3B (F6);–48/–60 V converters 1 (CB5) and 2 (CB6), –48/–60 V converter failand multicoupler alarm.

S4 +5 V DRAM supply (lower shelf) (F1 and 2) and (upper shelf) (F16and 17).

S5 –48/–60 V converters 3 (CB7) and 4 (CB8) and fans 0–5 stallalarms.

S6 +27 V PAB supply (F19).

S7 Not used.

GSM-100-323PAB


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BTS4 (+27 V)status inputs

The status inputs S0–S7 respond to the following alarms on the BTS-4 (+27 V working)cabinet:

Status input ... Respond to alarms from the following ...

S0 (D)RCU 0 (CB1), (D)RCU 1 (CB2), (D)RCU 2 (CB3) (D)RCU 3(CB4) (D)RCU 4 (CB5) and preselector 1A (F7), preselector 2A(F9), preselector 3A (F8).

S1 Matrix 1 (F10), matrix 2 (F11); internal combiner 1 (F12), internalcombiner 2 (F13), external combiner 1 (F14 and 15), externalcombiner 2 (F29 and 30); multicoupler 1 (F27) and multicoupler 2(F28).

S2 Fan 0 (F26), fan 1 (F25), fan 2 (F24), fan 3 (F23), fan 4 (F22) andfan 5 (F21) power supplies and +27 V DRAM backup input supply.

S3 +27 V PAB supply (F19); preselectors 1B (F4), 2B (F5), 3B (F6) andmulticoupler alarm.

S4 +5 V DRAM supply (lower shelf) (F1 and 2) and (upper shelf) (F16and 17).

S5 Fans 0–5 stall alarms.

S6 +27 V PAB supply (F19).

S7 Not used.

Signal routeing

Each of the above signals, with the exception of the +5 V DRAM supply, are first broughtto a TTL level before being fed to a data selector, which selects the appropriate input.The input is passed through an opto-isolator to ensure the signal is isolated between themain and digital grounds. The output of the opto-isolator is routed to the appropriatestatus input of the AART.

Signal timing

Since the data selectors that drive the status inputs S0–S3 and S5 are referenced tomain ground, the clocking signals, and output from the AART, are opto-isolated beforeclocking the data selectors. The status input S4 is driven from a data selector that isreferenced to digital ground and is clocked directly from the AART.

GSM-100-323 PDB and AIB


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–29

PDB and AIB

OverviewThe PDU in BSSC and BTS5 cabinets comprises an alarm interface board (AIB) and apower distribution board (PDB). The PDU can only be fitted in a BTS5 cabinet.

AIB description

The AIB circuits operate from:

S +27 V and optional +27 V DRAM backup from the PDB.

S +5 V from digital power supplies via the BSU backplane.

Normally the +5 V DRAM voltage for a GPROC’s dynamic RAM is supplied to the BSUbackplane by the DPSM. If the primary +27 V is removed from the cabinet, the AIBconverts the +27 V DRAM backup to a fused +5 V DRAM voltage, which is supplied tothe BSU backplane.

+5 V DRAM voltage fuses and usage are as follows:

S F1 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the upper BSU shelf backplane.

S F2 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the lower BSU shelf backplane.

The AIB monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC and provides acomposite alarm signal for the cabinet alarm LED.

The AIB combines all alarms into one common alarm output which is routed to thecabinet alarm LED mounted on the cabinet front door. When the LED is on, a hardwareand/or software failure condition exists within the cabinet. There is also a bi-colouredLED mounted on the AIB which indicates an AIB based fault.

The AIB processes operational failure signals from:

S Ruptured fuses.

S The protected side of circuit breakers (except DPSM circuit breakers).

S The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.

AIB viewThe following shows an AIB:

PC8

PC7

JU5

PC5

PC6

PC9

PC2

F1F2PC1

PC3SERIALCHIP

JU1

JU2

JU3

JU4

DS1

PDB descriptionThe PDB distributes +27 V and +5 V to units within the cabinet through 25 fuses. ThePDB reports fuse failures to the AIB and also provides a fused circuit for the optional27 V DRAM backup battery which connects to the DRAM port on top of cabinet.

The table shows the functions of the PDB fuses:

GSM-100-323PDB and AIB


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Fuse Voltage Rating Power to

1 to 5 60 25 A Not used (May or may not be installed)

6 to 10 60 0.5 A Not used (May or may not be installed)

11 & 12 60 5 A Not used (May or may not be installed)



17 60 2 A Lower Fan 0



20 60 2 A Upper Fan 0 (If installed)



23 60 4 A Spare

24 60 4 A DRAM Back-up

25 60 5 A Alarm Interface Board

PDB diagram

The diagram shows a PDB:

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

PC3 PC5

PC6

PC7 PC8

PC4

PC2

PC1

+275V

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25

+275V +275V

GND GND GND1

1

1

11 11

1

GSM-100-323 Circuit breakers


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–31

Circuit breakers

Purpose

Power is distributed within the cabinet via the circuit breakers. This section details thefunction of each circuit breaker in each cabinet.

BSSC with PAB

Eight circuit breakers distribute power to units in a BSSC cabinet with a PAB-type PDU.

S CB4 and CB5 provide -48/–60 V power to the fan power converters in positiveground cabinets only.

S CB6, CB7 and CB8 provide power to the DPSMs in the upper BSU or RXU shelf:

– In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply –48/–60 V.

– In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V.

S CB9, CB10 and CB11 provide power to the DPSMs in the lower BSU or RXU shelf:



BTS4

Ten circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BTS4 cabinet.

S CB1, CB2, CB3 and CB4 (20 A) provide +27 V power to DRCUs 0 to 3.

S CB5 and CB8 provide -48/-60 V power to the PCU in positive ground cabinets only.

S CB9, CB10 and CB11 (30 A) provide power to the DPSMs in the BSU:



BTS5

Three circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BTS5 cabinet.

S CB0, CB1 and CB2 (50 A) provide +27 V power to the DPSMs in the BSU.

BTS6

Ten circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BTS6 cabinet.

S CB1, at 30 A, provides +27 V power to the DAB.

S CB2 to CB7, at 20 A, provide +27 V power to DRCUs 0 to 5.

S CB8 to CB10, at 60 A, provide power to the PSMs:

– In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply –48/–60 V power tothe IPSMs.

– In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V power to theEPSMs.

GSM-100-323Fan cooling system


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Fan cooling system

Overview

The fan cooling system comprises two fan tray assemblies mounted directly below eachBSU or RXU shelf (in a BTS cabinet the upper fan tray assembly is above the DRCUshelf). Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans.

Cabinet baffling divides the cabinet cooling system into upper and lower cabinet coolingsubsystems. The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflowdeflectors, provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment.

Each fan has a fan stall sensor, which is connected to alarm circuits in the PDU.

Power

In negative earth cabinets, power for the fans is derived from the +27 V bus bar via thePDU.

In positive earth BSSC cabinets, a fan power converter unit (FPCU) is required to derive+27 V from the -48/60 V supply.

The FPCU is mounted above the lower BSU or RXU shelf in positive earth BSSCcabinets. The FPCU is shown below:

FAN POWER CONVERTER UNITINTERFACE

FAN POWER CONVERTERMODULE 2

FAN POWERCONVERTERMODULE 1



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–33

Interconnect panel

Location

The interconnect panel is on top of the cabinet.

Purpose

This panel provides connections for:

S DC input power.

S 2.048 Mbit/s line interconnect modules.

S Customer defined alarm equipment input and output.

S +27 V battery backup input for DRAM.

S +27 V power/alarm for external receiver multicoupler and external remotelytuneable combiner.

The interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routing fibre optic intercabinet cablesinto and out of the cabinet. Feed-through tubes do not compromise the cabinet EMCscreening, as the tubes operate below the waveguide cut off frequency.

The 2.048 Mbit/s line interconnection modules are:

S Type 43 interconnect boards (T43), used for unbalanced lines.

S Balanced-line interconnect boards (BIB), used for balanced lines.

BTS4

Diagram

The diagram shows the interconnect panel for the BTS4:

GK0

PIX0

+27 V BAT. BACKUP

FIBRE OPTIC CABLESFEED-THROUGH TUBE

PIX1

EARTH SMS1 MS3


RX3B RX1BRX2B RX3A RX2A

TX4 TX3 TX2 TX1 TX0

RX1A

EXTERNALCOMBINER

EXTERNALMULTICOUPLER

PHASE 1

PHASE 0

–48/60 V DC(–40 V TO –75 V) 0V

VIN

T43 orBIB

T43 orBIB



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

Connectors

The table details the interconnect panel connectors for the BTS4:


+27 V BattBackup

DRAM backupbattery.

PAB connector PC6 +27 V back-up battery

Rx1A, Rx2A andRx3A.

Receive antennasignals.

Input to Preselectors 1A, 2Aand 3A (upper RFE shelf).

Rx antenna 1A, 2A, 3Aor duplexer 0,1 or 2.

Rx1B, Rx2B,Rx3B.

Diversity receiveantenna signals.

Diversity input topreselectors 1A, 2A and 3A(lower RFE shelf).

Diversity Rx antenna1B, 2B and 3B.

Tx0, Tx1, Tx2,Tx3 and Tx4

Transmit antennasignal.

Refer to interconnectionmatrix or site documentation.

Refer to site specificdocumentation.

ExternalCombiner

External RTC power. PAB connector PC11 External RTC dc powerconnector.

ExternalMulticoupler

External ReceiverMulticoupler dcpower/sense.

PAB connector PC10 External ReceiverMulticoupler dc powerconnector.

MS1 and MS3 Multiple serialinterface ports (up tosix E1/T1 circuits ateach connector; sixTx and six Rxcircuits).

MS1 and MS3 connectorson BSU backplane.

E1/T1 circuits sourceor terminationequipment (via a T43or BIB).

PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarminput/output ports.

Front edge connector of PIXmodules.

Customer alarmequipment.

GK0 Not used. GK0 connector on BSUbackplane.

X21–0 andX21–1.

Not used in thisconfiguration.

Phase 0 andPhase 1.

Cabinet phasing Transmit combiner shelf. Tx phasing harness.



68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–35

BTS5

Diagram


D

D

D

TX4TX3

TX2

MS0

T43

MS2

T43

TX1

TX0GK0

+27 V BAT BACKUP

FIBRE OPTIC CABLESFEED–THROUGH TUBE

+27 V(+20 V TO +30 V)

PHASE 0

PIX0

PIX1


EXTERNALCOMBINER

EXTERNALMULTICOUPLER

PHASE 1

MS1

T43

MS3

T43

+ −

RXARXC

RXB

EARTH STUD

Connectors

The table details the interconnect panel connectors:


+27 V BattBackup

DRAM backupbattery

PDB connector PC8 +27 V backup battery

RxA, RxB, RxC Receive antennasignals

Input to preselectors 1A, 2Aand 3A (upper RFE shelf).

Rx antenna 1A, 2A, 3Aor duplexer port 0,1, 2.

Tx0, Tx1, Tx2,Tx3 and Tx4


Refer to interconnectionmatrix/site documentation.

Refer to site specificdocumentation.

ExternalCombiner

External RTC dcpower.

PDB connector PC5 External RTC dc powerconnector.


External ReceiverMulticoupler dcpower/sense.

PDB connector PC6 External ReceiverMulticoupler dc powerconnector.

MS0 to MS3 Multiple serialinterface ports (up tosix E1/T1 circuits ateach connector; sixTx and six Rxcircuits).

MS0 to MS3 connectors onBSU backplane.

E1/T1 circuits sourceor terminationequipment (via a T43).

PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarminput/output ports.

Front edge connector of PIXmodules.


GK0 Not used in thisconfiguration.

GKO connector on lowerBSU backplane.

D, D and D Not used in thisconfiguration.

Phase 0 andPhase 1

Not used in thisconfiguration.



GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BTS6

Diagram


GK0

PIX0

BATTERY BACKUP


PIX1

EARTHSTUD

MS3 MS1



TX1 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX0

RX1A

EXT C & M + VSWR

PHASE 1PHASE 0

–48/60 V DC(–40 V to –75 V)

0V

VIN

T43 orBIB

T43 orBIB

TX2

Connectors

The table details the interconnect panel connections for the BTS6:


Battery backup DRAM backup battery DAB connector PC4 Backup battery

Rx1A, Rx2A andRx3A


Input to dual pathpreselectors 1, 2, 3 (RFEshelf)

Rx antenna 1A, 2A,3A or duplexer port 0,1, 2

Rx1B, Rx2B andRx3B


Diversity input to dual pathpreselectors 1, 2, and 3(RFE shelf)

Diversity Rx antenna1B, 2B, and 3B

Tx0, Tx1, Tx2,Tx3, Tx4 and Tx5


Refer to interconnectionmatrix/site specificdocumentation

Refer to site specificdocumentation

EXT C & M +VSWR

External RTC dcpower and externalreceiver multicouplerdc power/sense

DAB connector PC6 External RTC andexternal receivermulticoupler dc powerconnector

MS1 and MS3 MSI ports (up to sixE1/T1 circuits at eachconnector; six Tx andsix Rx circuits)

MS1 and MS3 connectorson BSU backplane

E1/T1 circuits sourceor terminationequipment (via a T43or BIB)

PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarminput/output ports

Front edge connector ofPIX modules


GK0 Not used in thisconfiguration


Phase 0 and 1 Cabinet phasing Transmit combiner shelf Tx phasing harness

GSM-100-323 Type 43 interconnect board


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–37

Type 43 interconnect board

Location

Plugs into the interconnect panel through via a 37-pin D-type connector.

Purpose

The T43 interconnect board matches the impedance between the pulse code modulation(PCM) circuit lines and the BSU/RXU backplanes. The board interfaces up to six inputand six output unbalanced coaxial 75 ohm 2.048 Mbit/s lines to the external PCM circuitlines through twelve type 43 coaxial connectors.

The T43 uses 12 transformers to provide impedance matching between the PCM circuitlines and the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1.25 turnsratio to match the external 75 ohm and backplane 120 ohm connections. Each input andoutput is isolated from the backplane by up to 1500 V.

Use the T43 for unbalanced lines.NOTE

T43 diagram

The following shows the T43 interconnect board:

J0

J1

J2

J5

J4

J7

J8

J10

J13 J11

J14

J16

J17

GSM-100-323Type 43 interconnect board


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

T43 connectors

The table details the T43 connectors:

D–Type Function Coaxial D–Type Function CoaxialPin no. Pin no. Pin no. Pin no.

J0-1 MSI_MEGA_Tx1+ J1 Centre J0-20 MSI_MEGA_Tx1–(AC coupled to ground)

J1 Shield

J0-2 MSI_MEGA_Rx1+ J2 Centre J0-21 MSI_MEGA_Rx1–(Ground)

J2 Shield


J4 Shield


J5 Shield


J7 Shield


J8 Shield


J10 Shield


J11 Shield


J13 Shield


J14 Shield


J16 Shield


J17 Shield

Connector J0 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, and 37 are not used

GSM-100-323 Balanced line interconnect board


68P02901W03-A

GMR-01

4–39

Balanced line interconnect board

Location

Plugs into the interconnect board via two 37-pin D-type connectors.

Purpose

The balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) matches the impedance between the pulsecode modulation (PCM) circuit lines and the BSU backplanes. The board providesinterfaces for six input and six output balanced 120 ohm E1/T1 lines.

The board uses 12 transformers to match the impedance between the PCM circuit linesand the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1 turns ratio tomatch the external and backplane 120 ohm connections.

Use the BIB for balanced lines.NOTE

BIB diagram

The following shows the BIB:

J0

J1

GSM-100-323Balanced line interconnect board


GMR-0168P02901W03-A

BIB connectors

The table details the BIB connectors:

Pin no. Function Pin no. Pin no. Function Pin no.

J0–1 MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Tx1+

J1–1 J0–20 MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Tx1–

J1–20

J0–2 MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Rx1+

J1–2 J0–21 MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Rx1–

J1–21

J0–3 Ground J1–3 J0–22 Ground J1–22



J1–23



J1–24




J1–26



J1–27




J1–29



J1–30




J1–32



J1–33




J1–35



J1–36


J0–19 Ground J1–19

CHAPTER 2INSTALLING THE

EQUIPMENT

CHAPTER 3DECOMISSIONING THE

EQUIPMENT

CHAPTER 1 SITE PREPARATION

1st Jun 01 Installation and Configuration: BTS

68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

i

Category 423

Installation and Configuration

GSM-100-423

1st Jun 01ii Installation and Configuration: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W04-A

GSM-100-423


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

iii

Category 423Installation and Configuration i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-100-423

1st Jun 01iv Installation and Configuration: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Chapter 2Installing the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient/ lightning protection 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical fibres 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .










GSM-100-423


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

v
















GSM-100-423

1st Jun 01vi Installation and Configuration: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W04-A







Chapter 3Decommissioning the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 1

Site preparation

GSM-100-423


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

GSM-100-423


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 1Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-100-423


GMR-0168P02901W04-A



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–1

Overview

Introduction

This manual contains installation and decommissioning procedures for Motorola BSSequipment cabinets in the GSM, Extended GSM and DCS1800 systems.

All procedures apply to all types of equipment cabinet unless otherwise stated, forexample some are not applicable to DCS1800.

Hazardous voltages in excess of 50 V dc exist inside –48 V and –60 Vcabinets.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied.Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.

WARNING

Terminology

The term transceiver is used throughout as a generic term to represent all transceivermodules; where information applies only to one module type, this is indicated.

Torque values

Use the torque values listed below when tightening bolts:

Size Torque

Nm lbf

M4 5.4 4

M5 8.2 6

M6 14.8 11

M8 34 22

M10 66 49

M12 126 93

In this chapter

Read this chapter before beginning the installation. It covers installation tool kits, siterequirements, power requirements, optical fibre handling precautions, site visits andcabinet labelling.

GSM-100-423Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment

1st Jun 011–2 Installation and Configuration: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment

IntroductionTwo tool kits are recommended for use when installing GSM cellular sites. Cellular toolkit number one is for installation, and number two is for commissioning. Equipmentrequired for optimization is listed in Chapter 3.

Tool kit oneThe table lists the contents of cellular tool kit number one:

Quantity Description

1 pair Safety goggles

1 Hard hat

1 Dust mask

1 pair Ear defenders

1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead

1 Antistatic mat

1 Torch

1 5-Tray cantilever tool box (22 in)

1 Padlock to fit cantilever tool box

1 Zipped tool case

1 Socket set (A/F/Metric 1/2 in drive)

1 10 in adjustable spanner

1 8 in adjustable spanner

1 each2

Combination spanners A/F:1/4 in, 5/16 in, 3/8 in, 7/16 in, 1/2 in, 9/16 in, 5/8 in, 11/16 in, 7/8 inand 1 in3/4 in

1 Ratchet spanner (9/16 in x 1/2 in)

1 Torque wrench (10-150 ft/lb)

1 Torx driver set (T10 to T30)

1 Allen key set A/F

1 Claw hammer

1 Pipe cutter

1 Cone cutter (up to 1 in)

1 Cone cutter (up to 2 in)

1 Junior hacksaw

10 Replacement blades for junior hacksaw

1 300 mm hacksaw

10 Replacement blades for 300 mm hacksaw

1 pair 6 in side cutters

. . . continued

GSM-100-423 Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–3


1 pair 6 in heavy-duty side cutters

1 pair Wire cutters

1 pair Cable shears

1 Knife with retractable blade

1 pair 8 in combination pliers

1 pair General purpose pliers

1 pair Snipe nose pliers

1 each Screwdrivers 0pt, 1pt and 2pt

1 each Screwdrivers 4 in, 6 in and 8 in

1 Set of jeweller’s screwdrivers

1 Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades)

1 Transpower 110 V (twin outlet)

1 Kango 501 110 V

1 M20 drill bit to fit Kango 501

1 Pistol drill P221 115V

1 24-piece drill bit set 1/16 in to 1/2 in

2 110 V plugs

1 6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet)

1 Soldering iron

1 Soldering iron stand

1 Hand crimp tool

1 Crimp tool for type 43 connectors

1 BNC crimp tool with inserts

1 Telephone plug crimp tool

1 50 mm crimp tool

1 Cable tie gun

1 4 ft wooden step ladder

1 Table vice

1 10 in vice grips

1 7.5 m tape measure

1 12 in steel rule

1 Spirit level (3 ft)

1 Centre punch

1 Pocket scriber

1 10 in half round file

GSM-100-423Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Tool kit twoThe table lists the contents of cellular tool kit number two:


1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead

1 Antistatic mat

1 Marker pen

1 Zipped tool pack case

1 Large sectioned storage box

1 Torx driver set including sizes T10 to T30

1 pair Flush cut wire cutters

1 pair Light duty cable cutters

1 pair Industrial scissors

1 pair GP serrated jaw pliers

1 pair Snipe nose pliers

1 pair Straight point tweezers

1 Screw/nut driver set

1 Screw gripping driver

1 Null modem

1 RS232 mini tester

1 Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder

1 Cable tie gun

1 M to M gender changer

1 Co-ax cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)

GSM-100-423 Site requirements and considerations


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–5

Site requirements and considerations

Introduction

The base site must meet the following criteria.

Structuralrequirements

There must be:

Clearance of at least 775 mm in front of the equipment for operation and maintenancepurposes.

An overhead cable trough, mounted at least 150 mm above the top of the tallest cabinet.

Cabinetdimensions

BTS cabinets have the following dimensions:

Height 2096 mm.

Width 711 mm.

Depth (with door) 416 mm.

Depth (without door) 400 mm.

Operatingenvironment

Temperature 0 _C to +50 _C.

Humidity 20 % to 80 % non-condensing relative humidity (maximum 0.024 gram of water per gram of dry

air).

Airborne particulate matter < 5 milligrams/1000 cubic feet of air.

The BTS cabinet dissipates a maximum of 3500 watts when fully equipped.

Storageenvironment

Temperature –40 _C to +70 _C.

Humidity 10 % to 90 % non-condensing relative humidity

GSM-100-423Site requirements and considerations


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Diagram

The diagram shows the cabinet dimensions and mounting foot details:

416 mm

2096 mm

711 mm

400 mm

TOP VIEW

SIDE VIEW

FRONTFRONT

36.3 mm

25.3 mm

502.6 mm

201.6 mm

MOUNTING FOOT DETAIL

FRONT673 mm

1175 mm

CABINET 1 CABINET 2 CABINET 3

DETAIL A – CABINET DIMENSIONS AND TYPICAL MOUNTING-FOOT DETAIL

DETAIL B – RECOMMENDED CABINET CLEARANCES

400 mm

775 mm

CABINETDOOR

150 mmMINIMUMCLEARANCE

CABLE TROUGH

NOTE: 1.5 mm INSULATORSTRIPS ARE ATTACHED TO THESIDES AND BACK OF ALL CABINETSEXCEPT THE BTS6.

GSM-100-423 Power requirements


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–7

Power requirements

Introduction

BTS cabinets can operate from positive or negative earth supplies at various voltages.

Positive earthBTS cabinets

Positive earth BTS cabinets operate from a –48 V or –60 V dc supply. The maximumpower requirements are:

GSM900

S BTS4 (–48 V) = 45 A.

S BTS4 (–60 V) = 35 A.

S BTS6 (–48 V) = 60 A.

S BTS6 (–60 V) = 50 A.

DCS1800

S BTS6 (–48 V) = 55 A.

S BTS6 (–60 V) = 45 A.

Negative earthBTS cabinets

Negative earth BTS cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, –5 V dc) supply.The maximum power requirements are:

GSM900

S BTS5 (+27 V) = 85 A.

S BTS6 (+27 V) = 95 A.

DCS1800

S BTS6 (+27 V) = 85 A.

Backup power

BTS cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input powerbackup for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices.

The DRAM backup maximum power requirement for each cabinet is:

S 4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc.

An adequate means of routeing cables from the power source to theequipment, for example a cable trough, must be provided (BS 7671 ReferenceMethod 11).

NOTE

GSM-100-423Power requirements


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Overcurrentprotection

The cabinet overcurrent protection device can be:

S A fuse conforming to BS88.

S A main circuit breaker conforming to BS3871.

The device must be of the following rating:

S +27 V cabinets: 100 A.

S –48 V cabinets:

– BTS6: 80 A.

S –60 V cabinets: 63 A.

GSM-100-423 Handling optical fibres


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–9

Handling optical fibres

Introduction

The section details the precautions necessary for the handling of both glass and polymeroptical fibres.

Optical fibre cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of polymer or glass, coatedby a cladding (sometimes in two layers), and an outer sheath providing mechanicalprotection.

The optical fibre acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly, lightmust be propagated with minimal losses from end-to-end of the fibre. A number ofcauses can prevent this from happening, resulting in the potential for the link to becomefaulty.

Protection offibres andconnectors

To maintain good light transmission through the fibre optic link it is essential that theconnector end surfaces and/or bare fibre ends are kept clean at all times. Dust or dirtmust not be allowed to contaminate either the ends of the fibres, or enter the emitters ordetectors on the circuit board.

When an optical fibre is not connected, the protective caps must be fitted at all times tothe ends of the fibre and to all unused connectors on the modules.

Cleaning offibres andconnectors

When cleaning of contaminated optical connectors is deemed necessary, all areas mustbe wiped gently with a lint-free cloth soaked in a suitable cleaning solution.

Care must be taken to ensure the ends of optical fibres are not damaged inany way.

CAUTION

Lint free cloth is the preferred medium for cleaning, since the risk ofcontamination or damage due to the cleaning process is minimal. In extremecircumstances the use of soft clean cotton may be acceptable.The use of cotton buds soaked in cleaning solution is not recommended, sincelint is frequently left on the fibre and the connectors may be wet when thecables are inserted into the connectors

NOTE

Fibre connection

SMA connectors are used at both ends of the glass fibre optic cables. These should betightened to hand tight only when connecting – under no circumstances should anytools, such as pliers or spanners be used to tighten the connectors.

For polymer fibres, the procedures in Connection and disconnection of polymer fibrecables must be adhered to.

GSM-100-423Handling optical fibres


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Minimum bendradius

All optical fibres have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallest circle thatcan be formed, without damage, from a loop of fibre, that is how tight it can be coiled,looped or bent.

Under NO circumstances should fibres be bent tighter than the minimumbend radius.

CAUTION

The minimum bend radius for the optical fibres used in Motorola BSS equipment cabinetsis 30 mm. Refer to Figure 1-1.

Double the bend radius value stated above if the fibre is under tension.

NOTE

As a rule of thumb, the ‘natural’ bend radius of the fibre can be determined by allowingthe fibre to bend under its own weight. This radius will normally be greater than thatspecified above, and it is recommended that this is not exceeded. If in doubt, check bymeasuring accurately.

If a fibre is bent tighter than the minimum bend radius, two effects are possible:

S Excessive light loss from the outside of the bend.

S Fibre fracture due to microscopic imperfections caused by bending. Light isscattered and reflected by the fracture. The damage is permanent and is notrepaired by straightening the fibre.

FIBRE OPTIC CABLE

30 mm30 mm

Figure 1-1 Minimum bend radius of 30 mm (at size)

GSM-100-423 Visiting the site


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–11

Visiting the site

Introduction

Follow these instructions when preparing to work at a site and upon arrival.

Before the visit

Before going to the site:

Step Action

a. Ensure that all team members have adequate testequipment, tools and hardware to carry out their tasks.Check the site folder for any special requirements.

b. Contact the person in charge of the building to advise of theteam’s estimated time of arrival and the expected duration oftheir stay on the site. This will usually have been dealt withpreviously, but it is always advisable to make sure that theinformation has been passed on.

c. Check with the engineer in charge of the project to see ifanything needs to be taken to the site and collect anyoutstanding work for the site to be visited.

d. Ensure that the team read the site access details on eachvisit to a site as local regulations may change.

Arriving at thesite

When entering any site:

Step Action

a. Contact the local OMC and MSC to announce the team’sarrival, indicate your expected time of departure, andarrange for the 2Mbit/s links to be checked, before enteringthe site. Do not enter the site until you have made contactwith its OMC or MSC.

b. Enter the site and check for any building alarms, forexample intruder alarms, that may have been activated byentry.

c. Disable the Halon gas systems (if fitted) and any entryalarms.

d. Read any local instructions.

Occupied sites

In any exchange or occupied building, contact the caretaker or person in charge, who willexplain local regulations and may advise on parking, rubbish disposal and cateringfacilities.

Be as polite and helpful as possible; colleagues may well have to go back to the site at alater date.

GSM-100-423Visiting the site


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Leaving the site

When leaving a site during the installation or optimization period:

Step Action

a. At the end of the working day enable the Halon gas system(if fitted) and any alarm systems disabled on entry.

b. Contact the local OMC or MSC to announce the team’sdeparture.

c. Out of hours, if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC is notstaffed, contact the network control centre or OMC andinform them of the team’s departure.

d. Sign out of the building as necessary.

Never leave vehicles parked on site overnight.

NOTE

Rubbish

At the end of the job, clear all rubbish from the site unless otherwise indicated by thecustomer.

Do not burn rubbish, as the packaging can give off toxic gases.

WARNING

Rural sites

The senior engineer must:

S Ensure that all personnel on site are aware of the country code and the healthregulations relating to water authority sites.

All personnel must:

S Guard against all risk of fire.

S Fasten all gates.

S Drive carefully on country roads and observe all speed restrictions.

S Keep to the paths and tracks across farm land.

S Not leave litter.

Remember that site visits can be traced back if a complaint is made.

GSM-100-423 Visiting the site


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–13

Safety on site

The senior engineer must:

S Advise all staff on site of safety requirements before any work takes place.

S Ensure that cabinets are safely positioned at all times.

Do not move a cabinet without assistance. Cabinets must be safely positionedat all times.

WARNING

All personnel must:

S Wear the safety helmets supplied when antenna or overhead work is in progress,and when local regulations require them.

S Wear the safety goggles, ear protectors and dust masks supplied when drilling.This is particularly important when drilling overhead ironwork.

S Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.

S Stop work if any person in the team is not properly protected.

S Cut cable tie tails to remove sharp edges.



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Cabinet labels

IntroductionThis section details the warning, advisory and other labels on the BTS4, BTS5 and BTS6cabinets.

BTS4 labelsThe diagram shows the position of labels on the BTS4 cabinet:




FRONT OF DOOR


Motorola

12

34 5

6 78

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

20212223

24

25

28

29

30

31

19

27

10

26



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–15

Key to BTS4labels

The table details labels on the BTS4 cabinet:

Key Description Part number

1 Safety glasses 5402275W01

2 Fuse map 5402347W01

3 Circuit breaker 5402349W015402349W02

4 CE mark 5402470W01

5 Safety (for example, EN60 950) 5402489W01

6 T43 connection (-48/-60V cabinets only) 5402401W01

7 Caution non-ionizing radiation 5402282W01

8 Rating label 5402284W015402284W02

9 Danger energy hazard 5402192W01

10 Earth label 5402098W01

11 Serial number (factory marked) N/A

12 Warning live terminals 5409954E01

13 Warning disconnect fuse (part of fan) N/A

14 Panel must be in place 5409816E01

15 ESD 5409951E01


17 Half–size module laser hazard 5402281W01

18 Caution isolate 5402374W01

19 Warning disconnect fuse (part of fan) N/A

20 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard 5402103W01

21 Warranty (calibration) 5402402W01

22 RCU legendorDRCU legend (Including laser)

5409809B01

5402236W01

23 Caution non-ionizing radiation 5402282W01

24 ESD and card map 5409889E01

25 Warning possible laser radiation 5402274W01

26 Open door handle 5402471W01

27 Turn to release, this panel must be lowered 5409816E02


29 Caution isolate (–48/–60 V version only) 5402374W01

30 Hazard 5402234W01

31 Do not obstruct 5402194W01



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

BTS5 labels

The diagram shows the position of labels on the BTS5 cabinet:

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

FRONT OF DOOR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Motorola1

23

45

67

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

20212223

24

25

26

27

2829

30

19

10



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–17

Key to BTS5labels



1 Warning, live terminals 5409954E01


3 Fuse map 5409609F01

4 CE mark 5402470W01

5 Safety (for example, EN60 950) 5402489W01

6 T43 connection label 5402401W01

7 Earth label 5402098W01

8 Caution, non-ionizing radiation 5402282W01

9 Danger energy hazard 5402192W01

10 Rating label 5402284W01

11 Serial number (factory marked) N/A


13 Warning, disconnect fuse (part of fan) N/A


15 ESP 5409951E01


17 Half–size module laser hazard 5402281W01

18 Caution, isolate 5402374W01


20 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard 5402103W01

21 Warranty (calibration) 5402402W01

22 RCU legend (including possible laser hazard)orDRCU legend (including possible laser hazard)

5409809B01

5402236W01


24 ESD and card map 5409889E01

25 Warning, possible laser radiation 5402274W01

26 Open door handle 5402471W01


28 Turn to release, this panel must be lowered 5409816E02

29 Hazard 5402234W01




GMR-0168P02901W04-A

BTS6 labels

The diagram shows the position of labels on the BTS6 cabinet:

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


FRONT OF DOOR


1

2 3

6 78

9

11

13

14

15

16

17

18

20

21

23

24

25

26

19

10

22

54

12

27

28

29

30

31



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

1–19

Key to BTS6labels





3 Fuse map 5402845W01

4 Circuit breaker 5402890W01

5 Serial number

6 T43 connection label 5402401W01


8 Rating label (C01=+27 V, C02=–48 V) 5404316C01/02

9 Warning, live terminals 5402830W01

10 Earth symbol (stamped into metalwork)

11 Alarm label 54044315C01


13 Panel must be in place 5402812W01


15 Half-size module laser hazard 5402281W01

16 Warning laser radiation (on both sides) 5404365C01


18 Caution, isolate 5402374W01


20 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard (radio) 5402103W01

21 Warranty (on both sides) 5402402W01

22 Anti-tip (on both sides) 5402456W01

23 DRCU legend, including laser (radio) 5402038W01

24 Turn to release, this panel must be lowered(radio)

5409816E02

25 ESD and card map 5402832W01

26 Warning, possible laser radiation 5402274W01

27 Panel must be in place 5402812W01



30 Hazard 5402234W01

31 Frequency designation label



GMR-0168P02901W04-A


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 2

Installing the equipment

GSM-100-423


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

GSM-100-423


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 2Installing the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient/ lightning protection 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical fibres 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .










GSM-100-423


GMR-0168P02901W04-A
















GSM-100-423


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

v







GSM-100-423

1st Jun 01vi Installation and Configuration: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W04-A



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–1

Overview

Introduction

Follow the procedures and guidelines in this chapter to install BSS equipment cabinetsand their internal and external interfaces.

To install equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers, powersupplies and antennas, refer to the site specific documentation and the vendorinstructions.


Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied. Removeall rings, watches and other jewellery.

WARNING

In this chapter

Installation consists of the following steps, all of which are described in this chapter:

S Unpacking the equipment and inspecting for visible damage.

S Positioning and securing the cabinets as shown on the floor plan.

S Earthing the cabinets.

S Connecting dc power to the cabinets.

S Inserting modules into the cabinets.

S Connecting external equipment cabling such as transmit and receive antennacables and E1/T1 lines.

S Connecting the inter-cabinet fibre optic cables.

Before starting

Before starting an installation, prepare the site as described in Chapter 1 of this manualand in the site specific documentation.

Cabinet types

This chapter describes the installation procedure for BTS cabinets. The procedure is thesame for all cabinets except where otherwise indicated.

Do not attempt to fit a module in any cabinet or slot for which it is notsuitable.

CAUTION

Delivery

Before the the BSS equipment is delivered, designate an area of the site where theheavy freight and/or moving company can unload the equipment. The equipment must becarefully delivered to the site with the dollies and padding required to move it from theunloading area to the installation point.

GSM-100-423Overview


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Packaging

The cabinets are shipped in wooden crates.

Cabinets are shipped with the following items already installed:

S Cabinet interconnect panel.

S DC power distribution and alarm interface equipment.

S Module mounting shelves.

S Cooling fan assemblies.

S All intra-cabinet cabling.

S Receiver front end modules and bandpass filters (BTS cabinets only).

S Transmit combining and filtering modules (BTS cabinets only).

S Digital modules.

The following items are shipped in separate cartons:

S Power supply modules (PSMs).

S Transceivers (BTS cabinets only).

The external RF equipment cabinet (or frame) is shipped in its own carton. Theequipment to be installed in the frame (duplexer, triplexer, quadraplexer, receivermulticoupler, multicoupler extender or transmit channel combiner modules) and allinter-cabinet cabling is shipped in separate cartons.

Lifting cabinets

An unequipped BTS cabinet can weigh up to 148 kg (325 lb). Handle cabinetswith extreme caution to avoid tipping.

WARNING

BTS cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts,built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect thethreads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured toC.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Onlyeyebolts supplied in this kit must be used.

Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage thatmay have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contactMotorola for replacement.

1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point.

2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.

The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw theeyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed.

WARNING

3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.

4. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plasticinserts.

For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use oflifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to beused, ensure that all such regulations are met.



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–3

Site earthing

This manual summarizes general procedures. For detailed earthing information, refer toGrounding Guidelines For Cellular Radio Installations (68P81150E62).

The cell site equipment must be earthed at the same common earth point as its powersource. Provision must be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and to thecabinet before installing the system cabinets. An earthing terminal (stud) is located onthe interconnect panel on top of each cabinet. Each cabinet must be earthed separately(not daisy chained). For detailed site earthing information, refer to the site specificdocumentation.

Transient/lightningprotection

E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection aspart of the balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) or T43 board. The receive and transmitantenna connections to the building must be fed through coaxial electromagneticprotection (EMP) devices.

Torque values

Use the torque values listed below when tightening bolts:

Size Torque

Nm lbf

M4 5.4 4

M5 8.2 6

M6 14.8 11

M8 34 22

M10 66 49

M12 126 93

Optical fibres

Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before installing fibre optic cables.

GSM-100-423Unpacking the equipment


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Unpacking the equipment

Introduction

Carry out the following procedure with reference to the diagram on the next page.

Procedure

To unpack a cabinet from its shipping crate:

1. Cut the recyclable plastic banding used to secure the wooden crate. Put thebanding in a place where it will not be lost.

2. Remove the eight metal clips that secure the lid of the crate using a claw hammeror a similar levering device. Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost ordamaged.

3. Lift the lid free of the crate. Place the lid where it will not be damaged.

4. Remove the 12 metal clips that secure the sides of the crate using a claw hammer.Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost or damaged.

5. Lift the sides free of the crate. Place the sides where they will not be damaged.

Take care not to scratch or otherwise damage the cabinet.CAUTION

6. Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet.

7. Lift or slide the cabinet off the base of the crate.

8. Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet.

9. Put all the clips in a bag and tie them together with the banding, desiccant bag,barrier bag and the lid, sides and base of the cabinet.

10. Return the dismantled crate as advised by the in-country project manager.

11. Immediately after unpacking the equipment, inspect it for damage and report theextent of any damage to the transport company.

GSM-100-423 Unpacking the equipment


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–5

Shipping crate

The diagram shows the cabinet shipping crate:

LID

SIDE

SIDE

METAL CLIP

BASE

SIDE

SIDE

GSM-100-423Anchoring the cabinet


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Anchoring the cabinet

Introduction

Mounting procedures must conform to local building codes and regulations. Consult thesite authorities before beginning an installation.

Procedure

To secure a cabinet to the floor:

1. Open the cabinet door.

2. For access to the bottom of the cabinet, remove the lower fan housing/air baffleassembly (below the BSU shelf) by removing the four screws that secure it to thecabinet frame; retain the screws for reassembly.

3. Carefully place the cabinet at its anchoring point as shown in the site plan.

Ensure that cabinets are electrically insulated from each other. Cabinets canbe secured to adjacent cabinets or support structure using insulating bolts.

CAUTION

4. Use the mounting foot of the cabinet as a template to mark the location of the fourmounting holes. All four anchoring positions must be used.

Wear safety glasses while drilling holes.

WARNING

Cement dust from drilling concrete flooring is harmful to equipment and wiring.Make sure that the cabinet and any nearby equipment are protected. Use atarpaulin, cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Carefullyclean up any accumulated debris from the anchor installation before exposingthe equipment.

CAUTION

5. Move the cabinet away from the installation point. Drill holes for concretemounting anchors and fit them (Motorola suggests the RAWLNUT 1275).

6. Move the cabinet back to the installation point. Place an insulating shoulderwasher and then a flat washer onto each bolt. Loosely secure each cabinet to theanchors using the bolts with washers (Motorola suggests M12 x 100 bolts for usewith the RAWLNUT 1275 anchors).

7. Tighten the bolts, ensuring that the cabinet remains vertical and level.

8. Replace the lower fan housing/air baffle assembly removed in step 2.

GSM-100-423 Installing the cabinet air deflector


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–7

Installing the cabinet air deflector

Introduction

The SHN4757 air deflector unit is supplied with each cabinet. Installation isrecommended, but is left to the customer’s discretion.

The air deflector mounts on the cabinet door in front of the upper exhaust vent, which isapproximately at the height of a person’s eye when standing in front of the cabinet. Itdirects the airflow upwards without adversely affecting cabinet equipment cooling.

BTS6

The unit comprises a deflector and four mounting screws.

Temporary installation

1. Clip the air deflector on to the cabinet door upper exhaust vent.

Permanent installation

1. Remove the protective caps from the four predrilled holes in the door around theupper exhaust vent.


3. Secure the air deflector to the door using four M5 screws.

BTS4 and BTS5

The unit comprises a deflector and three mounting screws.

Temporary installation


GSM-100-423Installing the cabinet air deflector


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Permanent installation


2. Using the predrilled holes in the bottom flange of the deflector, mark the locationsfor screw mounting holes on the door.

3. Remove the air deflector.

4. Open the door and cover the internal units.

Wear safety glasses while drilling holes.

WARNING

Ensure that the interior of the cabinet is protected from possible swarfingestion.

CAUTION

5. Drill three 3.5 mm diameter holes through the door.

6. Repeat step 1.

7. Secure the air deflector to the door using three M4 x 8 self tapping screws.

Diagram

The diagram shows the air deflector mounted on a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet:


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

EXHAUST VENT

CLIPS(2 EACH END)

DRILL THREE 3.5 mm HOLES(OPTIONAL)

M4 X 3TAPPING

AIR DEFLECTOR

GSM-100-423 Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–9

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables

Introduction

The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double orreinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must alsoconform to safety standard EN60 950.

Do not make dc input power connections at the main dc power source at thispoint in the procedure.

WARNING

To protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damageby static electricity or foreign matter, ensure that the covers supplied are fitted.

Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, performany adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipmentrecommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all loadconditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dcoperation and between –40 V and –75 V dc for –48/60 V dc operation.

CAUTION

The dc power distribution system within each cabinet, including all internal power cablingand fuses, is factory assembled and tested.

The power requirements for the cabinets are listed in Chapter 1.

The power input and earth connectors are secured with M10 nuts.

Adequate means, for example a cable trough, must be provided for routeing cables fromthe main power source to the cabinet.

PAB

Configure the power alarm board (PAB) jumpers JU1 to JU3 for the power supply polarityand the external +27 V backup supply as shown below:

(JU1 pins 2, 3) NEG 1 POS JU1

(JU2 pins 2, 3)INT EXT

JU2

JU3

1

1(JU3 pins 2,3)

JU1, set for negative earth (+27 Vdc) supply

JU2 and JU3 set to external supply

(JU1 pins 1, 2) NEG 1 POS JU1JU1, set for positive earth (–48/60 Vdc) supply

GSM-100-423Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

DAB

Configure the distribution alarm board (DAB) switches S1 and S2 for the cabinetequipment configuration. Each switch comprises eight switches in a line.

The table lists the alarms that the switches enable:

Label Switch Position Circuit monitored On/Off

VSWR1 (Sector 1) S1 1 Power to VSWR1 monitor As required



Spare S1 4 OFF

BB O/P2 S1 5 BBBX lower shelf output ON

BB O/P1 S1 6 BBBX upper shelf output ON

BB I/P2 S1 7 BBBX lower shelf input ON

BB I/P1 S1 8 BBBX upper shelf input ON

DRCU5 S2 1 Power to DRCU5 ON if fitted






Spare S2 7 OFF

BBB ID S2 8 Backup battery fitted ON if fitted

The battery backup input and output alarms (switch S1 positions 5 to 8) areenabled when the switch is set to OFF.

NOTE



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–11

BTS6interconnectpanel

The diagram shows the BTS6 interconnect panel:

GK0

PIX0

BATTERYBACKUP


PIX1

EARTH STUD

MS3 MS1


TX1 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX0

RX1A

EXT C & M + VSWR

PHASE 1 PHASE 0

–48/60 V dcor +27 V dc

0V

VINT43 orBIB

T43 orBIB

TX2


The table lists the BTS6 interconnect panel connectors:

Connector Function Internal destination External destination

Batterybackup

DRAM backup battery BBBX connector PC2 Backup battery

Rx1A, Rx2A,and Rx3A


Input to dual pathpreselectors 1, 2, and 3(RFE shelf)

Rx antenna 1A, 2A,and 3A or port ofduplexer 0, 1 or 2

Rx1B, Rx2B,and Rx3B


Diversity input to dualpath preselectors 1, 2,and 3 (RFE shelf)

Diversity Rx antennas1B, 2B, and 3B

Tx0, Tx1,Tx2, Tx3,Tx4, and Tx5


Refer tointerconnection matrixand site specificdocumentation


EXTC&M+VSWR

External RTC dcpower, and externalreceiver multicouplerdc power and sense

DAB connector PC6 External RTC andexternal receivermulticoupler dc powerconnector

MS1 andMS3

MSI ports (maximumsix E1/T1 perconnector – six Tx andsix Rx)

Corresponding MSconnector onbackplane

E1/T1 line source ortermination equipment(through T43 or BIB)

PIX0 andPIX1

End user alarminput/output ports

Edge connector of PIXmodules

End user alarmequipment

GK0 GPS satellite receiver(for future use)


Master synchronizationsource (for future use)

Phase 0 andPhase 1

Phasing: Cabinetphasing

Transmit combinershelf

Tx phasing harness

Externalmulticoupler

External receivermulticoupler dcpower/sense

PAB connector PC6 External receivermulticoupler dc powerconnector



GMR-0168P02901W04-A



D

D

D

TX4TX3

TX2

MS0

T43MS2

TX1

TX0

+27 V BATTBACKUP


+27 V (+20 V TO +30 V)

Phase 0PIX0

PIX1


ExternalCombiner


Phase 1

MS1 MS3

+ −

RXARXC

RXB

EARTH STUD

Note: Tx connectors are 7/16 in and rx connectors are N-type

GK0

T43 T43 T43

INPUT POWER TERMINALS



Rx1A, Rx2A,and Rx3A


Input to preselectors1A, 2A, and 3A (upperRFE shelf)

Rx antenna 1A, 2A,and 3A or Rx port ofduplexer 0, 1, or 2

Rx1B, Rx2B,and Rx3B


Diversity input topreselectors 1A, 2A,and 3A (lower RFEshelf)


Tx0, Tx1,Tx2, Tx3, andTx4




Phase 0 andPhase 1

Phasing: Inter cabinetTx channel combining



Externalcombiner

DC power for externalRTC

PAB connector PC11 External RTC dc powerconnector




+27V dcbatterybackup

DRAM backup battery PAB connector PC6 +27 V dc backupbattery

MS1 andMS3

MSI ports Corresponding MSconnector onbackplane




68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–13

Connector External destinationInternal destinationFunction


GK0 connector onbackplane


PIX0 andPIX1






GK0

PIX0

+27 V BATT BACKUP


PIX1

EARTH STUD

MS1 MS3


RX3B RX1BRX2B RX3A RX2A

TX4 TX3 TX2 TX1 TX0

RX1A

External CombinerExternal Multicoupler

Phase 1 Phase 0

Note: Tx AND RX connectors are 7/16 in

Input powerterminals



Rx1A, Rx2A,and Rx3A


Input to preselectors1A, 2A, and 3A (upperRFE shelf)

Rx antenna 1A, 2A,and 3A or Rx port ofduplexer 0, 1, or 2

Rx1B, Rx2B,and Rx3B


Diversity input topreselectors 1A, 2A,and 3A (lower RFEshelf)


Tx0, Tx1,Tx2, Tx3, andTx4




Phase 0 andPhase 1

Phasing: Inter cabinetTx channel combining



Externalcombiner

DC power for externalRTC

PAB connector PC11 External RTC dc powerconnector




+27V dcbatterybackup

DRAM backup battery PAB connector PC6 +27 V dc backupbattery

MS1 andMS3

MSI ports Corresponding MSconnector onbackplane




GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Connector External destinationInternal destinationFunction


GK0 connector onbackplane


PIX0 andPIX1




GSM-100-423 Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–15

Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and externalequipment

Introduction

Protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damage bystatic electricity or foreign matter by ensuring that the covers supplied arefitted.

CAUTION

The procedure below describes how to install dc power cabling from the cabinets to thefollowing ancillary external equipment:

S DRAM backup battery.

S External RTC (GSM900 BTS cabinets only).

S External multicoupler (BTS cabinets only).

All cables and connectors must be supplied by the end user.

Procedure

To install dc power cabling between a cabinet and external equipment:

1. For BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets, construct the required cables with reference to thetable below.

Cable Cable type Connector: cabinet end Connector: externalend

Type Pin function Type Pinfunction

ExtRTC

Shielded 3 or4 conductors1mm2

15 wayfemaleshieldedD type

1: Main supply (link A) fused +27 V dc15: Redundant supply(link B) fused +27 Vdc5: DC earth

3 pos male As cabinetend

Extmulti–coupler

Shielded 4conductor1mm2


1: Multicoupler alarm2: Main supply fused +27 V dc3: Redundant supply fused +27 V dc4: DC earth


GSM-100-423Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

2. For BTS6 cabinets, construct the required cables with reference to the table below.

Cable Cable type Connector: cabinet end Connector: externalend

Type Pin function Type Pinfunction

DRAMbackupbattery

Shieldedtwisted pair(red/black)1mm2


1 (upper cage) and 2(lower cage): Battery–ve (black)7 (lower cage) and 6(upper cage) : Battery+ve (red)

End user’schoice

End user’schoice

ExtRTC

Shielded 3 or4 conductors1mm2


1: Main supply (link A) fused +27 V dc15: Redundant supply(link B) fused +27 Vdc5: DC earth


Extmulti–coupler

Shielded 4conductor1mm2


1: Multicoupler alarm2: Main supply fused +27 V dc3: Redundant supply fused +27 V dc4: DC earth


3. Connect the cable shield to the connector shell at the cabinet end.

4. Make sure that no cable has short or open circuit conductors.

5. Locate the connector(s) on the top of the cabinet interconnect panel.

6. Connect the cabinet end of the cable to the cabinet mating connector.

7. Connect the other end of the cable to the external equipment mating connector.

GSM-100-423 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–17

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet

Introduction

The location and details of the BTS cabinet input power terminals and the earth stud areshown in the diagrams and tables in Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables.earlier in this chapter.

Power and earthcables

Earth each cabinet using the earth stud on the interconnect panel on the topof the cabinet. Each cabinet must be individually connected to the masterearth bar (MEB). Do not daisy chain cabinet earths.

CAUTION

The maximum cable lengths allowed for each type of cabinet are shown in the tables thatfollow. The following rules must be observed:

S If the required length falls between two values of cross sectional area (CSA),round up to the next biggest cable.

S The earth cable must be the same size as the power cable.

S The cabinet overcurrent protection device must be a BS88 fuse or a BS3871 maincircuit breaker.

S Maximum ambient temperature +50 _C.

S Cables must be routed parallel and touching each other on a perforated tray(BS7671 method 11).

S The maximum length given is based on a 4% voltage drop at nominal voltage(BS7671 section 525–01–02).

+27 V cabinets

CSA (mm2) Maximum cable length (m)

BTS5 BTS6

16 –– ––

25 –– ––

35 19.2 17.2

50 25.8 23.2

70 38.0 34.2

95 52.1 46.9

120 66.6 60.0

GSM-100-423Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

–48 V cabinets


BTS4 BTS6

16 –– ––

25 19.9 17.1

35 27.8 24.0 30.3

50 37.4 32.2 40.7

70 55.2 47.6 60.1

95 75.7 65.2 82.3

120 96.7 83.3 105.2

–60 V cabinets


BTS4 BTS6

16 –– ––

25 24.8 21.4

35 34.8 30.0

50 46.8 40.3

70 69.1 59.5

95 94.6 81.5

120 120.9 104.1

GSM-100-423 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–19

Power cables for–ve earthcabinets

Use the correct cable specified in the tables for the dc input power cable from the maindc power source.


The positive cable must be red and the negative cable must be black. Theblack cable is at earth potential.

WARNING

To connect dc power cables to a negative earth cabinet:

1. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off.

2. Connect the earth ground from the MEB to the earth stud on top of the cabinet.

3. Connect the red positive dc power cable from the main dc power source to thecabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN.

4. Connect the black negative dc power cable from the main dc power source to thecabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0 V.

5. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).

GSM-100-423Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Power cables for+ve earthcabinets

Use the correct cable specified in the tables for the dc input power cable from the maindc power source.


The negative power cable must be blue and the positive cable must be black.The black cable is at earth potential.

WARNING

To connect dc power cables to a positive earth cabinet:

1. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off.

2. Connect the earth ground from the master ground bar to the earth stud on top ofthe cabinet.

3. Connect the blue negative (–) dc power cable from the main dc power source tothe cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN.

4. Connect the black positive (+) dc power cable from the main dc power source tothe cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0V.

5. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).

GSM-100-423 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–21

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main powersource

Safety

Do not wear an antistatic wrist strap when servicing the power supplies orpower distribution cabling. Serious personal injury can result.

The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double orreinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must alsoconform to safety standard EN60 950.

WARNING

Procedure

To connect the dc power cables to the main power source:

Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, performany adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipmentrecommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all loadconditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dcoperation and between –40 V and –75 V dc for –48/60 V dc operation.

CAUTION

1. Ensure that all main dc power source output switches are switched off.

2. Ensure that all circuit breakers in the cabinet are switched off.

3. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present.

4. Connect the positive lead of the input dc power cable to the positive terminal of themain dc power supply.

5. Connect the negative lead of the input dc power cable to the negative terminal ofthe main dc power supply.

Ensure that all power connections are secure.

WARNING

6. Do not apply power to the cabinet at this point in the procedure.

GSM-100-423Installing power supply modules


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing power supply modules

Introduction

The following types of power supply modules (PSMs) are fitted:

S BTS4 and BTS5: Digital power supply module (DPSM).

S –ve earth BTS6: Enhanced power supply module (EPSM).

S +ve earth BTS6: Integrated power supply module (IPSM).

Before installing power supply modules, refer to the site specific documentation todetermine the following:

S The number of power supply modules to be installed.

S The positions in which the power supply modules are to be installed.

S The number of power converter (PC) modules to be fitted (positive earth BTS4 andBTS5 cabinets only).

Procedure

To install the power supply modules:

1. Locate and unpack the power supply modules.

2. Positive earth BTS4 and BTS5 only. Locate and unpack the PC modules.

Switch the appropriate circuit breakers OFF to ensure that the supply to thePSMs is isolated.

CAUTION

Refer to the label on the power supply module to ensure that the correctmodule is fitted for the input power (–48V, –60V or +27V) used.

CAUTION

3. If the cabinet is delivered with the digital modules already installed, twotransportation panel fillers are fitted to the digital shelf to prevent the modules fromfalling out of the shelf in transit. Remove these by releasing the clips at the top andbottom, and replace them with blanking plates, before proceeding.

4. Mount each power supply module (and power converter if fitted) in the shelfassembly according to the configuration information in the site specificdocumentation.

5. Pull each PSM forward by about 25 mm (1 in) to unseat it.

GSM-100-423 Connecting RF cables


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–23

Connecting RF cables

Introduction

Refer to the site specific documentation for detailed antenna configurations andconnection procedures.

Use jumper leads to make connections from the antenna window to the connectors onthe top of the BTS cabinets. The jumper leads must be as short as possible, fabricatedon-site of 1/2 in Heliax (unless otherwise specified in the site installation plan), androuted to the appropriate cabinet in overhead cable trays.

For reference, the line loss of 1/2 in Heliax at 900 MHz is 7.55 dB per 100 m (2.3 dB per100 feet).

Connect all antenna feeders entering the building via coaxial EMPprotectors.

CAUTION

Separatetransmit antenna

To BTS cabinet

To connect a separate transmit antenna to BTS cabinets:

1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each transmit antenna feeder connector on theantenna window to the appropriate BTS cabinet.

2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Tx connector on top of theBTS cabinet.

To external equipment

To connect a separate transmit antenna to optional external RF equipment cabinet orframe and BTS cabinets:

1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each transmit antenna feeder connector on theantenna window to the optional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.

2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Tx ANT connector on theoptional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.

3. Route the required number of coaxial jumper leads from the optional external RFequipment cabinet, or frame, to the appropriate BTS cabinet.

4. Connect the external RF equipment cabinet, or frame end of each coaxial jumperlead to the appropriate Tx connector on the optional external RF equipmentcabinet or frame.

5. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the correct Tx connector on top of the BTScabinet.

GSM-100-423Connecting RF cables


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Separate receiveantenna

To BTS cabinet

To connect a separate receive antenna to BTS cabinets:

1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each receive antenna feeder connector on theantenna window to the appropriate BTS cabinet.

2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Rx connector on top of theBTS cabinet.

To external equipment

To connect a separate receive antenna to optional external RF equipment cabinet orframe and BTS cabinets:

1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each receive antenna feeder connector on theantenna window to the optional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.

2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Rx ANT connector on theoptional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.


4. Connect the external RF equipment cabinet, or frame end of each coaxial jumperlead to the appropriate Rx connector on the optional external RF equipmentcabinet or frame.

5. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Rx connector on top of theBTS cabinet.

Commonantenna

To connect a common transmit/receive antenna to optional external RF equipmentcabinet or frame and BTS cabinets:

1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each transmit/receive antenna feeder connectoron the antenna window to the optional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.

2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate ANT connector on theoptional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.


4. Connect the external RF equipment cabinet, or frame end of each coaxial jumperlead to the appropriate Tx connector on the optional external RF equipmentcabinet or frame.

5. Connect the BTS cabinet end of each transmit coaxial jumper lead to theappropriate Tx connector on top of the BTS cabinet.

6. Connect the external RF equipment cabinet, or frame end of each coaxial jumperlead to the appropriate Rx connector on the optional external RF equipmentcabinet or frame.

7. Connect the BTS cabinet end of each transmit coaxial jumper lead to theappropriate Rx connector on top of the BTS cabinet.

GSM-100-423 Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–25

Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs

Introduction

In the text that follows DRCU – with parentheses – is used as a general termfor DRCU and DRCUII modules.

NOTE

Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of DRCUs and their slotpositions. Install the first DRCU in the rightmost slot (DRCU 0). All subsequent DRCUsmust be installed adjacent to the previously installed DRCU. DRCUs can only be installedin BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets.

Procedure

The DRCU module weighs 15 kg (33 lbs). Handle with care.

WARNING

To install a DRCU:

1. Locate and unpack the DRCUs.

2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transceiver shelf assembly.

3. Locate the cable conduit that runs along the bottom front of the transceiver shelf.At each transceiver slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxialcables/connectors and fibre optic cables emerge from an opening in the conduit. Insome cabinets the cables are held inside the conduit; release the two 1/4-turnfasteners to open the conduit.

4. Raise the hinged air block door to the vertical position and secure it to the backwall of the transceiver shelf assembly using the integral 1/4-turn fastener. Leavethe door of any unused slot in the horizontal position.

5. Grasp the DRCU upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the otherhand. Position the module in the desired slot. Insert the back of the DRCU moduleinto the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensure that the moduleis firmly seated in the slot.

Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the DRCU being installed isswitched off.

CAUTION

6. Connect the dc power cable connector (D-subminiature, labelled on the cable asDRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) to the POWER connector at thebottom of the DRCU front panel. Secure the connector to the DRCU by tighteningthe two captive screws on the connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

GSM-100-423Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

7. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type-N, labelled on the cable asDRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connectornear the bottom of DRCU front panel.

Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connectors with orwithout the use of optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/outconnectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/outconnectors.

WARNING

Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before connecting fibre opticcables.

CAUTION

8. Select the data in fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as DRCUx IN, where x =DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) for the slot position. Unscrew and remove theprotective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cable to the DATAIN optic port on the DRCU front panel by the turning the connector clockwise.

Refer to Installing fibre optic cabling, in category 523, for information onrouting and installation of fibre optic cables.

NOTE

9. Select the data out fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as DRCUx OUT, wherex = DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) for the slot position. Unscrew and remove theprotective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cable to the DATAOUT optic port on the DRCU front panel by the turning the connector clockwise.

10. Connect the DRCU end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifieroutput (Tx OUT) connector at the top of the DRCU front panel. Connect the otherend of the coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF or cable tothe Tx connector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specificdocumentation to determine the exact connection point for the DRCU module).

11. Repeat step 5 to step 10 for each DRCU to be used in the BTS cabinet.

GSM-100-423 Installing DRCU3s


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–27

Installing DRCU3s

Introduction

Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of DRCU3s and theirslot positions. Install the first DRCU3 in the rightmost slot DRCU3 0). All subsequentDRCU3s must be installed adjacent to the previously installed DRCU3.

Procedure

The DRCU3 module weighs 15 kg (33 lbs). Handle with care.

WARNING

To install a DRCU3:

1. Locate and unpack the DRCU3s.

2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transceiver shelf.

3. Locate the cable conduit that runs along the bottom front of the transceiver shelf.At each transceiver slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxialcables/connectors and fibre optic cables emerge from an opening in the conduit. Insome cabinets the cables are held inside the conduit; open the conduit byreleasing the two 1/4-turn fasteners.

4. BTS4 and BTS5. Raise the hinged air block door to the vertical position andsecure it to the back wall of the transceiver shelf assembly using the integral1/4-turn fastener. Leave the door of any unused slot in the horizontal position.

BTS6. Remove the plastic air blank from the top of the transceiver shelf for alloccupied slots. Leave the blank in place for any unoccupied slot.

5. BTS4 and BTS5. Insert the spacer (Motorola kit number SWLN4096) into the slotbefore continuing.

6. Grasp the DRCU3 upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with theother hand. Position the module in the desired slot. Insert the back of the DRCU3module into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensure that themodule is firmly seated in the slot.

Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the DRCU being installed isswitched off.

CAUTION

7. Connect the dc power cable connector (D-subminiature, labelled on the cable asDRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the POWER connector at thebottom of the DRCU3 front panel. Secure the connector to the DRCU3 bytightening the two captive screws on the connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

GSM-100-423Installing DRCU3s


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

8. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type-N, labelled on the cable asDRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connectornear the bottom of DRCU3 front panel.

Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connectors with orwithout the use of optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/outconnectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/outconnectors.

WARNING


CAUTION

9. Select the data in fibre optic cable for the slot position (labelled on the cable asRADIO x INPUT, where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space).Remove the protective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cableto the DATA IN optic port on the DRCU3 front panel by turning the connectorclockwise.


NOTE

10. Select the data out fibre optic cable for the slot position (labelled on the cable asRADIO x OUTPUT, where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space).Remove the protective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cableto the DATA OUT optic port on the DRCU3 front panel by the turning the connectorclockwise.

11. Connect the DRCU3 end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifieroutput, Tx OUT, connector at the top of the DRCU3 front panel. Connect the otherend of the coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF, or cable tothe Tx connector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specificdocumentation to determine the exact connection point for this DRCU3 module).

12. Repeat step 6 to step 11 for each DRCU3 to be installed in the BTS cabinet.

GSM-100-423 Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–29

Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s

Introduction

In this section, the term SCU is used generically for SCU900 and SCU1800.The procedure applies to both unless otherwise stated.

NOTE

Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of SCUs and their slotpositions. Install the first SCU in the rightmost slot (SCU 0). All subsequent SCUs mustbe installed adjacent to the previously installed SCU.

Procedure

The SCU module weighs 10 kg (22 lb). Handle with care.

WARNING

To install an SCU:

1. Locate and unpack the SCUs.

2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the SCU shelf assembly.

3. Locate the cable conduit that runs along the bottom front of the SCU shelf. At eachSCU slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxial cables/connectorsand fibre optic cables emerge from an opening in the conduit. In some cabinets thecables are held inside the conduit. In these cases release the two 1/4-turnfasteners to open the conduit.

4. BTS4 and BTS5. For each occupied slot, raise the hinged air block door to thevertical position and secure it to the back wall of the SCU shelf assembly using theintegral 1/4-turn fastener.

BTS6. Remove the plastic air blank from the top of the SCU shelf for all occupiedslots. Leave the blank in place for any unoccupied slot.


6. Grasp the SCU upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the otherhand. Position the module at the front of the desired slot. Insert the back of theSCU module into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensurethat the module is firmly seated in the slot.

Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the SCU being installed isswitched off.

CAUTION

7. Connect the dc power cable connector (D-subminiature, labelled on the cable asSCUx, where x = SCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the VOLTAGE INPUT connector(SCU900) or the POWER connector (SCU1800) at the bottom of the SCU frontpanel. Secure the connector to the SCU by tightening the two captive screws onthe connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

GSM-100-423Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

8. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type N, labelled on the cable asSCUx, where x = SCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connectornear the bottom of SCU front panel.

Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with orwithout the use of optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/outconnectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/outconnectors.

WARNING


CAUTION

9. Select the data in fibre optic cable for the slot position (labelled on the cable asRADIO x INPUT, where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space).Remove the protective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cableto the DATA IN optic port on the SCU front panel by turning the connectorclockwise.


NOTE

10. Select the data out fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as RADIO x OUTPUT,where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space). Remove theprotective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cable to the DATAOUT optic port on the SCU front panel by turning the connector clockwise.

11. Connect the SCU end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifier output(Tx OUT) connector at the top of the SCU front panel. Connect the other end ofthe coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF or cable to the Txconnector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specific documentation todetermine the exact connection point for the SCU module).

12. Repeat step 5 to step 11 for each SCU to be installed in the BTS cabinet.

GSM-100-423 Installing TCU modules


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–31

Installing TCU modules

Introduction

In this section, the term TCU is used generically for TCU900, TCU1800 andhigh power TCU1800. The procedure applies to all TCUs unless otherwisestated.

NOTE

Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of TCUs and their slotpositions. Install the first TCU in the rightmost slot (TCU 0). All subsequent TCUs mustbe installed adjacent to the previously installed TCU.

Procedure

The TCU module weighs 9.8 kg. Handle with care.

WARNING

To install an TCU:

1. Locate and unpack the TCUs.

2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transceiver shelf assembly.

3. Locate the cable conduit that runs along the bottom front of the transceiver shelf.At each TCU slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxialcables/connectors and fibre optic cables emerge from an opening in the conduit. Insome cabinets the cables are held inside the conduit. In these cases release thetwo 1/4-turn fasteners to open the conduit.

4. BTS4 and BTS5. For each occupied slot, raise the hinged air block door to thevertical position and secure it to the back wall of the transceiver shelf assemblyusing the integral 1/4-turn fastener.

BTS6. Remove the plastic air blanking panel from the top of the transceiver shelffor all occupied slots. Leave the blanking panel in place for any unoccupied slot.


TCU1800s and high power TCU1800s are only fitted in BTS6 cabinets, andthe high power TCU1800 must be used in conjunction with a high sensitivityLNA.

NOTE

6. Grasp the TCU upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the otherhand. Position the module at the front of the desired slot. Insert the back of theTCU module into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensurethat the module is firmly seated in the slot.

Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the TCU being installed isswitched off.

CAUTION

7. Connect the dc power cable connector (D-subminiature, labelled on the cable asTCUx, where x = TCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the VOLTAGE INPUT connector(TCU900) or the POWER connector (TCU1800) at the bottom of the TCU frontpanel. Secure the connector to the TCU by tightening the two captive screws onthe connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

GSM-100-423Installing TCU modules


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

8. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type N, labelled on the cable asTCUx, where x = TCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connectornear the bottom of TCU front panel.

Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with orwithout the use of optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/outconnectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/outconnectors.

WARNING


CAUTION

9. Select the data in fibre optic cable for the slot position (labelled on the cable asRADIO x INPUT, where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space).Remove the protective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cableto the DATA IN optic port on the TCU front panel by turning the connectorclockwise.


NOTE

10. Select the data out fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as RADIO x OUTPUT,where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space). Remove theprotective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cable to the DATAOUT optic port on the TCU front panel by turning the connector clockwise.

11. Connect the TCU end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifier output(Tx OUT) connector at the top of the TCU front panel. Connect the other end ofthe coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF or cable to the Txconnector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specific documentation todetermine the exact connection point for the TCU module).

12. Ensure that the mode selection switch on the TCU front panel is set to the SCUposition.

13. Repeat step 5 to step 12 for each TCU to be installed in the BTS cabinet.

GSM-100-423 Receiver front end shelf


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–33

Receiver front end shelf

IntroductionReceiver front end (RFE) modules are factory-fitted to new cabinets. Use theseprocedures to upgrade cabinets after installation.

Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the required RFE configuration.

The table shows the possible combinations of RFE modules in each cabinet:

Equipment GSM 900 DCS1800

Item Additions BTS4 BTS5 BTS6 BTS6

Preselector 6-way splitter Yes Yes No No

Passive splitter No No Yes No

Receivermatrix Yes Yes Yes No

Dual pathpreselector –– Yes No Yes ––

Dual pathpreselector 2 –– Yes No Yes ––

Low noiseamplifier –– –– –– –– Yes

HighsensitivityLNA

–– –– –– –– Yes

A dual path preselector (DPP) and a low noise amplifier (LNA) provide similarfunctions, a DPP is for GSM 900 and a LNA is for DCS1800.

NOTE

Preselector

The preselector module comprises a bandpass filter and a preamplifier. One preselectoris required for each receive antenna signal, of which a BTS cabinet can support amaximum of six with DRCUs or SCUs.

Preselector modules are used in conjunction with:

S Six-way splitters (one preselector per six-way splitter).

S Passive splitters (one preselector per passive splitter).

S Receiver matrix (a maximum of three preselectors per receiver matrix).

Dual path preselector

The dual path preselector comprises two bandpass filters, two preamplifiers and twopassive splitters in a single module. One DPP is required for each pair of receive antennasignals. The DPP2 has an extra pair of connectors on the rear for extension or testpurposes.

Low noise amplifier

The low noise amplifier comprises two bandpass filters, two preamplifiers and twopassive splitters in a single module. One DPP is required for each pair of receive antennasignals. The high sensitivity LNA incorporates additional amplification, and has manuallyselectable low and high gain modes.

GSM-100-423Receiver front end shelf


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

The modules

The sections that follow describe installation procedures for:

S Preselector with 6-way splitter.

S Preselector with receiver matrix.

S Passive splitter.

S Dual path preselector.

S Diversity receive extender.

GSM-100-423 Installing a preselector with a 6-way splitter


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–35

Installing a preselector with a 6-way splitter

Procedure

The preselector and 6-way splitter can be fitted to BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets.

To install a preselector and six-way splitter:

1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the RFE shelf.

2. Locate the appropriate preselector/splitter position to be used.

There are three sets of tracks on the upper RFE shelf, used for antenna Rx1A,Rx2A, and Rx3A respectively from right to left. There are three sets of tracks onthe lower RFE shelf, used for Rx1B, Rx2B, and Rx3B respectively from right toleft.

In a BTS4 cabinet a spring clip is used to retain the preselector in each slot.Attach the springs to the rear of the RFE shelf before installing the splitter.

NOTE

3. Align the tracks on the bottom of the preselector module with the tracks on theRFE shelf. Position the preselector module at the back of the RFE shelf.

4. Locate the cables hanging from the cabling bracket mounted at the back of theRFE shelf. Select the preselector dc power cable (two-conductor cable labelled1A, 2A, 3A, 1B, 2B, or 3B). Grasp the moulded portion of the cable connector andpush it onto the mating connector on the back of the preselector module. Dressany unused cables to the cabling bracket.

Take care to ensure proper mechanical mating of the slide fit connectionbetween the splitter and the preselector modules. Improper connection coulddamage the connectors.

CAUTION

5. Align the tracks on the bottom of the splitter module with the tracks (used in step3) on the RFE shelf. Connect the splitter input connector to the preselector outputconnector.

6. BTS5. Secure the modules with their 1/4-turn fasteners.

BTS4. Hold the modules in place, tension the retaining spring against thepreselector and splitter, then insert the two ends of the spring into the slots in theRFE shelf. Secure the preselector and splitter with tie-wraps.

7. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for the remaining modules to be installed.

8. Locate the receive RF coaxial cables (labelled Rx1A, Rx2A, Rx3A, Rx1B, Rx2Band Rx3B) that are tie-wrapped to the bracket at the back of the RFE shelf. Selectthe appropriate cable and undo its tie wrap. Connect this cable to the RF inputconnector of the corresponding preselector filter at the front of the RFE shelf.

9. Repeat step 8 for each preselector to be installed and dress any unused cables tothe cabling bracket.

10. Locate the RF coaxial cables (labelled DRCU0 to DRCU5) stored on both sides ofthe cabinet next to the RFE shelf. Connect the appropriate cables to the RFoutput connectors of the appropriate splitter modules. Up to five coaxial cables canbe connected to each splitter. Connect 50 ohm terminations to any unused splitteroutput connectors.

GSM-100-423Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix

Procedure

The preselector with receiver matrix can be fitted to GSM900 cabinets.

To install a preselector and receiver matrix module:

1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the RFE shelf.

2. Locate the appropriate preselector mounting track to be used. There are three setsof tracks on the upper RFE shelf, used for antenna Rx1A, Rx2A, and Rx3Arespectively from right to left. There are three sets of tracks on the lower RFEshelf, used for Rx1B, Rx2B, and Rx3B respectively from right to left.

In a BTS4 cabinet a spring clip is used to retain the preselector in each slot.Attach the springs to the rear of the RFE shelf before installing the receivermatrix.

NOTE

3. Align the tracks on the bottom of the preselector module with the tracks on theRFE shelf. Position the preselector module at the back of the RFE shelf.

4. Locate the cables hanging from the cabling bracket mounted at the back of theRFE shelf. Select the preselector dc power cable (two-conductor cable labelled1A, 2A, 3A, 1B, 2B, or 3B). Grasp the overmoulded portion of the cable connectorand push it onto the mating connector on the back of the preselector module.Dress unused cables to the cabling bracket.

5. Repeat step 2 to step 4 for each preselector module to be installed.

Take care to ensure proper mechanical mating of the slide fit connectionbetween the matrix and the preselector modules. Improper connection coulddamage the connectors.

CAUTION

6. Align the tracks on the bottom of the receiver matrix module with the tracks (usedin step 3) on the RFE shelf. Connect the matrix input connector to the preselectoroutput connector.

7. BTS5 and BTS6. Secure the preselector and receiver matrix module with its1/4-turn fasteners.

BTS4. Hold the preselector and receiver matrix modules in place, tension theretaining spring against the preselector and receiver matrix, then insert the twoends of the spring into the slots in the RFE shelf. Secure the preselector andreceiver matrix with tie-wraps.

8. Connect the receiver matrix module dc power cable connector J2 to the receivermatrix module input power connector located at the right rear corner of themodule.

9. Locate the receive RF coaxial cables (labelled Rx1A, Rx2A, Rx3A, Rx1B, Rx2B,and Rx3B) that are tie-wrapped to the bracket at the back of the RFE shelf. Selectthe appropriate cable and undo its tie-wrap. Connect this cable to the RF inputconnector of the corresponding preselector filter at the front of the RFE shelf.

10. Repeat step 9 for each preselector to be installed and dress any unused cables tothe cabling bracket.

GSM-100-423 Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–37

11. Locate the RF coaxial cables (labelled DRCU0 to DRCU5) stored on both sides ofthe cabinet next to the RFE shelf. Connect the appropriate cables to the RF outputconnectors of the receiver matrix module. Up to six coaxial cables can beconnected to each receiver matrix. Connect 50 ohm terminations to any unusedreceiver matrix output connectors.

12. Set the receiver matrix module front panel DIP switches according to theinformation in the site specific documentation.

13. Repeat step 2 to step 12 for the lower preselectors and receiver matrix module ifthe BTS cabinet is equipped for diversity.

GSM-100-423Installing the dual path preselector


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing the dual path preselector

Procedure

To install a dual path preselector (DPP) module in a BTS4 or BTS6 cabinet:

1. Locate the appropriate DPP module position to be used. There are three sets ofantenna RF cables on the RFE shelf labelled RX1A/RX1B, RX2A/RX2B, andRX3A/RX3B respectively from right to left.

2. Position the DPP module on the RFE shelf, but do not push it in yet.

3. Locate the power cables hanging from the bracket behind the RFE shelf. Selectthe DPP dc power cables (two-conductor cables labelled 1A, 2A, 3A, 1B, 2B or3B). Grasp the overmoulded portion of the cable connector and push it onto themating connector on the back of the DPP module. Dress any unused cables to thecabling bracket.

4. Locate the receive RF coaxial cables that are tie-wrapped to the bracket behindthe RFE shelf (labelled RX1A, RX2A, RX3A, RX1B, RX2B and RX3B). Select theappropriate cable and undo its tie wrap. Connect this cable to the RF inputconnector of the corresponding DPP filter at the front of the RFE shelf. Repeat foreach DPP being used. Dress unused cables to the cabling bracket.

The two receive RF coaxial cables fitted to each DPP filter must be crossed (Afrom right to left and B from left to right) in front of the filter to maintain thecorrect bend radius.

NOTE

5. Locate the RF coaxial cables (labelled DRCU0 to DRCU5) stored on both sides ofthe cabinet next to the RFE shelf. Connect the appropriate cables to the RF outputconnectors of the appropriate DPP module. Up to 14 coaxial cables can beconnected to each DPP module in a BTS6, or up to 10 in a BTS4 or BTS5.Connect 50 ohm terminations to any unused DPP module output connectors.Dress unused cables inside the cabinet.

Take care to ensure the correct routeing of the power cables from the DPPmodules to the back of the RFE shelf. Incorrect routeing could damage thepower connectors.

CAUTION

6. Position the DPP module and engage the tongues at the back of the RFE shelf.Secure the DPP module to the RFE shelf using M4 retaining screws. Dress allfitted cables to the RFE shelf.

7. Repeat step 1 to step 6 for each DPP module to be installed.

GSM-100-423 Installing the passive splitter


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–39

Installing the passive splitter

Introduction

The passive splitter distributes receive signals from a single antenna to multiple BTS6cabinets. A maximum of three antenna pairs can be distributed among two BTS cabinets,or one antenna pair to three cabinets, with passive splitters. The passive splitter is fittedin the right hand position on the RFE shelf in BTS6 cabinets.

Procedure

To install a passive splitter:

1. Connect one end of an N-to-N coaxial cable to the TEST/AUX connector on therear of the DPP.

2. Connect an N-to-SMB adaptor to the other end of the cable.

3. Insert the adaptor into the hole in the support bracket behind the passive splitter.

4. Mate the adaptor to the SMB connector on the rear of the passive splitter.

5. Align the tongue on the bottom of the passive splitter with the right hand slot at therear of the RFE shelf.

6. Secure the module with two M4 screws.

GSM-100-423Installing the diversity receive extender


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing the diversity receive extender

Introduction

The diversity receive extender (DRX) is a low cost alternative to a multicoupler fordistributing receive signals from a single antenna to multiple BTS cabinets. Up to threeantennas can be distributed among two BTS cabinets.

The diversity receive extender kit (SWKN4001) consists of:

S Two RF cables with a mini-UHF connector on one end and an N-type connector onthe other.

S Two RF cables with 7/16 in connectors on each end (length to suit).

S Two attenuators.

S One mounting bracket.

S Miscellaneous hardware to attach the attenuators to the bracket.

Procedure

To install a diversity receive extender:

1. Using RF coaxial cable (Motorola part number 3002443W01), connect themini-UHF end of one cable to an unused connector of the splitter connected to theantenna to be distributed to a second BTS cabinet.

2. Dress the cable around the back of the splitter to the position of the attenuatorbracket.

3. With the attenuator bracket (Motorola part number 0702466W01) just clear of theRFE shelf connect the N-type bulkhead connector to the attenuator bracket.

4. Connect the 6 dB attenuator (Motorola part number 5882781R01) through themounting bracket to the N-type bulkhead connector.

5. Locate the cable (already installed) connected to the appropriate unused receiveconnector on the interconnect panel.

6. Move the bracket roughly into position and connect the 90_ N-type connector endof the cable (already installed) to the other end of the attenuator.

7. Hook the back of the bracket over the hole in the RFE shelf. Push the bracket ontothe front edge of the RFE shelf and fix with two thread forming screws (Motorolapart number 0312016A04).

8. Make up a cable with a 7/16 in connector on each end.

9. Connect one end of the cable to the connector connected to the 6 dB attenuatoron the primary BTS cabinet interconnect panel.

10. Connect the other end of the cable to the appropriate unused connector on theinterconnect panel on the secondary BTS cabinet.

11. Repeat step 1 to step 10 for each receive extender to be installed.

GSM-100-423 Transmit combiner shelf


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–41

Transmit combiner shelf

Introduction

In a BTS cabinet, transceiver RF output signals can be:

S Combined by an RTC (not DCS1800) or hybrid combiners.

S Bandpass filtered by Tx BPFs.

S Both of the above.

S None of the above.

The combiners and filters can be installed either in the transmit combiner shelf (below theRFE shelf) or in external equipment racks.

Output signals are connected to the cabinet interconnect panel connectors Tx0, Tx1,Tx2, Tx3, Tx4 and Tx5, from where they are routed either to external combining andfiltering equipment or directly to the antennas.

The modules

The sections that follow describe installation procedures for:

S Hybrid combiner with power load.

S Remotely tuneable channel combiner (RTC).

S Transmit bandpass filter.

S Transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering.

S Internal transmit phasing harness.

S External transmit phasing harness.

GSM-100-423Installing the hybrid combiner and power load


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing the hybrid combiner and power load

Introduction

Hybrid combiners are factory fitted to new cabinets. Use this procedure to upgradecabinets after installation.

Up to five hybrid combiners can be installed in a BTS6, or up to two in a BTS4 andBTS5.

Before starting the installation procedure refer to the site specific documentation anddetermine:

S The number of hybrid combiners to be installed.

S The positions of the hybrid combiners on the transmit combiner shelf.

S The hybrid input/output cabling configuration to be used.

S The number of DRCU or SCU transmitter outputs to be routed to the input of thetransmit combiners.

Procedure

To install a hybrid combiner and power load:

1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transmit combiner shelf.

2. BTS4 and BTS5. Go to step 8.

BTS6. Go to step 3.

3. Position the load bracket on the shelf. Lift the front of the bracket up and push ittowards the rear of the cabinet until the rear tab is engaged in the shelf slot.Secure the bracket by inserting a screw in the front edge of the transmit combinershelf.

4. Mount the RF power load on the load bracket. The bracket can be used to mountup to two loads. Secure each load to the bracket by inserting two screws throughholes in the bracket and into threaded holes in the bottom of the load.

5. Mount a hybrid combiner on the power load by mating the coaxial connectors (anyone of the connectors on the combiner can be used). Position the combiner so thatthe end with the two unterminated connectors extends above the load.

6. Repeat step 3 to step 5 for each bracket.

7. Go to step 13.

8. Mount the RF power load on the power load mounting bracket. The bracket can beused to mount up to two loads. Secure each load to the bracket by inserting twoscrews through holes in the bracket and into threaded holes in the bottom of theload.

9. Mount a combiner on the power load by mating the coaxial connectors (any one ofthe connectors on the combiner be used). Position the combiner so that the endwith the two unterminated connectors extends above the load.

10. Repeat step 9 for each additional combiner to be used.

11. Position the load bracket (with load and combiner attached) on the shelf. Lift thefront of the bracket up and push it toward the rear of the cabinet until the rear tabis engaged in the shelf slot. Secure the bracket by inserting a screw in the frontedge of the transmit combiner shelf.

GSM-100-423 Installing the hybrid combiner and power load


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–43

12. Repeat step 11 for the second load bracket.

13. Connect one end of the DRCU or SCU transmitter output coaxial cable to thetransmitter RF output connector of the appropriate DRCU or SCU.

The two unterminated connectors located on the same side of the hybridcombiner housing are input ports. The unterminated connector located on thesame side of the hybrid combiner housing as the load connection is thecombiner output port.

NOTE

14. Connect the other end of the DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable to its hybridcombiner input connector.

To connect more than one hybrid combiner together, use RF coaxial cable(Motorola part number 3009739D01). Connect one end of the cable to theoutput port of the first hybrid combiner and the other cable end to the inputport of the second hybrid combiner.

NOTE

15. Using RF coaxial cable (Motorola part number 3009531E01), connect the N-typeconnector end of the RF coaxial cable to the final hybrid combiner outputconnector. The 7/16 in connector end of the cable will be connected to thecorresponding Tx BPF input connector during the Installing the transmitbandpass filter procedure described in this chapter.

GSM-100-423Installing the RTC


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing the RTC

Introduction

One remotely tuneable channel combiner (RTC) only can be installed on the transmitcombiner shelf. The RTC is mounted in the middle of the shelf between the Tx BPFs,which are mounted on the outside edges of the shelf. The RTC can not be used in DCS1800 systems.

Before installing the RTC, refer to the site specific documentation and obtain thefollowing user specified information:

S The 8-bit RTC address (needed in the equip_device command for the COMBvariable).

S Which RTC input is to carry RTC link A, and if applicable which input is to carryRTC link B (needed in the equip_device command for the COMB and DRIvariables).

S Which DRCU is to be connected to the RTC input designated as link A, and whichis to be connected to the RTC input designated as link B.

S The status (in/out) of the coaxial coupling bridges on the front panel of the RTC.

S The RTC output cabling configuration and which RTC outputs are to be used.

Procedure

Refer to the diagrams in this section for the location of all jumpers and switches.

To install an RTC:

1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transmit combiner shelf. The RTC ismounted on top of the transmit combiner shelf.

2. Position the RTC on the transmit combiner shelf. Lift the front of the RTC up andpush it toward the rear of the cabinet until the rear tabs are engaged in the shelfslots. Secure the RTC with three screws inserted at the front edge of the transmitcombiner shelf.

3. Loosen the captive screws that secure the internal jumper/switch cover platelocated on the upper left corner of the RTC front panel. Remove the cover plate togain access to the internal jumpers.

The captive screws securing the internal jumper/switch cover plate to theRTC front panel must be secured finger tight. Do not use a screwdriver.

CAUTION

4. Set the RTC address jumpers ADRS0 (LSB) to ADRS7 (MSB) to match the RTCaddress in the site specific documentation and the database.

Jumpering an address line to GND provides a logic 1 address bit. Leaving anaddress line unjumpered provides a logic 0 address bit. These jumpers allowa decimal address range of 0 to 255.

NOTE

5. Ensure that the RS232 interface port enable jumpers are out. These jumpers arereserved for software testing.

GSM-100-423 Installing the RTC


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–45

6. Set the RTC link jumpers. Insert a LINK A jumper to GND for the cavity (CAV0 toCAV5) input designated as RTC link A. If applicable, insert a LINK B jumper toGND for the cavity (CAV0 to CAV5) input designated as RTC link B.

(1) CAV5 LINK A and CAV5 LINK B are for future equipment design and are always out.(2) On a 4-cavity RTC, CAV4 LINK A and CAV4 LINK B are always out. (3) Only one cavity can be jumpered as Link A and only one cavity can be jumpered as Link B. (4) A cavity cannot be jumpered as both Link A and Link B.(5) For data link redundancy both Link A and Link B are selected.

NOTE

7. Insert the RTC parking jumpers.

The parking jumpers prevent the RTC stepping motors from turning when nodc input power is applied. Leave the parking jumpers in at all times; this doesnot affect the normal operation of the equipment when dc input power isapplied to the RTC, because the system software ignores these jumpers andthe motors operate as normal.

NOTE

8. Insert the required RTC coaxial coupling bridges.

9. Terminate all unused RF input connectors with a 50 ohm dummy load.

10. Connect a short circuit between the centre conductor and shield of any unusedoutput port coaxial connectors and all exposed coaxial bridge connectors.

11. Locate the cables that are tie-wrapped to the bracket at the back of the RFE shelf.Select the RTC dc power cable labelled J1 and undo its tie-wrap.

12. Fit the RTC dc power cable connector J1 into either of the two mating connectorson the upper right corner of the RTC front panel. Dress any unused cables to thecabling bracket.

13. Connect one end of the DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable (Motorola partnumber 3009651D01 or 3009651D02) to the transmitter RF output connector ofthe appropriate DRCU.

When performing step 12 and step 13, make sure that the DRCUs areconnected to the correct RTC cavity input. This is critical to proper DRCU/RTCcavity frequency tuning as well as proper DRCU/RTC link communications.

NOTE

14. Connect the other end of the DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable to theappropriate RTC input connector.

15. Repeat step 13 and step 14 for each DRCU to be used in the BTS cabinet.

16. Connect the N-type connector end of the RF coaxial cable (Motorola part number3009531E01) to the appropriate RTC output connector.

Do not connect the 7/16 in connector end of the cable to the corresponding TxBPF input connector until the appropriate step during the procedure describedin Installing the transmit bandpass filter in this chapter.

NOTE

GSM-100-423Installing the RTC


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

17. Repeat step 16 for the remaining output connector of the RTC if the connector is tobe used.

18. Terminate all unused RTC RF connectors (input, output and coupling) with 50 ohmdummy loads. If terminations are not available for unused RF connectors, fit thecaps supplied to these connectors.

Five-cavity RTC

The diagram shows the front panel of a five-cavity RTC:

Dashed lines represent coaxial couplingconnectors. There are two connectorsassociated with each coaxial coupling bridge(JU1 to JU4/JU5). These connectors areexposed when a coaxial coupling bridge isremoved. These exposed connectors and anyunused OUTPUT PORT connector must beterminated with a short circuit coaxial connector.

NOTE:

COMBINERCAVITYCONFIG.

OUTPUTPORT 1

5/0 CAV0 TO CAV4 NOT USED IN IN IN IN

4/1 CAV1 TO CAV4 CAV0 OUT IN IN IN

3/2 CAV2 TO CAV4 CAV0 AND CAV1 IN OUT IN IN

2/3 CAV3 AND CAV4 CAV0 TO CAV2 IN IN OUT IN

1/4 CAV4 CAV0 TO CAV3 IN IN IN OUT

OUTPUTPORT 0

JU1 JU2 JU3 JU4

FIVE–CAVITY RTC COAXIAL BRIDGE SETTINGS VS CAVITY CONFIGURATION

INPUT FROM DRCUs

INPUT FROMDRCUs

OutputPort 1

Output port 0(terminated with a shortcircuit coaxial connector for thisapplication) see note

JU2

CAV 3 CAV 1

CAV 0CAV 2CAV 4JU4

JU3

DC PWR input connectors

See Detail A

DETAIL A

GNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGND

ADRS7ADRS6ADRS5ADRS4ADRS3ADRS2ADRS1ADRS0RS232ARS232BCAV5 LINKACAV5 LINKBCAV4 LINKACAV4 LINKBCAV3 LINKACAV3 LINKBCAV2 LINKACAV2 LINKBCAV1 LINKACAV1 LINKBCAV0 LINKACAV0 LINKBPARKINGPARKINGPARKING

GNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGND

RS232INTERFACE

PARTIAL RESET

ENABLERESET

FAULT

FULLRESET

ResetSwitches

Fault LED

Jumper Block

GSM-100-423 Installing the RTC


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–47

Four-cavity RTC

The diagram shows the front panel of a four-cavity RTC:

Dashed lines represent coaxialcoupling connectors. There aretwo connectors associated witheach coaxial coupling bridge (JU1to JU4/JU5). These connectorsare exposed when a coaxialcoupling bridge is removed. Theseexposed connectors and anyunused OUTPUT PORTconnector must be terminated witha short circuit coaxial connector.

NOTE:

COMBINERCAVITYCONFIG.

OUTPUTPORT 1

4/0 CAV0 TO CAV3 NOT USED IN IN IN

3/1 CAV1 TO CAV3 CAV0 OUT IN IN

2/2 CAV2 AND CAV3 CAV0 AND CAV1 IN OUT IN

1/3 CAV3 CAV0 TO CAV2 IN IN OUT

OUTPUTPORT 0

JU1 JU2 JU3

FOUR–CAVITY RTC COAXIAL BRIDGE SETTINGS VS CAVITY CONFIGURATION

CAV 3 CAV 1

CAV 0CAV 2

DETAIL A

GNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGND

ADRS7ADRS6ADRS5ADRS4ADRS3ADRS2ADRS1ADRS0RS232ARS232BCAV5 LINKACAV5 LINKBCAV4 LINKACAV4 LINKBCAV3 LINKACAV3 LINKBCAV2 LINKACAV2 LINKBCAV1 LINKACAV1 LINKBCAV0 LINKACAV0 LINKBPARKINGPARKINGPARKING

GNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGND

RS232INTERFACE

PARTIAL RESET

ENABLERESET

FAULT

FULLRESET

ResetSwitches

Fault LED

Jumper Block

DC PWR input connectorsINPUT FROM DRCUs

See Detail A

OutputPort 1

JU1(NOTE)JU2INPUT FROM

DRCUsJU3

Output port 0(terminated with ashort circuit coaxialconnector for thisapplication) seenote

GSM-100-423Installing the cavity combining block


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing the cavity combining block

Introduction toCCB

Cavity combining blocks (CCB) replace the remotely tuneable cavity combiner (RTC),and can be installed in Omni and Sector configurations.

The following information details the installation procedures for upgrading from a RTC toa CCB, in the same BTS configuration.

Safety

Installing a cavity combining block requires the removal of RF transmitter power, it istherefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.

Notify the OMC of imminent installation activity.

Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present withinthe cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/orbatteries are connected.

Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RFpower is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.

WARNING

Preparation forfitting CCBs

The following steps are required prior to installation of a CCB:

1. Fit CCB bracket (Motorola part number 0704865N01) to the CCB, using two M6nuts with plain washers and one M8 bolt with plain and locking washers.

2. Two CCBs are required if the installation is for an Omni 4, 5 or 6 site, remove theshort circuit stub (dummy load) from the CCB with the filter attached (Motorola partnumber 9104559D02).

3. Remove CCB control module cover from the CCB.

The CCB control module (Motorola part number SWLN4507AA) will already beattached to the front of the CCB.

NOTE

4. Power down the BTS cabinet by turning all circuit breakers to the OFF position.

5. All dc, Tx and Rx cables should be marked at this stage to ensure they arecorrectly assembled during the installation.

6. Remove all front end RF equipment from the cabinet, including the DPP shelf.Remove DPP modules from the DPP shelf.

GSM-100-423 Installing the cavity combining block


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–49

Omniconfiguration

(Cables not shown)

Initial Omni configuration procedure

The initial installation steps for all Omni configurations are as follows:

1. Fit an Omni configuration DPP, as detailed in Installing the dual pathpreselector of this chapter.

2. Place the CCB output assembly (Motorola part number 91004559D02) onto the RFshelf, so that the rear of the module is accessible (turned 90 degrees clockwise).Fit RF output cable TX0 to the rear of the filter.

3. Rotate the CCB anti-clockwise 90 degrees and slide into the two retaining fixturesat the rear of the unit. Secure the CCB bracket using two M4 x 8 screws, torquedto 2.2 Nm.

A right angled torx drive will be required for this operation due to spacerestrictions.

NOTE

4. Fit the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) to the RTC powerconnector at the rear of the cabinet.



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Omni 3 configuration

Further steps for an Omni 3 configuration are as follows:

1. Connect the power cable spur to the CCB.

Omni 4, 5 and 6 configuration

Further steps for Omni 4, 5 and 6 configurations are as follows:

1. For Omni4, 5 and 6 configurations fit the extension CCB into the cabinet in asimilar manner as for the original CCB. Fit the RF linking cable between the twoCCBs and ensure the short circuit stub is connected to the spare RF socket on topof the second CCB.

2. Ensure the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) is routedbetween the two CCBs. Connect the power cable to the CCBs, noting that CCB0is on the right.

3. Fit the signal link cable (Motorola part number 3004650D01) to connect the twocontrol modules.

Final Omni configuration procedure

The final installation steps for all Omni configurations are as follows:

1. Fit right angled 50 ohm N-type adaptors (Motorola part number 2804867N01) to allCCB input ports.

2. Slide the CCB cover brackets over these adaptors and secure each bracket withtwo M4 x 8 screws, torqued to 2.2 Nm.

3. Fit the BTS4D/6 blanking bracket to the left side of the cabinet and secure usingtwo M6 x 12 screws torqued to 3.4 Nm.

4. Route the splitter cables from the left of the cabinet, connecting the DPP to theradio modules, behind the two CCB cover brackets.

A BTS4D may require the splitter cables extending, if this is so use RF splitterextension cables (Motorola part number 3086226E01).A BTS6 cabinet may need the left blanking panel, by the transceivers,removed to enable removal of a cable tie.

NOTE

5. Connect the transceivers to the CCBs using the relevant RF cable:

Transceiver number BTS4D cable number BTS6 cable number

0 3004869N03 3004869N01

1 3004869N03 3004869N02

2 3004869N03 3004869N03

3 3004869N03 3004869N04

4 N/A 3004869N05

5 N/A 3004869N06



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–51

6. Switch all the circuit breakers to the ON position.

The cavity identities stored on the control modules may need changing tomatch those of the CCBs. This can be achieved by interrogating the CCB andchanging the switches on the control module. Refer to the relevant proceduresdetailed in BSS Optimization: Installation and Configuration: (GSM-100-423).

NOTE

7. Once fully operational refit the control module covers and close the cabinet door.

8. The installation is now complete, log completion of the installation activity andinform the OMC.

Sectorconfiguration

If a Sector cabinet is to have two CCBs installed each will be fitted with an output filterand short circuit stub (dummy load).

(Cables not shown)



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Sector configuration procedure

The steps for fitting a CCB into position CCB0 are as follows:

1. Fit Sector configuration DPPs, as detailed in Installing the dual path preselectorof this chapter.

2. Place the CCB with attached filter (Motorola part number 91004559D02) onto theRF shelf, so that the rear of the module is accessible (turned 90 degreesclockwise). Fit RF output cable TX0 to the rear of the filter.

3. Rotate the CCB anti-clockwise 90 degrees and slide into the two retaining fixturesat the rear of the unit. Secure the CCB bracket using two M4 x 8 screws, torquedto 2.2 Nm.

A right angled torx drive will be required for this operation due to spacerestrictions.

NOTE

4. Fit the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) to the RTCconnector at the rear of the cabinet.

Fitting a second CCB

The steps for fitting a CCB into position CCB1 are as follows:

1. Fit the remaining output CCB into the cabinet in a similar manner as for the originalCCB.

The RF output cable TX1 must be fitted to the rear of the filter. An additionalperson will be required to hold the CCB clear of the RF shelf to allow thisconnector to be fitted.

NOTE

2. Ensure the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) is routedbetween the two CCBs. Connect the power cable to the CCBs, noting that CCB0is on the right.

3. Fit the signal link cable (Motorola part number 3004650D01) to connect the twocontrol modules.

Fitting a third CCB

Further steps for a Sector 3-3-3 configuration are as follows:

1. Install a third output CCB into the second BTS cabinet by repeating the Omni 3installation procedure.

2. Link the two cabinets in the normal 3-3-3 fashion.

Final Sector configuration procedure

The final steps for all sector configurations are as follows:

1. Fit right angled 50 ohm N-type adaptors (Motorola part number 2804867N01) to allCCB input ports.

2. Slide the CCB cover brackets over these adaptors and secure each bracket withtwo M4 x 8 screws, torqued to 2.2 Nm.

3. Fit the BTS4D/6 blanking bracket to the left side of the cabinet and secure usingtwo M6 x 12 screws, torqued to 3.4 Nm.



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–53

4. Route the splitter cables from the left of the cabinet, connecting the DPPs to thetransceivers, behind the two CCB cover brackets.

A BTS6 cabinet may need the left blanking panel, by the transceivers,removed to enable removal of a cable tie.

NOTE

5. Connect the transceivers to the CCBs using the relevant RF cable:

Transceiver number BTS6 cable number

0 3004869N01

1 3004869N02

2 3004869N03

3 3004869N04

4 3004869N05

5 3004869N06

6. Switch all the circuit breakers to the ON position.

The cavity identities stored on the control modules may need changing tomatch those of the CCBs. This can be achieved by interrogating the CCB andchanging the switches on the control module. Refer to the relevant proceduresdetailed in BSS Optimization: Installation and Configuration: (GSM-100-423).

NOTE

7. Once fully operational refit the control module covers and close the cabinet door.

8. The installation is now complete, log completion of the installation activity andinform the OMC.

GSM-100-423Installing the transmit bandpass filter


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing the transmit bandpass filter

Introduction

Transmit bandpass filters (Tx BPFs) are factory fitted to new cabinets (although cablesare not connected to them). Steps 1 to 3 of these instructions are intended for upgradescarried out after installation.

One Tx BPF is required for each transmit antenna. A BTS cabinet can support amaximum of three transmit antenna signals via three Tx BPFs.

One Tx BPF can be mounted on the right of the shelf (Tx BPF0), one in the middle of theshelf (Tx BPF1), and one on the left of the shelf (Tx BPF2).

If an RTC is installed, only Tx BPF0 and Tx BPF2 can be used.

NOTE

Before installing a Tx BPF, refer to the site specific documentation and determine:

S The number of Tx BPFs to be installed.

S The positions in which the Tx BPFs are to be installed.

S The Tx BPF input/output cabling configuration to be used.

Procedure

To install a Tx BPF:


2. Position the Tx BPF on the transmit combiner shelf. Lift the front of the Tx BPF upand push it towards the rear of the cabinet until the rear tabs are engaged in theshelf slots. Secure the Tx BPF to the shelf by inserting a screw at the front edge ofthe transmit combiner shelf.

3. Repeat step 2 for all the Tx BPFs to be installed.

4. Connect RF coaxial cables (Motorola part number 3009532E01) from the combineroutput or transceiver transmitter RF output to the corresponding Tx BPF inputconnector on the bottom front panel of Tx BPF.

5. Locate and untie the RF coaxial cables labelled Tx0 to Tx4 (cables Tx0, Tx1 andTx2 are on the right of the cabinet, and Tx3 and Tx4 are on the left of the cabinet).

6. Connect the 7/16 in connector of the appropriate cable to the corresponding TxBPF output connector on the top front panel of Tx BPF.

GSM-100-423 Installing the transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–55

Installing the transmit RF cabling for external combining andfiltering

Introduction

Before starting the installation procedure, refer to the site specific documentation todetermine the number of transmitter outputs to be routed to the transmit outputconnectors on top of the cabinet.

Procedure

To install transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering:


2. Connect one end of the transmitter output coaxial cable (Motorola part number3009647E01) to the transmitter RF output connector of the DRCU.

3. Repeat step 2 for each DRCU in the BTS cabinet.

4. Locate and untie the RF coaxial cables labelled Tx0 to Tx4 (cables Tx0 and Tx1on the right of the cabinet and Tx2, Tx3, and Tx4 on the left of the cabinet).

5. Remove the panels on the side walls of the DRCU shelf assembly.

6. Route the cables Tx0 and/or Tx1 (depending on which transmit output connectoron the top of the cabinet is to be used) up and through the opening next to theright side of the transmit combiner shelf.

7. Connect the 7/16 in connector of the appropriate Tx cable to the correspondingDRCU transmitter output coaxial cable connector.

8. Route the cables Tx2, Tx3 and/or Tx4 (depending on which transmit outputconnector on the top of the cabinet is to be used) up and through the opening nextto the left side of the transmit combiner shelf.

9. Connect the 7/16 in connector of the appropriate Tx cable to the correspondingDRCU transmitter output coaxial cable connector.

10. Reinstall the panels on each side wall of the DRCU shelf assembly.

GSM-100-423Installing digital modules


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing digital modules

Introduction

Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with orwithout the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the datain/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/outconnectors.

WARNING

The BTS and BSSC cabinets use circuitry that is sensitive to static discharge.Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment. Do not touchconnector contacts. Wear an earthed high-impedance wrist strap whenhandling modules.

CAUTION

Bus terminator cards (BTCs) are fitted in all BSU/RXU shelves at the factory.The BTC ejectors have a protective plastic cover over the ejector tabs, whichis held in place by a crosshead screw. The plastic cover must be removedbefore installing or replacing a BTC module.

NOTE

Before installing digital modules, refer to the site specific documentation to determine thefollowing:

S The number of digital modules to be installed.

S The positions in which the digital modules are to be installed.

Factoryinstallation

Some cabinets are delivered with all digital modules already installed. If this is the case,perform only those steps in the procedure that relate to cabling.

If a digital module is found to be unserviceable, return it to Motorola in the containerprovided in the PCB transportation boxes kit (SWBN4831A).

GSM-100-423 Installing digital modules


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–57

Installing DRIX3modules

When installing DRIX3 modules use the normal procedure with the following provisos:

1. Fully remove the blue or black screw in the port guide by turning the connectoranti-clockwise. Push the fibre through the screw in the port guide so that the fibreextends from the connector by a few millimetres, then reconnect the port guide tothe DRIX3.

Inserting the fibre with the port guide in place, that is, loosened by a quarterturn, results in a poor connection and causes DRI alarms 61, 62, and 63.

NOTE

2. Jumpers must be positioned on links J3 and J6 for a BTS4/BTS5, or on J3 and J7for a BTS6.

Installing BBBXmodules

The battery backup board (BBBX) module has no backplane connections, and cantherefore be installed in any available slot, provided that the associated cables can reachit.

The cables are factory installed in the cabinet, but must be connected to the BBBXmodule on site.

Cabling is as follows:

BBBXconnector

Type Pin Function Connectsto

Input 9-way male D-type 1 Input return DAB

4 Input good signal

5 Output good signal

6 Input voltage

7 Earth

9 Signal return (0 Vdigital)

Output 4–way 1 0 V Connector

4 +5 VAI2 onbackplane

NOTEPins not listed are not used.



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Procedure

Refer to Handling optical fibres in Chapter 1 before connecting fibre opticcables.

CAUTION

To install the digital modules:

1. Locate and unpack the full- and half-size digital modules. Place the modules onan antistatic bench mat. If an antistatic bench mat is not available place eachmodule on the antistatic bag from which it was removed.

2. Locate a PIX module. If no PIX module is present go to step 6.

3. Locate the PIX interconnect cables that are tie-wrapped to the BSU/RXU shelf. Ifone PIX module is present, cut the tie-wrap for the cable labelled PIX0. If two PIXmodules are present, cut the tie-wraps for both cables (labelled PIX0 and PIX1).

4. Insert the first PIX module into slot 16, ensuring that the module is firmly seated inthe backplane connector. Insert the second PIX module (if present) into slot 15,making sure that the module is firmly seated in the backplane connector.

5. Connect the cable PIX0 to the PIX module in slot number 16 and tighten the twocaptive screws to secure the cable to the PIX module. Connect the cable PIX1 tothe PIX module in slot 15 (if present) and tighten the two captive screws to securethe cable to the PIX module.

6. Mount the remaining modules in the BSU/RXU shelf assembly according to theconfiguration information in the site specific documentation and the diagrams onthe next two pages.

7. Locate the fibre optic pair and the DRCU module for DRCU 0. Connect the fibreoptic cable marked CR400 to the DRCU connector marked CR400, and connectthe fibre optic cable marked CR401 to the DRCU connector marked CR401. Theconnectors marked D1 and D2 are not used in this configuration.

8. Ensure that the jumpers on all DRIX modules are positioned on links J3 (BE4/6)and J7 (BE6).

9. Make sure that the switch on the front of each digital module is set to the down(disabled) position.

10. Using a non-permanent marker, note the module arrangement used for this BSUshelf on the label affixed to the inside of the cabinet door.

GSM-100-423 Installing digital modules


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–59

BSU shelf

The diagram shows the BSU shelf module arrangement. It is intended to show modulelocations and is not drawn to scale. Modules in the lower shelf are actually twice thevertical height of those in the upper.

DRI and DRIX modules are not used in a BSSC cabinet BSU shelf.

NOTE

Any open slots in the lower shelf area must have a filler panel in place for proper cooling of shelf modules

WHEN SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT A WRIST STRAP GROUNDING DEVICE MUST BE WORN AT ALL TIMES

CARD CAGE BOARD ARRANGEMENT DIRECTORY – NOTATIONS TO BE MADE WITH NON–PERMANENT MARKERS ONLY



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

RXU shelf

The diagram shows the RXU shelf module arrangement. It is intended to show modulelocations and is not drawn to scale. Modules in the lower shelf are actually twice thevertical height of those in the upper.

Any open slots in the lower shelf area must have a filler panel in place for proper cooling of shelf modules

WHEN SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT A WRIST STRAPGROUNDING DEVICE MUST BE WORN AT ALL TIMES

GSM-100-423 Optical fibre installation


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–61

Optical fibre installation

Introduction

The following procedures detail the instructions for connecting both polymer fibre opticand glass fibre optic cables. Before commencing installation refer to Handling opticalfibres for instructions on care and handling of fibre optic cables.

Polymer fibreoptic cableinstallation

BTS4/5 cabinet preparation

Follow the necessary steps in Cabinet preparation under Replacing fibre optic cablesin BTS4/5, to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.

BTS4/5 polymer fibre optic installation

1. Connect the radio end of the new fibre to the radio. This connection is made withan SMA connector and is achieved by turning the connector clockwise. Do notover-tighten, hand tight is sufficient.

Do not use pliers or spanners to ‘torque up’ the SMA connector. This willdamage the radio.

CAUTION

2. Route the fibre along the DRCU cable tray to the left.

3. Pass the loose DRIX ends of the fibre through the opening at the left side of theDRCU cable tray.

4. Feed the fibre through the hole from the top. This aids the routeing and preventsany straining or stretching of the fibre.

5. Route the fibre down the cabinet side wall.

6. Pass the ends of the fibre back through the cabinet wall and into the left side of thedigital card cage.

Carefully feed through any extra cable as required.

7. Route the cable along the digital card cable tray and through the plastic separatorsadjacent to the appropriate DRIX board.

Ensure that sufficient cable has been routed to form a neat loop to the DRIX,complying with bend radius requirements detailed in Handling optical fibres.

NOTE

Proceed to Connecting the fibre to the DRIX.

GSM-100-423Optical fibre installation


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

BTS6 Cabinet preparation

Follow the necessary steps in Cabinet preparation under Replacing fibre optic cablesin BTS6 , to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.

BTS6 polymer fibre optic installation

1. Route the new fibre through the corresponding grommet in the DRCU cable tray,which is associated with the DRCU to be connected, from the underside.

If the hole is too small the grommet should be removed from the cable tray andsplit. It should then be slipped onto the new fibre near the radio end. Passthis end through the original hole in the DRCU cage cable tray from theunderside, and then refit the grommet.

NOTE


Do not use pliers or spanners to tighten the SMA connector. This will causedamage.

CAUTION

3. Route an amount of fibre through the grommet hole in the DRCU cable tray frombelow as required to prevent any straining or stretching of the fibre.

Refer to the note above to correctly fit new fibre.

4. Route the DRIX end of the fibre through the corresponding grommet in the plasticair baffle, towards the associated DRIX card, from above.

5. Feed through enough fibre optic cable as required to connect to the DRIX.


NOTE

Proceed to Connecting the fibre to the DRIX.



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–63

Connecting the fibre to the DRIX

This procedure applies to all DRIX original (no suffix) and DRIX3 (A or B) using polymerfibre connections.

This procedure is not applicable to DRIX3C, as it is designed to be used withglass fibre optic cables only

NOTE

Inserting or removing the fibre with the port guide still in place (that is loosenedby a quarter turn) results in damage to the fibre end and poor connections.This will directly cause DRI alarms 61, 62 and 63. If alarms do occur the fibreshould be disconnected and replaced with a new item if:S The length of bare fibre exposed beyond the protective sheath exceeds

4.5 mm.

S The fibre sheath is damaged where the port guide has clamped.

S The exposed fibre is damaged in anyway, such as being scratched orbent.

S The fibre ends are dirty and cannot be cleaned satisfactory.

CAUTION

When making a new connection to the DRIX board, fully remove the blue or blackscrew-in port guide, by rotating the port guide anticlockwise until it separates from thecomponent body. Push the bare fibre end through the screw-in port guide so the fibreextends from the connector (as shown in Figure 2-1) by 10 mm minimum, then reconnectthe port guide to the DRIX. The port guide should then be slid down the fibre andscrewed up. During this last step, the fibre should be held in place so that no movementcan occur. It should not be allowed to hang free when the guide is screwed up. Do notapply excessive force to retain the fibre in place.

10mm min

EXPOSED FIBREOUTER SHEATHPORT GUIDE

4.5mm maxFIBRE OPTIC CABLE

Figure 2-1 Fibre cable through port guide

GSM-100-423Optical fibre installation


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Glass fibre opticcable installation

BTS4/5 cabinet preparation

Follow the necessary steps in Cabinet preparation under Replacing fibre optic cablesin BTS4/5, to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.

BTS4/5 glass fibre optic installation



CAUTION

2. Route the fibre along the DRCU cable tray to the left.

3. Pass the loose DRIX end of the fibre through the opening at the left side of theDRCU cable tray.

4. Feed the fibre through the hole from the top. This aids the routeing and preventsany straining or stretching of the fibre.

5. Route the fibre down the cabinet side wall.

6. Pass the ends of the fibre back through the cabinet wall and into the left side of thedigital card cage.

Feed through any extra cable as required.

7. Route the cable along the digital card cable tray and through the plastic separatorsadjacent to the appropriate DRIX board.


NOTE

8. Connect the DRIX end of the new fibre to the DRIX. This connection is made withan SMA connector and is achieved by turning the connector clockwise. Do notover tighten, hand tight is sufficient.

Proceed to Cabinet restoration.



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–65

BTS6 cabinet preparation

Follow the necessary steps in Cabinet preparation under Replacing fibre optic cablesin BTS6, to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.

BTS6 glass fibre optic installation

1. Route the new fibre through the corresponding grommet in the DRCU cable tray,which is associated with the DRCU to be connected, from the underside.

If the hole is too small the grommet should be removed from the cable tray andsplit. It should then be slipped onto the new fibre near the radio end. Passthis end through the original hole in the DRCU cage cable tray from theunderside, and then refit the grommet.

NOTE



CAUTION

3. Route an amount of fibre through the grommet hole in the DRCU cable tray frombelow as required to prevent any straining or stretching of the fibre.

4. Route the DRIX end of the fibre through the corresponding grommet in the plasticair baffle, towards the associated DRIX card, from above.

If the hole is too small the grommet should be removed from the plastic airbaffle and split. It should then be slipped onto the new fibre near the DRIXend. Pass this end through the hole in the plastic air baffle from above, andthen refit the grommet.

NOTE

5. Feed through enough fibre optic cable as required to connect to the DRIX.


NOTE

6. Connect the DRIX end of the new fibre to the DRIX. This connection is made withan SMA connector and is achieved by turning the connector clockwise. Do notover-tighten, hand tight is sufficient.

Proceed to Cabinet restoration.

GSM-100-423Installing the control signal cabling


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Installing the control signal cabling

Introduction

The internal control signal cabling within each BTS cabinet is factory fitted and tested.This section deals with external connections.

Inter-cabinetfibre opticconnections

Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with orwithout the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the datain/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/outconnectors.

WARNING

Refer to the site specific documentation for information on the following inter-cabinet fibreoptic interconnections:

S BTS cabinet to other BTS cabinet.

S BTS cabinet to BSSC cabinet.

S BTS cabinet to other BSSC cabinet.

E1/T1 lineconnections

Transient protection of the E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment is theresponsibility of the end user. All E1/T1 lines brought in from outside thebuilding must be spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at the buildingentry point. Where this is not practical, an optional transient-protection boardcan be purchased from Motorola. Consult Motorola about transient protectionfor the BTS and BSSC sites.

CAUTION

E1/T1 line connections are made by one of the following methods:

S 120 ohm twisted pair through a BIB mounted on top of a BTS.

S 75 ohm coaxial cable through a T43 board mounted on top of a BTS cabinet.

See T43 to backplane connections and BIB to backplane connections at the end ofthis chapter for the connections between the T43 or BIB and the cabinet backplane.

GSM-100-423 Installing the control signal cabling


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–67

End user I/Odevice cabling

A maximum of two PIX modules per cabinet allows for a total of eight sets of outputcontrol contacts and 16 input sense contacts at a BTS or BSSC site.

Relay-closure outputs

If connectors PIX0 and/or PIX1 on the cabinet interconnect panel are unused,they should be protected from damage by static electricity or foreign matter byensuring that the covers supplied are fitted.

CAUTION

The PIX module includes four relays controlled by a GPROC. There are both normallyopen and normally closed contacts for each of the four relays. The contacts are rated for1A at 30 V and can be used to control external equipment at the site such as fans oraudible alarms. The external equipment is connected to the BTS at the 62-pin D-typeconnector marked PIX0 or PIX1 on the interconnect panel.

Dry-contact inputs

The PIX module includes eight inputs which can be used to connect external sensors.These inputs cause alarms to be reported at the BSC, which forwards the alarm to theOMC.

The external sensors are supplied by the end user. Each sensor is connected across apair of PIX inputs (SEN Dn and SEN Sn, where n corresponds to a PIX opto-coupler 1 to8). For proper operation, all sensors must be of the dry-contact type with the followingspecification:

S 10 kohms or greater across sense inputs is required for a logic 1 (PIX opto-coupleroff).

S 1 kohm or less across sense inputs is required for a logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).

These inputs are available at the 62-pin D-type connectors marked PIX0 and PIX1 on theinterconnect panel. Ensure that the connector being used is terminated at a PIX modulein the cabinet.

PIX connector

The diagram shows the PIX connector:

(MATING SIDE OF FEMALE CONNECTOR VIEWED FROM TOP OF CABINET.)

1

22

43

21

42

62

GSM-100-423Installing the control signal cabling


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

PIX connectordetails

The table lists the PIX connector details:

PIN no. Function PIN no. Function PIN no. Function

1 Sense S7 22 Not used 43 Not used

2 Sense D7 23 Not used 44 Sense S8

3 Not used 24 Not used 45 Sense D8










13 Not used 34 Not used 55 Not used

14 Common 4 35 Not used 56 NC4

15 Not used 36 NO4 57 Not used






21 Not used 42 NO1

GSM-100-423 T43 to backplane connections


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–69

T43 to backplane connections

Introduction

The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the fourassociated T43 positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will havefour T43 positions associated with each cage. Some equipment, for example the BTS,may not equip all four T43 positions.

The following mappings are listed:

S MS0 to BSU.

S MS1 to BSU.

S MS2 to BSU.

S MS3 to BSU.

S MS0 to RXU.

S MS1 to RXU.

S MS2 to RXU.

S MS3 to RXU.

MS0 to BSU

The table lists T43 MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping:

MSI no. Cardslot

T43 conn.PIN no.

4 L13 J1, Tx

4 L13 J2, Rx

4 L13 J4, Tx

4 L13 J5, Rx

2 L15 J7, Tx

2 L15 J8, Rx

2 L15 J10, Tx

2 L15 J11, Rx

0 L17 J13, Tx

0 L17 J14, Rx

0 L17 J16, Tx

0 L17 J17, Rx

GSM-100-423T43 to backplane connections


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

MS1 to BSU


MSI no. Cardslot

T43 conn.PIN no.

5 L12 J1, Tx

5 L12 J2, Rx

5 L12 J4, Tx

5 L12 J5, Rx

3 L14 J7, Tx

3 L14 J8, Rx

3 L14 J10, Tx

3 L14 J11, Rx

1 L16 J13, Tx

1 L16 J14, Rx

1 L16 J16, Tx

1 L16 J17, Rx

MS2 to BSU


MSI no. Cardslot

T43 conn.PIN no.

10 L7 J1, Tx

10 L7 J2, Rx

10 L7 J4, Tx

10 L7 J5, Rx

8 L9 J7, Tx

8 L9 J8, Rx

8 L9 J10, Tx

8 L9 J11, Rx

6 L11 J13, Tx

6 L11 J14, Rx

6 L11 J16, Tx

6 L11 J17, Rx



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–71

MS3 to BSU


MSI no. Cardslot

T43 conn.PIN no.

11 L6 J1, Tx

11 L6 J2, Rx

11 L6 J4, Tx

11 L6 J5, Rx

9 L8 J7, Tx

9 L8 J8, Rx

9 L8 J10, Tx

9 L8 J11, Rx

7 L10 J13, Tx

7 L10 J14, Rx

7 L10 J16, Tx

7 L10 J17, Rx

MS0 to RXU

The table lists T43 MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping:

MSI/XCDR Cardslot

T43conn.

PIN no.

XCDR 5 L19 J1, Tx

XCDR 5 L19 J2, Rx

XCDR 4 L20 J4, Tx

XCDR 4 L20 J5, Rx

XCDR 3 L21 J7, Tx

XCDR 3 L21 J8, Rx

XCDR 2 L22 J10, Tx

XCDR 2 L22 J11, Rx

XCDR 1 L23 J13, Tx

XCDR 1 L23 J14, Rx

XCDR 0 L24 J16, Tx

XCDR 0 L24 J17, Rx

GSM-100-423T43 to backplane connections


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

MS1 to RXU


MSI/XCDR Cardslot

T43conn.

PIN no.

XCDR 11 L13 J1, Tx

XCDR 11 L13 J2, Rx

XCDR 10 L14 J4, Tx

XCDR 10 L14 J5, Rx

XCDR 9 L15 J7, Tx

XCDR 9 L15 J8, Rx

XCDR 8 L16 J10, Tx

XCDR 8 L16 J11, Rx

XCDR 7 L17 J13, Tx

XCDR 7 L17 J14, Rx

XCDR 6 L18 J16, Tx

XCDR 6 L18 J17, Rx

MS2 to RXU


MSI/XCDR Cardslot

T43conn.

PIN no.

XCDR 1 L9 J1, Tx

XCDR 1 L9 J2, Rx

XCDR 1 L9 J4, Tx

XCDR 1 L9 J5, Rx

XCDR 0 L10 J7, Tx

XCDR 0 L10 J8, Rx

XCDR 0 L10 J10, Tx

XCDR 0 L10 J11, Rx

XCDR 13 L11 J13, Tx

XCDR 13 L11 J14, Rx

XCDR 12 L12 J16, Tx

XCDR 12 L12 J17, Rx



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–73

MS3 to RXU


MSI/XCDR Cardslot

T43conn.

PIN no.

XCDR 4 L6 J1, Tx

XCDR 4 L6 J2, Rx

XCDR 4 L6 J4, Tx

XCDR 4 L6 J5, Rx

XCDR 3 L7 J7, Tx

XCDR 3 L7 J8, Rx

XCDR 3 L7 J10, Tx

XCDR 3 L7 J11, Rx

XCDR 2 L8 J13, Tx

XCDR 2 L8 J14, Rx

XCDR 2 L8 J16, Tx

XCDR 2 L8 J17, Rx

GSM-100-423BIB to backplane connections


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

BIB to backplane connections

Introduction

The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the fourassociated BIB positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will havefour BIB positions associated with each cage. Some equipment, for example the BTS,may not equip all four BIB positions.

The mappings listed are:

S MS0 to BSU.

S MS1 to BSU.

S MS2 to BSU.

S MS3 to BSU.

S MS0 to RXU.

S MS1 to RXU.

S MS2 to RXU.

S MS3 to RXU.

GSM-100-423 BIB to backplane connections


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–75

MS0 to BSU

The table lists the BIB MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping:

MSI no. Cardslot

PCM signal(MSI board)

BIB conn.PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.

4 L13 MEGATX+ J1–1 EXT_MEGA_RX1+ 0

4 L13 MEGATX– J1–20 EXT_MEGA_RX1– 0

4 L13 MEGARX+ J1–2 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ 0

4 L13 MEGARX– J1–21 EXT_MEGA_TX1– 0

4 L13 MEGBTX+ J1–4 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ 0

4 L13 MEGBTX– J1–23 EXT_MEGA_RX4– 0

4 L13 MEGBRX+ J1–5 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ 0

4 L13 MEGBRX– J1–24 EXT_MEGA_TX4– 0



















GMR-0168P02901W04-A

MS1 to BSU


MSI no. Cardslot


BIB conn.PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.



























68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–77

MS2 to BSU


MSI no. Cardslot


BIB conn.PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.



























GMR-0168P02901W04-A

MS3 to BSU


MSI no. Cardslot


BIB conn.PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.



























68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–79

MS0 to RXU

The table lists the BIB MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping:

MSI/XCDR Cardslot

PCM signal(MSI/XCDR

board)

BIBconn.

PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.

XCDR 5 L19 MEGATX+ J1–1 EXT_MEGA_RX1+ 0

XCDR 5 L19 MEGATX– J1–20 EXT_MEGA_RX1– 0

XCDR 5 L19 MEGARX+ J1–2 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ 0

XCDR 5 L19 MEGARX– J1–21 EXT_MEGA_TX1– 0

XCDR 4 L20 MEGBTX+ J1–4 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ 0

XCDR 4 L20 MEGBTX– J1–23 EXT_MEGA_RX4– 0

XCDR 4 L20 MEGBRX+ J1–5 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ 0

XCDR 4 L20 MEGBRX– J1–24 EXT_MEGA_TX4– 0



















GMR-0168P02901W04-A

MS1 to RXU


MSI/XCDR Cardslot

PCM signal(MSI/XCDR

board)

BIBconn.

PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.



























68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

2–81

MS2 to RXU


MSI/XCDR Cardslot

PCM signal(MSI/XCDR

board)

BIBconn.

PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.



























GMR-0168P02901W04-A

MS3 to RXU


MSI/XCDR Cardslot

PCM signal(MSI/XCDR

board)

BIBconn.

PIN no.

Signal(BIB board)

BIB no.& MS no.


























68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 3

Decommissioning the equipment

GSM-100-423


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

GSM-100-423


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 3Decommissioning the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-100-423


GMR-0168P02901W04-A



68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

3–1

Overview

Introduction

This chapter describes how to decommission BTS cabinets. To decommissionequipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers, power supplies andantennas, refer to the vendor’s instructions.


Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied. Removeall rings, watches and other jewellery.

WARNING

Prerequisite

Read Chapter 1 of this manual before attempting to decommission a base site.

Lifting cabinets

BTS cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts,built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect thethreads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured toC.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Onlyeyebolts supplied in this kit must be used.

Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage thatmay have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contactMotorola for replacement.

1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point.

2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.

The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw theeyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed.

WARNING

3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.

4. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plasticinserts.

For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use oflifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to beused, ensure that all such regulations are met.

GSM-100-423Decommissioning a BTS cabinet


GMR-0168P02901W04-A

Decommissioning a BTS cabinet

Introduction

Use the following procedure to decommission a BTS, and use the checklist to check offeach action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often as required. Do not writeon the original.

Before starting

Before starting to decommission a BTS ensure that:

S The main power source is switched off and that no power is connected to theBSSC cabinet.

S Sufficient packing crates and cartons are available to pack the decommissionedequipment.

Procedure

To decommission a BTS cabinet:

1. Check the cabinet and its contents for signs of damage.

2. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present in the cabinet.

Stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a hazard to personnelusing the site.

WARNING

3. Disconnect the positive and negative leads of the cabinet input dc power cablefrom the main power source. Do not remove the earth lead. Put the cables insuitable packaging.

4. Disconnect the E1/T1 link cables from the cabinet and secure them to theoverhead racking.

5. Disconnect the transmit RF cables from between the cabinet and the antennawindow. Put the cables in suitable packaging.

6. Disconnect the receive RF cables from between the cabinet and the antennawindow.

GSM-100-423 Decommissioning a BTS cabinet


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

3–3

7. Disconnect and remove the following cables from the cabinet:

– The RF cable from between the hybrid or remote tune combiner andbandpass filter.

– The RF cable from between the DRCU and the hybrid or remote tunecombiner.

– The RF cable from between the transmit port and the bandpass filter.

– The RF cable from between the DRCUs and the six-way splitter.

– The receive RF cables from between the receive port and the DRCUs.

– The dc cables from the DRCUs.

– The fibre optic cables from between the DRIX modules and DRCUs (put thecables into suitable packaging).

8. Ensure that the optical ports on the DRIX modules and DRCUs are protected bydust caps.

9. Remove the DRCUs taking care not to damage or trap any remaining cables. Putthe DRCUs in the packing boxes provided.

10. Remove the following modules from the cabinet:

– Bandpass filter.

– Hybrid/dummy load tray.

– Six-way splitter.

11. Put the modules in the packing boxes provided.

12. Disconnect and remove the RF and dc cables connected to the preselectors. Putthe cables into suitable packaging.

13. Remove the preselectors. Put the preselectors in the packing box provided.

BTS cabinets use circuitry that is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid handlingthe modules in a high-static environment. When handling the modules, do nottouch connector contacts. An earthed high-impedance wrist strap must beworn when handling modules.

CAUTION

14. Remove the fibre optic cables from the LANX modules and put them into suitablepackaging.

15. Using a suitable screwdriver remove:

– The T43 or BIB boards including covers.

– The PIX modules.

– BTC modules, take care not to damage the threads on the extractor levercovers.

– The remaining half-size modules.

16. Ensure that the optical ports on the LANX modules are protected by dust caps.Put the boards and modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in theboxes provided.

17. Remove the following full-size modules:

– KSW modules.

– GPROC/GPROC2 modules.

– MSI modules.

– GCLK modules.

– DRI modules.



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

18. Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the boxesprovided.

19. Remove the DPSMs. Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully packthem in the boxes provided.

20. Disconnect the power leads from the cabinet and the earth lead from the cabinetand the main power source.

21. Remove the air deflector from the cabinet door. Put the deflector and the securingscrews into suitable packaging.

22. If the BTS is mounted on a plinth, remove the bottom fittings (bolts and washers)then carefully pack them in suitable bags.

23. Remove the overhead cable trough and supports and put them into suitablepackaging.

An unequipped BTS cabinet can weigh up to 148 kg (325 lb). Handle cabinetswith extreme caution to avoid tipping.

WARNING

24. Move the cabinet to a location where it can be safely packed into its woodentransit case.

GSM-100-423 Decommissioning a BTS cabinet


68P02901W04-A

GMR-01

3–5

BTS checklist

ENGINEER’S NAME DATE

SIGNATURE

SITE NAME

EQUIPMENT TYPE

NAT ID

Cables from DRCU/ hybrid/ BPF removed and packed

All remaining RF and fibre optic cables disconnected

DRCUs removed and packed

ACTION YES NO N/A

PSU decommissioned

Packing material (including anti2static bags) on site

Are cabinets damaged? If yes detail in comments box.

Cables disconnected from top of cabinet and stowed

Hybrid/ dummy load tray/ BPF removed and packed

Preselectors/ 62way splitter removed and packed

PIX/ T43/ BIB/ BTC and modules removed and packed

DRI/ DRIX modules removed and packed

Remaining half size modules removed and packed

GPROC/GPROC2 modules removed and packed

MSI/ KSW modules removed and packed

GCLK modules removed and packed

DPSMs removed and packed

All loose cables in the cabinet stowed and secured

Earth cable disconnected from cabinet

Air deflector removed and packed

Cabinet bottom fittings removed and packed

Cabinet packed in transit case

Cable trough and supports removed and packed

COMMENTS



GMR-0168P02901W04-A

CHAPTER 2GENERAL PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 3MAINTENANCEPROCEDURES

CHAPTER 4REPLACEMENTPROCEDURES

CHAPTER 5MISCELLANEOUS REPAIR

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1st Jun 01 Maintenance Information: BTS

68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

i

Category 523

Maintenance Information

GSM-100-523

1st Jun 01ii Maintenance Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

iii

Category 523Maintenance Information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the manual 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2General procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General procedures 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .








Chapter 3Maintenance procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance procedures 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-523

1st Jun 01iv Maintenance Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W05-A




Chapter 4Replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement procedures 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter structure 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .








GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

v











GSM-100-523

1st Jun 01vi Maintenance Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W05-A










GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

vii











GSM-100-523

1st Jun 01viii Maintenance Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W05-A











68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 1

Introduction

GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

iii


Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the manual 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523 Introduction


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

1–1

Introduction

Overview

This chapter:

S Gives the purpose of the maintenance category.

S Lists prerequisites for using the maintenance category.

S Lists documents related to this category.

Audience

This manual is for technicians who work at base station system (BSS) sites.

The manual assumes a degree of familiarity with Motorola BTS hardware. Techniciansmay use this manual to maintain and repair the BTS cabinets.

Purpose of themanual

Use this manual to find procedures necessary to maintain and to remove and replacevarious components in the cabinets.

Prerequisites

This manual assumes the reader knows is suitably qualified to maintain Motorola BTSsites.

Structure

The manual contains the following:

S General procedures

This chapter contains general information to be used whilst maintaining the BTS.

S Maintenance

This chapter contains the procedures for general maintenance of the BTS.

S Repairs

These chapters contain specific instructions for replacing and repairingcomponents within the BSS cabinets. Anyone, regardless of skill level, shouldrefer to these instructions when working on the site.

GSM-100-523Introduction

1st Jun 011–2 Maintenance Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W05-A


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 2

General procedures

GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 2General procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General procedures 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .








GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523 General procedures


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

2–1

General procedures

Introduction

This chapter contains general repair information. This information applies to alldiagnostic and repair procedures.

Motorola recommends reading this chapter before:

S Leaving for a site.

S Beginning a repair procedure.

Table 2-1 lists the different sections in this chapter.

Table 2-1 General procedures sections

This section... Contains...

Test and repair equipmentlists

S A list of required testing equipment.

S A list of required repair equipment.

Warnings and safety S Definitions of the three types of messages.

S Toxic material warnings.

S Electrical warnings.

S Static discharge cautions.

S Fibre optic cabling precautions.

Locating faulty Cabinets Instructions for locating the cabinets at a site that aregenerating the alarms.

Connecting the LocalMaintenance Terminal (LMT)

Instructions for:

– Connecting the LMT.

– Setting up the MMI interface.

– Changing the security level.

Identifying the faulty devices The procedure for displaying alarms at the LMT.

GSM-100-523Test and repair equipment lists


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Test and repair equipment lists

Test equipmentlist

Table 2-2 lists the equipment Motorola recommends for diagnosing and testing BTScabinets. This table contains recommendations for both GSM900 and DCS1800systems.

The following table identifies the required test equipment, suitable alternatives can beused.

Table 2-2 GSM test equipment


1 IBM compatible personal computer (PC) with the followingminimum specifications:

– Intel 486 processor.

– 170 MB hard drive.

– 8 MB RAM.

– ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.

NOTESome software tools require a PC with these specifications. If theonly purpose of the PC is to monitor alarms and enter MMIcommands, a PC with the following specifications should suffice:

– Intel 386 processor.

– 60 MB hard drive.

– 4 MB RAM.

– ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.

1 Either of the following:

S RF signal generator (Hewlett - Packard HP 8657A orequivalent) for testing GSM 900 systems only,

Or:

S RF signal generator (Hewlett - Packard HP 8657B orequivalent) for testing either GSM 900 or DCS 1800systems.

1 Digital multimeter (Hewlett - Packard HP E2378A or equivalent)

As required RF 50 ohm resistive load(s) with the following minimumspecifications:

– 50 watt minimum.

– Operation up to 1 GHz (GSM 900 systems).

– Operation up to 2 GHz (DCS 1800 systems).

1 RF 50 ohm power load (Relm T44004 or equivalent)100 watt minimum

1 RF 20 dB attenuator (Narda 769–20 or equivalent)150 watt minimum

1 RF Adaptor kit: N to 716 (Huber and Suhr 33–716–n–50–1 orequivalent)

. . . continued

GSM-100-523 Test and repair equipment lists


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

2–3

Table 2-2 GSM test equipment


1 RF Wattmeter (Bird 43 or equivalent) with the following elements:

– 1 watt.

– 2.5 watt.

– 5 watt.

– 10 watt.

– 25 watt.

– 50 watt.

1 N to N male coaxial cable, 4 m long, calibrated

6 N to 7/16 male coaxial cable, 2 m long, calibrated

1 N to 7/16 male coaxial cable, 4 m long, calibrated

1 N to 7/16 male coaxial cable, 300 mm long, calibrated

1 100/140 fibre optic loop back cable, polished at both ends

1 RS-232 ribbon cable

1 GSM Communications analyzer (Hewlett - Packard HP 8922B orequivalent)

1 Down converter (Hewlett - Packard HP 83220A or equivalent) foruse with the GSM Communications analyzer (DCS 1800 systemsonly)

1 ESD protection kit

GSM-100-523Test and repair equipment lists


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Repairequipment list

Table 2-3 lists the tools Motorola recommends for repairing BTS cabinets.

Table 2-3 Repair equipment


1 Torque wrench, calibrated in newton meters or foot–pounds

1 Torx driver, size T–30





1 Nut driver, size 10 mm AF

1 Nut driver, size 8 mm AF

1 Flat blade screwdriver

1 Phillips screwdriver

1 Tamper-proof Allen key for loosening and tightening thecovers on external cabinet locks

1 Motorola approved wrist strap

1 Antistatic pad

May vary, dependingon the number ofboards beingremoved.

Antistatic containers or bags

1 Set, jewellers screwdrivers, both Phillips and flat blade

1 Bucket

Mild dishwashing soap or detergent

GSM-100-523 General repair procedures


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

2–5

General repair procedures

Overview

The Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) uses Base Station System (BSS) FaultManagement software to determine whether or not the site is in a fault condition. If it is,the OMC sends a technician to a site to fix the problem.

The rest of this section contains the general steps to follow to isolate the fault.

Siteconfiguration

A site may include any or all of the following:

S Base transceiver station (BTS).

S Base station controller (BSC).

S Remote transcoder (RXCDR).

This manual assumes familiarity with these components. Refer to the appropriateservice manuals for detailed descriptions.

GSM-100-523Man machine interface (MMI)


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Man machine interface (MMI)

Definition

The MMI is the interface between the user and the software.

The MMI may run on:

S A terminal at the Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC).

S A local maintenance terminal (LMT).

MMI uses

Use the MMI to:

S Obtain information from the system:

– Display alarm reports.

– Retrieve device status.

S Control the system:

– Take modules out of service (OOS).

– Put modules into service (INS).

GSM-100-523 Locating faulty cabinets


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

2–7

Locating faulty cabinets

Purpose

This section contains instructions for isolating a particular fault to a particular cabinet.

Prerequisites

These steps assume that:

S The OMC requested a visit to the site.

S The OMC knew the site locations, and which cabinet was generating the alarm.

Procedure

Follow these steps to isolate the fault to a cabinet.

1. Enter the site if it is safe to do so.

2. Determine if the BTS cabinet has alarm LEDs in the door.

Some older cabinets have an LED in the upper left corner. Later generations ofcabinets do not have this LED.

The cabinet LED shows that the cabinet is receiving power.

If the cabinet... Then...

has an LED in the door... continue with step 3.

does not have an LED in thedoor...

skip ahead to step 4.

3. Check the LED on each BTS cabinet.

GSM-100-523Locating faulty cabinets


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

If the doorLED is...

Thecabinet...

Therefore...

lit... haspower...

continue with step 4.

off... does nothave

power...

investigate the power failure to this cabinet.

i. Check the rectifiers for correctoperation. Refer to thedocumentation supplied by therectifier manufacturer.

– If the rectifiers are working correctly,continue with step ii, below.

– If the rectifiers are working incorrectly,repair or replace them according tothe manufacturer’s instructions.

Check back with the OMC to see ifthe alarm cleared.

If the alarm is cleared, the condition isfixed. No further action is necessary.

If the alarm did not clear, continuewith step ii, below.

ii. Check the top of the cabinet to see ifthere is voltage present.

– If there is no voltage present, checkfor an auto disconnect.

– If voltage is present, check for aninternal failure.

4. Open the door of the faulty cabinet.

The OMC should identify the faulty cabinet. The OMC gets this information fromthe various alarm messages sent by the system.

If the OMC did not identify which cabinet was faulty, open each cabinet on the siteuntil you find one with fault indicators, such as lit Alarm (red) LEDs.

5. Note the status of the LED indicators on the front panel of each module equippedwith them.

See Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 for BSU and RXU module location within the shelf.

6. Continue with Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT).

GS

M-100-523

Lo

cating

faulty cab

inets

1st Jun 01M

aintenance Information: B

TS

68P02901W

05-A

GM

R-01

2–9

BTC 0

BTC 1

XCDR 1

GPROC 6

GPROC 7

DRI(M) 2

DRI(M) 3

DRI(M) 1

DRIX 2

DRIX 4

DRIX 0

DRIX 1

KSW/TSW A

GCLK B

GCLK A

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ


PIX 0

DRI(M) 4

DRIX 3

KSW/TSW B

GPROC 5

XCDR 0

RMT KSWX A4

RMT KSWX A3

RMT KSWX A2

RMT KSWX A1

RMT KSWX A0

KSWX A2

KSWX A1

KSWX A0

EXP

EXP

EXP

LANX A

LANX B

KSWX B0

KSWX B1

EXP

EXP

KSWX B2EXP

RMT KSWX B0

RMT KSWX B1

RMT KSWX B2

spare

GPROC 3

GPROC 4

GPROC 2

GPROC 1

GPROC 0

MSI 0

MSI 1

MSI 2

MSI 3

XCDR 2

XCDR 3

MSI 4XCDR 4

MSI 5XCDR 5

MSI 6XCDR 6

MSI 7XCDR 7

MSI 8XCDR 8

MSI 9XCDR 9

DRI(M) 0 MSI 10XCDR 10

MSI 11XCDR 11

CLKX B0

CLKX B1

CLKX A0

CLKX A1

CLKX A2

CLKX B2

RMT KSWX B3

RMT KSWX B4

KSWX A

KSWX B

LCL

LCL

U0

U1

U2

U3

U4

U5

U6

U7

U8

U9

U10

U11

U12

U13

U14

U15

U16

U17

U18

U19

U20

U21

U22

U23

U24

U25

U26

U27

U28

L0L1

L3L5

L6L7

L8L9

L10L11

L12L13

L14L15

L16L17

L18L19

L20L21

L22L23

L24L25

L26L27

L28

KS

0K

S1

AI0

AI1

AI2

MS

0G

K0

DR

5D

R4

DR

3D

R2

DR

1D

R0

MS

1M

S2

MS

3

PIX 1

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ SPARE ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ SPARE

Fig

ure 2-1 B

SU

shelf modules slot assignm

ent layout and backplane connectors

BTC 0

BTC 1

XCDR 1

KSW A

GCLK B

GCLK A

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

PIX 0

KSW B

XCDR 0

RMT KSWX A4

RMT KSWX A3

RMT KSWX A2

RMT KSWX A1

RMT KSWX A0

KSWX A2

KSWX A1

KSWX A0

EXP

EXP

EXP

LANX A

LANX B

KSWX B0

KSWX B1

EXP

EXP

KSWX B2EXP

RMT KSWX B0

RMT KSWX B1

RMT KSWX B2

GPROC 1

GPROC 0

MSI 0

MSI 1

MSI 2

MSI 3

XCDR 2

XCDR 3

MSI 4

XCDR 4

XCDR 5

XCDR 6

XCDR 7

XCDR 8

XCDR 9

XCDR 10

XCDR 11

CLKX B0

CLKX B1

CLKX A0

CLKX A1

CLKX A2

CLKX B2

RMT KSWX B3

RMT KSWX B4

KSWX A

KSWX B

LCL

LCL

U0

U1

U2

U3

U4

U5

U6

U7

U8

U9

U10

U11

U12

U13

U14

U15

U16

U17

U18

U19

U20

U21

U22

U23

U24

U25

U26

U27

U28

L0L1

L3L5

L6L7

L8L9

L10L11

L12L13

L14L15

L16L17

L18L19

L20L21

L22L23

L24L25

L26L27

L28

KS

0A

I0

AI1

MS

0M

S1

MS

2M

S3

PIX 1

AI2

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ SPARE

XCDR 12

XCDR 13

XCDR 14

XCDR 15

XCDR 16

XCDR 17

XCDR 18

KS

1

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ

ÉÉ SPARE

Fig

ure 2-2 R

XU

shelf modules slot assignm

ent layout and backplane connectors

GSM-100-523Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)

Overview

Most of the diagnostic and repair procedures suggest connecting a Local MaintenanceTerminal (LMT) in order to enter MMI commands, lock and unlock devices, and viewalarms.

This section gives detailed instructions for connecting the LMT.

Required toolsand equipment

This procedure requires the following equipment:

S IBM - compatible Personal Computer (PC),

S RS-232 cable.

Refer to Table 2-2 for a list of test equipment and equipment specifications.

Prerequisites

Before performing the steps in this procedure, determine which cabinet contains themaster processor.

Connecting theLMT to a GPROC

Follow these steps to connect the PC to a GPROC, or GPROC2, to create an LMT.

1. Open the cabinet containing the master GPROC.

2. Find the master GPROC.

Motorola recommends connecting the PC to the master GPROC. However, thePC can be connected to any GPROC that is not in an alarm state.

3. Connect one end of the RS-232 ribbon cable to the asynchronous communicationscontroller port of the PC.

4. Connect the other end of the RS-232 ribbon cable to the TTY port connector onthe front panel of the master GPROC in the BSU (or RXU) shelf.

5. Power up the PC.

The PC is now a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).

6. Continue with Setting up the MMI.

GSM-100-523 Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

2–11

Setting up theMMI

Follow these steps to set up the Local Maintenance Terminal.

1. Set the LMT TTY port parameters:

– 9600 baud.

– 8 data bits.

– 1 stop bit.

– 1 start bit.

– no parity.

2. Press the RETURN (or ENTER) key.

The LMT displays one of the following prompts:

– MMI-ROM 0115 –> (for GPROC running in ROM)

– MMI-RAM 0115 –> (for GPROC running in RAM)

Work from either prompt.

Changing thesecurity level

Follow these steps to change the security level.

1. Enter the disp_level command at the prompt.

The system displays the current User Security level, like this:

Current security level is 1

2. Enter the chg_level command.

The system asks for the password for the next security level. There are twopasswords available:

– One password will change the security level to Level 2.

– One password to change from security level 2 to level 3.

The OMC will know the passwords. Contact the OMC for the passwords.

3. Enter the user password to access the BSS.

Enter thepassword...

And the system displays... Continue with...

correctly... the new security level and the systemprompt:

Current security level is x MMI–RAM0115–>

Where x is the new security level.Possible values are:

– 2

– 3

Identifying the faultydevices

incorrectly... the old security level and the systemprompt:

Current security level is 1 MMI–RAM0115–>

Step 2 and step 3. untilthe system displays thenew security level.

GSM-100-523Identifying the faulty devices


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Identifying the faulty devices

Prerequisites

Before performing the steps in this procedure:

S Locate the faulty cabinet.

S Connect the LMT.

Equipment safety

During replacement procedures, it may be possible to identify signs of damage causedby overheating, short circuits or sudden component failure. This may indicate a problemthat could repeat, cause additional damage, or be a symptom of a failure elsewhere.Analysis of the problem may identify common faults and make corrective action possible.

it is recommended that:

S The OMC is informed that an equipment safety problem has been identified.

S The steps for Reporting safety issues are followed. These detailed in theintroductory section of this manual.

Checking thestatus

Follow these steps to check the status of the device which is reporting the alarm to theOMC.

Devices that are Out Of Service (OOS) report an operational state of“disabled.”

NOTE

1. To enable alarm reporting, enter the following command at the LMT:

enable_alarm #

Where: # is: location id

2. To display a list of the currently active FMIC and OIC alarms, enter the followingcommand at the LMT:

disp_act_alarm #

Where: # is: location id

The OMC should provide the number for the site variable (see step 4 in LocatingFaulty Cabinets).

3. Observe the displayed alarm report and active alarm list.

The system now displays alarm reports as they occur. The module in the alarmreport is detecting the alarm.

4. Check to see if the module reporting the alarm or that has an active alarm is thesame as the module with a status LED indicating a fault.

This module may be the source of the fault. However, some other device, cable,shelf, or RF equipment could be causing the fault.

GSM-100-523 Identifying the faulty devices


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

2–13

5. Look up the Device Alarm in the Device Alarms tables, detailed in MaintenanceInformation: BSS Field Troubleshooting (GSM–100–523).

There is an Alarm table for each device or digital board.

6. Diagnose the problem by following the Fault Diagnosis procedure indicated in theDevice Alarm table.

7. If necessary, use the module replacement procedures detailed in this manual toreplace the suspect module.

Additional fault isolation may be necessary if the module reporting the failure is replacedand placed in service and new alarms are reported again. To perform this additional faultisolation, evaluate the actual alarm message that the module is reporting. Refer to theGSM event/alarm messages in Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC(GSM-100-501) for a list of valid alarm reports and alarm information details.

GSM-100-523Resetting and re-initializing a site


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Resetting and re-initializing a site

Overview

BSS software commands cannot take the following BTS cabinet hardware modules Outof Service (OOS):

S Power distribution unit modules

S Radio Front End (RFE) modules

S Transmit combining/filtering modules

S External RF equipment

Procedure

Follow these steps to reset the site.

Resetting the site takes the site out of service (OOS) and drops all calls. Itis advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.

CAUTION

1. Enter reset_bss at the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).

2. Replace the faulty module using the appropriate procedure.

3. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules toreinitialize the site and put it back In Service (INS).

– DRI

– MSI

– KSW/TSW

– GPROC

4. Verify the site automatically reboots and is INS.


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 3

Maintenance procedures

GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 3Maintenance procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance procedures 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523 Maintenance procedures


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

3–1

Maintenance procedures

Introduction

This chapter contains the maintenance procedures for the BTS cabinet.

Prerequisites

These procedures assume that the engineer is competent to work on Motorola BTSequipment.

GSM-100-523Air filter replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Air filter replacement

Introduction

As part of BSSC/BSSC2 cabinet maintenance, foam air filters should be replaced everysix months with new or previously washed filters.

Replacementprocedure

Follow the procedure detailed under Air filter replacement in chapter 4, to correctlyreplace cabinet foam air filters.

Air filter cleaning

Air filters removed from BSSC/BSSC2 cabinets during air filter replacement must bewashed prior to storing for reuse. Follow the procedure detailed under Cleaning cabinetair filters later in this chapter, to correctly clean used foam air filters.

GSM-100-523 Cleaning cabinet air filters


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

3–3

Cleaning cabinet air filters

Introduction

The cabinet air filters should be replaced with new or clean filters every six months. Toremove the filters refer to Chapter 4 Air filter replacement.

Follow these instructions to wash the foam air filters fitted to the BTS cabinet after theyhave been removed and taken to a location were they are to be cleaned.

Tools andequipment

This procedure requires the following tools and equipment.

S A bucket, or similar container.

S A source of warm water.

S Mild soap, dishwashing soap or detergent.

Cleaning cabinetair filters

To clean the cabinet air filters proceed as follows:

1. Wash the filter in warm soapy water.

2. Squeeze the water out of the filter gently, and allow the filter to dry.

Do not wring the filter. Wringing may tear the material.CAUTION

3. Inspect the filter for splits and holes. If the filter is undamaged it should be storedfor reuse. Damaged filters are to be discarded in accordance with localguidelines.

GSM-100-523Cleaning of fibre optics


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Cleaning of fibre optics

Introduction

The ends of the fibre optic, whether or not terminated by a connector, must be kept cleanat all times. No dust or dirt must be allowed to contaminate the ends of the fibre or thefemale connectors on the modules.

When a fibre is not connected, the protective caps must be fitted at all times to the endsof the fibre and to all unused connectors on the modules.

Tools andequipment

The following tools and equipment are required:

S Lint free cloth.

S A suitable cleaning solution.

Cleaning offibres andconnectors

As a matter of routine, the fibre optic ends should be cleaned whenever the cables areinserted into their connector.

To clean fibre optic components, wipe gently with a lint-free cloth soaked in a suitablecleaning solution.

Care must be taken not to scratch the ends of the fibres.

CAUTION

Protective caps, if fitted, should be removed for the minimum amount of time, to reducethe risk of contamination/damage.

Lint free cloth is the preferred medium for cleaning, since the risk ofcontamination or damage due to the cleaning process is minimal. In extremecircumstances the use of soft clean cotton may be acceptable.The use of cotton buds soaked in cleaning solution is not recommended, sincelint is frequently left on the fibre and the connectors may be wet when thecables are inserted into the connectors.

NOTE


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 4

Replacement procedures

GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

iii

Chapter 4Replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement procedures 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter structure 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .











GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A










GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

v











GSM-100-523

1st Jun 01vi Maintenance Information: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W05-A








GSM-100-523 Replacement procedures


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–1

Replacement procedures

Purpose

This chapter contains procedures for replacing various components within the BTScabinets.

Chapter structure

The replacement procedures are listed alphabetically, by device name (for example,CLKX, or GPROC/GPROC2).

If there are different procedures for replacing a redundant device and a similarnon–redundant device (such as redundant and non–redundant CLKX modules) theinstructions for replacing the redundant device are given first.

GSM-100-523Using the MMI to change device status


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Using the MMI to change device status

IntroductionA device must be out of service (OOS) before it can be removed from an operationalcabinet. This is achieved by use of the lock_device command. The unlock_devicecommand is used to return the device in service (INS).

If an operational cabinet has active and standby (redundant) devices it is possible toswap their functionality. The swap_device command swaps the specified standbydevice with the specified active device.

Taking a deviceout of service(OOS)

Follow these steps to take a device out of service.

S To take a device out of service intrusively, invoke the following command at theLMT:

lock_device <location> <device_name> <device_id1><device_id2> <device_id3>

Where: <location> is: site id

<device_name> unique deviceidentification

<device_id1> first device identifier

<device_id2> second device identifier

<device_id3 third device identifier

The system takes the device out of service.

Locking a device intrusively puts the device OOS and excludes it from useimmediately.

NOTE

S To take a device out of service nonintrusively, invoke the following at the LMT:

shutdown <location> <device> <device_id> <device_id><device_id> <seconds>






<seconds> time limit on transition inseconds

The system lets the device continue existing calls, but will not use the device forany new traffic. At the end of the timeout period the system treats the commandas a lock.

The shutdown_device command usually applies to DRIMs.

GSM-100-523 Using the MMI to change device status


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–3

Unlocking adevice

To unlock a locked device and put it INS, enter the following at the LMT:

unlock_device <location> <device_name> <device_id1><device_id2> <device_id3>






The system puts the device into service.

The unlock_device command only brings a locked device in service froma locked state, allowing the system to use the device. If the system findsproblems with the device during configuration, however, the device willremain out of service.

NOTE

The system uses some devices of the same type in a redundant pair. One device isactive (device status of BUSY_UNLOCKED) and the other device is standby (devicestatus of ENABLED_UNLOCKED). If the active device fails, the standby device switchesto BUSY_UNLOCKED status.

Swappingdevices

Follow these steps to determine the current state of the active and standby devices whenattempting to swap devices.

1. Enter the following command at the LMT:

state <location> <device_name> <device_id1> <device_id2><device_id3>






The system displays the status of the device.

2. Repeat step 1 for any redundant devices.

GSM-100-523Using the MMI to change device status


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

3. If one device is Busy/Unlocked and the other device is ENABLED_UNLOCKED,enter the following command at the LMT:

swap_devices <location> <ACTIVE device_name> <STANDBYdevice_name> <ACTIVE device_ids> <STANDBY device_ids>


<ACTIVEdevice_name>

unique device id of activedevice

<STANDBYdevice_id1>

unique device id ofstandby device

<ACTIVE device_ids> first, second and thirdactive device identifiers

<STANDBY device_ids first, second and thirdstandby device identifiers

The system swaps the devices. Now the device that was ENABLED_UNLOCKEDwill be BUSY_UNLOCKED.

4. Repeat the state command to verify that the devices have swapped states.

Devices can only be swapped when both devices are INS (device status ofBUSY_UNLOCKED or ENABLED_UNLOCKED).

NOTE

GSM-100-523 Air filter replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–5

Air filter replacement

Introduction

Follow these instructions to replace the foam air filters in the BTS cabinets.

The cabinet air filters should be replaced with new or clean filters every six months. It isrecommended that filters are not washed on site but replaced with new or previouslywashed filters.

Tools andequipment

This procedure requires the following tools and equipment.

S New or previously washed air filters.

Table 4-1 lists the different air filters and the kits of new filters that can be ordered.

Table 4-1 Replacement air filters

Kit Number(10 Filters):

Filter PartNumber:

Description: ApproximateSize:

SWEN4008A 3509601F04 BTS4 upper intakeair filter

(Three latch door)

124mm x 515mm


(Single latch door)

124mm x 610mm

SWEN4006A 3509601F02 BTS4 lower air filter 269mm x 610mm


124mm x 515mm



124mm x 610mm


GSM-100-523Air filter replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing the airfilter

To replace the cabinet air filters proceed as follows:

Eye protection must be worn if you open the cabinet door when the cabinet ispowered up.

WARNING

1. Open the cabinet door.

2. Lift the bar securing the filter and carefully lift it free.

The door locking mechanism obstructs the bar on some older BTS4 cabinets.Move filter securing bar to the right when lifting it free.

NOTE

3. Remove the filter.

Do not install a wet filter. A wet filter will damage the equipment.

CAUTION

4. Position the new or previously washed filter.

5. Refit the securing bar.

6. Repeat step 2 to step 5 for the second filter, as necessary.

7. Close and latch the cabinet door.

8. Filters can be washed off site using warm water and mild soap (dishwashing soapor detergent) for later installation at a site.

GSM-100-523 Interface board replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–7

Interface board replacement

Introduction

This section gives instructions for removing and replacing a balanced line interface board(BIB) or a T-43 interface board (T43). Since the procedure for both boards is the same,this section refers to either board as an “interface board.”

All channel traffic associated with an interface board is lost during thereplacement procedure. If only one 2.048 Mbit/s link is affected by aninterface board fault, replacement of the interface board should be performedduring a period of low traffic so as not to interrupt service on the other 2.048Mbit/s links connected to the interface board.

CAUTION

Illustrations

Figure 4-1 shows a sample of the balanced line interconnect board (BIB).

J0

J1

T2T1

T5T4

T7 T8

T10

T13T11

T14 T16

T17

Figure 4-1 Balanced-line Interconnect Board

Figure 4-2 shows a sample of the T-43 interconnect board (T43).

J0

J1

J2

J5

J4

J7

J8

J10

J13 J11

J14

J16

J17

Figure 4-2 Type 43 interconnect board

GSM-100-523Interface board replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing aninterface board

1. Enter the lock_device command to take the affected MMS device out-of-service(OOS).

MMS is the software name for the 2.048 Mbit/s links.

2. Remove the four screws that secure the interface board to the cabinet interconnectpanels.

3. Lift the interface board free to disconnect the 37-pin D connector.

4. Note the order that the 2.048 Mbit/s links are connected to the interface board.

5. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links from the interface board.

6. Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links to the replacement interface board.

7. Reconnect the interface board to the correct 37-pin D connector on the cabinetinterconnect panel.

8. Secure the interface board to the interconnect panel using the four screwsremoved in step 2.

9. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the MMS device back in-service(INS).

GSM-100-523 Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–9

Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and installing a transmit bandpass filter(Tx BPF).

Do not remove or replace a transmit bandpass filter while the radio unit istransmitting!

WARNING

Removing a TxBPF

Follow these steps to remove the Tx BPF:


The transmit combiner shelf is located above the DRCU shelf assembly betweenthe DRCU fans and the RFE shelf.

2. Check the LEDs on the DRCU associated with the Tx BPF being replaced to verifythe DRCU does not have any traffic on it.

3. Enter the lock_device command to take the radio unit out of service (OOS).

The DRCU cannot have traffic at the moment the Tx BPF is replaced.

CAUTION

4. Disconnect all the coaxial cables by turning the cable connectors clockwise.

5. Note the order of that the coaxial cables are connected to the three ports on theBPF for reconnecting purposes.

6. Remove the Tx BPF hold down screw from the bottom edge of the transmitcombiner shelf.

7. Lift the front of the Tx BPF module up and pull it toward the front of the cabinetuntil the rear module tab disengages from the shelf slot.

Installing a TxBPF

Follow these steps to install a Tx BPF:

1. Install the Tx BPF into the cabinet by pushing the module toward the back of thecabinet until the rear module tab engages to the shelf slot.

2. Tighten the Tx BPF hold down screws to the bottom edge of the transmit combinershelf.

3. Connect all the coaxial cables.

4. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRI/DRIX/DRCU associatedwith the Tx BPF back in-service (INS).

GSM-100-523Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Initializing thesite

After installing this module, it may be necessary to reinitialize the site.

Follow these steps to reset the site:

Resetting the site takes the site out–of–service (OOS) and interrupts or dropscalls in progress. It is advisable to perform this procedure during periods oflow traffic.

CAUTION


2. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules toreinitialize the site and put it back In Service (INS).

– DRI

– MSI

– KSW/TSW

– GPROC


GSM-100-523 Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–11

Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and replacing redundant clock extendermodules (CLKX).

Example

Figure 4-3 shows a typical CLKX card.

Fibre opticclock outputs to

local KSWXs

Backplane connector

Figure 4-3 Clock Extender (CLKX) module

ReplacingCLKXA

Follow these steps to replace CLKX A.

Replacing redundant CLKX modules may cause a system glitch when theCLKXs are being switched.

NOTE

1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane.This forces a changeover to CLKX B modules.

2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX A module to be replaced.

3. Remove the CLKX A module and insert the replacement CLKX.

4. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables.

5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.

GSM-100-523Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

ReplacingCLKXB

Follow these steps to replace CLKX B.

Replacing redundant CLKX modules may cause a system glitch when theCLKX are being switched.

NOTE

1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane.This forces a changeover to CLKX A modules.

2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX B module to be replaced.

3. Remove the CLKX B module and insert the replacement CLKX.


5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.

GSM-100-523 Non-redundant CLKX replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–13

Non-redundant CLKX replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and replacing non-redundant clockextender modules (CLKX)

Example

Figure 4-4 shows a typical CLKX card.

Fibre optic clockoutputs to local

KSWXs

Backplaneconnector

Figure 4-4 Clock Extender (CLKX) module

Replacing theCLKX

Follow these instructions to remove and replace the CLKX.

Replacing stand-alone CLKX modules causes system down time.

NOTE

1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the CLKX to be replaced.

2. Remove the faulty CLKX.

3. Insert the replacement CLKX.


The procedure is complete.

GSM-100-523Dual path preselector replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Dual path preselector replacement

Description

This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the dual path preselectorsin GSM900 systems.

Removing a dualpath preselector

Follow these steps to remove the dual path preselector (DPP):

1. Open the cabinet door and locate the faulty DPP unit.

2. Enter the lock command to take the radio units connected to the faulty DPP outof service.

3. Use a Torx T20 driver to remove the two screws that secure the DPP to thecabinet shelf.

Set the screws aside for later use.

4. Pull the DPP forward. Do not remove the DPP from the shelf.

– Pulling the DPP forward makes it easier to remove the various cables.

5. Disconnect all the cables from the DPP.

Make note as to which cables connect to the different DPP connectors. Thisinformation is necessary for proper installation of the new DPP.

6. Remove the DPP from the shelf and set it aside.

GSM-100-523 Dual path preselector replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–15

Installing a dualpath preselector

Follow these steps to install a new DPP:

1. Lift the DPP onto the receiver front end (RFE) shelf.

Do not secure the DPP at this time.

2. Connect the two RF input cables to the two input connectors on the DPP.

– The input connectors are on the top of the DPP. They are N-typeconnectors, to match the RF input cable connectors.

– Connect the cables to match the connections to the original DPP.

3. Connect the radio unit cables to the output connectors.

Connect the cables to match the connections to the original DPP.

4. Line up the DPP with the back of the shelf.

The DPP has two large tabs along the lower back edge. These tabs fit into slots inthe receiver front end shelf.

5. Slide the DPP back into the RFE shelf.

Do not force the DPP into the back of the shelf. The connectors shouldmate with little effort.

CAUTION

Slide the DPP until:

– The two tabs slide into the slots.

Make sure the tabs do not trap or cut any cables.

CAUTION

– The screw holes in the base of the DPP line up with the holes in the RFE.

6. Secure the DPP to the RFE shelf with two Torx screws.

Use the screws that were removed in step 3 on the previous page.

If the screw holes in the DPP do not align with the screw holes in the RFEshelf the DPP is not inserted properly.

CAUTION

Tighten the screws with a T20 driver.

7. Enter the unlock command to unlock the radio unit and return it to service.

8. Close and lock the cabinet door.

GSM-100-523Low noise amplifier replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Low noise amplifier replacement

Description

This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the low noise amplifiers inDCS1800 systems.

These instructions also apply to the high sensitivity LNA, with additional instructionsadded where necessary.

Removing a lownoise amplifier

Follow these steps to remove the low noise amplifier (LNA):

1. Open the cabinet door and locate the faulty LNA unit.

2. Enter the lock command to take the radio units connected to the faulty LNA out ofservice.

3. Use a Torx T20 driver to remove the two screws that secure the LNA to the cabinetshelf.

Set the screws aside for later use.

4. Pull the LNA forward. Do not remove the LNA from the shelf.

– Pulling the LNA forward in a DCS1800 cabinet disconnects it from themodified “D” connectors at the rear of the cabinet, and makes it easier toremove the various cables.

5. Disconnect all the cables from the LNA.

Make note as to which cables connect to the different LNA connectors. Thisinformation is necessary for proper installation of the new LNA.

6. Remove the LNA from the shelf and set it aside.

GSM-100-523 Low noise amplifier replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–17

Installing a lownoise amplifier

Follow these steps to install a new LNA:

For a high sensitivity LNA ensure that Low Gain is selected on both rear panelswitches if there are additional sources of gain in the receive path, ie if amasthead amplifier is fitted or the receivers are daisy chained together.

NOTE

1. Lift the LNA onto the receiver front end (RFE) shelf.

Do not secure the LNA at this time.

2. Connect the two RF input cables to the two input connectors on the LNA.

– The input connectors are on the top of the LNA. They are N-typeconnectors, to match the RF input cable connectors. Connect the cables tomatch the connections to the original LNA.

3. Connect the radio unit cables to the output connectors.

Connect the cables to match the connections to the original LNA. They areTNC-type connectors.

4. Line up the LNA with the back of the shelf.

The LNA has two large tabs along the lower back edge. These tabs fit into slots inthe receiver front end shelf.

5. Slide the LNA back into the RFE shelf.

Do not force the LNA into the back of the shelf. The connectors shouldmate with little effort.Make sure the tabs do not trap or cut any cables.

CAUTION

Slide the LNA until:

– The two tabs slide into the slots.

– The screw holes in the base of the LNA line up with the holes in the RFE.

– The modified “D” connectors on the back of the LNA connect with thematching “D” connectors on the RFE shelf (DCS1800 only).

6. Secure the LNA to the RFE shelf with two Torx screws.

Use the screws that were removed in step 3 in the removal procedure.

If the screw holes in the LNA do not align with the screw holes in the RFE shelfthe LNA is not inserted properly.

CAUTION

Tighten the screws with a T20 driver.

7. Enter the unlock command to unlock the radio unit and return it to service.

8. Close and lock the cabinet door.

GSM-100-523Radio unit replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Radio unit replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and installing transceivers of similar type(DRCU, DRCU2, DRCU3, SCU, TCU or high powered TCU). The procedures apply toall transceivers unless otherwise stated.

If a DRCU, DRCU2 or DRCU3 is being replaced with an SCU or TCU the followingchanges must be made:

S Plastic fibre optic cables must be replaced with glass fibre optic cables

S DRIX digital cards must be replaced with DRIX3 digital cards

S A width thermal spacer must be fitted to the SCU – A thermal spacer is notrequired when replacing a DRCU3 with an SCU.

Disconnectingthe unit

1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the radio unit shelf assembly.

The radio unit shelf assembly is located in the middle of the cabinet.

NOTE

2. Check the LEDs on the radio unit to verify the unit does not have any traffic on it.

If the cabinet is equipped with DRCU3 radios or SCUs the LED does not indicatethe presence of traffic.

3. When the radio unit does not have channel traffic, enter the lock_devicecommand to take the DRIMs out-of-service (OOS)

4. Disconnect all the coaxial cables from the power amplifier output connector at thetop of the radio unit front panel.

5. Disconnect all the coaxial cables from the receive RF input connector at thebottom of the radio unit front panel.

If the radio unit is equipped for diversity reception, disconnect the coaxial cablesecond receive RF input connector.

6. Set the circuit breakers for the radio unit to the off position.

GSM-100-523 Radio unit replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–19

7. Use a flat blade screw driver to loosen the two retaining screws on the power cableconnectors, and gently pull the connectors free.

This disconnects the dc power cable from the POWER connector at the bottom ofthe radio unit front panel.

A voltage of 15 V is present, at the power D-type connector of the DRCU3,when the circuit breaker for the appropriate DRCU is switched off and theDRCU3 is disconnected.This voltage is due to the alarm detection circuitry monitoring the state of thecircuit breaker, and presents no hazard as it is supplied via a 20 kohm currentlimiting resistor.With the DRCU3 connected (and the circuit breaker off) there is nomeasurable voltage present at the connector.

NOTE

8. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the DATA IN and DATA OUT connectors onthe radio unit front panel by turning the connectors counterclockwise and gentlypulling them free.

Protect the tips of the fibre cables with a cover, if available.

CAUTION

Removing theunit

Follow these instructions to remove the radio unit from the cabinet.

The heat sinks on the radio may be hot to the touch. Hold the radio by thehandle and flange only.

WARNING

1. Grasp the radio unit handle with one and and place your finger tips of the otherhand under the front panel bottom flange.

The radio unit is very heavy. Proceed with caution.

WARNING

2. Gently lift up on the flange and pull outward on the handle to remove the radio unitfrom the shelf slot.

3. Ensure all cables exit the DRCU cable trough through the cut out provided. Failureto do this could cause the cables to be chaffed.

GSM-100-523Radio unit replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing theUnit

Follow these steps to place a radio unit into the cabinet:

The radio unit is very heavy. Proceed with caution.

WARNING

1. Place a new radio unit in an empty shelf slot.

2. Remove any protective tips from the fibre optic cables.

3. Connect the fibre optic cables into the DATA IN and DATA OUT connectors on theradio unit front panel.

4. If replacing an DRCU, DRCU2 or DRCU3 with an SCU or TCU, the plastic fibrecables must be replaced with glass fibre cables.

5. If replacing an DRCU, DRCU2 or DRCU3 with an SCU or TCU, DRIX digitalmodules must be replaced with DRIX3 digital modules see DRIX boardreplacement.

6. If replacing an DRCU or DRCU2 with an SCU or TCU, a thermal spacer must befitted with the SCU or TCU.

Powering up theunit

Follow these steps to power up the new radio:

1. Press the power cable onto the power cable connector

2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the two retaining screws on the power cableconnector.

3. Connect the coaxial cable to the receive RF input connector at the bottom of theDRCU front panel.

If the DRCU is equipped for diversity reception, connect the second receiveRF input connector.

NOTE

4. Connect the coaxial cable to the power amplifier output connector at the top of theradio unit front panel.

5. If fitting a TCU ensure that the front panel mode selection switch is set to the SCUposition.

6. Reset the circuit breakers.

7. Use the bay level calibration procedure Installation & Configuration: BSS(GSM-100-423) to set the CS power level of the new radio.

8. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring theDRI/DRIX/radio unit back in-service (INS).

9. Close the cabinet door.

GSM-100-523 Radio unit replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–21

Resetting the site

After installing this module, it may be necessary to reinitialize the site.

Follow these steps to reset the site.

Resetting the site takes the site out-of-service (OOS) and interrupts or dropscalls in progress. It is advisable to perform this procedure during periods of lowtraffic.

CAUTION


2. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules toreinitialize the site and put it back in service (INS).

– DRI

– MSI

– KSW/TSW

– GPROC/GPROC2


GSM-100-523Replacing the DRIM


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing the DRIM

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the digital radio interfacemodule (DRIM) boards in BTS cabinets.

A faulty DRIM may be carrying some traffic. If so, removing and replacing the DRIM mayreduce channel capacity temporarily.

If, however, the DRIM to be replaced cannot carry channel traffic, no additional ill effectswill be noticed during removal and replacement.

Replacing theDRIM

Follow these steps to replace the DRIM board(s).

1. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the DRIM that requiresreplacement to examine channel traffic.

The radio unit should not have any channel traffic at the moment ofreplacement.

NOTE

2. After the channel traffic has cleared, in a TTY window, enter the lock_devicecommand. to take the DRIM/DRIX/radio unit out of service (OOS).

3. Connect an approved antistatic wrist strap to the cabinet, if one is not alreadyconnected.

4. Put the antistatic strap on a wrist.

Always wear an earth strap connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on theequipment.

CAUTION

5. Disable the faulty DRIM using the front panel switch.

6. Remove the DRIM.

7. Install the replacement DRIM into the slot from which the faulty DRIM wasremoved in step 6.

8. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring theDRIM/DRIX/radio unit back in service (INS).

GSM-100-523 DRIX board replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–23

DRIX board replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the digital radio interfaceextender board (DRIX) in BTS cabinets.

A faulty DRIX may be carrying some traffic. If so, removing and replacing the DRIX mayreduce channel capacity temporarily. If, however, the DRIX to be replaced cannot carrychannel traffic, no additional ill effects will be noticed during removal and replacement.

Replacing theDRIX

Follow these steps to replace the DRIX.

1. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the DRIM that requiresreplacement to examine channel traffic.

The radio unit should not have any channel traffic at the moment ofreplacement.

NOTE

2. When the radio unit associated with the DRIX channel traffic has cleared, in aTTY window, enter the lock_device command to set the DRIM/DRIX/radio unitout of service (OOS).

Take care when disconnecting and connecting fibre optic cables. Refer toHandling optical fibres.

CAUTION

3. Disconnect the fibre optic cable from the DRIX to be replaced.

4. Remove the DRIX.

5. Install the replacement DRIX into the slot from which the faulty DRIX was removedin step 4.

6. Reconnect the fibre optic cables.

7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring theDRI/DRIX/radio unit back in-service (INS).

GSM-100-523Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables

Introduction

For systems which use DRCU and DRCU2 radios, and/or the original DRIX board, theoriginal plastic fibres remain the optimum solution and therefore plastic fibres shouldcontinue to be used. Spares and replacement plastic fibres are available from Motorolauntil stocks become exhausted.

The black polymer fibres must be handled extremely carefully. The notes on BendingRadius and cleanliness should be followed at all times. These plastic cables have anSMA connector at one end and (radio end), but no connector at the other end (DRIXend).

The procedure for disconnection and connection at the radio end is the same as for glassfibres, avoid cross threading and over tightening.

The procedure for disconnection and connection at the DRIX board is very important.The connection ‘joint’ is highly sensitive, and the utmost care is required at all stages offibre handling. The procedure below should be followed for all connections using plasticfibre to the DRIX boards.

Disconnection atDRIX board

When disconnecting the fibre from the DRIX board, fully disconnect the blue or blackscrew in port guide and fibre by rotating the port guide anticlockwise. Remove the portguide complete with fibre. This should be performed without applying any force on thefibre itself – it will come out with the port guide. The port guide should not be removedfrom the fibre.

If the removal is to replace the DRIX board, then the new port guides shouldbe placed on the ports of the DRIX being removed, and the fibre reconnectedusing the original port guides as described above. DRIXs returned to Motorolafor repair without both port guides cannot be repaired.If disconnection is to replace the fibre, the port guide can be removed from thefibre with extreme care. To remove the port guide from the fibre, slide the portguide further up the fibre before removing. This causes the port guide to openfully.

NOTE

The bare fibre end is required to be optically flat and perpendicular to ensuresatisfactory performance of the link. Preparation of the fibre end requiresspecial tools. At no time should cutting of the fibre be attempted in the field.

CAUTION

Connectionprocedure at theDRIX board

For connection of polymer fibres, to the DRIX board, follow the procedure detailed underOptical fibre connection in category 423.

GSM-100-523 Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–25

Disconnection atthe radio

There will be an SMA style connector at the radio end of polymer fibres. Disconnectionof the connector from the radio should not require any form of tool, as during installationfibre connection to the radio must only be made hand tight.

Connection atthe radio

For connection of polymer fibres, to the radio, follow the procedure detailed underOptical fibre connection in category 423.

GSM-100-523Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables

Introduction

Glass fibres can be used with DRIX3 (all models) connected to DRCU3, SCU900/1800and TCU900/800 radios. They do not work with DRIX, DRCU and DRCU2. If convertingto glass, from polymer, the DRIX3 will need its jumpers moving to TopCell settings, J5and J9 only. The new DRIX3C board is hard wired, so the setting of jumpers does nothave to be carried out.

The glass fibres used for BTS6 are Motorola Part number 3004462N01; these are about1.3 m in length. The glass fibres used for BTS4/5 are Motorola Part number3004462N02; these have a length of 2 m.

General fibrecare

Ensure that proper care is taken of the glass fibres, especially during the installationprocess. The full care procedures are documented in Handling optical fibres. They aresummarized below:

Fibre bend radius

All fibres have a minimum bend radius, which represents the smallest loop/circle thatshould be made from the fibre allowing it still to function correctly. For glass fibres this is30 mm long term, increasing to 60 mm when under strain (for example - installation).Care should be taken when routeing the fibres in the BTS cabinets that they are not bentover objects which may cause a sharp bend, such as panel edges.

Fibre protection

The end surfaces of the fibre assembly must be kept extremely clean. The protective endcaps must be used at all times, and especially during routeing. The fibre ends shouldonly be exposed when connecting to the Radio or DRIX units. After disconnection, theprotective caps must be fitted to the fibre ends to maintain cleanliness.

Fibre connection

Fibre SMA connectors are used for both ends of all glass fibre cables. These should betightened to hand tight only when connecting. Under no circumstances should anytools, such as pliers or spanners, be used to tighten the connectors.

Fibre optic cablereplacementprocedures

The replacement of glass fibre optic cables in BTS4/5/6 cabinets comprises of thefollowing procedures:

S Cabinet Preparation

S Configuring the DRIX

S Fibre Optic cable installation

S Cabinet restoration

GSM-100-523 Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–27

Replacing fibreoptic cables inBTS 4/5

Replacement of optical fibres requires the removal of RF transmitter power and thelocking of the DRIM, this will interrupt service on that carrier. This must be done inagreement with the OMCR. It is therefore advisable to carry out this maintenance activityduring periods of low traffic.

In all cases, attention must be paid to care instructions and DRIX jumper settings.Jumper settings must be changed to accommodate glass fibres if these are being usedto replace polymer fibres.

Fibre optic cable routing

For a BTS4/5 cabinet ensure:

S The fibres are routed from the radio and along the DRCU cage cable tray, whichhas a removable cover.

S The cables are bound together and to the cage, typically by cable ties or tiewraps.

S The fibres are passed down through the left wall of the cabinet and emerge intothe cable tray of the digital rack, which is on top of the half size cards.

S The fibres run along the cable tray of the digital rack, emerging at the appropriateplace for connection to the DRIX.

Cabinet preparation

1. Ensure that the DRIM has been locked and radio powered down, for each fibre tobe replaced.

2. Remove the DRCU cable tray cover, by unscrewing the two 1/4 turn fasteners thatsecure it.

3. Remove the air deflector baffle from above the half size digital cards. This isretained by four sprung fasteners, and its removal will allow easier access to thefibres.

4. Remove the digital cage cable tray plastic cover, which is clipped in place.

5. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced from the radio.

Take care and follow the correct disconnect procedure. Refer to Connectionand disconnection of polymer fibre cables when replacing polymer fibrecables with glass fibre cables.

CAUTION

6. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced fibre from the DRIX boards, according totype, as follows:

– If polymer, by completely unscrewing the retaining collet and sliding it up thefibre prior to pulling the fibre from the connector. Do not force the fibre.

– If glass, by unscrewing the SMA connector on the DRIX front panel.



GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Configuring the DRIX

1. If replacing polymer fibre with glass, check DRIX and fibre type compatibility, seeDRIX compatibility in Chapter 3 of Category 323, and:

– Where a DRIX is fitted replace with a DRIX3C, and proceed to Fibre opticinstallation.

– Where a DRIX3A or 3B is fitted, continue with steps 2 to 4.

– Where a DRIX3C is fitted the jumpers are preconfigured for glass. TheDRIX3C should not be removed. Proceed to Fibre optic installation.

2. Remove the DRIX, by carefully pulling on the board bracket (this part of the DRIXis marked 4104 on the front).

3. Set the two jumpers on the DRIX3A or 3B to J9 and J5, both marked T. This willselect the correct connectors and drive mode for glass fibres on the DRIX.

The jumpers were previously fitted to J3, J6 or J7 (marked BE4/6, BE4, BE6respectively).

NOTE

4. Refit and screw the DRIX in its original location.

Fibre optic cable installation

For correct fibre optic cable installation follow the procedure detailed under Opticalcable installation in Chapter 2 of Category 423.

Cabinet restoration

1. Dress or adjust the fibre so that no particular excess of fibre is visible in the DRCUor digital cages. The centre section of the new fibre should be allowed to hangnaturally in the cabinet wall, without excessive bending, along with all the otherfibres.

2. The original fibre can either be left in place or removed.

– If leaving in place, the loose ends of the fibre should be laid straight alongthe respective cable trays, and passed through into the cabinet wall space ifrequired.

Take care not remove to the wrong fibre or damage adjacent fibres. Excessiveforce must not be used, nor should any cutters or snips be used to remove bitsof fibre.

CAUTION

– If removing the fibre, then start from the DRIX end, as this end has noconnectors and is easiest to pass through the cabinet.

3. Remove the blanking panel below the DRCU cage to permit access to the cableties.

4. Remove the cable ties which hold the cable bundle in the DRCU cable tray. Fitnew cable ties so that the new fibres are secured.

Cut the cable ties from below only. This will prevent any accidental damage tothe actual cables and fibres.Do not over-tighten the cable ties, especially on glass fibres which may sufferloss in performance over time if crushed.

CAUTION



68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–29

5. Refit the blanking panel removed in step 3.

6. Refit the digital cage cable tray plastic cover, then the air deflector baffle.

Take care not to catch any fibres or cables in the covers.

CAUTION

7. Refit the DRCU cage cable tray cover.

Return to service

It is recommended that a functional check of the DRIX to radio link is performed to verifythe connection. The DRIM should be unlocked and the subsequent download observed.After this has completed, confirm the radio is operational by using the state command.Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.

Replacing fibreoptic cables in aBTS6 cabinet

Replacement of optical fibres requires the removal of RF transmitter power and thelocking of the DRIM this will interrupt service on that carrier. This must be done inagreement with the OMC-R. It is therefore advisable to carry out this maintenanceactivity during periods of low traffic.

In all cases, attention must be paid to care instructions and DRIX jumper settings.Jumper settings must be changed to accommodate glass fibres if these are being usedto replace polymer fibres.

Fibre optic cable routing

For a BTS6 cabinet ensure:

S The fibres are routed from the radio through a hole in the DRCU cage tray, throughthe plastic air baffle, and down to the DRIXs that are located in the half size digitalcard cage.

S Any excess in fibre length is dressed or coiled in the space above the air baffle.

Cabinet preparation

1. Ensure that the DRIM has been locked and the radio has been powered down, foreach fibre to be replaced.

2. Remove the digital cage cable tray plastic cover, which is clipped in place.

3. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced from the radio.

Take care and follow the correct disconnect procedure. Refer to Connectionand disconnection of polymer fibre cables when replacing polymer fibrecables with glass fibre cables.

CAUTION



GMR-0168P02901W05-A

4. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced fibre from the DRIX boards, according totype, as follows:

– If polymer by completely unscrewing the retaining collet and sliding it up thefibre prior to pulling the fibre from the connector. Do not force the fibre.

– If glass by unscrewing the SMA connector on the DRIX front panel.

Configuring the DRIX

1. If replacing polymer fibre with glass, check DRIX and fibre type compatibility, seeDRIX compatibility in Chapter 3 of Category 323, and:

– Where a DRIX is fitted replace with a DRIX3C, and proceed to Fibre opticinstallation.

– Where a DRIX3A or 3B is fitted, continue with steps 2 to 4.

– Where a DRIX3C is fitted the jumpers are pre–configured for glass. TheDRIX3C should not be removed. Proceed to Fibre optic installation.

2. Remove the DRIX, by carefully pulling on the board bracket (this part of the DRIXis marked ’4104’ on the front).

3. Set the two jumpers on the DRIX3A or 3B to J9 and J5, both marked T. This willselect the correct connectors and drive mode for glass fibres on the DRIX.

The jumpers were previously fitted to J3, J6 or J7 (marked BE4/6, BE4, BE6respectively).

NOTE

4. Refit and screw the DRIX in its original location.

5. Remove the fibre to be replaced. Extract the fibre from the DRIX end towards theradio end.

When removing a glass fibre, it may be necessary to remove the DRCU cabletray grommet in order to pass the SMA connector through the cable tray hole.

NOTE

Fibre optic cable installation

For correct fibre optic cable installation follow the procedure detailed under Opticalcable installation in Capter 2 of Category 423.

Cabinet restoration

1. Dress or adjust the fibre so that no particular excess of fibre is visible in the DRCUor digital cages. The remaining fibre must be looped up gently and allowed to sitnaturally in the space above the plastic air baffle.

Take care not to bend the fibre optic cable to tight when looping. Refer toHandling optical fibres.

CAUTION

2. Refit the digital cage cable tray plastic cover.

Take care not to catch any fibres or cables in the cover.

CAUTION



68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–31

Return to service

It is recommended that a functional check of the DRIX to radio link is performed to verifythe connection. The DRIM should be unlocked and the subsequent download observed.After this has completed, confirm the radio is operational by using the state command.Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.

GSM-100-523Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and installing a duplexer or quadraplexermodule.

The duplexer or quadraplexer is mounted in an external equipment cabinet or racklocated close to the BTS cabinet.

Removing theduplexer orquadraplexer

Follow these steps to remove a duplexer or quadraplexer module:

Before disconnecting cables, ensure that the transmit RF power is OFF.

Severe burns may result if RF power is ON while disconnecting the cables.

WARNING

1. Locate the duplexer or quadraplexer that needs replacing.

2. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the duplexer/quadraplexer beingreplaced to verify the radio unit does not have any traffic on it.

The radio unit cannot have any traffic at the moment the duplexer/quadraplexer isreplaced.

3. When the radio unit has no channel traffic, enter the lock_device command totake the DRIMs associated with the faulty duplexer/ quadraplexer out of service(OOS).

4. Note the order of that the coaxial cables are connect to the ports of theduplexer/quadraplexer.

The cables must be reconnected in the same order later in the procedure.

5. Disconnect all the coaxial cables from the duplexer/quadraplexer by turning thecable connectors counterclockwise,

6. Remove the cables from the duplexer/quadraplexer.

7. Remove the duplexer/quadraplexer mounting screws.

8. Remove the duplexer/quadraplexer.

GSM-100-523 Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–33

Installing theduplexer orquadraplexer

Follow these steps to install a duplexer or quadraplexer module:

1. Install the new duplexer/quadraplexer in the space previously occupied by thefaulty duplexer/quadraplexer removed in the previous section.

2. Tighten the duplexer/quadraplexer mounting screws.

3. Connect the coaxial cables to all duplexer/quadraplexer TX, RX, and ANT ports.

4. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRIMs back in service (INS).

Resetting the site

After installing this module, it may be necessary to re-initialize the site. Follow thesesteps to reset the site.

Resetting the site takes the site out of service (OOS) and interrupts or dropscalls in progress. It is advisable to perform this procedure during periods oflow traffic.

CAUTION


2. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules tore-initialize the site and put it back in service (INS).

– DRI

– MSI

– KSW/TSW

– GPROC/GPROC2


GSM-100-523Replacing a fan unit


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing a fan unit

Removing thefan

Follow these steps to replace a faulty fan:

1. Locate the faulty fan.

The faulty fan is the one that is not spinning.

2. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the four quarter-turn fasteners whichsecure the fan to the shelf assembly.

3. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet.

4. Disconnect the fan power cable connector and lift it free of the cabinet.

Installing the fan

Follow these steps to install a fan unit:

1. Connect the Fan Power cable connector to the new fan.

2. Install the new fan into the cabinet.

3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four quarter–turn fasteners that securethe fan to the shelf assembly.

4. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms atthe OMC are cleared.

GSM-100-523 Redundant GCLK module replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–35

Redundant GCLK module replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing redundant generic clock (GCLK) modules.

Replacing aredundant GCLK

Follow these steps to replace the GCLK module

1. Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of the masterGPROC/GPROC2.

Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 forinstructions.

Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the masterGPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect toany available GPROC/GPROC2.

If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.

NOTE

2. Determine which GCLK card needs replacement.

Use the following table to determine the next action to take.

Table 4-2 GCLK replacement options

If... Then...

the master GCLK card needsreplacement...

i. In a TTY window, enter theswap_devices command totell the software to make theredundant GCLK themaster.

ii. Continue on to step 3.

the stand-by GCLK card... Continue on to step 3.

3. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK outof service (OOS).

4. Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch.

5. Remove the faulty GCLK.

6. Insert the replacement GCLK.

7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacementGCLK back in service (INS).

GSM-100-523Non-redundant GCLK replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Non-redundant GCLK replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant Generic Clock (GCLK)modules.

Prerequisite

If one is not already connected, connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTYport of the master GPROC/GPROC2.


Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the masterGPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to anyavailable GPROC/GPROC2.


NOTE

Illustration

Figure 4-5 shows a GCLK board.

2.048 MHz In

16.384 MHz OUT

6.12 S OUT

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

125uS OUTGROUND

FREQUENCY ADJUST

60mS OUTTESTPORTS


(NORMALLY OFF)

(MASTER = ON)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR


Figure 4-5 GCLK board

GSM-100-523 Non-redundant GCLK replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–37

Conditions

There are two configurations that may require GCLK replacement. The following tableshows the two configurations and which instructions apply.

Table 4-3 Non-redundant GCLK replacement conditions

If the cabinet contains: Follow the steps in:

A single BSU shelf Replacing a Single Shelf Configuration GCLK inthis section

More than one BSU shelf Replacing a Multi-Shelf Configuration GCLK inthis Chapter.

Follow the appropriate procedure.

Replacing asingle shelfconfigurationGCLK

Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a single-shelf configuration cabinet.


NOTE

1. Insert the replacement GCLK into the empty GCLK slot.

2. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacementGCLK.

3. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacementGCLK in–service (INS).

4. Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize.

5. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational andadministrative state of the GCLK.

6. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLKout–of–service (OOS).



Replace the GCLK with a blanking plate.

9. Reset the DRIM module, using the front panel switches.

GSM-100-523Non-redundant GCLK replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing amulti-shelfconfigurationGCLK

Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a multi-shelf configuration cabinet.

If the system is operational, module replacement will cause down-time for theentire system.

CAUTION



3. Insert the replacement GCLK.

GSM-100-523 GPROC/GPROC2 replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–39

GPROC/GPROC2 replacement

Overview

This section provides the procedure for replacing redundant and non-redundant GeneralProcessor (GPROC) boards. The procedure for replacing the GPROC or GPROC2 is thesame, only the procedure for the GPROC is given.

RedundantGPROCconsiderations

If the processing capability of a GPROC in a redundant system fails, the redundantGPROC should be loaded automatically with the appropriate code and enabled. Thesystem then takes the failed GPROC Out Of Service (OOS). Therefore, no ill effectsshould be seen during GPROC replacement.

Non–redundantGPROCconsiderations

If a non-redundant system is still operational, GPROC replacement may cause atemporary system glitch when GPROCs are switched.

Before going tothe site

The OMC must determine the following:

S Site number.

S Device ID.

S Cage number.

S Slot number.

GSM-100-523GPROC/GPROC2 replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Locating thefaulty GPROC

Use the information from the OMC together with the LED display on the GPROCs tolocate the faulty board.

Table 4-4 shows the various LED displays.

Table 4-4 GPROC LED Guide

If theGreen

LED is...

And theRed LED

is...

The board is... Additional action...

on... off... either:

S operating normally

S may be unequipped

no further action isnecessary.

S may be unequipped

Use the site command toverify whether the board isequipped or not.

flashing... off... waiting for code to download...

flashing... flashing... undergoing normal ROMprogramming...

flashing... on... in an alarm condition... continue with Removing

off... on... the GPROC.

on... on...

off... off... not receiving dc power...

Illustration

Figure 4-6 shows a GPROC module.

ALARM (RED) LED

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED


(NORMALLY OFF)

THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT ALLOWS CONTROL OFON BOARD SELF DIAGNOSTICS.

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

(NORMALLY ON)

Figure 4-6 GPROC module

GSM-100-523 GPROC/GPROC2 replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–41

Removing theGPROC

Follow these steps to set up the GPROC replacement:

Do not exchange all GPROCs connected to one LAN simultaneously or allDTE addresses will be lost.

CAUTION

1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC.

Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), beginning in Chapter2 for instructions.

Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC.However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any availableGPROC.

If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter all the MMI commands.

NOTE

2. Enter the lock command to lock the faulty GPROC.

3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the faulty GPROC to the down (DISABLE)position.

4. Remove the faulty GPROC.

Installing theGPROC

Follow these steps to replace the GPROC.

Replacing the master GPROC will cause a site outage.

CAUTION

1. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the replacement GPROC to the down(DISABLE) position.

2. Insert the replacement GPROC into the empty GPROC slot.

Make sure the GPROC locks firmly into the backplane.

3. The DTE addresses of a replacement master GPROC must be checked to ensurethat it is correct for the site in which it is installed.

4. The OMC must initiate the equip_device command to inform the software toload code into the replacement GPROC.

From software release 1510 onwards the equip_device command will onlybe available from the OMC.

NOTE

5. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacementGPROC back in-service (INS).

GSM-100-523Hybrid combiner and power load replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Hybrid combiner and power load replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing a Hybrid Combiner and its power loadmodule.

Each hybrid combiner requires a power load. One hybrid combiner combines twotransmit input signals into one transmit output signal. Hybrid combiner stages can becascaded together. A BTS cabinet can support a maximum of four hybridcombiner/power loads.

Prerequisites

Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure.




NOTE

Removing thehybrid combiner

Follow these steps to remove a hybrid combiner.

Turn the transmit RF power OFF, and verify that it is off, before disconnectingcables! Severe burns may result if RF power is ON while disconnecting thecables.

WARNING


The transmit combiner shelf is located above the DRCU shelf assembly betweenthe DRCU fans and the RFE shelf.

2. Locate the hybrid combiner to be removed.

3. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the hybrid combiner beingreplaced to verify the radio does not have any traffic on it.

The radio unit must not have any traffic at the moment the hybrid combiner isreplaced.

4. If the radio unit has no channel traffic, in a TTY window, enter the lock_devicecommand to take the DRI/DRIX/radio unit associated with the faulty hybridcombiner out of service (OOS)

5. Note the order that the coaxial cables are connected to the three ports.

6. Disconnect all the coaxial cables by turning the cable connectorscounter-clockwise.

GSM-100-523 Hybrid combiner and power load replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–43

7. Disconnect the hybrid combiner from its power load (a black, finned device) byturning the power load connector clockwise.

8. Continue on to the next section on removing power loads, if necessary.

Removing thepower load

Follow these step to remove the power load.

1. Remove the power load mounting bracket securing screw from the bottom frontedge of the transmit combiner shelf.

2. Lift the front of the bracket up and pull it toward the front of the cabinet until therear bracket tab disengages from the shelf slot.

3. Remove the two screws that secure the power load to the bracket.

4. Remove the power load.

Installing thepower load

Follow these step to install the power load.

1. Install the power load into the cabinet.

2. Tighten the two screws that secure the power load to the bracket.

3. Push the front of the bracket in until the rear tab engages to the shelf slot.

4. Install the power load mounting bracket securing screw to the bottom edge of thetransmit combiner shelf.

5. Continue on to the next section on installing hybrid combiners, if necessary.

Installing thehybrid combiner

Follow these step to install the hybrid combiner.

1. Connect the hybrid combiner to the power load by turning the power loadconnector counter–clockwise.

2. Connect all the coaxial cables to the three ports on the hybrid combiner by turningthe cable connectors clockwise.

3. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRI/DRIX/DRCU associatedwith the hybrid combiner back in-service (INS).


NOTE

4. After installing this module, it may be necessary to re-initialize the site. Refer toResetting the Site in Chapter 2 for more information.

GSM-100-523Redundant KSW or TSW replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Redundant KSW or TSW replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switches (KSWs) ortimeslot switches (TSWs).

Prerequisites



Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 forinstructions.


NOTE

Illustration

Figure 4-7 shows a sample KSW / TSW board.

Alarm (red) LED

Active (green) LED

RESET/DISABLE SwitchUp (momentary) = Reset

Middle = Normal operationDown = Disable

(Normally off)

(Normally on)

Backplane connector

Figure 4-7 KSW board

GSM-100-523 Redundant KSW or TSW replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–45

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace a redundant KSW or TSW.

Module replacement may cause system down time.

CAUTION

1. Enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch to thereplacement KSW/TSW (A/B).

If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter this command.

NOTE

2. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and release the switch.

The switch returns to the middle (active position) automatically.

3. Press the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable thefaulty KSW/TSW.

4. Remove the faulty KSW/TSW.

5. Insert the replacement KSW/TSW.

GSM-100-523Non–redundant KSW or TSW module replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Non–redundant KSW or TSW module replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing non–redundant kiloport switches (KSWs)and Timeslot switches (TSWs).

Prerequisites





NOTE

Illustration

Figure 4-8 shows a sample KSW / TSW board.

Alarm (red) LED

Active (green) LED

RESET/DISABLE SwitchUp (momentary) = Reset

Middle = Normal operationDown = Disable

(Normally off)

(Normally on)

Backplane connector

Figure 4-8 KSW module

GSM-100-523 Non–redundant KSW or TSW module replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–47

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace the KSW or TSW.

Module replacement may cause a short SITE outage when KSWs/TSWs areswitched.

CAUTION

1. Insert the replacement KSW/TSW into an empty KSW/TSW slot.

2. If necessary, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch tothe replacement KSW/TSW (A/B).

If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter this command.

NOTE

3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and then down to theDISABLE position to disable the faulty KSW/TSW.

4. Remove the faulty KSW/TSW.

GSM-100-523Redundant KSWX module replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Redundant KSWX module replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switch extender(KSWX) modules

Module replacement will cause the site to self–reset. It is recommended thatnetwork appropriate action be implemented to minimize the effects of the resetwhen the KSWXs are switched.

CAUTION

Illustration

Figure 4-9 shows a typical KSWX module.

RESET/DISABLE Switch

LED (green)

Fibre optic inputfrom CLKX

Fibre optic outputto another KSWX

Fibre optic input fromanother KSWX

Backplane connector

Figure 4-9 Kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module

GSM-100-523 Redundant KSWX module replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–49

LED indications

The indications for the redundant and non-redundant KSWX are shown in the followingtable:

Table 4-5 LED indications

LED Action

Lit KSWX in local slot andKSWX is master andKSWX is receiving clocks from the fibreport andNo GCLK alarms andNo TDM receive violations from the fibreport andKSW not present

or

KSWX in local slot andKSWX is master andKSWX is receiving clocks from the fibreport andNo GCLK alarms andKSW is present

or

KSWX in remote or expansion slot andNo GCLK alarms andNo TDM receive violations from the fibreport

Flashing KSWX in local slot andKSWX is slave andKSWX is receiving clocks from the fibreport andNo GCLK alarms andNo TDM receive violations from the fibreport andKSW not present

or

KSWX in local slot andKSWX is slave andKSWX is receiving clocks from the fibreport andNo GCLK alarms andKSW is present

OFF When any of the lit or flashing criteria arenot present or no power to the card

GSM-100-523Redundant KSWX module replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing KSWXA and B

Follow these step to replace a KSWXA and KSWX B.

1. Take network appropriate actions to use KSWX B modules only.

2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX.

3. Remove the faulty KSWX.

4. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the faulty KSWX wasremoved.

5. Reconnect all fibre optic cables.

6. If required, take network appropriate actions to restore the new KSWX backin-service (INS).

A KSWX B module must be replaced with a KSWX A module.

NOTE

GSM-100-523 Non–redundant KSWX module replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–51

Non–redundant KSWX module replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing non–redundant kiloport switch extender(KSWX) modules

Illustration andindications

A board view of the redundant module is shown in Figure 4-9 and the LED indications inTable 4-5

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace a non–redundant kiloport switch extender module.

1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX.

2. Remove the faulty KSWX.

3. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the fault KSWX was removed.


GSM-100-523Redundant LANX replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Redundant LANX replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing redundant local area network extender(LANX) cards.

There are two sets of instructions:

S Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN.

S Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN.

Follow the instructions that fit the situation.

Prerequisites

Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before replacing this module.


Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions.


NOTE

Replacing theLANX associatedwith the activeLAN

Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the active LAN.

Module replacement will cause system down time.

CAUTION

1. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to usedthe standby LAN.

2. Remove the LANX.

3. Install the replacement LANX in the slot from which the faulty LANX was removedin the previous step.


5. Wait about 30 seconds.

6. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked(active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby).

7. Enter the swap_device command to swap the active LAN back to standby andthe replacement LAN to active.

GSM-100-523 Redundant LANX replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–53

Replacing theLANX associatedwith the standbyLAN

Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the standby LAN.

1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX.

2. Remove the LANX.



5. Wait about 30 seconds.

6. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked(active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby)

It may take the system up to 30 seconds to bring the standby LAN back in service(INS).

7. Enter the swap_device command to swap the active LAN back to standby andthe replacement LAN to active.

GSM-100-523Non–redundant LANX replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Non–redundant LANX replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing non–redundant local area networkextender (LANX) cards.

The LAN–A device is controlled by the local area network extender module (LANX)module in upper slot 20 of the digital module shelf. The LAN–B device is controlled bythe LANX module in upper slot 19 of the digital module shelf.

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace a non–redundant LANX module.

Module replacement will cause system down time.

CAUTION

1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX.

2. Remove the faulty LANX.



GSM-100-523 MSI replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–55

MSI replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing a Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module.

Non–redundantsystems

The following table shows the effects of replacing MSI boards in non–redundant systems.

If the MSI being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channeltraffic

capacity for all 2.048 Mbit/s links is lost duringMSI replacement.

cannot carry any channel traffic no other ill effects will be noticed

Redundantsystems

MSI replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system.

Illustration

Figure 4-10 shows a typical MSI board.

Alarm (red) LED

Active (green) LED

RESET/DISABLE Switch

(Normally off)

(Normally on)

Up (momentary) = ResetMiddle = normal operation

Down = Disable

Backplaneconnector

Figure 4-10 Multiple serial interface (MSI) module

GSM-100-523MSI replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace an MSI board.

1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC.



If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands.

NOTE

2. Enter the lock_device command to take the MSI out of service (OOS).

3. Disable the MSI board with the RESET/DISABLE switch:

– Set the switch up to the RESET position.

– Then set the switch down to the DISABLE position.

The switch locks in the DISABLE (down) position.

4. Remove the faulty MSI.

5. Install the replacement MSI in the slot from which the faulty MSI was removed inthe previous step.

6. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the MSI back inservice (INS).

GSM-100-523 PIX replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–57

PIX replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing a parallel interface extender (PIX) board inan external alarm system.

Illustration

Figure 4-11 shows a PIX board.

Alarm (green) LED

Connector is cabled to top ofcabinet for interconnect tocustomer site equipment

(On = no alarms)(Off = customer alarm detected)

Backplane connector

Figure 4-11 PIX board

Replacing thePIX

Follow these steps to replace a PIX board.

Replacing this module may trigger false customer alarms.

CAUTION

1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC/GPROC2.




NOTE

2. Enter the lock_device command to take the PIX out-of-service (OOS).

3. Disconnect the cable from the PIX.

GSM-100-523PIX replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

4. Remove the faulty PIX.

5. Install the replacement PIX in the slot from which the faulty PIX was removed inthe previous step.

6. Reconnect the cable to the PIX.

7. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the PIX back in-service (INS).

GSM-100-523 Power supply module replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–59

Power supply module replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing power supply modules.

These are two sets of instructions:

S Replacing a non-redundant power supply module

S Replacing a redundant power supply module

Applications

This procedure applies to all of the various power supply modules used in Motorola BTS,including:

S DPSMs,

S EPSMs,

S IPSMs,

Illustration

Figure 4-12 shows the DPSM:

ACTIVE LED (GREEN): ON WHEN ALLOUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENTAND WITHIN TOLERANCE.

ALARM LED (RED):ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARMCONDITIONS EXIST.OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITIONEXISTS.

GND (EARTH FOR +5BV OUTPUT)GND (EARTH FOR +5BV OUTPUT)+5BV+5BV

CGND (CHASSIS EARTH)VINA− (0 V INPUT)VINA+ (+27 V INPUT)

25−PIND−TYPECONNECTOR(FEMALE)

(REAR VIEW)

Figure 4-12 DPSM

The other power supply modules are very similar in outward appearance. LED positionand overall size may differ.

GSM-100-523Power supply module replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing anon–redundantpower supplymodule

Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant power supply module

If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational,module replacement should be transparent to the system.

NOTE

Do not mix power supply modules; for example, if a cabinet is equipped withDPSMs, do not try to insert any other type of power supply module. Alwaysreplace a power supply module with the same type of module!

CAUTION

1. Remove the air baffle from the unused slot.

2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot.

3. Remove the faulty power supply module.

4. Re-install the air baffle in the slot from which the faulty power supply module wasremoved.

Replacing aredundant powersupply module

Follow these steps to replace a redundant power supply module:

If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational,module replacement should be transparent to the system.

NOTE

1. Remove the faulty power supply module.

2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot from which the faultDPSM was removed in the previous step.

GSM-100-523 XCDR replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–61

XCDR replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing a transcoder module (XCDR).

Non–redundantSystems

The following table shows the effects of replacing XCDR boards in non–redundantsystems.

If the XCDR being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channeltraffic...

capacity for all E1/T links is lost during MSIreplacement.

cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed

RedundantSystems

XCDR replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system.

Illustration

Figure 4-13 shows a typical transcoder module.

Alarm (red) LED

Active (green) LED

RESET/DISABLE switch

(Normally off)

(Normally on)


Down = Disable

Backplane connector

Figure 4-13 XCDR module

GSM-100-523XCDR replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace a transcoder board.




If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands.

NOTE

2. Enter the lock_device command to take the XCDR out of service (OOS).

3. Set the front panel switch up to the RESET position and then down to theDISABLE position to disable the faulty XCDR.

4. Remove the faulty XCDR.

5. Install the replacement XCDR in the slot from which the faulty XCDR was removedin the previous step.

6. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the XCDR back inservice (INS).

GSM-100-523 GDP replacement


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–63

GDP replacement

Overview

This section contains instructions for replacing a Generic DSP Processor (GDP) modulewhen used as an XCDR.

Non-redundantSystems

The following table shows the effects of replacing GDP boards in non-redundantsystems.

If the GDP being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channeltraffic...

capacity for all E1/T1 links is lost during GDPreplacement.

cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed

RedundantSystems

GDP replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system, as long asall traffic has been routed away from the board to be replaced.

Illustration

Alarm (red) LED

Active (green) LED

RESET/DISABLE switch

(Normally off)

(Normally on)


Down = Disable

Backplane connector

Figure 4-14 shows a typical transcoder module.

Figure 4-14 GDP module

GSM-100-523GDP replacement


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace a GDP transcoder module.

1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) and connect it to the TTY port of aGPROC.



If an LMT is unavailable the OMC-R must invoke all MMI commands.

NOTE

2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the GDP card out ofservice (OOS).

3. Set the front panel switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty GDPcard.

4. Remove the faulty GDP card.

5. Install the replacement GDP card in the slot from which the faulty GDP card wasremoved.

6. Set the front panel switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position.

7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacementGDP card in-service (INS).

If replacing an XCDR module with a GDP module, as an upgrade, the OMCrequires command changes to recognize and use the different module.Ensure the OMC has made these changes before upgrading an XCDR modulewith a GDP module.

NOTE

GSM-100-523 Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC)


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–65

Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC)

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and installing a Remotely TunableChannel Combiner (RTC)

Locating theRTC

Follow these steps to:

– Locate the RTC,

– Prepare the cabinet for RTC removal.


The transmit combiner shelf is located above the radio unit shelf assemblybetween the radio unit fans and the RFE shelf.

Figure 4-15 shows the upper portion of a BTS cabinet and identifies the transmitcombiner shelf.

DAB

RFESHELF

(D)RCU 2

(D)RCU 3

TRANSMITCOMBINERSHELF

(D)RCU 0

(D)RCU 1

(D)RCU 4

(D)RCU 5

Figure 4-15 BTS cabinet

GSM-100-523Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC)


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

2. Locate the RTC.

The RTC is mounted on the top of the transmit combiner shelf. Figure 4-16 showsa front view of a sample RTC.

ON

FEED

Figure 4-16 Remotely tunable combiner – front view

A removable plate may cover the toggle switches on the left side of the RTC.Remove this plate by loosening the two screws which secure it in place.



Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the masterGPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect toany available GPROC.

4. Enter the lock_device command to take the DRIMs/DRIX/radio units associatedwith the faulty RTC out of service (OOS).

The radio unit cannot be transmitting at the moment the RTC is replaced.

CAUTION

GSM-100-523 Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC)


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–67

Removing theRTC

Follow these steps to remove the RTC from the cabinet.

1. Disconnect the dc power cable (Amp Mate–n–Lok) connector located on the righthand side of the combiner front panel by squeezing on the connector and pulling itfree.

2. Note which coaxial cables are connected to the input ports of the RTC and therouting of the cables.

This information is necessary for reconnecting the cables to the new RTC.

3. Disconnect all the coaxial cables.

4. Disconnect the Tx Bandpass Filter (Tx BPF) cables from the combiner.

5. Remove the three combiner module hold down screws from the bottom front edgeof the transmit combiner shelf.

The remotely tunable combiner is heavy. Take care when lifting it.

WARNING

6. Lift the front of the combiner module up and pull it toward the front of the cabinetuntil the rear bracket tabs disengage from the shelf slots.

7. Lift the RTC free.

Installing a RTC

Follow these steps to install an RTC.

The remotely tunable combiner is heavy. Take care when lifting it.

WARNING

1. Lift the RTC and onto the transmit combiner shelf.

2. Lift the front of the RTC up and push the module toward the back of the cabinetuntil the rear bracket tabs engage the shelf slots.

3. Tighten the three combiner module hold down screws into the bottom front edge ofthe transmit combiner shelf.

4. Connect the Tx BPF cables to the combiner

5. Connect the radio unit cables to the combiner.

6. Connect the dc power cable (Amp Mate–n–Lok) connector located on the righthand side of the combiner front panel by pressing the connector into the jack untilit clicks into place.

7. Enter the unlock_device to bring the DRI/DRIX/radio unit associated with theRTC back in service (INS).

GSM-100-523Replacing a single cavity in an RTC


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing a single cavity in an RTC

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and installing a single cavity filter in aremotely tunable combiner (RTC).

Procedurecriteria

Motorola does not manufacture the RTC. If something goes wrong with an RTC, it isbest to replace the entire RTC unit and return the faulty one to Motorola. Motorola, inturn, will return it to the original supplier.

However, there are rare occasions when replacing a single cavity may be necessary.Such replacement should be authorized by Motorola BEFORE the replacement takesplace.

Contact the local Motorola office for further information and authorization BEFOREreplacing a single cavity filter.

Removing thecavity filter

Follow these steps to replace a single cavity in an RTC.



NOTE

2. Enter the lock_device command for the two COMB devices.

This disables all the DRIMs and radio units connected to the RTC.

3. Disconnect the RF connectors from the front panel of the cavity filter to bereplaced.

4. Unscrew the eight M3 crosshead screws that secure the appropriate RF bridge(s)and lift the bridge(s) free.

5. Unscrew the four M2.5 captive screws that secure the cavity filter front panel andgently pull the cavity filter free of the RTC chassis.

GSM-100-523 Replacing a single cavity in an RTC


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–69

Installing thecavity filter

Follow these steps to install the cavity filter:

1. Push the cavity filter into the RTC chassis.

2. Screw in the four M2.5 captive screws to secure the cavity filter front panel.

Torque the four screws to 5 Nm.

3. Replace the RF bridges.

4. Screw in the eight M3 crosshead screws to secure the appropriate RF bridge(s).

Torque the eight screws to 5 Nm.

5. Connect the RF connectors to the front panel of the cavity filter being replaced.

6. Enter the unlock_device command on both COMB devices to bring the COMBSand DRIMs back in service (INS).


GSM-100-523Replacing the RTC control processor


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing the RTC control processor

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and installing a new processor board in aRemotely Tunable Combiner (RTC).

Procedurecriteria

Motorola does not manufacture RTCs. If something goes wrong with an RTC, it is bestto replace the entire unit and return the faulty one to Motorola. Motorola, in turn, willreturn it to the original supplier.

However, there are rare occasions when replacing the RTC control processor may benecessary. Such replacement should be authorized by Motorola BEFORE thereplacement takes place.

Contact the local Motorola office for further information and authorization BEFOREreplacing a control processor.

Removing thecontrolprocessor board

Follow these steps to replace the RTC control processor board.



NOTE

2. Enter the shutdown_device command to take the DRI/DRIX/radio unitassociated with the faulty RTC out of service (OOS).

3. Locate the control processor board.

The board is located in the small cavity on the left side of the RTC.

Figure 4-17 shows a sample RTC and identifies the processor board location.

Figure 4-18 shows the processor board in more detail.

The processor board may be covered by a small plate that is secured by twoscrews. Loosen the screws to remove the plate and expose the board.

GSM-100-523 Replacing the RTC control processor


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–71

ON

FEED

Processor board location(See Figure 4-18for more detail)

Figure 4-17 Remotely tunable combiner – front view

PARTIAL/FULL

RESETswitch

Red LED

Pull tab

ENABLE RESETswitch

Figure 4-18 RTC processor board detail

GSM-100-523Replacing the RTC control processor


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

4. Grasp the pull tab and pull the processor out from the RTC.

The tab slides on its mounting screws.

The board fits snugly; pull gently but firmly.

5. Set the RTC address on the new processor card to match that of the old processorcard.

Set the address by covering up the pins on the long connector.

6. Insert the new card into the rails that are molded into the card supports.

7. Press the pull tab to press the card into the RTC.

Press until the card is firmly seated into the backplane of the RTC.

The card is fragile. Do not force it into the cavity!The card will fit snugly, butcan be pushed into the RTC without excessive effort. If the card does notslide easily into place, remove it and make sure it is seated in the railsproperly.

CAUTION

8. Use the unlock_device command to bring the DRI/DRIX/radio unit associatedwith the faulty RTC back in service (INS).

GSM-100-523 Replacing a cavity combining block


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–73

Replacing a cavity combining block

Overview

This section contains instructions for removing and refitting a cavity combining block(CCB).

Safety

Removing a cavity combining block requires the removal of RF transmitter power, it istherefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.

Notify the OMC of imminent installation activity.

Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present withinthe cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/orbatteries are connected.

Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RFpower is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.

WARNING

Preparation forCCB removal

The following steps are required prior to removing a CCB:



Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the masterGPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect toany available GPROC.

2. Enter the lock_device command to take the DRIMs/DRIX/transceiversassociated with the faulty CCB out of service (OOS).

3. All dc, Tx and control cables associated with the faulty CCB should be marked atthis stage to ensure they are correctly assembled during the refitting procedure.

GSM-100-523Replacing a cavity combining block


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Removing a CCB

The following steps are required to remove a CCB:

A CCB with filter weighs 11.5 kg. Lift the CCB carefully, to avoid physicalinjury. Set the CCB down carefully, to avoid further damage to the CCB ordamage to the site.The RF output cable is fitted to the rear of the filter. For a cabinet containingtwo CCBs an additional person will be required to hold the CCB clear of theRF shelf to allow this cable to be disconnected.

WARNING

1. Disconnect all dc, Tx and control cables from the front and top of the CCB.

2. Unscrew the two M4 x 8 screws that secure the CCB bracket to the RF shelf.

3. Pull the CCB forward and, if a filter is attached, disconnect the RF output cableconnected to the filter.

4. Lift the CCB free.

Refitting a CCB

The following steps are required to refit a CCB:

A CCB with filter weighs 11.5 kg. Lift the CCB carefully, to avoid physicalinjury. Set the CCB down carefully, to avoid further damage to the CCB ordamage to the site.The RF output cable is fitted to the rear of the filter. For a cabinet containingtwo CCBs an additional person will be required to hold the CCB clear of theRF shelf to allow this cable to be disconnected.

WARNING

1. Lift the CCB onto the RF shelf.

2. If a filter is attached to the CCB, connect the RF output cable to the filter.

3. Slide The CCB into the two retaining fixtures at the rear of the cabinet and securethe CCB bracket using two M4 x 8 screws, torqued to 2.2 Nm.

4. Refit the dc, TX and control cables to the front and top of the CCB.

5. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRIMs/DRIX/transceiversassociated with the CCB back in service (INS).

6. The replacement is now complete, inform the OMC and log completion of therepair/replacement activity.

GSM-100-523 Removing and replacing a receiver matrix


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–75

Removing and replacing a receiver matrix

OverviewThis section contains instructions for removing a receiver matrix.

See Chapter 4 for instructions for:

S Removing the receiver matrix Radio Front End (RFE) module.

S Replacing a receiver matrix

S Installing a receiver matrix RFE.

Turn the transmit power OFF before disconnecting cables. Severe burns mayresult if RF power is ON and cables are disconnected.

WARNING

Before beginningDetermine whether a PC is available in the repair kit.

Although Motorola recommends including a PC in the standard testing equipment, onemay not be available.

If a PC is... Then...

available... Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) to theTTY port of the master GPROC/GPROC2.

Refer to Connecting a local maintenanceterminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for instructions.

Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to theTTY port of the master GPROC/GPROC2.However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT canconnect to any available GPROC/GPROC2.

unavailable... the OMC must enter all MMI commands.

Removing areceiver matrix

Follow these steps to remove a receiver matrix.

1. Open the cabinet door and locate the preselector shelf (RFE).

2. Locate the receiver matrix to be removed.

3. Note the order that the cables are connected to the output ports on the front of thereceiver matrix.

Up to five coaxial cables may be connected to one receiver matrix.

NOTE

4. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the receiver matrix beingreplaced to verify the radio unit does not have any traffic on it.

The radio unit cannot have any traffic at the moment the receiver matrix isreplaced.

CAUTION

GSM-100-523Removing and replacing a receiver matrix


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

5. If the radio unit has not channel traffic, in a TTY window, enter the lock_devicecommand to take the DRIM/DRIX/radio unit out of service (OOS)

If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter this command.

NOTE

6. Disconnect all coaxial cables from the receiver matrix output ports.

7. Determine the type of BTS you are working on:

If this is a: Then...

BTS4 cabinet Release the module retaining spring. The spring releasepoints are on the RFE shelf at the front corners of thematrix and continue on to step 8.

BTS5 cabinet Release the quarter-turn fasteners and continue on tostep 8.

8. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the RF input port on the front of eachpreselector module the receiver matrix is connected to.

9. Slide the receiver matrix out toward the front of the cabinet.

Installing areceiver matrix

Follow these steps to install a receiver matrix.

1. Install the receiver matrix module into the front of the cabinet.

2. Determine the type of BTS you are working on:

If this is a: Then...

BTS4 cabinet... i. Engage the module retaining spring. Thespring engage points are on the RFE shelfat the front corners of the matrix.


BTS5 cabinet... i. Fasten the quarter-turn fasteners.


3. Connect all the coaxial cables to the receiver matrix output ports.

GSM-100-523 Removing and replacing a receiver matrix


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–77

4. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring theDRIM/DRIX/radio unit modules back in–service (INS).

If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter this command.

NOTE

5. After installing this module, it may be necessary to reinitialize the site.

Refer to the procedure, Resetting the Site, in Chapter 2 for more information.

The procedure is complete

See Chapter 4 for instructions to install a receiver matrix RFE.

GSM-100-523Replacing a power converter


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing a power converter

Overview

This section contains instructions for:

S Removing a power converter (PC),

S Installing a power converter.

Removing apower converter

Follow these steps to remove a PC:

1. Open the BTS cabinet door.

2. Locate the PCU.

The PCU is mounted on the left side of the transceiver shelf assembly.

3. Locate the faulty PC within the Power Converter Unit (PCU).

Figure 4-19 shows a sample PCU and a PC.

power converter module

Power converter unit

Figure 4-19 PCU with removed PC module

GSM-100-523 Replacing a power converter


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

4–79

4. Set the following circuit breakers to OFF:

– CB5 for PC1

– CB6 for PC2

– CB7 for PC3

– CB8 for PC4

5. Pull the PC front panel handle outward, away from the cabinet until the PCconnectors are disengaged from the PCU backplane connectors.

Installing apower converter

Follow these steps to install a PC:

1. Position the new PC within the PCU

2. Push the new PC into the cabinet until the PC connectors engage the PCUbackplane connectors.

3. Set the following circuit breakers to ON:

– CB5 for PC1

– CB6 for PC2

– CB7 for PC3

– CB8 for PC4


GSM-100-523Replacing a power converter


GMR-0168P02901W05-A


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

i

Chapter 5

Miscellaneous repair

GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

iii










GSM-100-523


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

GSM-100-523 Miscellaneous repair procedures


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–1

Miscellaneous repair procedures

Introduction

This chapter contains instructions for removing and replacing various components,including:

S Circuit breakers.

S Bus terminator cards.

S RFI finger gaskets

Failure of these items is unusual. Usually, replacement of any of these items is firstrecommended by Motorola, through its local offices, and may recommend theseprocedures. They also may require parts or supplies that are not part of the normalrepair equipment.

Obtainingreplacementauthorization

Several of these replacement procedures require authorization or special parts fromMotorola. The replaceable modules are not part of standard replacement kit.

Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace these modules.

GSM-100-523Removing and replacing a circuit breaker


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Removing and replacing a circuit breaker

Overview

This section contains instructions for:

S Removing a circuit breaker.

S Replacing a circuit breaker.

Indications

Circuit breakers are durable pieces of equipment. If a circuit breaker trips to the OFFposition, it can usually be reset by setting it up to the ON position.

However, sometimes a circuit breaker may not be able to be reset. That is, the circuitbreaker switch will not click into the ON position, or will not engage. In these cases thecircuit breaker is broken. The broken circuit breaker must be removed and a new oneinstalled in its place.

Removing acircuit breaker

Follow these steps to remove a circuit breaker.

1. Reroute all traffic to an unaffected cabinet.

2. Switch off all dc power supplies to the cabinet before removing and replacingcircuit breakers.

The external dc power supplies must be OFF during circuit breaker removal orinstallation.

WARNING

3. Open the cabinet door and locate the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) at the top ofthe cabinet.

4. Open the PDU cover to expose the circuit breakers and the Distribution AlarmBoard (DAB).

The DAB is located on the right side of the PDU.

NOTE

5. Remove all four M4 x 8 screws, and remove the circuit breaker cover.

6. Grasp the faulty circuit breaker and pull it outward, away from the cabinet until thecircuit breaker disengages from the mounting buses.

GSM-100-523 Removing and replacing a circuit breaker


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–3

Installing acircuit breaker

Follow these steps to install a circuit breaker.

1. Check the circuit breaker to make sure it is the correct type and rating.

2. Install the circuit breaker.

3. Verify the breaker engages the mounting buses correctly and push the circuitbreaker firmly into place.

4. Replace the circuit breaker cover.

Step Action

a. Install the four M4 x 8 screws that secure the circuit breakercover.

b. Torque the hex standoffs to 2.2 Nm.

5. Close the PDU cover.


7. Reconnect dc power to the cabinet if necessary.

8. Switch on all dc power supplies to the cabinet.

It may be necessary to re-initialize the site after installing new circuit breakers andre-applying power to the cabinet. Refer to Resetting and re-initializing a site inChapter 2 for more information.

GSM-100-523Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

Overview

There are only two bus terminator cards (BTC) fitted in a shelf. There cannot be anyredundant BTCs to come into service when a BTC is removed. However, under somecircumstances a KSW (TSW) module can terminate the TDM bus; consequently the BTCreplacement procedures are split into two groups: non-redundant KSWs/TSWs andredundant KSWs/TSWs.

Within these groups there are several variants of the procedures which depend upon theconditions listed at the beginning of each procedure.

Conditions

There are 6 sets of conditions which produce several variants of the this procedure.Follow the appropriate procedure relating to your situation and conditions.

If these conditions apply: Follow the steps in:

S Replacing BTC 0 (left side).

S KSW A/TSW A is in the shelf.

S Spare KSW/TSW and BTC are available

Procedure 1.

S Replacing BTC 0 (left side).

S KSW B/TSW B is in the shelf.

S A spare BTC is available.

Procedure 2.

S Replacing BTC 1 (right side).

S KSW B/TSW B is in the shelf.

S Spare KSW/TSW and BTC are available.

Procedure 3.


This procedure requires authorization or special parts from Motorola. The replaceablemodules are not part of standard replacement kit.

Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace this module.

GSM-100-523 Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–5

Procedure 1

Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 when:

S KSW A / TSW A is in the shelf.

S A spare KSW/ TSW and BTC are available.

This Procedure contains two sub-procedures:

S Preparing the cabinet

S Replacing the BTC

Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retainsas much system functionality as possible.

NOTE

Preparing the cabinet

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement.

1. Insert a spare KSW/TSW into the empty slot 1 (KSW B/TSW B).

2. Connect an LMT, if one is not already available.


3. Open a TTY window.

Replacing the BTC

Follow these steps to replace the BTC.

1. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSWB/TSW B.

2. Disable KSW A/TSW A in slot 27 using its front panel switch and remove KSWA/TSW A.

3. Insert the spare BTC into slot 27.

4. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 inslot 28 and remove BTC 0.

5. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 28 (BTC 0) and refit the extractor tabs.

6. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.

7. If desired, re-insert KSW A/ TSW A into slot 27.

8. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software toswitch back to KSW A/TSW A.

9. Remove the spare KSW B/TSW B from slot 1.

GSM-100-523Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Procedure 2


S KSW B / TSW B is in the shelf.

S A spare BTC is available.


NOTE

1. Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 27 (KSW A/TSW A).

2. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 inslot 28 and remove BTC 0.


4. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.

Procedure 3


S KSW B / TSW B is in the shelf.

S A spare KSW/TSW and BTC are available.


NOTE

1. Insert a spare KSW/TSW into the empty slot 27 (KSW A/TSW A).

2. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software toswitch to KSW A/TSW A.

3. Disable KSW B/TSW B in slot 1 using its front panel switch and remove KSWB/TSW B.

4. Insert the spare BTC into slot 1.

5. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs on the front of BTC 1 in slot 0and remove BTC 1.


7. Remove the BTC from slot.

8. If desired, re-insert KSW B/TSW B into slot 1.

9. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software toswitch to KSW B/TSW B.

GSM-100-523 Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–7

Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)

Introduction

This section explains how to remove a distribution alarm board (DAB).

Background

Under some extraordinary circumstances, the DAB may fail in a cabinet. In thesecircumstances it is necessary to replace the DAB.

Although a DAB can be replaced in the field, they are not considered “field replaceable”boards, like the digital modules.

Replacing a DAB is an extraordinary action which requires consultation andauthorization from the local Motorola office and the MCSC.

Contact the local Motorola office before attempting to replace a DAB!

Precautions

Follow these precautions when removing or replacing the DAB and PAB:

S Switch off all power to the cabinet. If possible, disconnect the power cables fromthe top of the cabinet.

Do not perform this procedure until all power has been removed from thecabinet!

WARNING

S Contact the local Motorola office for advice and authorization BEFORE attemptingthis procedure.

S Do not cross or mix up input cables.

Some of the cable links use similar connectors. It is possible to cross the cableswhen reconnecting the cables. Label the cables, if necessary, to prevent mistakesin connecting cables.

S Use care when connecting and disconnecting cables.

Some of the connectors are fragile. Note how the connectors fit, and pull or pushthem gently.

GSM-100-523Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Removing theboard

Follow these steps to remove a DAB or PAB:

1. Switch off the power to the cabinet.

Do not continue with this procedure until the cabinet power is off!

WARNING

2. Disconnect the various connectors from the board.

There are several different types of cable connectors.

– Figure 5-1 shows a DAB.

– Table 5-1 describes the various types of connectors.

F4 F5 F6F7F8 F9

F10 F11 F12F13 F14F15 F18

F19

F20

F21 F22 F23F24F25F26

F27 F28F29F30

PC7PC3

PC4

INTERNAL FUNCTIONS EXTERNAL FUNCTIONS

PC2

U4

0 VLED

S1

S2

D43

LEDD21

LEDD23

LEDD24

LEDD27

LEDD29

LEDD31

LEDD32

LEDD33

LEDD35

LEDD37

LEDD38

LEDD41

LEDD42

LEDD40

LEDD39

LEDD36

LEDD34

LEDD30

LEDD28

LEDD26

LEDD25

LEDD22

+27 V

LEDD8

SCREWS SCREWS

LOWER SHELF

− A10

LOWER SHELF

− A11

DRAM BAT

TERY

BACKU

P

DIP SWITCHES

Figure 5-1 Distribution alarm board

GSM-100-523 Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–9

Table 5-1 DAB connector descriptions and disconnection tips

Connector: Description

Internal Functions These are large, reddish brown plastic connectors.There are clips molded into the top and bottom of theconnector that snap into similar molded clips on the

External Functions board.

To disconnect, squeeze the connector at the top andbottom, and pull straight out from the board.

DRAM Battery BackupPC4

These are small, black clips which connectribbon-cable to the board.

PC 7 To disconnect, pull straight out from the board

Lower Shelf – AI0PC2

These ribbon-cable connectors have clips that lockthem into the board.

To disconnect, flip the clips back from the top and


bottom of the connector, and pull straight out.

NOTEDo not cross these cables. Take notice of the positionof the cables, and label if necessary.

3. Loosen the screws that secure the board.

– The DAB is held in place by four black Phillips head captive screws (screwswhich do not come out of the board).

4. Pull the board GENTLY away from the cabinet.

The board may be firmly anchored to the cabinet. Make sure all the screws havebeen loosened or removed.

Be careful when pulling on the DAB. It may break. Try to pull from both ends,rather than from the middle of the board. If possible, try to rock the board free.

CAUTION

5. Set the board aside.

GSM-100-523Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Installing a newboard

Follow these steps to install the new DAB:

1. Compare the DIP switches on the new board to the DIP switches on the old board.

Reset the DIP switches on the new board as necessary.

2. Line up the 0 V and +27 V posts on the new board with the input ports in thecabinet.

3. Make sure the various cables are not positioned behind the board or obstructingthe board.

4. Press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into the 0 V and +27 V ports.

5. Tighten the screws until they are firm, to secure the board in the cabinet.

6. Connect the various cables.

There are several different types of cable connectors.

– Refer to Figure 5-1 for locations of the connectors.

– Refer to Table 5-2 for descriptions of the connectors

Table 5-2 DAB connector descriptions and connection tips

Connector: Description

Internal Functions These are large, reddish brown plastic connectors,with clips that snap into similar molded clips on the

External Functions board.

To connect, push the connector straight into the jack.

DRAM Battery BackupPC4

These are small, black clips which connectribbon-cable to the board.

PC 7 To connect, push the connector straight into the jack.


These ribbon-cable connectors have clips that lockthem into the board.

To connect, press the connectors straight into the


jacks. The connectors will fold up and over theconnectors to hold them in place.

* CAUTIONDo not cross the PC2 and PC3 ribbon cables.

7. Restore power to the cabinet.

GSM-100-523 Replacing the BSU digital cage


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–11

Replacing the BSU digital cage

Introduction

Under certain extraordinary circumstances, it may be necessary to replace the entirecage/backplane assembly within a cabinet. This procedure explains how to replace thedigital cage.

This procedure takes the cabinet out of service for about four hours. Motorolarecommends performing this procedure during hours of low traffic if possible.

Prerequisites

Contact Motorola with any questions about this procedure.

NOTE

Replacing a cage is an extraordinary action. Therefore, these instructions assume theperson(s) performing this procedure are experienced in all aspects of Site maintenance.

Motorola recommends reading through the entire procedure, including the various relatedtexts and references, before attempting to perform it.

Tools andequipment

The following tools and equipment are necessary to remove and replace the backplane:

S Torx drivers.

S Anti-static mat.

S Anti-static bags, or other containers suitable for storing digital boards, in quantitiessufficient to store all the boards in the cages(s).

S An approved earth strap.

S Labels and marking pens.

GSM-100-523Replacing the BSU digital cage


GMR-0168P02901W05-A


The digital cage is very reliable. Replacement is only necessary in certain limitedcircumstances.

Therefore, the Customer Network Resolution Centre (CNRC) Swindon must issue aProblem Identity Number (PIN) before Motorola will accept a cage or backplane forreturn. The PIN shows that CNRC agreed to the backplane replacement.

Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes suchaction.

NOTE

Procedure

Follow these steps to obtain a PIN number:

1. Call the CNRC at +44 (0) 1793 565444.

This is a British telephone number (44 is the country code for the United Kingdom).

Prefix this number with the international access code if you are calling from outsidethe United Kingdom.

2. Describe the problem to the CNRC representative, and explain why cagereplacement is indicated.

Be prepared to describe:

– What alarms/events/SWFMs accompanied the problem.

– What diagnostic actions , if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.

– What repair actions, if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.

CNRC review

The CNRC will review the problem and the steps taken so far. Depending on this review,the CNRC may either:

S Suggest further tests or procedures before authorizing the cage replacement.

S Authorize replacing the cage, and issue a PIN number.

Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes suchaction.

NOTE

If CNRC issues a PIN number authorizing the cage replacement:

S Write the number down.

S Quote the PIN number, in addition to the normal returns number, in anycommunications with Motorola.

Motorola will not accept returned digital cages without an CNRC authorization.

NOTE



68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–13

Removing thecage

Overview

This section contains three separate procedures:

S Preparing the cabinet explains how to set up the cabinet so that it is safe to workon the digital cage.

S Disassembling the cage explains how to take the digital cage apart.

S Removing the cage explains how to take the cage out of the cabinet.

Perform these procedures in order, beginning with Preparing the cabinet.

Preparing the cabinet

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for cage replacement.

1. Determine which cage(s) need replacing.

It is probable that only one cage has a faulty backplane. Use the following table todetermine the appropriate actions.

If the faulty cage... Then:

does not contain theBSP...


contains the BSP...

i. Reset the BSC, according to theprocedure in Resetting andre-initializing a site, in Chapter 2.

* CAUTIONResetting the site stops call processing.Determine whether call processing is occurringbefore deciding to reset the site. Disable callprocessing at the site before continuing with thisprocedure.

ii. Continue with step 2.

2. Use the circuit breakers to disconnect power to the cage(s).

Be careful while working on the cabinet! There is danger of electric burns andshock!

WARNING

Follow the procedures in Removing and replacing a circuit breaker, in thischapter.

– If both cages in a cabinet require replacement, disconnect the power to thecabinet.

– If only one cage of a cabinet requires backplane replacement, leave thepower connected to the other cage.

Disabling one cage lets call processing continue, providing the second cageis independent of the first. However, it also means –48 V power is stillpresent in the cabinet.

3. Remove the power supply to the cabinet.

The cage is ready for disassembly.



GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Disassembling the cage

Follow these steps to disassemble the cage.

Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital modules.

CAUTION

1. Remove all the power supply modules in the cage.

Follow the procedure in Power supply module replacement in Chapter 4.

2. Remove all digital full and half size modules from the cage.

Wear an approved earth strap when handling digital modules. Use theantistatic mat and antistatic containers to store the digital modules.

CAUTION

Put the digital modules into suitable anti-static packaging or storage containers.These modules will go back into the new backplane.

3. Disconnect the dc supply to the fan assembly that corresponds to the cage beingreplaced.

Follow the procedure beginning in Chapter 4.

4. Disconnect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage.

5. Disconnect the MSI and DAB cables, and label the cables so they can bereconnected properly.

The cables are at the top of the BSU cage.

Do not drop any of the nuts or washers into the lower BSU cage. Loose nutsor washers can damage the cage and the components if the cage is stillpowered up.

CAUTION

6. Note their respective positions and disconnect any fibre optic cables fitted to thecages.

The cage is ready for removal.

Removing the cage

The cage is heavy! Lift the cage carefully, to avoid physical injury. Set thecage down carefully, to avoid further damage to the cage, or any damage tothe site.

WARNING

Follow these steps to remove the cage.

1. Remove the eight front screws which attach the cage to the cabinet.

2. Lift the BSU cage out and set it aside.



68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–15

Installing thecage

Replacing the cage

The cage is heavy! Lift the cage carefully, to avoid physical injury. Set thecage down carefully, to avoid further damage to the cage, or any damage tothe site.

WARNING

Follow these steps to replace the cage.

1. Lift the new cage / backplane assembly into the cabinet.

2. Secure the cage in place with the eight front screws

Equipping the cageFollow these steps to equip the new cage with power and digital modules.

1. Connect the MSI and DAB cables.

The cables are at the top of the BSU cage.

2. Reconnect any fibre optic cables if the cage is extended or expanded to to othercages

3. Connect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage.

4. Insert the fan assembly, and secure it to the cabinet with the front four screws.

5. Connect the dc supply to the fan assembly.

6. Choose an action from the following table:

If... Then...

The upper cage is beingreplaced...

secure the front cover plate below thefan assembly, and continue with step 7.

The lower cage is beingreplaced...


7. Insert all the digital full size and half size modules.

8. Insert the power supply modules.

Restoring powerFollow these steps to restore dc power to the cabinet.

1. Connect the power supply to the top of the cabinet.

2. Connect the circuit breakers.

Follow the procedure in Installing a circuit breaker, in this chapter.

3. Observe the LEDs on all the power supply modules, and choose an action fromthe following table.

Valid Input Default

the green LED is lit on all the powersupply modules...


the red LED is lit on all the powersupply modules...

use Power supply modulereplacement in Chapter 4 to diagnoseand correct the problem.

the red LED is lit on any powersupply module...

Continue with step 4 when all the greenLEDs are lit.



GMR-0168P02901W05-A

4. Hard reset all the digital cards.

Step Action: Result:

a. Flip the switch on each digitalcard up to the RESET position.

The board is taken out of service(OOS).

b. Release the switch. The card resets automatically.

IMPORTANT/GPROC2S Reset the GPROC/GPROC2s last.

S Reset the GPROC/GPROC2 in slot 20 last of all.

Checking connections

Follow these steps to check the connections between the new backplane and the rest ofthe system.

1. Connect a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) to the TTY port on the masterGPROC.

2. Verify the connection.

– If the cabinet is a BSS site, verify the connection to the OMC.

– If the cabinet is a BTS site, verify the connection to the BSC.

The site will take about one hour to code load and initialize.

3. Verify that all site Message Transfer Links (MTLs) and Operations andMaintenance Links (OMLs) are operational.

– To verify the MTLs, type: state 0 MTL x 0 0, where x is the MTL identifier.

– To verify the OML, type: state 0 OML x y 0, where x and y are the OML identifiers.

The status for the MTL and the OML should be <busy, unlocked>. If it is not,further diagnosis is necessary.

GSM-100-523 DRAM battery backup fuse failure alarm


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–17

DRAM battery backup fuse failure alarm

Devices

This procedure applies to:

S DRIMs.

S KSWs (TSWs).

Alarm level

The alarm level is WARNING.

OMC actions

The OMC must determine the following:

S Site number.

S Device ID.

S Cage number.

S Slot number.

Procedure

Follow these steps to diagnose the failed device:

1. Determine if the battery backup is connected.

If the batterybackup is...

And... Then...

not connected ...

the battery backupoption isimplemented...

connect the battery backup to thecabinet.

the battery backupoption is notimplemented...

the alarm is expected. No furtheraction is required.

connected to thecabinet...

this is a BTS cabinet... i. Locate and replacethe appropriate fuseon the DAB.


2. Determine the frequency of the alarm occurrence.

If the alarm is ... Then...

not frequent... No further action is required.

frequent... i. Power down the appropriate device.

ii. Replace the device with a new one.

iii. Power up the new device.

GSM-100-523RFI finger gasket replacement procedure


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

RFI finger gasket replacement procedure

Purpose

Follow this procedure to replace the finger gaskets around the door of the BTS cabinet.

Tools andequipment

This procedure requires the following tools and equipment:

S A sharp knife, such as a Model maker’s knife or a utility knife.

S Scissors.

S A plastic scraper.

A plastic scraper will not damage the cabinet. Do not use a metal scraper.

S A suitable cleaning agent.

S Paper towels or rags.

S A new RFI gasket.

Removing theold gasket

Follow these steps to remove the old gasket from the cabinet:

1. Insert the knife blade through one of the slots in the gasket.

2. Cut the gasket base material down to the cabinet base.

3. Peel the gasket off from the cabinet, beginning at the cut.

Use the plastic scraper or knife blade to raise the gasket away from the cabinet.

As the gasket pulls away, some gasket adhesive may remain on the cabinet.

4. Wet a paper towel or rag with the cleaning solution, and wipe it over any remaininggasket adhesive.

The cleaner will soften the old gasket adhesive.

5. Use the plastic scraper to scrape away the old adhesive.

6. Clean the gasket area with more cleaning solution, and allow to dry.

Once the gasket and its old adhesive have been removed, the new gasket can beinstalled.

GSM-100-523 RFI finger gasket replacement procedure


68P02901W05-A

GMR-01

5–19

Installing thenew gasket

Follow these steps to install the new gasket:

1. Measure the new gasket material

The gasket material comes in 600 mm lengths.

2. Cut the gaskets to length with the knife or scissors

Short lengths of gasket can be replaced. Motorola recommends a minimum lengthof three fingers per strip.

The gasket cannot be bent into or around a corner. Use separate strips ofgasket for the top, bottom, and sides of cabinets and doors. Cut the gasket tothe nearest whole gasket-finger length. Maximum gaps between gasket stripsof 10 mm (one gasket-finger width) are permissible.

NOTE

3. Peel about 50 mm of the backing paper from the gasket strip. Do not cut thepaper from the gasket.

4. Align the gasket with the edge of the cabinet, and press the gasket into place.

Lift the gasket fingers carefully and press the base of the gasket to affix the gasketto the cabinet.

Do not put pressure on the tops of the gasket fingers.

CAUTION

5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 for all the gasket strips.

GSM-100-523Fan replacement procedure


GMR-0168P02901W05-A

Fan replacement procedure

Purpose

This section explains how to replace the older type fans (5901694E01) with the new(5902872w01) type fans. The old type fans are not available as replacement parts.

This procedure should only be used to replace an old style fan with the new style fan.

Old fan assemblies can be identified as they have grey painted aluminium grills and four(4) nickel plated captive screws fitted in the corners of the grill.

New fan assemblies have plastic grilles and four black plastic quarter–turn fixings.

The new fan assembly consists of:

Fan guard front 1off 1502392W01Fan and rear guard 1 off 5902872W01Screw 4 off 0310907C72

Tools andequipment

This procedure requires the following tools and equipment:

S A T20 torx driver.

Procedure

Follow these steps to replace the fan:

1. Locate the faulty fan.

2. Identify and remove the correct fuse for the faulty fan (a chart on the inside of theDAB door identifies the fuses).

3. Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the four quarter turn fasteners that securethe fan to the shelf assembly.

4. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet.

5. Disconnect the fan power cable and remove the fan from the cabinet.

6. Unscrew and remove the two (2) M4 star head screws securing the grill onto thefan (a T20 torx driver is required) and discard the old fan.

7. Repeat step 6 for the new fan.

8. Retain the fan, but discard the plastic grill and the fixing screws.

9. Fit the metal grill to the new fan using the original screws.

10. Connect the power cable to the new fan.

11. Install the new fan in the cabinet.

12. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four quarter turn fasteners that securethe fan to the shelf assembly.

13. Insert the fuse removed in step 2 and check the fan works correctly.

14. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms atthe OMC are cleared.

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01 I–1

Index

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01 I–2

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01 I–3

Aair deflector

installing in BSSC, BTS4 and BTS5: 423, 2–7installing in BSSC2 and BTS6: 423, 2–7

air filtercleaning procedure: 523, 3–3replacement procedure: 523, 3–2, 4–5

alarm interface board (AIB): 323, 4–29

Alarms, internal alarm system, replacing a powerconverter: 523, 4–78

arriving at a site: 423, 1–11

Bbackplane, replacement procedure: 523, 5–11

installing the cage: 523, 5–15obtaining authorization: 523, 5–12removing the cage: 523, 5–13tools and equipment: 523, 5–11

backplane connectionsBIB: 423, 2–74T43: 423, 2–69

backup power, consumption: 423, 1–7

balanced line interconnect board (BIB): 323, 4–39

base station unit shelfBTS6: 323, 1–2slot assignment: 323, 3–2

battery backup board (BBBX): 323, 3–63

BBBX, installing: 423, 2–57

before visiting a site: 423, 1–11

bend radius, optical fibres: 423, 1–10

BIB, backplane connections: 423, 2–74

BSU, module plan: 423, 2–59

BTC, replacement procedures, non–redundant cards:523, 5–4

BTSSee also BTS4; BTS5; BTS6decommissioning: 423, 3–2receiver equipment, overview: 323, 2–2transmitter equipment, overview: 323, 2–4

BTS4cabling diagrams

+27 V version: 323, 1–44–48/–60 V version: 323, 1–33

differences from BTS6: 323, 1–32interconnect panel: 323, 4–33

BTS5cabling diagrams, +27 V version: 323, 1–56differences from BTS6: 323, 1–55interconnect panel: 323, 4–35

BTS6base station unit shelf: 323, 1–2cabinet

dimensions: 121, 1–3internal view: 121, 1–2

cabling diagrams+27 V version: 323, 1–21–48/–60 V version: 323, 1–10

fan cooling system: 323, 1–7interconnect panel: 323, 1–8, 4–36internal units: 121, 1–3power distribution unit: 323, 1–6

bus terminator card (BTC): 323, 3–7

Ccabinet dimemsions: 121, 2–1

cabinetsBSSC2, fan cooling system: 323, 4–32BTS4

cabling diagrams (+27 V): 323, 1–44cabling diagrams (–48/–60 version): 323, 1–33differences from BTS6: 323, 1–32interconnect panel: 323, 4–33

BTS5cabling diagrams (+27 V version): 323, 1–56differences from BTS6: 323, 1–55interconnect panel: 323, 4–35

BTS6cabling diagrams (+27 V version): 323, 1–21cabling diagrams (–48/–60 V ): 323, 1–10dimensions: 121, 1–3fan cooling system: 323, 1–7, 4–32interconnect panel: 323, 1–8, 4–36internal units: 121, 1–3internal view: 121, 1–2power distribution unit: 323, 1–6

delivery: 423, 2–1dimensions: 423, 1–5environmental limitations: 423, 1–5labelling

BTS4: 423, 1–14BTS5: 423, 1–16BTS6: 423, 1–18

lifting: 423, 2–2, 3–1overcurrent protection: 423, 1–8packaging: 423, 2–2power requirements: 323, 4–2torque values: 423, 1–1, 2–3types covered: 423, 2–1weights: 423, 2–2

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01 I–4

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

cablesBBBX: 423, 2–57control signal: 423, 2–66earth: 423, 2–17power: 423, 2–17RF: 423, 2–23

cabling diagramsBTS4


BTS5, +27 V version: 323, 1–56BTS6


catering, on site: 423, 1–11

cavity combining block, installing: 423, 2–49

CCB 900/1800, description: 323, 2–29

circuit breakers: 323, 4–31removing and replacing: 523, 5–2

cleaning, optical fibres: 423, 1–9; 523, 3–4

cleaning procedure, air filters: 523, 3–3

clock extender (CLKX): 323, 3–64

common antenna, connecting: 423, 2–24

connectingcommon antenna: 423, 2–24power cables

negative earth cabinets: 423, 2–19positive earth cabinets: 423, 2–20

RF cables: 423, 2–23for external combining and filtering: 423, 2–55

separate receive antenna: 423, 2–24separate transmit antenna: 423, 2–23

connecting a LMTconnecting to a GPROC: 523, 2–10general maintenance procedures: 523, 2–10

connecting a local maintenance terminalconnecting to a GPROC: 523, 2–10general maintenance procedures: 523, 2–10

connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT),security level changes: 523, 2–11

control signal cabling, installing: 423, 2–66

D

DAB, replacement procedure: 523, 5–7

decommissioningBTS: 423, 3–2

checklist: 423, 3–5prerequisite: 423, 3–1

digital cagereplacement, authorization procedure: 523, 5–12replacement procedure: 523, 5–11

installing the cage: 523, 5–15removing the cage: 523, 5–13tools and equipment: 523, 5–11

digital modulesBSU shelf slot assignments: 323, 3–2drix compatibility: 323, 3–67factory installed: 423, 2–56front panels: 323, 3–5full size

BTC: 323, 3–7DRIM: 323, 3–8GCLK: 323, 3–13GDP: 323, 3–56GPROC: 323, 3–17GPROC2: 323, 3–23KSW: 323, 3–28MSI: 323, 3–35MSI2: 323, 3–40overview: 323, 3–6TSW: 323, 3–46XCDR: 323, 3–52

half sizeBBBX: 323, 3–63CLKX: 323, 3–64DRIX3: 323, 3–66KSWX: 323, 3–69LANX: 323, 3–72overview: 323, 3–62PIX: 323, 3–77

installing: 423, 2–56installing BBBXs: 423, 2–57installing DRIX3s: 423, 2–57RXU shelf slot assignments: 323, 3–3

digital radio interface (DRIM): 323, 3–8

digital radio interface extender (DRIX3): 323, 3–66

distribution alarm board (DAB): 323, 4–18

diversity receive extender, installing: 423, 2–40

DPSMinstalling: 423, 2–22replacement procedure: 523, 4–59

non–redundant modules: 523, 4–60redundant modules: 523, 4–60

DRAM battery backup: 121, 2–2

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01 I–5

DRCU, installing: 423, 2–25

(D)RCU shelfDRCU: 323, 2–32DRCUII: 323, 2–42DRCU3: 323, 2–52SCU900: 323, 2–62SCU1800: 323, 2–62

DRCU shelf, overview: 323, 2–31

DRCU term, definition: 423, 1–1

DRCU: 323, 2–32

DRCUII: 323, 2–42installing: 423, 2–25

DRCU3: 323, 2–52installing: 423, 2–27

DRIX3, installing: 423, 2–57

dual path preselectorinstalling: 423, 2–38replacement procedure: 523, 4–14

duplexer: 323, 2–92

Eearthing

cable sizes: 423, 2–17site: 423, 2–3

enhanced power supply module (EPSM): 323, 4–6

environment: 121, 2–1

EPSMinstalling: 423, 2–22replacement procedure: 523, 4–59


equipment safety: 523, 2–12

external equipmentpower cabling

to DRAM backup battery: 423, 2–15to external multicoupler: 423, 2–15to external RTC: 423, 2–15

RF cabling, for external combining and filtering:423, 2–55

external equipment rackduplexer: 323, 2–92overview: 323, 2–91quadraplexer: 323, 2–93

eyebolts, inserting: 423, 2–2, 3–1

Ffan cooling system

BTS6: 323, 1–7FPCU: 323, 4–32overview: 323, 4–32

fan power converter unit (FPCU): 323, 4–32

Fan replacement procedure: 523, 5–20

faults, locating faulty devices: 523, 2–12

faulty deviceschecking the status: 523, 2–12locating: 523, 2–12

five cavity RTC, diagram: 423, 2–46

four cavity RTC, diagram: 423, 2–47

frequency, bands, PGSM900: 121, 2–2

full size digital modulesBTC: 323, 3–7DRIM: 323, 3–8GCLK: 323, 3–13GDP: 323, 3–56GPROC: 323, 3–17GPROC2: 323, 3–23KSW: 323, 3–28MSI: 323, 3–35MSI2: 323, 3–40overview: 323, 3–6TSW: 323, 3–46XCDR: 323, 3–52

GGDP

replacement procedure: 523, 4–63technical description: 323, 3–56

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01 I–6

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

general maintenance proceduresconnecting a LMT: 523, 2–10

connecting to a GPROC: 523, 2–10setting up the man machine interface: 523,

2–11setting up the MMI: 523, 2–11

connecting a local maintenance terminal: 523,2–10connecting to a GPROC: 523, 2–10setting up the man machine interface: 523,

2–11setting up the MMI: 523, 2–11

equipment safety: 523, 2–12general repair procedures: 523, 2–5identifying faulty devices: 523, 2–12

checking device status: 523, 2–12introduction to: 523, 2–1locating faulty cabinets: 523, 2–7man machine interface: 523, 2–6MMI: 523, 2–6resetting and re–initializing a site: 523, 2–14test and repair equipment lists: 523, 2–2

general repair procedures, general maintenanceprocedures: 523, 2–5

generic clock (GCLK): 323, 3–13

generic processor (GPROC): 323, 3–17

generic processor2 (GPROC2): 323, 3–23

glass optical fibresinstalling: 423, 2–64replacement procedures: 523, 4–26

GPROCconnecting a LMT: 523, 2–10connecting a local maintenance terminal: 523,

2–10

GPROC/GPROC2, replacement: 523, 4–39

H

half size digital modulesBBBX: 323, 3–63CLKX: 323, 3–64DRIX3: 323, 3–66KSWX: 323, 3–69LANX: 323, 3–72overview: 323, 3–62PIX: 323, 3–77

hybrid combiner: 323, 2–20

hybrid combiner and power load, installing: 423, 2–42

IIAS alarms, replacing a power converter: 523, 4–78

installingair deflector

in BSSC, BTS4 and BTS5: 423, 2–7in BSSC2 and BTS6: 423, 2–7

cavity combining block: 423, 2–49control signal cabling

for E1/T1 line connections: 423, 2–66for end user I/O devices: 423, 2–67for inter cabinet fibre optics: 423, 2–66

digital modules: 423, 2–56diversity receive extender: 423, 2–40DPSM: 423, 2–22DRCU: 423, 2–25DRCUII: 423, 2–25DRCU3: 423, 2–27dual path preselector: 423, 2–38EPSM: 423, 2–22eyebolts: 423, 2–2glass optical fibres: 423, 2–64hybrid combiner and power load: 423, 2–42IPSM: 423, 2–22optical fibres: 423, 2–61passive splitter: 423, 2–39PIX: 423, 2–67polymer optical fibres: 423, 2–61preselector

with 6 way splitter: 423, 2–35with receiver matrix: 423, 2–36

RTC: 423, 2–44SCU900: 423, 2–29SCU1800: 423, 2–29spacer: 423, 2–27, 2–29tool kits for: 423, 1–2transmit bandpass filter: 423, 2–54

installing TCU modules: 423, 2–31

integrated power supply module (IPSM): 323, 4–9

interconnect panelBIB: 323, 4–39BTS4: 323, 4–33; 423, 2–13BTS5: 323, 4–35; 423, 2–12BTS6: 323, 1–8, 4–36; 423, 2–11overview: 323, 4–33T43: 323, 4–37

internal alarm system alarms, replacing a powerconverter: 523, 4–78

IPSMinstalling: 423, 2–22replacement procedure: 523, 4–59


GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01 I–7

Kkiloport switch extender (KSWX): 323, 3–69

kiloport switch (KSW): 323, 3–28

KSW, replacement procedurenon–redundant modules: 523, 4–46redundant modules: 523, 4–44

KSWX, replacement procedurenon–redundant modules: 523, 4–51redundant modules: 523, 4–48

Llabelling

BTS4: 423, 1–14BTS5: 423, 1–16BTS6: 423, 1–18

LANX, replacement procedurenon–redundant modules: 523, 4–54redundant modules: 523, 4–52

leaving a site: 423, 1–12

LMTchanging the security level: 523, 2–11setting up the MMI: 523, 2–11

local area network extender (LANX): 323, 3–72

local maintenance terminalsecurity level changes: 523, 2–11setting up the MMI: 523, 2–11

locating faulty cabinets, general maintenanceprocedures: 523, 2–7

Mman machine interface

general maintenance procedures: 523, 2–6setting up: 523, 2–11

miscellaneous repair procedures: 523, 5–1

MMIgeneral maintenance procedures: 523, 2–6setting up: 523, 2–11

Security level changes at an LMT: 523, 2–11

module planBSU: 423, 2–59RXU: 423, 2–60

MSI, replacement procedure: 523, 4–55

multiple serial interface (MSI): 323, 3–35

multiple serial interface (MSI2): 323, 3–40

Oobtaining authorization: 523, 5–12

MCSC review: 523, 5–12

optical fibresbend radius: 423, 1–10cleaning: 423, 1–9; 523, 3–4connection: 423, 1–9handling: 423, 1–9installing: 423, 2–61protection: 423, 1–9

Pparallel interface extender (PIX): 323, 3–77

passive splitter: 323, 2–13installing: 423, 2–39

periodic maintenance, air filters: 523, 3–2, 4–5

PGSM900, frequency band: 121, 2–2

PIXconnector: 423, 2–67definition: 523, 4–57installing: 423, 2–67replacement procedure: 523, 4–57

polymer optical fibresinstalling: 423, 2–61replacement procedures: 523, 4–24

powerBBBX connections: 423, 2–57BTS4 connections: 423, 2–13BTS5 connections: 423, 2–12BTS6 connections: 423, 2–11cable sizes: 423, 2–17connecting external equipment: 423, 2–15connecting to cabinet: 423, 2–17connecting to main source: 423, 2–21consumption

backup: 423, 1–7negative earth BTS: 423, 1–7positive earth BTS: 423, 1–7

DAB setup: 423, 2–10input limits: 423, 2–9PAB setup: 423, 2–9preparing to connect: 423, 2–9supply modules, installing: 423, 2–22terminal sizes: 423, 2–9

power alarm board, PAB: 323, 4–22

power converter, replacement procedure: 523, 4–78

power converter unit (PCU): 323, 4–12

power distribution board (PDB): 323, 4–29

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01 I–8

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

power distribution unitAIB: 323, 4–29BTS6: 323, 1–6circuit breakers: 323, 4–31DAB: 323, 4–18overview: 323, 4–17PAB: 323, 4–22PDB: 323, 4–29

Power Requirements: 121, 2–1

power requirements: 323, 4–2

power supply module, replacement procedure: 523,4–59non–redundant modules: 523, 4–60redundant modules: 523, 4–60

power supply modulesEPSM: 323, 4–6IPSM: 323, 4–9overview: 323, 4–2PCU: 323, 4–12

preselector: 323, 2–16

protecting, optical fibres: 423, 1–9

Qquadraplexer: 323, 2–93

Rre–initializing a site: 523, 2–14

receiver equipment overview: 323, 2–2

receiver front end modulespassive splitter: 323, 2–13preselector: 323, 2–16receiver matrix: 323, 2–176 way splitter: 323, 2–13

receiver matrix: 323, 2–17installing: 423, 2–36removing and replacing: 523, 4–75

remote transcoder unit shelf, slot assignments: 323,3–3

remotely tunable combinerreplacement: 523, 4–65single cavity replacement: 523, 4–68

remotely tuneable combiner (RTC): 323, 2–26

removal and replacement procedures, receivermatrix: 523, 4–75

replacement procedureGCLK, redundant: 523, 4–35redundant GCLK: 523, 4–35

replacement procedures: 523, 4–1(D)RCUs: 523, 4–18air filters: 523, 3–2, 4–5backplane replacement: 523, 5–11


circuit breakers: 523, 5–2digital cage, obtaining authorization: 523, 5–12digital cage replacement: 523, 5–11


DRIM: 523, 4–22DRIX: 523, 4–23dual path preselector (DPP): 523, 4–14duplexer: 523, 4–32fans: 523, 4–34GCLK

multi–shelf configuration: 523, 4–38non–redundant: 523, 4–36single shelf configuration: 523, 4–37

GDP: 523, 4–63glass optical fibres: 523, 4–26GPROC/GPROC2: 523, 4–39hybrid combiner: 523, 4–42interface boards: 523, 4–7MSI: 523, 4–55non–redundant BTC: 523, 5–4non–redundant CLKX: 523, 4–13non–redundant GCLK: 523, 4–36

multi–shelf configuration: 523, 4–38single shelf configuration: 523, 4–37

non–redundant KSW: 523, 4–46non–redundant KSWX: 523, 4–51non–redundant LANX: 523, 4–54non–redundant TSW: 523, 4–46PIX: 523, 4–57polymer optical fibres: 523, 4–24quadraplexer: 523, 4–32radio units: 523, 4–18RCUs: 523, 4–18redudnant TSW: 523, 4–44redundant CLKX: 523, 4–11redundant KSW: 523, 4–44redundant KSWX: 523, 4–48redundant LANX: 523, 4–52replacing an DAB: 523, 5–7SCUs: 523, 4–18transmit bandpass filter: 523, 4–9Tx BPF: 523, 4–9XCDR: 523, 4–61

replacing digital cages, authorization procedure: 523,5–12

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01

Service Manual: BTS

68P02901W37-A

GMR-01 I–9

resetting a site: 523, 2–14

RF cables, connecting: 423, 2–23for external combining and filtering: 423, 2–55

RF modules(D)RCU shelf

DRCU: 323, 2–32DRCUII: 323, 2–42DRCU3: 323, 2–52SCU900: 323, 2–62SCU1800: 323, 2–62

DRCU shelf, overview: 323, 2–31external equipment rack

duplexer: 323, 2–92overview: 323, 2–91quadraplexer: 323, 2–93

overview: 323, 2–1receiver front end

passive splitter: 323, 2–13preselector: 323, 2–16receiver matrix: 323, 2–176 way splitter: 323, 2–13

transmit combiner shelfCCB 900/1800: 323, 2–29hybrid combiner: 323, 2–20overview: 323, 2–19RTC: 323, 2–26Tx BPF: 323, 2–25

RFE shelf, modules in: 423, 2–33

RTC, installing: 423, 2–44

rubbish, disposal on site: 423, 1–12

rural sites, visiting: 423, 1–12

RXU, module plan: 423, 2–60

Ssafety

cabinet weights: 423, 2–2connecting mains power: 423, 2–21delivery: 423, 2–1earth cable sizes: 423, 2–17on site: 423, 1–13overcurrent protection: 423, 1–8power cable sizes: 423, 2–17site earthing: 423, 2–3transient and lightning protection: 423, 2–3

SCU900, installing: 423, 2–29

slim channel unit 900 (SCU900): 323, 2–62

SCU1800, installing: 423, 2–29

slim channel unit 1800 (SCU1800): 323, 2–62

separate receive antenna, connecting: 423, 2–24

separate transmit antenna, connecting: 423, 2–23

site requirementsdimensions: 423, 1–5environmental: 423, 1–5structural: 423, 1–5

6 way splitter: 323, 2–13installing: 423, 2–35

spacer, installing: 423, 2–27, 2–29

status checking, identifying faulty devices: 523, 2–12

swapping a device: 523, 4–3

systems covered: 423, 1–1

TT43, backplane connections: 423, 2–69

T43 interconnect board: 323, 4–37

taking a device OOS: 523, 4–2

TCUs, installation: 423, 2–31

test and repair equipment lists, general maintenanceprocedures: 523, 2–2

timeslot switch (TSW): 323, 3–46

tool kits, installationone: 423, 1–2two: 423, 1–4

torque values: 423, 1–1, 2–3

transceiver control unitfrequency bands: 323, 2–72technical description: 323, 2–72

alarm reporting: 323, 2–74control driver board: 323, 2–89data link details: 323, 2–81digital processing and control board: 323, 2–80downlink (Tx) digital processing: 323, 2–81DPC firmware tasks: 323, 2–82front panel diagram: 323, 2–75front panel switches: 323, 2–74LEDs: 323, 2–74maintenance details: 323, 2–73power amplifier board: 323, 2–89processing and control: 323, 2–83receiver board detail: 323, 2–77TCU circuitry: 323, 2–73TCU input/output diagram: 323, 2–76TMS functions: 323, 2–84traffic and control channel output: 323, 2–78transceiver station manager board: 323, 2–83transmitter board details: 323, 2–87transmitter details: 323, 2–87Uplink (Rx) digital processing: 323, 2–82view: 323, 2–73

GSM-100-020

1st Jun 01 I–10

Service Manual: BTS

GMR-0168P02901W37-A

transcoder (GDP): 323, 3–56

transcoder (XCDR): 323, 3–52

transient and lightning protection: 423, 2–3

transmit bandpass filterinstalling: 423, 2–54replacement procedure: 523, 4–9

transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF): 323, 2–25

transmit combiner shelfhybrid combiner: 323, 2–20modules in: 423, 2–41overview: 323, 2–19RTC: 323, 2–26Tx BPF: 323, 2–25

transmitter equipment overview: 323, 2–4

transportation panel fillers, removing: 423, 2–22

TSW, replacement procedurenon–redundant modules: 523, 4–46redundant modules: 523, 4–44

Uunlocking a device: 523, 4–3

unpacking, cabinets: 423, 2–5

Vvisiting sites

arriving: 423, 1–11before: 423, 1–11catering facilities: 423, 1–11leaving: 423, 1–12rubbish: 423, 1–12rural sites: 423, 1–12safety: 423, 1–13

XXCDR

replacement procedure: 523, 4–61technical desription: 323, 3–52

Service Manual Bts

Documents

Transcript of Service Manual Bts